SPECIFICATION FOR LOW
VOLTAGE INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION (L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
CAWANGAN KEJURUTERAAN
ELEKTRIK
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
CONTENT
Page: i of iv
SECTION
CONTENT
REVISION PAGE
1.0
General
2
S1/1
2.0
Switchboards
3
S2/1 – S2/8
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
3.0
Types of Switchboard
Enclosures
2.2.1 Self Contained Floor Mounted Cubicle Switchboards
2.2.2 Wall Mounted Switchboards
Busbars
Meter Panels
Others
Distribution Boards And
3
S3/1-S3/2
Consumer Units
4.0
Switchgears
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.7
4.8
2
S4/1-S4/9
Air Circuit Breakers
Moulded Case Circuit Breakers
Miniature Circuit Breakers
Residual Current Device
Fuse Switchgears
Isolating Switches
Contactors
Automatic Transfer Switching Equipment
5.0
Protection Relays
2
S5/1 – S5/2
6.0
Measuring Instrument And
Accessories
2
S6/1 – S6/3
6.1
6.2
Measuring Instrument
Current Transformers
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
CONTENT
Page: ii of iv
SECTION
CONTENT
REVISION PAGE
7.0
Surge Protective Device
2
S7/1 – S7/3
8.0
Busbar Trunking
2
S8/1 – S8/2
9.0
System Of Wiring
2
S9/1 – S9/13
9.1
10.0
9.2
9.3
9.4
9.5
9.6
9.7
Type Of Cables
9.1.1 PVC Insulated PVC Sheathed Cable
9.1.2 PVC Insulated Cable
9.1.3 XLPE/PVC Cable
9.1.4 Armoured Cable
9.1.5 Mineral Insulated Cables
Wiring In Conduit/Trunking (Surface Or Concealed)
Metallic And Non-Metallic Conduits
Cable Trunking
Cable Tray
Cable Ladder
Identification of Pipelines And Services
9.8
Mounting Heights
Wiring Accessories
10.1
10.2
10.3
10.4
10.5
2
S10/1 –S10/4
Switches And Switch Plates
Switched Socket Outlets And Unswitched Socket Outlets
Boxes For Switches, Switched Socket Outlets Unswitched Socket
Outlets And Distribution Boards (Box And Enclosure For Electrical
Accessories)
Ceiling Roses
Lampholders And Batten Holders
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
CONTENT
Page: iii of iv
SECTION
11.0
CONTENT
Luminaires
11.1
11.2
11.3
11.4
12.0
4
S11/1-S11/18
Fluorescent Luminaires
11.1.1 Tubular Type Fluorescent Luminaires
11.1.1.(a) Tubular Type Fluorescent Luminaires
T8(FD 26)
11.1.1.(b) Tubular Type Fluorescent Luminaires
T5(FDH 16)
11.1.2
Downlight Type Compact Fluorescent Luminaires
Self Contained Emergency Luminaires
LED Luminaires
Installation Of Luminaires
Lamps
12.1
12.2
12.3
12.4
REVISION PAGE
3
S12/1-S12/15
Tubular Fluorescent Lamp
Compact Fluorescent Lamp Without Integral Control Gear
Compact Fluorescent Lamp With Integral Control Gear
LED Lamp
12.4.1 LED Bulb
12.4.2 LED Double Capped Lamps (T8 LED Tubes)
13.0
Ceiling Fans
2
S13/1-S13/2
14.0
Earthing
2
S14/1-S14/5
15.0
Labelling
2
S15/1
16.0
Switchroom
2
S16/1
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
CONTENT
Page: iv of iv
SECTION
17.0
CONTENT
Requirement For Anti-Corrosive
REVISION PAGE
2
S17/1-S17/4
Type Installations
17.1
17.2
17.3
17.4
17.5
17.6
18.0
Wiring
Switchboards (Main Switchboard , Sub Switchboard And
Distribution Board)
Switches, Switched Socket Outlets & Unswitched Socket Outlets
Luminaires
Ceiling Fans & Exhaust Fan
Special Treatment For Housings of Electrical Items Used In SaltSprayed Environment
Test, Test Instruments And Test
2
S18/1-S18/2
Certificates
18.1
Test And Calibration Of Measuring And Test Instruments
18.2
Test And Test Certificates
19.0
Service And Maintenance
2
S19/1
20.0
Shop Drawings, As-Installed
2
S20/1-S20/3
3
S21/1-S21/10
Drawings, Manuals And Tools
20.1
Shop Drawings
20.2 As-Built Document And Tools
21.0
List of Standards
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
1.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
GENERAL
Page: S1 - 1 of 1
1.0.1 This section of the Specification describes and specifies requirements for the
supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning, handing over in approved
working order and maintenance during the Defects Liability Period of the whole
electrical installation in accordance with the Specification, Supplementary
Notes, Bill of Quantities, Conditions of Contract, Drawings etc.
1.0.2 Unless specified elsewhere, all equipment, switchgears, apparatus, appliances
and accessories for low voltage electrical installation shall be rated for
operation on a 230/400V (within the tolerance as defined in MS IEC 60038;
230/400V, +10%, -6%), 3 phase, 4 wire, 50Hz. system with solidly earthed
neutral.
1.0.3 All standards shall conform to the latest MS, MS IEC, IEC, BS EN, BS and/or
EN standard.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
2.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SWITCHBOARDS
Page: S2 - 1 of 8
2.0
2.1
SWITCHBOARDS
TYPES OF SWITCHBOARD
2.1.1 The types of switchboard shall be as specified in the Bill of Quantities and/or
Drawings and shall be of the following types: 2.1.1.1
Self-contained, floor mounted, flush fronted, metalclad cubicle
type suitable for front and rear access;
2.1.1.2
Self-contained, floor mounted, flush fronted, metalclad cubicle
type suitable for front access;
2.1.1.3
Wall mounted metalclad type suitable for front access.
2.1.2 The switchboards shall house their air circuit breakers, moulded case circuit
breakers, fuse switches, switch fuses, isolators, contactors, busbars, meters,
protective relays, selector switches, indicating lamps, current transformers,
cable terminating boxes, cable glands, anti-condensation heaters complete
with automatic thermostats and isolators and all other necessary items of
equipment whether specified hereinafter or in the Drawings or not, suitable for
operation on a 230/400V, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50Hz. system with solidly earthed
neutral. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, the switchboards shall be
capable of withstanding fault condition of not less than 50kA at 400V for 1
second as defined in MS IEC 60439-1. The switchboards shall comply with MS
IEC 60439-1 and the degree of protection shall be IP41 in accordance to MS
IEC 60529.
2.1.3 Outdoor switchboards shall also comply with MS IEC 60439-5 with protection
degree of IP54 in accordance to MS IEC 60529.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
2.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SWITCHBOARDS
Page: S2 - 2 of 8
2.1.4 Type testing for switchboard as per categorization shall be as per Table 2A
below:
Category
Current Rating
I
I ≤ 600A
II
600A < I ≤ 2000A
III
I > 2000A
Registration & Type Test Report
Suruhanjaya Tenaga
Suruhanjaya Tenaga & Partial Type
Test in accordance with MS IEC 604391
(i)
Short Circuit Test
(Clause:8.2.3)
(ii)
Temperature Rise Test
(Clause:8.2.1)
Suruhanjaya Tenaga & Full Type Test in
accordance with MS IEC 60439-1
Table 2A : Type testing for switchboard as per categorization
2.1.5 Routine tests on the switchboard shall be carried out before delivery to site.
The main circuits and the auxiliary circuits shall be tested to verify dielectric
properties with power-frequency test voltage of 2500Vac for 1 minute and
insulation resistance under test voltage of 1000V. Routine tests shall include
inspection and checking of wiring, electrical continuity of the protective circuits,
connections and effectiveness of mechanical actuating elements and interlock.
Test Results or Certificate duly certified by Competent Person as in Electricity
Regulations 1994 shall be issued for every switchboard supplied and installed.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
2.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SWITCHBOARDS
Page: S2 - 3 of 8
2.2
ENCLOSURES
2.2.1 SELF-CONTAINED FLOOR MOUNTED CUBICLE SWITCHBOARDS
2.2.1.1 The framework of the switchboard shall be fabricated from rolled steel sections
of thickness not less than 2.5mm and shall be self-supporting when assembled,
uniform in height and depth from front to back. The rigid construction shall be
designed to withstand without any sag, deformation or warping, the loads likely
to be experienced during normal operating, maintenance or maximum fault
condition.
2.2.1.2 The front shall be provided with covers/doors of box formation. The rear shall
be provided with hinged removable doors of box formation. The rear doors
shall be of double-leaf type with rebated edges and each leaf should preferably
not be wider than 450mm. Each leaf of door shall have 2 pairs of approved
hinges. The door shall be fitted with approved type of surface-mounted
espagnolette or cremone bolts complete with approved locking device operated
by a satin chrome lever handle at the centre fixing. The top and sides shall be
of removable panels.
2.2.1.3 Cover plates with openings for cable entry shall be provided at the base of the
switchboard. All panels, covers and doors shall be fabricated from sheet steel
of thickness not less than 2.0mm and so constructed as to provide a clear,
flush and pleasing appearance. The panels, covers and front doors shall be
secured to the enclosure by means of chromed type of screws with cylindrical
knurled head complete with retaining clips. Welded cross struts shall not be
used.
2.2.1.4 The switchboard shall be dust and vermin proof. All covers and doors shall be
provided with grommets and dust seals to exclude dust and dirt. Louvres or
ventilation vent with filter shall be provided at the sides and back for adequate
ventilation. Precaution shall be taken to prevent overheating due to hysteresis
and eddy current using non ferrous plate (for single core cable). All edges shall
be rounded. Serrated star washers shall be fitted to ensure satisfactory
earthing of the front cover.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
2.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SWITCHBOARDS
Page: S2 - 4 of 8
2.2.1.5 Unless otherwise specified in the drawings and/or bill of quantities, the
switchboards shall be of Form 2b and comply with MS IEC 60439-1. The
busbars shall be separated from the switchgears/functional units and the
incoming and outgoing terminals. The form of separation shall be achieved by
metallic or non-metallic rigid barriers/partitions. All switchgears shall be
mounted so as to give adequate clearance for cable and busbar connections.
2.2.1.6 Switchgears shall be mounted on insulation runners where connected to
busbars and on steel supports where cable connection are made. The
insulation runners shall be of minimum 10mm thickness and mounted on steel
support or back panel of the enclosure whichever is more appropriate.
2.2.1.7 Cables connection between the busbars and the switchgears shall be neatly
arranged and mounted on cable runner. The terminals of the switchgears for
external cable connections shall be at least 200mm above the base of the
switchboards and, moreover, so placed that the cables can be easily
connected to them. Withdrawable type of switchgears shall be mounted on the
framework assembly, including the runner rails and fixed rear isolation
contacts, which shall be supplied as a part of the switchgear assembly. Each
withdrawable switchgear shall be housed in its own compartment with rear
connected busbars.
2.2.1.8 All indicating instrument which need to be read by the operator shall not be
located higher than 2m above the base of the switchboard. All operating
devices such as handle, push buttons, etc., shall be located at such a height
that they can easily be operated, and in general, the centerline shall not be
higher than 2m above the base of the switchboard. In the case where building
automation devices, transducers and relays are provided, they shall be
separately housed in a compartment of the section of the switchboard. All
wiring from the devices, transducers and relays shall be neatly arranged and
connected to the terminal blocks with removal links mounted on rail. Terminals
shall be identified and labelled in accordance with IEC 60445.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
2.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SWITCHBOARDS
Page: S2 – 5 of 8
2.2.1.9
Where surge protective device is specified, the device and its associate
equipment shall be totally compartmentalized with clear transparent cover at
immediate lower subsection where the incoming switchgear is connected. A
lockable tool compartment with keys and opening handle shall be provided
at the lowest subsection of the switchboard. The switchboard shall undergo
de-rusting treatment, anti-rust treatment with the exterior finished with epoxy
dry-powder and oven baked semi-gloss beige colour and interior finished
matt white. The switchboard shall be bolted to mild steel channel base or
over concrete trench. The channel shall be anti-rusted and painted with a
primer. There shall be a readily installed cable tray on the interior of both
side panels for outgoing cable. All cables shall be rigidly secured using
cable support bracket of non rotting material, before termination.
2.2.1.10 Where top entry is specified or required, there shall be a readily installed
cable box for top entry cable.
2.2.1.11 Where the incoming feeder circuit breaker in the switchboard is 2500A and
above, the switchboard shall be equipped with an arc protection system.
The arc protection shall be installed against the internal arc in the
switchboard in order to improve personnel safety to minimize damage to the
switchgears in case of internal arc faults, thus improving the availability of
the electricity service. The arc protection shall be integrated with protection
relays or of stand alone type. The relays shall be in accordance to the
requirements in Section 5.0. Only a simultaneous occurrence of over-current
and arc incidence(s) shall activate the trip signal in the relay.
2.2.1.12 Arc sensors shall be mounted in the switchboard. The arc sensors for
detecting the arc shall be of photo transistor or lens sensors. The arc
sensors shall in practice be installed within the cable compartment of the
outgoing feeder, main incoming circuit breaker and busbar compartment.
The arc protection system shall include a self -supervision function covering
all equipment, including the arc sensors. All internal faults shall be indicated
on the arc protection unit and an alarm contact shall be activated. The arcmonitoring unit shall contain a display capable of indicating the exact
compartment of the fault after the tripping.
2.2.1.13 All outgoing MCCBs in the switchboard where the incoming feeder circuit
breaker is rated 400A and above shall be provided with panel mounting
external operating handle with padlocking facilities.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
2.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SWITCHBOARDS
Page: S2 – 6 of 8
2.2.2 WALL MOUNTED SWITCHBOARDS
2.2.2.1 The switchboard shall be fabricated from sheet steel of thickness not less than
2.0mm. The enclosure shall be of all welded construction with sheets bent
where possible so as to minimise the number of welded joints. The four sides
of the enclosure shall be returned at the front to facilitate fixing of front cover
plates. The front cover plates or doors shall be of box formation and flanged to
facilitate fixing to the enclosure.
2.2.2.2 The front cover of the switchboard shall be provided with grummets and dust
seal to exclude dust and dirt. Meshed louvre or ventilation vent with filter shall
be provided at both sides for ventilation. All edges shall be rounded. Serrated
star washers shall be fitted to ensure satisfactory earthing of the front cover.
The switchboard shall undergo de-rusting treatment, anti-rust treatment and be
finished with epoxy dry-powder and oven baked semi-gloss beige colour.
2.2.2.3 The switchboard shall not be mounted directly to the wall or structure. It shall
be firmly bolted/welded on to galvanised C-channel brackets which in turn shall
be bolted to the wall or structure by means of bolts and nuts. The top of the
switchboard shall not be higher than 2100mm and the bottom shall not be
lower than 900mm from the floor.
2.3
BUSBARS
2.3.1 Busbars shall conform to BS EN 13601 and shall be tinned hard drawn high
conductivity copper with an adequate uniform rectangular cross section to carry
continuously their rated current without overheating. They shall be rigidly
mounted on non-hygroscopic insulators so as to withstand any mechanical
stresses to which they may be subjected under maximum fault condition.
2.3.2 Busbar sizes must not be less than that specified in the Drawings. However if
the busbar sizes are not specified, then the busbar rating shall be based on a
current density of not more than 1.5 A/sq. mm. In any case, the main busbars
rating shall not be less than the rating of the incoming switchgear (In). All
busbars whether horizontal or vertical, shall be of the same size.
2.3.3 The main busbars shall be run for the full length of the switchboard without
reduction in size. Neutral busbar shall be of full size and full length as the
phase busbars. Connections shall be made up with bronze or other copper
alloy and nuts utilising tension washers on both outer faces. Where multiple
parallel bars are used, they shall be separated by tinned copper spacers at
spacing equal to the busbar thickness.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
2.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SWITCHBOARDS
Page: S2 – 7 of 8
2.3.4 The main busbar shall be arranged in a horizontal plane in the order neutralblue-yellow-red, viewed from the rear of the switchboard. Busbars shall be
painted at appropriate points with colours red, yellow, blue and black to denote
the phases.
2.3.5 Tinned copper earthing bar of cross sectional area not less than 50mm x 6mm
shall run along the switchboard for its entire length. This switchboard earthing
bar shall be fastened and bonded at the base to each vertical frame member of
the switchboard. At least one earthing bar of similar cross sectional area shall
run the full height of the switchboard and connected to the main earthing bar.
All earthing bars shall be identified with green and yellow (twin-coloured)
colour.
2.3.6 Distribution busbars shall be sized in accordance with the maximum outgoing
switchgear rating. Connections from busbars to the switchgears shall be
effected by means of copper conductors securely clamped to the busbars and
colour coded to identify the phase and neutral conductors. Copper conductor
either bare tinned busbars or insulated cable shall be rated in accordance with
the current rating of the switchgear. Neutral conductor shall be of full size as
phase conductor. Coloured cable sleeve shall be shrouded for cable end
termination.
2.4
METER PANELS
2.4.1 The metalclad, mild steel or other approved material with thickness not less
than 1.5mm meter panel of box formation shall be installed adjacent to, but
physically separated from the main switchboard. Suitable flexible and/or rigid
galvanised steel conduit with approved adaptors shall be supplied and fitted
between the main switchboard and the meter panel. The design, construction
and method of installation of the meter panel shall be to the requirement of
Supply Authority or Licensee.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
2.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SWITCHBOARDS
Page: S2 - 8 of 8
2.5
OTHERS
2.5.1 All secondary wiring shall be of not less than 1.5 sq. mm. section insulated with
PVC and shall be fixed securely without strain by cleats of the compression
type. All screws, locknuts, washers, bolts etc. shall be of copper alloy type.
2.5.2 Indicating lights shall be long life coloured LED type. All indicating lights shall
be adequately ventilated and easily be replaced from the front of the panel
without the use of extractors.
2.5.3 Instruments, meters, relays, protective fuses etc. located on the front of the
switchboard shall be so positioned that as far as possible, each instrument,
meter, relay, protective fuse etc. is adjacent to the unit which it is associated.
All relays shall be of heavy duty type, unaffected by external vibration and
capable of operation in any position. All instruments, meters, relays, equipment
etc. shall be fully tropicalised.
2.5.4 One number approved anti-condensation heater shall be installed for every two
sections at the switchboards. Each heater shall be complete with automatic
thermostat control, ON-OFF switch and indicating lamp.
2.5.5 Engraved labels with white lettering on a black background shall be fastened or
riveted on the front panels of each switchgear and item of equipment. The
wording shall be approved by the S.O.'s Representative. Engraved name plate
showing the relevant earth fault setting, overcurrent setting, current transformer
ratio, fuse rating, name of the circuit to which it is connected, etc. shall be fixed
to switchgear panels to which it refers.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
3.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND
CONSUMER UNITS
Page: S3 - 1 of 2
3.0
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS & CONSUMER UNITS
3.1
All Distribution Boards (metalclad and all insulated) shall be installed at
locations indicated in the Drawings or as directed by the S.O.'s Representative.
The Distribution Boards shall be assembled by licensed switchboard
manufacturer, registered with Suruhanjaya Tenaga (ST) and Jabatan Kerja
Raya.
3.2
They shall comply with MS IEC 60439-3 and unless otherwise specified, shall
be surface mounted metalclad type. The sheet steel shall have minimum
thickness of 1.2mm. They shall have hinged cover, rust-proof and finished with
oven baked epoxy powder coating. Knockouts or other approved form of cable
entries and suitable brass earthing bolt and nut shall be provided.
3.3
The Distribution Boards shall be equipped with HRC fuses or Miniature Circuit
Breakers (MCB) of rating as specified in the Drawings. HRC fuses shall comply
with relevant parts of IEC 60269. MCB shall have rupturing capacity not less
than that indicated on Drawings and/or Bill of Quantities and shall comply with
MS IEC 60898.
3.4
The busbars shall be hard drawn high conductivity copper. The current rating of
the busbars shall not be less than the incoming switchgear rating. The neutral
and earth connection for each circuit shall be individually connected to the
neutral and brass earth bar/terminal respectively. The sequence of termination
of the neutral and earth wires shall correspond to that of phase circuit.
3.5
For all -insulated Distribution Board/Consumer Unit, the main switch shall be
double pole MCB (Miniature Circuit Breaker) provided with a clear indication of
'ON-OFF' positions. The main switch shall comply with MS IEC 60947-3 and
have fully shrouded incoming cable terminals. The contacts shall be of long
switching life type.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
3.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
DISTRIBUTION BOARDS AND
CONSUMER UNITS
Page: S3 - 2 of 2
3.6
Where surge protective device is specified, the device and its associated
equipment shall be housed in separate compartment immediately after where
the incoming switchgear is connected.
3.7
All outgoing cables shall have alphanumeric circuits number labels. The labels
of the neutral and earth shall correspond to that of the phase circuit.
3.8
Engraved labels with white lettering on a black background shall be fitted
externally (using rivet) on the front cover of the Distribution Board/Consumer
Unit describing its usage and with a suitable designation for identification.
3.9
Each Distribution Board shall be provided with a laminated schematic diagram
and paste on the inside cover of the Distribution Board. The details shall
include fuse rating/MCB rating, cable size, number and type of loads etc. The
description of each circuit printed thereon shall include the corresponding
circuit number in the as installed schematic diagram.
3.10
All Distribution Boards shall be provided with top and bottom entry/exit with
minimum 50mm x 50mm pre-cut hole. The opening shall be fitted with flat,
removable gland plate to cover the hole.
3.11 Where Distribution Board is specified to be installed at special service
conditions as per clause 7 of IEC 61439-3:2012 and clause 7.2 of IEC 614391:2011 where variations in temperature and humidity take place at such speed
where condensation is liable to occur inside it, each Distribution Board
shall be provided with
meshed louvre or ventilation vent with filter for
adequate ventilation and/or
one number
anti condensation heater
complete with automatic thermostat
control, ON OFF switch and indicating
lamp.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
4.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SWITCHGEARS
Page: S4 - 1 of 9
4.0
SWITCHGEARS
4.0.1 All switchgears shall have voltage and frequency rating suitable for the power
system to which they are connected. The current rating shall not be less than
the specified in the Drawing and/or Bill Quantities. They shall conform to the
latest MS, MS IEC or IEC standards.
4.1
AIR CIRCUIT BREAKERS
4.1.1 Air circuit breakers (ACB) shall be of withdrawable metalclad, flush mounted,
horizontal drawout isolation and air break type suitable for installing on cubicle type
of switchboard. They shall be three or four poles type as specified and shall comply
fully with MS IEC 60947-1 and 60947-2. They shall be ASTA, KEMA or other
accredited laboratories certified for minimum rupturing capacity, rated short time
withstand current, (Icw) of 50kA at 400V for 1 second or otherwise specified.
4.1.2 They shall consist of quick-make, quick-break, mechanically and electrically trip
free mechanism arranged to give double break in all poles simultaneously. The
closing mechanism shall be of stored energy type, either manually or electrically
charged. Mechanical `ON' and `OFF' or ‘I’ and ‘O’ indicators shall be provided. The
tripping mechanism shall be equipped with push button for independent manual
tripping and shall be stable and not being opened by shocks.
4.1.3 Each pole of the circuit breaker shall be provided with an arc chute to extinguish
the arc drawn between the breaker contacts each time a breaker interrupts current,
and interpole barriers to reduce arcing time for rapid deionization of the arc and
guard against flash over. The contacts shall be renewable type.
4.1.4 The operating mechanism and carriage shall have the following positions: 4.1.4.1 Service- In this position the main and control contacts are engaged.
4.1.4.2 Test
- In this position the main contacts are isolated but the
control
contacts are still engaged. It shall be possible to
check the correct operation of the control circuits without
energising the main circuit.
4.1.4.3 Isolated - Both main and control contacts are isolated.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
4.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SWITCHGEARS
Page: S4 - 2 of 9
4.1.5 They shall be provided with marking to show the breaker positions with facility
for padlocking the carriage in the Test and Isolated positions. They shall be
equipped with the following interlock devices: 4.1.5.1 Prevent withdrawal of breaker while the breaker is in closed position.
4.1.5.2 Prevent closure of breaker while the carriage is in any position between
`fully isolated' and `fully home'.
4.1.6 The arrangement of the busbar connections shall be such that with the circuit
breaker withdrawn, the live parts shall be protected, either by suitable
shrouding or lockable shutters.
4.1.7 Minimum four numbers (2 -Normally-Open, 2-Normally-Close) double break
type auxiliary contacts shall be provided.
4.1.8 Mechanical interlocks and/or electrical interlocks, where specified, shall be
provided. Mechanical interlock shall be of code key type, arranged to
mechanically operate the trip mechanism latch so that the breaker can only be
closed when the key is trapped in the lock. Electrical interlock shall be
controlled by means of operation of auxiliary switches of another breaker
designed to cut out the closing coils and mechanism of the parent breaker.
4.1.9 Where used as bus-coupler, they shall be of 4 pole type and provided with
electrical and/or mechanical interlocks as required so that it is not possible for
the coupler to close with its associated main incoming supply breakers closed.
4.1.10 Where used as incoming feeder from supply source (either from transformer,
generator set or coupler), they shall be of 4 pole type.
4.1.11 The neutral of the 4 pole type ACB terminals shall be of the same size as the
phase.
4.1.12 The frame of ACB shall be bonded to the switchboard earthing bar using of
3mm x 25mm tinned copper tape.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
4.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SWITCHGEARS
Page: S4 - 3 of 9
4.2
MOULDED CASE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
4.2.1 Moulded case circuit breakers (MCCB) shall have the number of poles as
specified in the Drawings and/or Bill of Quantities. They shall comply with MS
IEC 60947-1 and MS IEC 60947-2. They shall be fully tropicalised and suitable
o
to be used up to an ambient temperature of 40 C, enclosed in glass-reinforced
polyester moulded case and suitable for use on 230/400V, 50Hz. a.c. supply
system.
4.2.2 They shall be of the quick-make, quick-break type having manually operable
toggle type handle. Permanent position indicators shall be provided to show
status of the breaker. When tripping occurs, the handle shall be in the `trip'
position midway between the 'ON' and 'OFF' or ‘I’ and ‘O’ position so as to
provide positive indication of automatic interruption. The operating mechanism
shall be non-tamperable. The MCCB shall have trip-free feature to prevent the
breaker from being closed against fault conditions. Multipole MCCB shall have
common-trip operating mechanism for simultaneous operation of all poles.
4.2.3 The tripping units shall be one of the following types: 4.2.3.1 Thermal-magnetic type with bimetallic elements for inverse time-delay
overload protection and magnetic elements for short circuit protection.
4.2.3.2 Solid state trip unit with adjustable overload protection and adjustable
short circuit protection with or without adjustable time-delay.
4.2.4 An arc extinguisher shall be incorporated to confine, divide and extinguish the
arc drawn between the breaker contacts each time a breaker interrupts current.
The contacts shall be of non-welding type.
4.2.5 Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings and/or Bill of Quantities, the
minimum rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity (Icu) of the MCCB shall
be 50kA rms at 400V for switchboards connected to transformer or Supply
Authority's or Licensee’s incomer and 25kA for the subsequent switchboards.
4.2.6 The rated service short-circuit breaking capacity (Ics) shall be 100% of the rated
ultimate short-circuit breaking capacity (Icu) at 400 volts for incoming feeder,
and for all outgoing feeder Ics shall be 50% of Icu.
4.2.7 Unless otherwise specified the rated ultimate short circuit breaking capacity
(Icu) for MCCB at Distribution Board shall be not less than 10kA at 230/400V
and Ics shall not be less than 50% Icu at 230/400V.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
4.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SWITCHGEARS
Page: S4 - 4 of 9
4.2.8 If current limiting types of MCCB are used, they shall be equipped with current
limiting device of either permanent self-resetting power fuse type or magnetic
repulsion moving contact type.
4.2.9 The current limiting device shall coordinate with the normal trip mechanism so
that all fault and overload currents occurring within the safe capability of the
MCCB shall cause the MCCB to open, and all currents occurring beyond the
capability of the MCCB shall cause the current limiting devices to operate.
4.2.10 If required, the MCCB shall have facilities for shunt trip, under-voltage/no-volt
trip, externally connected earth fault protection, externally connected
overcurrent protection etc.. They shall also have auxiliary contacts, accessories
etc. for indication, alarm and interlocking purposes if necessary. In area where
is specified, and door interlocking facilities to prevent the panel door from being
opened to access to the MCCB in closed position, shall be provided.
4.2.11 Where used as incoming feeder from supply source (either from transformer
and/or generator set), they shall be of 4 pole type.
4.3
MINIATURE CIRCUIT BREAKERS
4.3.1 Miniature Circuit Breakers (MCB) shall be of the type approved by Suruhanjaya
Tenaga and JKR.
4.3.2 Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings and/or Bill of Quantities, (MCB)
shall have breaking capacity not less than 6kA (rms) and of C-type with Class 3
energy limiting characteristics. They shall comply with MS IEC 60898-1 and/or
MS IEC 60898-2, fully tropicalised and suitable for use on a 230/400V, 50Hz.
o
a.c. system and up to an ambient temperature of 40 C.
4.3.3 They shall be quick-make, quick-break and trip free type complete with de-ion arc
interrupters. The tripping elements shall be of thermal magnetic type with inverse
time delay overcurrent and instantaneous short circuit characteristic. The response
to overload shall be independent of variations in ambient temperature.
4.3.4 They shall be manually operated by means of toggle type handles having visual
indication of whether the breaker is opened, closed or tripped. Multipole MCB
shall be of all pole protected type and provided with common-trip mechanism
for simultaneous operation of all the poles.
4.3.5 Where used as incomer, they shall be of 2 pole type.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
4.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SWITCHGEARS
Page: S4 - 5 of 9
4.4
RESIDUAL CURRENT DEVICE
4.4.1 Residual Current Device (RCD) shall be of the type approved by Suruhanjaya
Tenaga and JKR.
4.4.2 RCD shall be residual current operated circuit breakers without integral overcurrent
protection (RCCB) and residual current operated circuit breakers with integral
overcurrent protection (RCBO) shall be current operated functionally independent
of line voltage type, suitable for use on a 230/400V, 50Hz. a.c. system and up to
an ambient temperature of 40°C. RCCB shall comply with MS IEC 61008 -1 and
MS IEC 61008-2-1 and RCBO shall comply with MS IEC 61009-1 and MS IEC
61009-2-1. They shall be of either two-pole or four-pole type as indicated in the
Drawings and/or Bill of Quantities. The rated current and the rated residual
operating current of the RCCB or RCBO shall be as specified in the Drawings
and/or Bill of Quantities. Rated conditional short circuit current (I nc) shall be of
minimum 6kA. For RCBO, protection against overcurrent shall of C-type with Class
3 energy limiting characteristic complying with MS IEC 60898-1 and MS IEC
60898-2. The breaking capacity shall not be less than 6kA.
4.4.3 RCCB and RCBO shall provide resistance against nuisance tripping due to an
impulse voltage or transient overvoltage.
4.4.4 RCCB and RCBO shall be A or AC type unless otherwise specified.
4.4.5 Test push button and visual indication for 'ON' and 'OFF' or ‘I’ and ‘O’ shall be
provided. They shall be equipped with screw clamping type of cable terminals,
which shall be covered by moulded phonolic plastic with knockouts for cable entry.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
4.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SWITCHGEARS
Page: S4 - 6 of 9
4.5
FUSE SWITCHGEARS
4.5.1 Fuse-switch disconnector and switch-disconnector fuse shall be of totally
enclosed, flush or surface mounting, double air break, quick-make and quickbreak type complete with phase barriers and fully comply with MS IEC 60947-1
and MS IEC 60947-3. They shall be of utilization category AC-23A. They shall be
equipped with operating handle, position ON-OFF indicator and mechanical door
interlock to prevent the cover from being opened with the switch closed and the
switch being closed with the cover opened. However this interlock shall be able
to be defeated by competent person for maintenance purpose. Terminals and
fuses shall be minimum IP20. The doors shall be provided with dust seal.
4.5.2 They shall be equipped with replaceable HRC fuses. The fuse holder shall have
shrouded base contact with provision for busbar mounting and front wiring. The
fuse links and fuse carrier shall comply with relevant parts of MS IEC 60269.
Suitable knockouts shall be provided for cable entry.
4.6
ISOLATING SWITCHES
4.6.1 Isolating switches or switch-disconnector shall be of metalclad or high impact
insulating material (e.g. polycarbonate) type. They shall fully comply to MS IEC
60947-1 and MS IEC 60947-3. The degree of protection shall be IP54 for indoor
installation and IP65 for outdoor installation. They shall be able to operate
continuously at full current rating without de-rating, capable of making and
breaking currents under normal condition and when in open position, providing
isolation from source of electrical energy for reasons of safety.
4.6.2 They shall be quick-make, quick-break type suitable for use on 230/400V, 50Hz.
a.c. system and shall have padlocking facilities to secure against unauthorised
operation. They shall be provided with removable top and bottom end plates or
knockouts for cable entry. The enclosure, the isolating mechanism and all other
accessories shall be from the same manufacturer.
4.6.3 The enclosure for metalclad type shall comprise of heavy gauge steel plates rust
protected and finished grey stove enamel. Front access doors for metalclad type,
which is detachable, shall be fitted with dust-excluding gasket and shall be
interlocked to prevent opening when the switch is 'ON'. However this interlock
shall be able to be defeated by competent person for maintenance purpose. It
shall be provided with, if required, facilities for lock-on and lock-off the
operating handle.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
4.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SWITCHGEARS
Page: S4 - 7 of 9
4.7
CONTACTORS
4.7.1 Contactor shall have the number of poles as specified in the Drawings and/or
Bill of Quantities. They shall comply with IEC 60947-1 and 60947-4-1. They
shall be fully tropicalised, suitable to be used up to an ambient temperature of
40 °C and suitable for use on 230/400 V, 50 Hz. a.c. supply system.
4.7.2 The contacts shall be of quick-make and quick-break type, dust-proof and rust
protected. They shall be of utilization category as per Table 4A.
Current
Utilization
Category
AC-1
Non Inductive or slightly inductive loads, resistance furnaces, heater
AC-2
Slip-ring motors: switching off
Squirrel-cage motors: starting, switching off motors during running
Most typical industrial application
AC-3
AC
Typical Applications
1
2
AC-4
Squirrel-cage motors: starting, *plugging , *inching
AC-5a
Switching of electric discharge lamps
AC-5b
Switching of incandescent lamps
AC-6a
Switching of transformers
AC-6b
Switching of capacitor banks
AC-7a
Slightly inductive loads in household appliances: mixers, blenders
AC-7b
Motor-loads for household applications: fans, central vacuum
Hermetic refrigerant compressor motor control with manual resetting
AC-8a
overloads
Hermetic refrigerant compressor motor control with automatic
AC-8b
resetting overloads
*(1) Plugging - Stopping a motor rapidly by reversing the primary power connections.
*(2) Inching - Energizing a motor repeatedly for short periods to obtain small
incremental movements.
Table 4A - Utilization Categories
4.7.3 The contactor shall have multiple auxiliary contacts, and unless otherwise
specified shall be normally-open.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
4.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SWITCHGEARS
Page: S4 - 8 of 9
4.8
AUTOMATIC TRANSFER SWITCHING EQUIPMENT
4.8.1 The automatic transfer switching equipment (ATSE) shall comprise of a transfer
switching device and a necessary monitoring and transfer control device for
monitoring supply circuits and for transferring load circuits from
the normal
supply to an alternative supply in the event of a
monitored supply deviation
and automatically returning the load to the normal supply when it is restored.
4.8.2 ATSE shall be of utilization category AC 33B and shall comply to MS IEC 609471 and IEC 60947-6-1.
4.8.3 Unless otherwise specified, the operating mechanism of the
be reliably, electrically and mechanically interlocked to prevent
connection to both normal mains and alternative supplies.
ATSE shall
simultaneous
4.8.4 Unless specified otherwise in the Bill of Quantities and/or Drawings, the transfer
switching device of an ATSE shall be of automatic changeover contactors Class
CC type in accordance with IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-4.The automatic
changeover contactors shall be bar mounted type with fixed bar and moving
shaft made of steel and bearing supports made of aluminium/bronze alloy. They
shall be of double air-break, quick-make and quick-break type complying with
MS IEC 60947-1 and IEC 60947-4-1. They shall be dust-proof, rust protected,
fully tropicalised and suitable for use on 230 V/400 V, 50 Hz A.C. system.
4.8.5 The operating coil shall be 230 V/400 V 50 Hz A.C. type and shall operate
satisfactorily when the voltage at the coil terminals is between 85% and 110%
of the nominal voltage. The electromagnet shall be of laminated type.
4.8.6 The automatic changeover contactors shall be four pole type. Each pole shall
comprise three main parts: 4.8.6.1
The main contacts shall be of 'butt-contact' pattern
without sliding or rolling and shall operate with absolute
minimum contact bounce.
4.8.6.2
The blow out coil shall be rated to carry the total current
flowing through the main pole and according to the thermal
rating of the contactor.
4.8.6.3
The arc chute shall be De-ion type or the type having 'arc
‘splitter' for rapid extinction of electric arc. Each arc chute
shall have a steatite disc on its internal faces for preventing
rapid erosion of the chute by the effect of arcs. The arc
chutes shall be easily removable to allow inspection of the
main contacts and where necessary their replacement.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
4.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SWITCHGEARS
Page: S4 - 9 of 9
4.8.7 The main contacts shall able to carry continuously the rated current, capable of
making and withstanding short-circuit currents without damage in an enclosure
0
having an ambient temperature up to 40 C.
4.8.8 Unless otherwise specified, a minimum of four normally close and four
normally open auxiliary contacts shall be provided.
4.8.9 A transparent protection screen of full compartment size shall be provided
in front of the automatic changeover contactors.
4.8.10 For Class CB where the circuit breakers are specified as transfer switching
devices, the circuit breakers shall comply with MS IEC 60947-1 and MS IEC
60947-2. Unless specified otherwise, the rated short-time withstand current
shall be of the same rating for the circuit breaker receiving supply from the
Licensee or Supply Authority.
4.8.11 For class PC, the ATSE shall comply with MS IEC 60947-1 and MS IEC
60947-6-1.The ATSE shall be of open transition (break -before-make) type or
closed transition (make-before -break) type according to the application stated
on the design. Unless there is no type specified, all ATSE shall be of open
transition type.
4.8.12 ATSE shall have the overlapping neutral feature during synchronizing and
changing over from normal mains supply to an alternative supply and
vice versa.
4.8.13 ATSE shall be complete with a monitoring and transfer control device for
monitoring supply circuits and for transferring load circuits from the normal
mains supply to an alternative supply in the event of a monitored supply
deviation and automatically returning the load to the normal mains supply
when it is restored.
4.8.14 The monitoring and transfer control device shall be of microprocessor based
controller comprising automatic transfer switching module or combination of
automatic transfer switching module and automatic mains failure module.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
5.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
PROTECTION RELAYS
Page: S5 - 1 of 2
5.0
PROTECTION RELAYS
5.1
The protection device shall provide either instantaneous or inverse time lag
characteristics in the overload range and instantaneous with or without time
delay in the short circuit range as specified in the Drawings and/or Bill of
Quantities. The protection device shall be of the type acceptable to the Supply
Authority or Licensee and JKR. The protection relays shall be of panel flush
mounting type. All relays shall comply with relevant parts of IEC 60255.
5.2
Overcurrent and earth fault protection shall be provided by externally
connected current transformers.
5.3
Unless specified in the drawing and/or Bill Of Quantities, electromechanical
overcurrent and earth fault relay shall be of Inverse Definite Minimum Time
(IDMT) type.
5.3.1 For overcurrent relay of IDMT induction disc type, current settings shall
be from 50% to 200% of rated current adjustable in seven equal steps
and time multiplier settings from 0.1 to 1.0 adjustable continuously.
5.3.2 Earth fault relay of IDMT induction disc type shall have current settings
from 10% to 40% of rated current adjustable in seven equal steps and
time multiplier settings from 0.1 to 1.0 adjustable continuously.
5.4
Earth leakage relay (ELR) shall be of the type suitable for use on a 230/400V,
o
50Hz system and up to ambient temperature of 40 C. ELR shall be provided
with test button for simulation of a fault, earth leakage, LED indicator, a reset
button, protection against nuisance tripping due to transient voltage and d.c.
sensitive. Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings and/or Bill of Quantities,
ELR shall be of adjustable current sensitivity and adjustable time delay type.
5.5
The selectivity range for current sensitivity shall be 0.03A to 10A and the time
delay selectivity range of 0 second to 1 second. ELR shall be incorporated with
matching balanced core current transformer and shunt trip coil for the circuit
breaker to which it controls the tripping shall also be provided.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
5.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
PROTECTION RELAYS
Page: S5 - 2 of 2
5.6
Unless specified in the Drawings and/or Bill of Quantities, the microprocessor
based protection relays shall be rated at 230V/400V and operating voltage
shall be in a range from 90V to 250V. The relays shall be housed in robust
panel flush mounting case and shall be fully tropicalised and suitable to be
used up to an ambient temperature of 50 oC and relative humidity of 95%.
5.6.1 Unless otherwise specified, the microprocessor based protection relays
shall be of combined three phase over current and earth-fault
protection with instantaneous, definite time and inverse time
characteristics. Time / current characteristic of IDMT overcurrent and
earth fault relays shall be of standard inverse curve (3/10).
5.6.2 The microprocessor based protection relays shall give numerical digital
readout of set values, actual measured values and recorded values.
The relays shall include a serial communication port for external
connection to facilitate external reading, setting and recording of relay
data and parameters by a personal computer (PC). PC connecting
cable and parameter reading/setting /recording PC program shall be
provided.
5.6.3 The microprocessor based protection relays shall be incorporated with
built-in self-supervision system with auto-diagnosis. The selfsupervision system shall continuously monitor the relay microprocessor
programs. If a permanent fault is detected, an alarm indication shall be
given. A 230V/5A alarm contact for connection to external alarm shall
be provided.
5.6.4 If current and voltage measurements are specified, the microprocessor
based protection relays shall make available these measurements for
local display. The measurements shall include phase currents, phaseto-phase voltages and phase-to neutral voltages.
5.6.5 The microprocessor based protection relays shall comply with relevant
parts of IEC 60255 and shall also comply with relevant parts of IEC
61000 on electromagnetic compatibility.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
6.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
MEASURING INSTRUMENT AND
ACCESSORIES
Page: S6 - 1 of 3
6.0
MEASURING INSTRUMENT AND ACCESSORIES
6.0.1 Measuring instrument and accessories shall comply with the relevant IEC
Standards. They shall meet the requirement as specified in the Drawings
and/or Bill of Quantities.
6.1
MEASURING INSTRUMENT
6.1.1 Measuring instrument shall be of panel flush mounting type with square
escutcheon plate finished matt black and pressed steel case. They shall be of
industrial grade type adequately shielded against stray magnetic fields,
conform to the measuring scales and arrangements as shown in the Drawings
and calibrated for correct readings. They shall comply with MS 925 and
relevant parts of IEC 60051. External zero adjustment shall be provided for
ammeters and voltmeters.
6.1.2 Ammeters, unless otherwise specified, shall be of moving iron type having
continuous overload capacity of 120% of rated value and full scale value
accuracy of ±2%. They shall be provided with maximum demand indicator, if
specified.
6.1.3 Voltmeters shall be of moving iron type having overload capacity of 200% of
rated value and full scale value accuracy of ±1.5%.
6.1.4 Kilowatt-hour meter shall be of 6 numbers wheel cyclometer aluminium type
with both the current and voltage coils on laminated cover fabricated from high
quality silicon steel strip. They shall have overload capacity of 200% of rated
value and accuracy of ±0.5% at the supply voltage and frequency
characteristic.
6.1.5 Power factor meters shall be of balanced type using ferrodynamic, cross-coiled
mechanism with measuring range from 0.5 lagging to 0.5 leading. Full scale
value accuracy shall be ±1.5%.
6.1.6 Frequency meters shall be of reed type with frequency range from 45Hz. to
55Hz. and accuracy of ±5%. If specified in the Drawings and/or Bill of
Quantities, the microprocessor based power meter shall be rated at 230V/400V
and operating voltage shall be in a range from 90V to 265V.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
6.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
MEASURING INSTRUMENT AND
ACCESSORIES
Page: S6 - 2 of 3
6.1.7 The meters shall be housed in robust panel flush mounting case and shall be
fully tropicalised and suitable to be used up to an ambient temperature of 50oC
and relative humidity of 95%. The meters shall give direct numerical digital
readout of actual measured values and recorded values. The meters shall
include one serial communication port for external connection to facilitate
external reading and recording of meter data and parameters.
6.1.8 The measurements and their accuracy of the microprocessor-based meters
shall be as per Table 6A: Parameters / measurements
Volts (V): line-line / line-neutral
Currents (A): per phase
Frequency (Hz)
Power Factor: total
Active Power (kW): total
Reactive Power (kVAr): total
Apparent Power (kVA): total
Active Energy (kWh): total
Reactive Energy (kVArh): total
Maximum Demands (A, W, VA): total
Accuracy
0.5% of reading ± 2 digit
0.5% of reading ± 2 digit
0.1 Hz ± 1 digit
1% of reading ± 2 digit
1% of reading ± 2 digit
1% of reading ± 2 digit
1% of reading ± 2 digit
1% of reading
1% of reading
1% of reading ± 2 digit
Table 6A: Accuracy of Microprocessor-based Meter
6.1.9 If harmonics content measurement is specified, individual and total harmonics
distortion on the current and voltage up to 30th harmonic shall be measured
with the accuracy of 1% of reading.
6.1.10 There shall be a custom display screen, which can be programmed to display
customised specific parameter requirements.
6.1.11 All data shall be continuously and concurrently logged, recorded and stored in
internal non-volatile memory. All time base logged-in data can be retrieved and
downloaded to a personal computer (PC) using serial communication port. PC
connecting cable and data retrieving PC program shall be provided.
6.1.12 The meters shall comply with IEC 60359 and IEC 60688. The meters shall also
comply with relevant parts of MS IEC 61000 on electromagnetic compatibility.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
6.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
MEASURING INSTRUMENT AND
ACCESSORIES
Page: S6 - 3 of 3
6.2
CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
6.2.1 Current transformers shall comply fully with MS 1202 and IEC 60044-1 and
shall have short time rating not less than that of the switchboard in which they
are incorporated. The secondary shall be rated for 5A. They shall be
adequately rated in VA to carry the summation of all VA burdens of the
connected loads but in any case, the rating shall not be less than 15VA. They
shall be capable of withstanding, without damage, on open circuit secondary
with full primary current.
6.2.2 They shall be constructed from high quality silicon steel core. They shall be
installed inside the switchboard in such a way that it is easily accessible for
maintenance purpose. Identification labels shall be fitted giving type, ratio,
rating, output and serial numbers.
6.2.3 Unless otherwise specified, current transformers used for measuring and
metering shall be of Class 1.0 accuracy and those used for protection shall be
of Class 10P10 accuracy.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
7.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE
Page: S7 - 1 of 3
7.0
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE
7.1
The surge protective devices (SPDs) shall be one-port type compatible with the
230/400V, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50Hz with solidly earthed neutral supply system it is
protecting. The SPDs shall be of the type complying with MS IEC 61643-1, MS
IEC 61643-12 and IEEE Std C62.41.2 and in accordance with
recommendations of MS IEC 62305 and the relevant parts and sections of MS
IEC 60364.
7.2
If the specifications conflict in any way, with any or all of the above/ standards,
the specification shall have precedence and shall govern.
7.3
The SPDs shall be designed for the average isoceraunic level of approximately
200 thunder-days per year.
7.4
The SPDs modes of protection shall be each phase-to-neutral (L-N), each
phase-to-earth (L-E) and neutral-to-earth (N-E) for either single phase or three
phase supply system.
7.5
The SPDs shall be of voltage limiting type with metal oxide varistors (MOVs), or
voltage switching type with gas discharge tube (GDT)/spark gap, or
combination type with MOVs and GDT/spark gap. MOVs and GDT shall comply
with MS IEC 61643-331 and MS IEC 61643-311 respectively.
7.6
The maximum continuous operating voltage (Uc) of SPDs shall be minimum
275V for SPDs connected between L-N and L- E. When SPDs connected
between N-E, the rating of Uc shall be minimum 230V. The continuous
operating current (Ic) for each mode of protection shall not exceed 3mA. In the
case where the MOVs are used, the SPDs shall be provided with integrated
thermal protection to avoid thermal runaway due to degradation.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
7.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICE
Page: S7 - 2 of 3
7.7
7.8
The SPDs to be installed with respect to the location of category shall be as in
Table 7A. The maximum discharge current (Imax) of SPDs shall be declared by
the SPD manufacturer by submitting the V-I characteristic of a MOVs / GDT /
spark gap.
The SPDs shall be equipped with visual indicator showing the protection status
of the SPDs. Unless otherwise specified, SPDs shall be provided with auxiliary
contact for connection to remote monitoring of SPDs protection status. A
durable label with red lettering on a white background with words as stated
below shall be fastened externally on the front cover of the SPDs compartment.
AMARAN
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
7.9
Pemasangan ini dilindungi oleh Surge Protective Device (SPD).
SPD tidak lagi berfungsi apabila “petunjuk” bertukar warna
/ tidak menyala
Sila buat pemeriksaan pada SPD secara bulanan
Sila hubungi ‘orang kompeten’ untuk penggantian SPD.
Pastikan juga ‘circuit breaker’ ke SPD sentiasa berada
dalam keadaan ON (I).
The size of connecting conductors shall be as recommended by the SPD
manufacturer. The connecting conductors shall be as short as possible
(preferably not exceeding 0.5m for the total length) and shall be tightly bound
together throughout the whole length with cable-ties or other approved means.
Either a MCCB or a fuse of rating as recommended by the SPD manufacturer
shall be provided for disconnecting the SPDs from the system in the event of
SPDs failure or for maintenance. In the case where an MCCB is used, the
breaking capacity of the MCCB shall comply with the rated ultimate short circuit
breaking capacity (Icu) for the switchboards and DB respectively. The Ics shall
be 50% of the Icu.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
7.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SURGE PROTECTION DEVICE
Page: S7 - 3 of 3
Location Category
1.2/50 µs (U oc)
Voltage
Generator
8/20 µs (Isc)
Current
Generator
Voltage
Protection Level
(Up)
Maximum
Discharge
Current, Imax
(8/20 μs) per
mode
Main Switchboard
(MSB)
≥ 20 kV
≥ 10 kA
≤ 1800 V
≥ 65 kA
Sub-Switchboard
(SSB) receiving
energy from MSB
located in the
same building
≥ 10 kV
≥ 5 kA
≤ 1500 V
≥ 40 kA
≥ 20 kV
≥ 10 kA
≤ 1800 V
≥ 65 kA
≥ 6 kV
≥ 3 kA
≤ 1200 V
≥ 20 kA
≥ 10 kV
≥ 5 kA
≤ 1500 V
≥ 40 kA
≥ 20 kV
≥ 10 kA
≤ 1500 V
≥ 40 kA
≥ 2 kV
≥ 1 kA
≤ 500 V
≥ 10 kA
SSB receiving
energy from MSB
located in other
building
Distribution Board
(DB) receiving
energy from SSB
located in the
same building
(for cases where
the SSB located in
the same building
with MSB)
Distribution Board
(DB) receiving
energy from SSB
located in the
same building
(for cases where
the SSB located in
other building with
MSB)
DB receiving
energy from the
licensee or
MSB/SSB located
in other building
Socket Outlet or
Terminal
Equipment
Table 7A – SPDs Location Categories
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
8.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
BUSBAR TRUNKINGS
Page: S8 - 1 of 2
8.0
BUSBARS TRUNKINGS
8.1
Busbar Trunkings System (busduct) shall comply with MS IEC 60439-2, preassembled, totally enclosed type and shall be as specified in the Drawings
and/or Bill of Quantities.
8.2
The insulation of the busbars in busduct shall be one of the following types as:8.2.1
8.2.2
8.2.3
8.2.4
Air Insulated
Resin Encapsulated Insulated
Epoxy Insulated
Polyester Film minimum Class B Insulation
8.3
Busbar trunkings shall be suitable for operation on a 400 V, 3 phase, 4 wire,
50Hz. system with solidly earthed neutral. The rated short-time withstand
current, Icw shall be tested for 1 second as specified in MS IEC 60439-1.
8.4
The neutral busbar shall be of the full size as the phase busbars.
8.5
The housing shall be of galvanised sheet steel of not less than 1.5mm
thickness finished with epoxy dry-powder and oven baked enamel grey. Fireresisting barriers shall be included as an integral part of each bus duct length
and fitting. The maximum length of the busduct shall be not more than 3000mm
and the tap-off openings for plug-in units shall be provided at every interval of
not more than 900mm. Unless otherwise specified, the degree of protection
shall be IP42 for indoor installation and IP65 for outdoor installation in
accordance to MS IEC 60529.
8.6
Busbars shall be of hard drawn tinned high conductivity copper to BS EN
13601. The busbar current rating shall not be less than that specified in the
drawing based on current density as per table 8A below. The busbars shall be
fully insulated over its entire length except joint parts and totally enclosed in the
housing. The insulation shall be seamless and also be flame-retardant. Earth
continuity of the busduct shall be provided by continuous length of copper strip
of dimension not less than 25mm x 3mm fitted on both external sides of the
busduct.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
8.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
BUSBAR TRUNKINGS
Page: S8 - 2 of 2
Current Rating (I)
Maximum Allowable
Current density
(A/mm²)
I ≤ 600A
2.67
600A < I ≤ 1800A
2.42
1800A < I ≤ 2000A
2.33
I >2000A
2.0
Table 8A : Current rating and current density for busbar trunking
8.7
The plug-in unit shall be mechanically interlocked with the busway housing to
prevent installation or removal of plug-in unit while the switch in ON position.
Plug-in unit enclosures shall make positive earth connections to the busduct
housing before contacts are made with the busbars.
8.8
Expansion joints shall be provided for every interval of 3000mm at maximum,
and at the end of busduct end box unit shall be provided. Busduct joints shall
have sufficient contact length of adjacent sections so as to provide rigidity and
strength. A spring material shall be used in jointing so as to ensure a constant
contact pressure. All joint units, tee and elbow units, offset and combination
elbow units, flanged end-feed units, expansion joint units and end joint units for
the busduct system installation shall be the type manufactured and supplied by
the same busduct manufacturer.
8.9
The busduct system shall be supported rigidly and adequately by external spring
hangers mounted on channel base. The busduct system shall be supported at
maximum intervals of 3000mm for vertical runs and 1500mm for horizontal runs
so that the busduct will not be in contact with the wall or floor slab surfaces.
The spring hangers shall be supplied by the busduct manufacturer.
8.10
The floor openings and wall openings where busduct passes through shall be
sealed with fire-resisting barrier approved by Jabatan Bomba Dan Penyelamat
Malaysia, according to the appropriate degree of fire resistance.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
9.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SYSTEM OF WIRING
Page: S9 - 1 of 13
9.0
SYSTEM OF WIRING
9.0.1 The system of wiring shall be either surface wiring, concealed wiring, surface
conduit wiring or concealed conduit wiring as indicated in the Drawings and/or Bill
of Quantities. The wiring systems shall comply with MS IEC 60364-5-52. All wiring
shall be run neatly and in an orderly manner. They shall be routed parallel to
building wall and column lines in a coordinated manner with other services. The
wiring throughout shall be on the ‘looping-in system’ and no ‘tee’ or other types of
joints are allowed. No reduction of the strands forming the conductors are allowed
at all terminals. Multi strand conductors with a minimum of 7 strands shall be used.
All strands shall be effectively secured by approved means.
9.0.2 Wiring which are not embedded in concrete or concealed behind plaster shall
be run in an accessible manner on the beams, underside of slabs or below
pipes, ducts, and downdrops shall be run on the surface of columns or walls.
Concealed wiring shall be installed in such a way that plaster can be applied
over their thickness without being subjected to spalling or cracking. Cables
serving different operating voltages and functions shall be segregated.
9.0.3 All cables shall be legibly marked on the external surface with at least the
following elements; Manufacturer’s identification, Voltage designation, Nominal
area of conductor and Standard Numbers. Standard colour coded cable shall
be used for three phase circuit to identify the phase conductors, neutral
conductor and protective conductor respectively. Opening on floor, wall or
partition through which cable, trunking, conduit or other wiring passes through
shall be sealed according to the appropriate degree of fire resistance after the
installation. Chipping and cutting of concrete are not allowed unless otherwise
approved by the S.O.’s Representative.
9.0.4 The Electrical Contractor is required to work in conjunction with the building
contractor for the provision of openings, trenches, core-holes, chases etc. as the
building concreting work progresses. In steel frame structures, the wiring system
shall be rigidly and securely supported and fastened in place onto the structural
steel beams, purlins and columns by fasteners such as clamps, clips, anchors,
straps, hangers, supports or similar fittings. The fasteners shall be designed and
installed as not to damage either to steel structures or wiring system.
9.0.5 The fasteners shall be installed at intervals not exceeding 1000mm, and within
300mm of every outlet box, junction box, device box, cabinet or fitting. Fasteners
shall be of spring steel and/or galvanised steel, and where wires, rods or threaded
rods are used with fasteners, they shall be of rolled carbon steel. The fasteners
shall be finished with zinc coatings to resist rusting. Samples for the fasteners used
shall be submitted to S.O.’s Representative for approval before they are used.
Unless otherwise approved by S.O.’s Representative, no welding on and/or drilling
holes into any members or components of the steel frame structures for the
installation of fasteners are allowed.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
9.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SYSTEM OF WIRING
Page: S9 - 2 of 13
9.1
TYPES OF CABLES
9.1.1 PVC INSULATED PVC SHEATHED CABLE
9.1.1.1 PVC insulated PVC sheathed cables shall be of 300/500V grade to
MS 2112-3 and MS 2112-4 and 600/1000 V grade to MS 274. The
conductors shall be of stranded plain annealed copper to MS 69 and
MS
280. The insulation shall be suitable for continuous operation at a
maximum cable temperature of 70°C and comply with MS 138.
9.1.2
PVC INSULATED CABLE
9.1.2.1 PVC insulated cable shall be of 450/750V grade to MS 2112-3 and
MS 2112-4 and 600/1000V grade to MS 274. The conductors shall be
of stranded plain annealed copper to MS 69 and MS 280. The
insulation shall be suitable for continuous operation at a maximum
cable temperature of 70°C and comply with MS 138.
9.1.3
XLPE/PVC CABLE
9.1.3.1 Cable shall be manufactured and tested in accordance to BS 5467 or
IEC 60502 and shall have high conductivity plain copper stranded
conductors, insulated with cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), suitable
for a voltage of 600/1000V laid together and bedded with extruded
PVC and sheathed with PVC.
9.1.4
ARMOURED CABLE
9.1.4.1 PVC/SWA/PVC CABLE - Cable shall be manufactured and tested in
accordance with MS 274 or BS 6346 and shall have high conductivity
plain copper stranded conductors insulated with PVC suitable for a
voltage of 600/1000V laid together and bedded with PVC, armoured
with galvanised steel wires and sheathed with PVC.
9.1.4.2 XLPE/SWA/PVC CABLE - Cable shall be manufactured and tested in
accordance to BS 5467 or IEC 60502 and shall have high
conductivity plain copper stranded conductors, insulated with crosslinked polyethylene (XLPE), suitable for a voltage of 600/1000V laid
together and bedded with extruded PVC, armoured with galvanised
steel wires and sheathed with PVC.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
9.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SYSTEM OF WIRING
Page: S9 - 3 of 13
9.1.4.3 XLPE/AWA/PVC CABLE - Cable shall be manufactured and tested
in accordance to BS 5467 or IEC 60502 and shall have high
conductivity plain copper stranded conductors, insulated with crosslinked polyethylene (XLPE), suitable for a voltage of 600/1000V laid
together and bedded with extruded PVC, armoured with aluminium
wires and sheathed with PVC.
9.1.5
MINERAL-INSULATED CABLES
9.1.5.1
Mineral-insulated cables shall be manufactured complying with IEC 60702,
IEC 60331 and BS 6387 Category C, W and Z for electrical circuit integrity in
case of fire. The cables shall have been tested to comply with IEC 60332-1
and 60332-3 for flame retardance, and IEC 61034 for smoke obscuration. The
cables shall be halogen free with low organic content and do not release any
corrosive emission when subject to fire conforming to IEC 60754-2. The
cables shall be able to withstand a short circuit temperature of 280°C for 5
seconds. For general lighting and power points final circuits, unless otherwise
specified, cables of 600V insulation grade may be used.
9.1.5.2
For main circuits and major power points, the cables used shall be of 1000
volt insulation grade. They shall be installed strictly in accordance with the
manufacturer's recommendation and instruction. The mineral-insulated cables
shall be as specified:
9.1.5.2.1
Mineral-insulated copper clad sheathed copper conductor
(MICC) cables comprise of pressure packed magnesium oxide
insulation contained within a solid drawn ductile seamless
copper sheath with solid high conductivity copper conductors; or
9.1.5.2.2
Mineral-insulated mineral sheathed copper conductor (MIMS)
cables comprise of multi stranded high conductivity copper
conductors wrapped with layers of glass mica composite tape
flame barrier and be insulated with a non-melt cross linked
mineral insulation and mineral sheathed.
9.1.5.3 Cables installed on walls shall be fixed by means of copper clips or copper
saddles at appropriate spacing. The clips or saddles shall be secured by
means of brass screws. Where cables are installed on cable trays, they shall
be clipped at appropriate spacing by means of copper saddles. The saddles
shall be secured by means of brass bolts and nuts. Where single core cables
are used on multi-phase distribution work, the cables shall be laid on their
phase groups whether flat or trefoil.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
9.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SYSTEM OF WIRING
Page: S9 - 4 of 13
9.1.5.4 Where single core cables pass through ferrous or other magnetic materials,
the area surrounding the cables shall be replaced with non ferrous plate of
appropriate dimensions. Adequate bonding shall be provided where cables
break formation to enter terminating positions. Minimum bending radius shall
be not less than 6 times the cable diameter and saddle spacing not more than
60 times the cable diameter or 500mm whichever is less.
9.1.5.5 Connection to motors, generators, transformers and other similar equipment
shall be by one of the two methods listed below: 9.1.5.5.1
The cable shall be clipped at the appropriate spacing up to a
point adjacent to the equipment and an unsupported
antivibration loop shall be left in the cable.
9.1.5.5.2
The cable shall be glanded into a suitable terminal box adjacent
to the equipment and connection to the equipment being
effected by means of mechanically protected flexible cable of
adequate cross sectional area.
9.1.5.6 For mineral -insulated copper clad sheathed copper conductor (MICC) cables,
termination shall be of cold seal type. Silicon rubber sleeve insulation shall be
used to replace copper sheath stripped off near the termination for temperature
not exceeding 150°C. For temperature exceeding 150°C, varnished glass sleeve
insulation shall be used. Insulation and continuity tests shall be carried out before
and after the cable is terminated. The insulation test reading shall be `infinity'. A
blow lamp may be used for drying out cable ends.
9.1.5.7 If it is impracticable to cut to waste, in which event the cable should be brought to
cherry red heat at about 600mm from the end and moisture driven carefully
towards the cut end. It is absolutely essential that great care shall be taken to
maintain earth continuity when terminating the cables. Dirt and metallic particles
in the compound and any loose traces of dielectric left at face of the sheath after
stripping shall be removed prior to sealing. Cold sealing compound shall be forced
down one side of the pot only until slightly overfilling in order to avoid trapping of
air at the base of the pot and to ensure that when the sealing disc is entered
before crimping a completely solid insulation barrier is effected.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
9.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SYSTEM OF WIRING
Page: S9- 5 of 13
9.1.5.8
All other necessary accessories such as tap-off units, joint boxes, brass
compress ring glands, screw-on brass pots, earth tail seals, coloured
sleeving for phase identification, cone shape beads, fibre disc, brass
locknuts etc. required for the proper installation work, unless otherwise
approved by the S.O.'s Representative, shall be of the type manufactured by
the cable manufacturer.
9.1.5.9
For mineral-insulated mineral sheathed copper conductor (MIMS) cables,
termination shall be metal gland or close fitting metal bush of crimping type.
All other necessary accessories such as tap-off units, joint boxes including
termination kits etc. required for the proper installation work, unless
otherwise approved by the S.O.'s Representative, shall be of the type
manufactured by the cable manufacturer.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
9.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SYSTEM OF WIRING
Page: S9- 6 of 13
9.2
WIRING IN CONDUIT/TRUNKING (SURFACE OR CONCEALED)
9.2.1 The cables used in conduit wiring, unless otherwise specified shall be similar to
that described in 9.1.2 above. Unless otherwise specified in the Drawings
and/or Bill of Quantities, the conduits shall be of galvanised steel and conduit
fittings shall be of galvanised steel or alloy materials. Cables above false
ceiling shall be run in conduit or trunking.
9.2.2 The conduit shall generally be run on the underside of the floor slab or
suspended from the floor slabs by mild steel brackets or suspenders. The
trunking shall be suspended from the floor slabs or mounted against the wall by
mild steel brackets. The mild steel brackets shall be anti-rust treated, painted
with a primer and finished in an orange enamel. The suspension structure shall
be robust in constructions and adequately installed such that the
conduit/trunking will not sag.
9.2.3
Conduit for lighting point shall be terminated in a junction box complete with
die-cast cone-shaped metal cover so that downdrop to luminaire shall be
carried out through flexible steel conduit up to the luminaire. Ceiling fan points
shall be run in the similar way. Flexible conduit shall be used for termination to
equipment, which are subjected to movement or vibration. However, the length
of this flexible conduit shall not exceed 400mm unless approved by the S.O.’s
Representative.
9.2.4
For concealed conduit wiring, a spare conduit shall be provided from the
distribution board to the ceiling space for future extension. The spare conduit
shall be plugged at the ceiling end with removable plug. The number of cables
drawn into the conduit or laid in trunking shall be such that the ratio of the sum
of the overall cross-sectional areas of the cables (including insulation and any
sheath) to the internal cross-sectional area of the conduit or trunking in which
they are installed shall not exceed 40% for conduit and 45% for trunking
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
9.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SYSTEM OF WIRING
Page: S9- 7 of 13
9.3
METALLIC AND NON-METALLIC CONDUITS
9.3.1 Steel conduits shall be of galvanised, heavy gauge, screwed type complying
with MS 275-1, MS 1534:PT.1, MS 1534:PT.2:Sec1, IEC 60423, IEC 61386-1
and IEC 61386-21. All steel conduit fittings shall comply with MS 275-2, MS
1534:PT.1, MS 1534:PT.2:Sec1, IEC 61035-1, IEC 61035-2-1, IEC 61386-1
and IEC 6138621. The steel conduits shall be fitted with brass bushes at the free ends and
expansion devices at appropriate intervals. The ends of each length of steel
conduit shall be properly reamed. The termination to the distribution boards,
consumer units, switchgears and outlet boxes shall be effected by brass type
smooth-bore bushes. All steel conduits shall be effectively earthed.
9.3.2 For laying underground, steel conduit shall be used and buried at a minimum
depth of 450mm below ground level or 100mm below floor slab or
hardstanding. Junction boxes, outlet boxes etc. shall be alloy material or cast
iron. The covers shall be galvanised sheet steel or alloy material with thickness
not less than 1.2mm. Accessories such as junction boxes downdropping to
luminaires shall have diecast cone-shaped metal cover.
9.3.3 For non-metallic conduits and fittings, they shall be of rigid high impact PVC
grade Heavy Duty Code No 4421 and shall be under Product Certification
Scheme. The colour of the conduit for concealed wiring shall be of orange.
Unless otherwise for purposes of identification or distinguishing from another
services, white coloured conduit shall be used for surface wiring. Rigid high
impact PVC conduits shall comply with MS 1534:PT.1, MS 1534:PT2:Sec1,
IEC 60614-1, IEC 60614-2-2, IEC 60423, BS EN 61386-2, BS EN 50086-1 and
fittings shall comply with MS 1534:PT.1, MS 1534:PT2:Sec1., IEC 61035-1 and
IEC 61035-2-2.
9.3.4 All fittings and accessories for the rigid high impact PVC conduits shall be
made and supplied by the same manufacturer for the rigid high impact PVC
conduit. The ends of each length of rigid high impact PVC conduit shall be
properly reamed. The termination to the distribution boards (metalclad and all
insulated), switchgears and outlet boxes shall be effected by adaptors and
lock-rings. Flexible metallic and non-metallic conduits shall comply with MS
1534:PT.1, MS 1534:PT2:Sec1, IEC 60614-1, IEC 60614-2-5 and its fittings
complying with MS
1534:PT.1, MS 1534:PT2:Sec1, IEC 61035-1 and IEC 61035-2- 3.
9.3.5 The conduits shall be fixed by means of saddles secured rigidly at intervals not
exceeding 750mm, and within 300mm of every outlet box, junction box, device
box, cabinet or fitting. Steel saddles shall be used for steel conduits. Unless
otherwise specified, steel conduits and steel fittings shall be used.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
9.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SYSTEM OF WIRING
Page: S9- 8 of 13
9.4
CABLE TRUNKING
9.4.1 Cable trunking system shall comply with MS IEC 61084. They shall be
fabricated from galvanised sheet steel (electrogalvanised steel and/or hot
dipped galvanized steel) and finished with epoxy oven baked or two coats of
standard orange enamel. They shall be equipped with removable covers at
suitable intervals. They shall be supplied in lengths to suit the installation and
shall have the minimum wall thickness as per Table 9A: NOMINAL SIZE (mm x mm)
MINIMUM WALL THICKNESS (mm)
50 x 50 and below
1. 0
75 x 50 to 100 x 100
1. 2
150 x 50 to 300 x 150
1.6
Table 9A: Size and thickness for cable trunking
9.4.2 All trunking elbows, offset and combination elbows, adaptors and tees shall be of
same thickness as the straight trunking and shall be the type manufactured and
supplied by the same trunking manufacturer. The trunking shall be supported by
fixing brackets so that the trunking will not be in contact with the walls or floor
slabs. The brackets shall be installed at intervals not greater than 1500mm for
vertical runs and not greater than 1000mm for horizontal runs. The brackets shall
be derusted, finished in a primer and coated with standard orange enamel.
9.4.3 Wherever the trunking passes through a floor or a fire resistant wall, fire
resisting barrier shall be provided. At these positions the cables shall be sealed
with non-hygroscopic fire resisting material of minimum 2-hour fire rating. In
addition, the floor openings and wall openings shall be sealed with similar type
of compound. Cables running in the trunking shall carry conductor identification
colours and shall be supported by split hard wood racks securely fixed at the
base of the trunking and spaced not more than 600mm apart.
9.4.4 Cables for each final circuit shall be properly bunched together and labelled.
Where conduit is tapped off from the trunking, suitable brass type smoothbore
bushes shall be fitted at all conduit termination. Unless otherwise specified, all
trunkings shall have either tinned copper tape of dimension not less than
25mmx3mm as circuit protective conductor or earth cable of appropriate size.
In the latter case, all trunking joints shall be bridged by means of tinned copper
tape of dimension not less than 25mm x 3mm.
9.4.5 For colour code identification bands can refer to table 9B of 9.7.2.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
9.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SYSTEM OF WIRING
Page: S9 - 9 of 13
9.5
CABLE TRAY
9.5.1 Cable tray system shall comply with MS IEC 61537 and shall be fabricated from
perforated galvanised sheet steel complete with all necessary bends, tee pieces,
adaptors and other accessories. The minimum thickness of the sheet steel shall be
1.5mm for cable trays with widths up to and including 300mm and 2.0mm for cable
trays with width exceeding 300mm. However minimum thickness for the sheet steel
of the perforated hot dipped galvanised cable trays shall be 2.0mm. Cable trays
may either be suspended from floor slabs by hangers or mounted on walls or
vertical structure by brackets at 600mm intervals.
9.5.2 However where the above methods of installation are not feasible or practical,
suitable floor mounted mild steel structures shall be provided. All supports,
hangers and structures shall be robust in construction and adequately installed
to cater for the weights of the cables and trays supported on them so that cable
trays and cables will not sag. All supports, hangers, bracket and structures
shall be antirusted, finished in primer and coated with standard orange enamel.
9.5.3 All supports, hangers, bracket and structure for the perforated hot dipped
galvanised cable trays shall also be of hot dipped galvanised type. Fixing clips
and cleats for cables on trays shall be installed by means of bolts,washers and
nuts.
9.5.4 All tees, intersection units, adaptor units etc. shall be the type manufactured by
the cable tray manufacturer unless otherwise approved by the S.O.'s
Representative. Wherever cable tray pass through a floor or a fire resistant
wall, fire-resisting barrier as mentioned in 9.4.3 above shall be provided.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
9.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SYSTEM OF WIRING
Page: S9 - 10 of 13
9.6
CABLE LADDER
9.6.1 Cable ladder system shall comply with MS IEC 61537 and fabricated from mild
steel and finished in hot-dipped galvanised complete with all necessary horizontal
elbow, horizontal tee, horizontal cross, reducer straight, outside riser, inside riser,
reducer left, reducer right, cable clamp, cantilever arm, hold down clip/clamp,
hanger bar, vertical splice plate and horizontal splice plate for welded type and
screwed type. The minimum thickness of the sheet steel shall be 2.0mm.
9.6.2 Cable ladder may either be suspended from floor slabs by hangers or mounted on
walls or vertical structure by cantilever arm. Cable ladder shall be supported rigidly
and adequately by external spring hangers mounted on channel base. The cable
ladder shall be supported at maximum intervals of 3000mm for vertical runs and
1500mm for horizontal runs so that the cable ladder will not be in contact with the
wall or floor slab surfaces. The spring hangers shall be supplied by the cable
ladder manufacturer. All supports, hangers and structures shall be robust in
construction and adequately installed to cater for the weights of the cables and
ladder supported on them so that cable ladder and cables will not sag.
9.6.3 Rungs shall be spaced at 300mm nominal centres, welded to the rail sections
by approved welding procedures. All rungs shall be perforated in accordance to
the manufacturer’s design.
9.6.4 The cable ladders shall be supplied fully assembled with preparations for
connections to straight sections or accessories using splice plates
mechanically bolted together. Allowance shall be provided for longitutional
adjustments and expansion. The cable ladders when completed shall be
smooth, free from all sharp edges and shall be capable of discharging any
water that may be retained due to normal weathering.
9.6.5 All accessories shall be the type manufactured by the cable ladder
manufacturer unless otherwise approved by the S.O.'s Representative.
Wherever cable ladder pass through a floor or a fire resistant wall, fire-resisting
barrier as mentioned in 9.4.3 above shall be provided.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
9.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SYSTEM OF WIRING
Page: S9 - 11 of 13
9.7
IDENTIFICATION OF PIPELINES AND SERVICES
9.7.1 Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, basic colours for the identification of
electrical conduits and trunkings and their coverings from other pipelines or
services shall be orange for electrical services in compliance with BS 1710. For
Extra Low Voltage Electrical Services, colour code indication band shall be
provided. The basic identification colour shall be applied by painting over the
whole length of the conduits and trunkings and their coverings.
9.7.2 However, if decorative colour white or other decorative colour is used for
exposed electrical conduits and trunkings and their coverings as specified
and/or as directed by S.O.’s Representative, then orange colour identification
band shall be provided. In addition, for all Extra Low Voltage Electrical Services
and Information Communication Technology (ICT) works, colour code
indication bands shall be provided as in the Table 9B below.
Conduit / Trunking
Contents
Public Address / Sound
Reinforced System
Intercom System
Nurse Call / Digital Call
System
MATV / CCTV System
Building Automation
/
Security System
Audio Video / Data /
Multimedia Link System
Information
Communication
Technology (ICT)
Telephone System
Basic
Identification
Colour Band
(Approx. 150
mm)
Colour Code
Indication Band
(Approx. 100mm)
Orange
Crimson
Orange
Emerald Green
Orange
Salmon Pink
Orange
Yellow
Orange
Blue
Orange
White / Emerald
Green / white
White
White
White
Green
Table 9B : Colour Code Indications For Extra Low Voltage Electrical
Services And Information Communication Technology (ICT)
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
9.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SYSTEM OF WIRING
Page: S9 - 12 of 13
9.7.3 Colour identification bands shall be provided on the conduits and trunkings and
their coverings as a band over a length of approximately 150mm. The bands
shall comply to table 9B.
9.7.4 The colour identification bands and colour code indication bands shall be
applied by painting or adhesive colour bands at intervals not more than
1000mm along the conduits and trunkings and their coverings. They shall be
provided at junctions, both sides of service appliance, wall/floor penetration and
any other place where identification is required and necessary.
The colour reference to BS 4800 shall be as in Table 9C below.
Colour
Orange
White
Crimson
Emerald Green
Salmon Pink
Yellow
Blue
Colour Reference (BS 4800)
06 E 51
00 E 55
04 D 45
14 E 53
04 C 33
10 E 53
18 E 51
Table 9C: Colour Reference
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
9.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SYSTEM OF WIRING
Page: S9 - 13 of 13
9.8
MOUNTING HEIGHTS
9.8.1 Mounting heights listed below shall be measured from the underside of the
fitting to the finished floor level. Unless otherwise specified or directed on site
by the S.O.’s Representative, heights of fixing shall be as in Table 9D below: Type of Fitting
Mounting Height
(mm)
Suspended ceiling luminaires and ceiling fans
2400
Wall mounted luminaires and wall bracket fans
2050
Switches and fan regulators
1450
Socket outlets (for surface wiring), and those in
the kitchen and washing areas (for concealed
1450
wiring)
Socket outlets (for concealed wiring)
300
Isolator points
1450
Window unit air conditioner switches and
1450
starters
Cooker points
1450
Water heater outlet points.
1450
Distribution boards (in service duct)
1450
Distribution boards(other than in service duct)
2050
Table 9D: Mounting Height
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
10.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
WIRING ACCESSORIES
Page: S10 - 1 of 4
10.0
WIRING ACCESSORIES
10.1
SWITCHES AND SWITCH PLATES
10.1.1
All lighting switches and fan switches shall comply with MS 616 and MS IEC
60669-1 and generally be flush type. All ceiling mounted cord operated
switches shall be completed with mounting block comply with MS IEC 606691.
10.1.2
All switches shall be suitable for use in inductive circuit. Unless otherwise
specified in the Drawings and/or Bill of Quantities, they shall be rated at 10A.
Samples of switches shall be submitted for approval prior to installation.
10.1.3
Switches for lighting and fans shall generally be grouped as shown in the
Drawings. Where several switches are grouped together, grid switches shall
be used unless otherwise directed by the S.O.'s Representative. Each group
shall be of different phase and separated according to the supply source. All
groups appropriately labelled.
10.1.4
Refer Table 10A below for colour scheme.
10.1.5
In areas where plate switches cannot be used, ceiling mounted cord operated
switches or architrave switches shall be provided as directed by the S.O.'s
Representative.
10.1.6
Maximum allowable number of switches for switch plate of size 85mm x
85mm is four (4) and maximum allowable number of switches for switch plate
of size 85mm x 140mm is eight (8). Brand name and model shall be
embossed at the front part of the switch plate.
10.1.7
For switches with built-in indicator light, the wiring for indicator light shall be
permanently terminated and shall not used the terminal for clamping external
conductors.
10.1.8
The positions of all switches shown in the Drawings are only approximate.
The Electrical Contractor should check the exact positions of the switches
with the S.O.’s Representative, and confirm the arrangement of all door
swings and other fixtures before installing downdrops and switches.
10.1.9
The circuit protective conductor of the circuit shall terminate directly at the
earth terminal of the mounting box (back box).
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
10.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
WIRING ACCESSORIES
Page: S10 - 2 of 4
Connected From
Switched
Socket
Outlets And
Switches
Unswitched
Socket
Outlets
Normal
Generator Set
UPS
Rocker
White
Yellow
Red
Face Plate
White
White
White
Face Plate
White
Yellow
Red
Table 10A: Colour Scheme for Switches and Socket Outlet
10.2
SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS AND UNSWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS
10.2.1 Switched socket outlets shall be shuttered, two pole or single pole switch and
earthing pin type. They shall be of flush type. Both 13A switched and unswitched
socket outlet shall be of the rectangular pin type complying with MS 589.
10.2.2 15A switched socket outlets and unswitched socket outlets shall be of round pin
type and comply with MS 1577.
10.2.3 Circuit protective conductor of the circuit shall terminate directly at the box used
for mounting switched socket outlet and unswitched socket outlet.
10.2.4 Refer Table 10A for colour scheme.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
10.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
WIRING ACCESSORIES
Page: S10 - 3 of 4
10.3
BOXES FOR SWITCHES, SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS, UNSWITCHED
SOCKET OUTLETS AND DISTRIBUTION BOARDS (BOX AND
ENCLOSURE FOR ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES)
10.3.1 Generally the boxes shall comply with MS 1873, IEC 60670-1, MS 589 and /or
MS 616.
10.3.2 Unless otherwise specified, boxes used for mounting switch plates, switched
socket outlets and unswitched socket outlets in concealed conduit wiring shall
be metalclad type of minimum 0.8mm thick galvanised sheet steel. Earth
terminal complete with cable lug and brass screw shall be provided. Cable for
bonding the box to switch, switched socket outlet and unswitched socket outlet
shall be the same size as the circuit protective conductor.
10.3.3 For surface conduit wiring, boxes for switches, switched socket outlets and
unswitched socket outlets shall be of the type manufactured and supplied by
the manufacturer of the switch plates, switched socket outlets and unswitched
socket outlets respectively.
10.3.4 Switch plates, switched socket outlet and unswitched socket outlets shall be
fixed to the boxes by means of original flat base chrome screws.
10.3.5 The installations of Distribution Boards on the walls (as classified according to
some parts of MS 1873, IEC 60670-1) shall comply with MS 1873 Part 24, IEC
60670-24. Flushed adaptable metal back box of minimum size 200mm(W) x
100mm(H) x 35mm(D) shall be installed recessed behind Distribution Boards
for rewirebility.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
10.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
WIRING ACCESSORIES
Page: S10 - 4 of 4
10.4
CEILING ROSES
10.4.1 Ceiling Roses shall comply with MS 770. They shall be either surface of semirecess type with the base having a minimum of three knockouts for cable
entries. The base shall incorporate clearly labelled clamp type terminals
suitable for holding phase, neutral, earth and loop-in cables in a distinct
manner. The cover plates shall be of the screw-in type. The base and cover
shall be moulded non-track urea to BS 1322.
10.5
LAMPHOLDERS AND BATTENHOLDERS
10.5.1 Lampholders and battenholders shall comply with MS 769, MS IEC 60838, and
MS IEC 61184. They shall be supplied complete with brass plunger and heat
resisting springs to ensure that plunger pressure is maintained throughout the
long life of the lampholders and battenholders. Cordgrip shall be provided to
cover the exposed ends of cord sheathing and firmly grips the cord. Batten
holders shall be of three clearly labelled terminal type. Edison screw
lampholders shall comply with MS IEC 60238.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11 - 1 of 18
11.0 LUMINAIRES
11.0.1 The luminaires together with lamp, lamp holders, control gear and other
associated accessories shall, as a minimum requirement, conform to the
relevant parts and/or sections of MS IEC 60598.
11.0.2 All luminaires shall be fully assembled, completed with lamp, control gear,
internal wiring etc.. Internal wires shall be terminated in terminal blocks in an
approved manner. Wiring shall be of heat resistant insulated coloured cables.
The terminal blocks shall be suitably rated and clearly labeled for connection to
external wiring.
11.0.3 All metal parts of the luminaires shall be effectively earthed and supplied with
an approved earth terminal.
11.0.4 All components of the luminaires shall be able to withstand a voltage range of
+10% to -6% of the rated voltage.
11.0.5 All discharge type luminaires shall be power factor corrected to at least 0.9
lagging using dry type capacitor.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11 - 2 of 18
11.1
FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES
11.1.1
TUBULAR TYPE FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES
11.1.1.1
Fluorescent luminaires shall be of the type approved by Suruhanjaya Tenaga
and JKR.
11.1.1.2
Fluorescent luminaires shall comply with MS IEC 60598-1 and MS IEC
60598-2-1 or MS IEC 60598-2-2.
11.1.1.3
Fluorescent luminaires shall have housing made from good quality mild steel
sheet of minimum thickness 0.50 mm and shall be of sound and rigid
construction suitable for suspended and surfaced mounted installation. The
metalwork shall be rust inhibited to prevent corrosion and, unless otherwise
approved by the S.O.'s Representative, shall be sprayed with an undercoat of
zinc chromate primer and finished with two coatings of super white baked
enamel.
11.1.1.4
Wiring within the luminaire shall be carried out with heat resistant cable
o
marked with the word “HR 105 C ‟. It shall be done in a neat way with
holder to hold the cable in position and also to avoid contact with heat
producing components. Cables shall be terminated in a termination block
marked ”L‟ and “N‟ for connection to the incoming wires. A brass direct
pressure type earth terminal shall be provided in the casing near the
termination block for earth connection. This earth terminal shall be clearly
marked with the standard earth terminal symbol.
11.1.1.5
All components in the luminaire shall be guaranteed for a minimum of 2000
hour life. All components in the fluorescent luminaires shall be manufactured
by the manufacturer or being supplied by others. The components shall be
marked with “made for” if supplied by other manufacturer except
high frequency electronics ballast if specified, fluorescent tube, starter,
cable and holders for fluorescent tube and starter. The components shall
be of the type approved by Suruhanjaya Tenaga and JKR.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11- 3 of 18
11.1.1.(a) TUBULAR TYPE FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES T8 (FD 26)
11.1.1.(a).i The electromagnetic ballast shall comply with MS IEC 61347-1,
MS IEC 61347-2-8 and MS 141:PT.2. The ballast shall be of the
type approved by Suruhanjaya Tenaga and JKR. Unless
otherwise specified, they shall be polyester resin impregnated,
silent operation type fitted with terminal block for easy wiring.
For 18 watts and 36 watts fluorescent tubes, the watt loss of
the ballast shall be 6 watts. The mounting of the ballast shall
be in such a way that easy dismantling and replacement can
be effected within the casing.
11.1.1.(a).ii The fluorescent luminaires shall be power factor corrected to
at least 0.9 lagging.
11.1.1.(a).iii The capacitor shall comply with MS IEC 61048 and MS IEC
61049 and shall be of dry, self-healing, aluminium metalised
polypropylene type. Proper tool clip shall be provided to hold
the capacitor in position.
11.1.1.(a).iv The starter shall comply with MS IEC 60155 and the starter
holders comply with MS IEC 60400. For the single channel
luminaires, the starter shall be fitted at the side of the casing.
In cases where starters are to be fitted from the outside of the
luminaire casing, the starter holders shall be installed in such a
way that the starters shall not protrude out of the casing by
more than 10mm.
11.1.1.(a).v In the case where high frequency electronics ballast is
specified, the ballast shall be of type approved by Suruhanjaya
Tenaga and JKR. The ballast shall comply to MS IEC 61347-1,
MS IEC 61347-2-3 and MS IEC 60929, BS EN 55015 for radio
frequency interference suppression and MS IEC 61000-3-2 for
harmonics distortion. They shall be of preheat start, nondimming, low in-rush starting current and low leakage current
type. Rated maximum operating temperature of a ballast case
o
shall not exceed 70 C. The Ballast shall be rated a minimum
Energy Efficiency Index Classification (EEI) of A2 as per
CELMA/ELC Guide.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11- 4 of 18
11.1.1.(a).vi Harmonics distortion shall be within the limits in accordance
with MS IEC 61000-3-2. However, total harmonics distortion
shall be less than 25% where third harmonics component
shall not be more than 15%.The ballast shall operate and
maintain consistent light output over voltage variation from 10% to +5% of the rated voltage and power factor of not less
than 0.95. Overvoltage protection at 350 volts and automatic
shutdown in the event of lamp failure shall also be
incorporated. The electronic ballast shall have five year
warranty from the manufacturer.
11.1.1.(a).vii The lamp holders shall comply with MS IEC 60400 of robust
and well designed construction suitable for bi-pin fluorescent
tubes. The lamp holders shall be made of polycarbonate
material. Lamp holders for use with electronic ballast shall be
rated minimum 500V or higher than U-out rating of electronic
ballast, (whichever is higher).
11.1.1.(a).viii All fluorescent tube shall be provided with its own ballast
(except for electronic ballast).
11.1.1.(a).ix Louvres and reflectors for the luminaires shall be made of
high purity anodized aluminium with at least 99.85% pure
aluminium with no iridescent mirror finished. The thickness of
the reflector shall be minimum 0.4mm and total light reflection
of reflector shall be minimum 86%.
11.1.1.(a).x
The prismatic and opal diffuser shall be made of Ultra Violet
(UV) stabilised Flame Retardant Polyethylene Terephtalate
Glycol (PETG) or minimum UV-stabilised flame retardant
material.
11.1.1.(a).xi Louvres, reflectors and diffusers shall give good even light
distribution with minimal glare in both the axial and transverse
planes. Photometric data for the luminaires shall be made
available and submitted to S.O.‟s Representatives when
required.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11- 5 of 18
11.1.1.(b) TUBULAR TYPE FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES T5 (FDH 16)
11.1.1.(b).i The high frequency electronics ballast shall be of type approved
by Suruhanjaya Tenaga and JKR. The ballast shall comply to
MS IEC 61347-1, MS IEC 61347-2-3 and MS IEC 60929, BS
EN 55015 for radio frequency interference suppression and MS
IEC 61000-3-2 for harmonics distortion. They shall be of
preheat start, non-dimming, low in-rush starting current and low
leakage current type. Rated maximum operating temperature of
o
a ballast case shall not exceed 70 C. The Ballast shall be rated
a minimum Energy Efficiency Index Classification (EEI) of A2 as
per CELMA/ELC Guide.
11.1.1.(b).ii
Harmonics distortion shall be within the limits in accordance
with MS IEC 61000-3-2. However, total harmonics distortion
shall be less than 25% where third harmonics component shall
not be more than 15%.The ballast shall operate and maintain
consistent light output over voltage variation from -10% to +5%
of the rated voltage and power factor of not less than 0.95.
Overvoltage protection at 350 volts and automatic shutdown in
the event of lamp failure shall also be incorporated. The
electronic ballast shall have five year warranty from the
manufacturer.
11.1.1.(b).iii The lampholders shall comply with MS IEC 60400 of robust and
well designed construction suitable for bi -pin fluorescent tubes.
The lamp holders shall be made of polycarbonate material.
Lamp holders shall be rated minimum 500V or higher than U-out
rating of electronic ballast, (whichever is higher).
11.1.1.(b).iv Louvres and reflectors for the luminaires shall be made of
high purity anodized aluminium with at least 99.85% pure
aluminium with no iridescent mirror finished. The thickness of
the reflector shall be minimum 0.4mm and total light reflection
of reflector shall be minimum 90%.
11.1.1.(b).v The prismatic and opal diffuser shall be made of Ultra Violet
(UV) stabilised Flame Retardant Polyethylene Terephtalate
Glycol (PETG) or minimum UV-stabilised flame retardant
material.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11- 6 of 18
11.1.1.(b).vi Louvres, reflectors and
diffusers shall give good
even light distribution with
minimal glare in both the
axial
and transverse planes. Photometric data for the
luminaires shall be made available and submitted to
S.O.‟s Representatives when required. For luminaires T5
cross louvre type, the Light Output Ratio (LOR) shall be
minimum 80%.
11.1.2
DOWNLIGHT TYPE COMPACT FLUORESCENT LUMINAIRES
11.1.2.1 The luminaires shall be of type approved by JKR. The luminaires shall
comply with MS IEC 60598 and relevant part of IEC 60598 or equivalent.
11.1.2.2 The luminaires shall have two separate components comprising of an
electrical control gear and optical systems. The construction of the
luminaires shall be either in two separate housing/compartment or integral.
11.1.2.3 Electrical control gear system comprises of ballast, capacitor etc. The optical
system shall incorporate a one piece full bowl reflector, lamp holder(s) etc.
Luminaires shall have either horizontal or vertical pin type lamp connection.
11.1.2.4 The housing of the control gear system shall be made from extruded
aluminium or good quality mild steel sheet of thickness not less than 0.8
mm and shall be of sound and rigid construction suitable for suspended
installation. The metalwork shall be rust inhibited to prevent corrosion. The
housing of the control gear system shall be coated by electrostatic powder.
The housing shall be provided with a mean to dissipate heat. Rubber
grommets shall be provided at cable entry.
11.1.2.5 Wiring within the control gear system shall be carried out with heat
o
resistant cable marked with the word 'HR 105 C’. It shall be done in a neat
way with holder to avoid contact with heat-producing components. Cables
shall be terminated in a termination block marked ‘L’ and ‘N’ for connection
to the incoming wires. A brass direct pressure type earth terminal shall be
provided in the control gear near the termination block for earth connection.
This earth terminal shall be clearly marked with the standard earth terminal
o
symbol. The HR 105 C cable shall be used to connect the optical system
and the control gear system. It shall not be more than 300mm long. The
o
cables shall be enclosed in a cable sleeve HR 105 C.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11- 7 of 18
11.1.2.6
11.1.2.5.1
Electrical connection and disconnection of the control gear
system from the incoming supply cables and optical system
shall be through a plug & socket/connection unit. It shall be
made from flame retardant material. The plug & socket shall
be rated at 10A. A conduits fitting that terminates the flexible
conduit to the lamp control gear shall be provided. The cable
clamp arrangement shall not damage the insulation of the
cables.
11.1.2.5.2
The manufacturer shall provide installation instruction for each
model of the luminaries by means of hook or other suitable
method.
The reflector shall be made of high purity anodized aluminium with at least
99.85% pure aluminium with no iridescent mirror finished (e.g. polished
aluminium). The thickness of the reflector shall be minimum 0.5 mm. The
support shall be made from mild steel with minimum thickness of 1.3
mm. The ring shall be made from die-cast aluminium with minimum thickness
of 1.3 mm. The support and ring shall be coated by electrostatic powder. The
clip shall be made from stainless steel. For horizontal lamp connection, the
diameter of the reflector shall be large enough for easy relamping of lamps.
11.1.2.6.1 Photometric data for the luminaires shall be made available
and submitted to S.O.’s Representatives when required. The
required photometric data for the luminaires shall be Polar
Curve, Utilization Factors, Luminance Distribution Table,
Downward Light Output Ratio, Upward Light Output Ratio,
Light Output Ratio, Spacing to Mounting Height Ratio and
Threshold Increment.
11.1.2.6.2
11.1.2.7
Light Output Ratio for the luminaires shall be minimum 70%.
The lamp holder shall be G24 type for the 10W/13W/18W/26W compact
fluorescent lamp (CFL) without integral control gear. The lamp holder shall
comply with MS IEC 60400, made to fit individual lamp wattage and not
interchangeable. The lampholder shall be made of non-metallic, heat
resistant material and be rigidly fixed onto the optical compartment. The
lampholder shall be incorporated with a housing made from extruded
aluminium or good quality mild steel sheet or aluminium die cast with a
mechanism to dissipate heat (heat sink).
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11- 8 of 18
11.1.2.8
The ballast shall comply with MS IEC 61347-1, MS IEC 61347-2-8 and MS 141:
PT.2 and shall be of the type approved by Suruhanjaya Tenaga and JKR. The
ballast shall be polyester resin impregnated, silent operation type fitted with
terminal block for easy wiring. The watt loss for the ballast shall be 6W.
11.1.2.8.1
11.1.2.9
For electronic ballast refer to 11.1.1.(a).v
The capacitor shall comply with MS IEC 61048 and MS IEC 61049 and of
type approved by Suruhanjaya Tenaga and JKR. The capacitor shall be
cylinder shape type. The capacitor shall be dry, self healing, metalised
polypropylene type with terminal block for easy wiring.The casing shall be
made from aluminium or flame retardant plastic. The capacitor shall be
mounted with nut and lock washer.
11.1.2.10 All components in the fluorescent luminaires shall be manufactured by the
manufacturer or being supplied by others. The components shall be marked
with “made for” if supplied by other manufacturer except high frequency
electronics ballast if specified, compact fluorescent lamp, cable and holders
for compact fluorescent lamp. The components shall be of the type
approved by Suruhanjaya Tenaga and JKR.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11 - 9 of 18
11.2 SELF CONTAINED LUMINAIRES
11.2.1 Self-contained emergency luminaires shall comply with MS 619 and IEC 605982-22 and approved by Jabatan Bomba Dan Penyelamat Malaysia and JKR.
11.2.2 The body shall be made from good quality mild steel sheet, aluminum extrusions or
injection moulded flame retardant material. For mild steel sheet, shall be rust
inhibited to prevent corrosion. The body shall be sprayed with an undercoat of zinc
chromate primer and finished with two coatings of super white baked enamel.
11.2.3 The diffuser shall be of flame retardant type. The material for the diffuser shall
be of either polycarbonate or prismatic Polyethylene Terephthalate Glycol
(PETG) or equivalent.
11.2.4 The luminaires shall be equipped with maintenance-free high temperature
rated sealed nickel cadmium battery, solid state automatic charger, changeover
device, fluorescent lamp, indicator lamp, test switch and interior disconnecting
device i.e. fuse, relay or other protective device. Other types of battery shall be
allowed provided they conform to their relevant safety and performance
standard and the relevant requirement of MS 619 and IEC 60598-2-22.
11.2.5 The battery shall be fully rechargeable to its operational capacity in not more than
24 hours after discharge. Low volt cut-off safety feature shall be incorporated to
prevent over discharge of battery. The response time for non-maintained
emergency luminaires shall be 2 second upon failure of the normal lighting.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11 - 10 of 18
11.2.6 Unless otherwise specified, the fluorescent tube shall be 8 watt with minimum
output of 330 lumen. The duration for emergency operation shall not be less
than 3 hours. The initial lumen output of the self-contained emergency
luminaires at changeover from normal to emergency mode shall be not less
than 25% of the nominal lumen output of the fluorescent tube. The lumen
output at the end of the rated duration shall be minimum 10% of the nominal
lumen output of the fluorescent tube.
11.2.7 The self contained emergency luminaires with “KELUAR” signage pictogram
shall be of the maintained 3 hours rating type as specified above, complying
with relevant part of MS 983, MS 619 and IEC 60598-2-22 and approved by
Jabatan Bomba Dan Penyelamat Malaysia and JKR. The lamp shall be of 2
fluorescent tubes type or minimum 10 units of super bright white LEDs. The
diffuser shall be of flame retardant type. The material for the diffuser shall be of
either polycarbonate or prismatic PETG or equivalent. The lettering and
directional arrow shall be white on green background.
11.2.8 The LED shall face downward to provide uniform light distribution via the
transparent acrylic on “KELUAR” signage pictogram and to provide courtesy
light source at the floor level for increase safety. The LED shall comply to the
following characteristics:
Module Type
Characteristics
Dot Matrix
Operating Voltage
230V (+10%, -6%), 50Hz +1%
Power Factor
≥ 0.90
Total Harmonic Distortion
≤ 20 %
Power
8 W – 10 W (Typical : 10 W)
Intensity
200cd – 800cd
LED type
5 mm (AlInGaP, InGaN)
LED Mounting Technology Through holes
Chromaticity Coordinates
White
Green
(x , y) as on CIE chart
0.361 , 0.385
0.009 , 0.720
0.264 , 0.267
0.284 , 0.520
0.280 , 0.250
0.209 , 0.400
0.356 , 0.350
0.028 , 0.400
Table 11A: Electrical Characteristics of LED signal module
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11 - 11 of 18
11.3
LED LUMINAIRES
11.3.1.
DOWNLIGHT TYPE LED LUMINAIRES
11.3.1.1. The luminaires shall be of type approved by Suruhanjaya Tenaga (ST).
11.3.1.2. The luminaires shall comply with the relevant
Malaysian Standards or
IEC Standards and other relevant standards in terms of safety and
performance criteria. The luminaires shall comply to MS IEC 60598 Series,
IES LM-79-08,
IES LM-80-08, MS 62722-2-1, MS IEC 62031, IEC 62471,
IEC 61547, MS IEC 61000-3-2 and BS EN 55015 / CISPR 15.
11.3.1.3. The luminaires shall be designed and constructed that it is capable of
providing the service for which is intended.
It shall be manufactured under
“Lighting Class LED” and shall be commercially available.
11.3.1.4. The LED luminaires shall be new and complete with LED control gear (LED
driver), thermal management unit, surge and overvoltage protection and
suitable for supply voltage of 230 V, +10%, -6% at 50 Hz. The LED luminaire
shall consist of two separate components
comprising of LED control gear
and optical system.
11.3.1.4.1 The construction of the luminaires shall be of either two
separate housing / compartments or integrated.
11.3.1.4.2 The luminaire shall be shined downwards to provide uniform light
distribution and it shall have adequate heat sink for heat
dissipation / thermal management.
11.3.1.4.3 All components of the luminaires shall operate well within the
ratings with due consideration for the local conditions (high
humidity of 95% RH and ambient temperature of 35°C).
11.3.1.4.4 Interchangeability of consumable components is preferred for
maintenance purposes.
11.3.1.4.5 The luminaires in mode of operation shall not produce voltage
disturbance / fluctuation to the electrical supply system.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11 - 12 of 18
11.3.1.4.6 The housing of the LED control gear and optical system shall
be of sound and rigid construction suitable for suspended
installation. A means of connecting the flexible GS conduit to
the lamp control gear / luminaires shall be provided.
11.3.1.4.7 Material used for the construction of the luminaires and its
component shall be recyclable.
11.3.1.5.
The LED control gear shall comply to MS IEC 61347-2-13, MS IEC 62384,
BS EN 55015 / CISPR 15 for radio frequency interference suppression and
MS IEC 61000- 3-2 for harmonics distortion. Rated maximum operating
temperature of the LED control gear shall not exceed 70°C.
11.3.1.5.1 Harmonics distortion shall be within the limits in accordance
with MS IEC 61000-3-2. However, total harmonics distortion
shall be less than 20%. The LED control gear shall operate
and maintain consistent light output over voltage variation
from +10% to -6% of the rated voltage and power factor of not
less than 0.9 lagging.
11.3.1.5.2 The LED control gear shall be able to withstand short circuit
current, overload, over voltage, under voltage and over
temperature.
11.3.1.5.3 The optical system shall incorporate one piece full bowl
reflector where applicable and high power LED or LED
module of required wattage and shall comply to MS IEC
62031 and IEC 62471. The luminaire shall continue to
operate safely even though there is failure of a partial number
of LEDs / LED. The LEDs / LED module lumen output shall
not be depreciated to below 70% of the original output during
the liability / warranty / contract period (whichever is
applicable). The initial luminous flux shall not be less than
90% of the rated luminous flux.
11.3.1.5.4 There shall be no flickering of the light source in mode of
operation and when it reaches its end of life.
11.3.1.5.5 The LED / LED module shall not be driven more than the
rated drive current.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11 - 13 of 18
11.3.1.6. The optical system support shall be made from mild steel / die cast
aluminum with minimum thickness of 1.3 mm . The ring shall be made from
die-cast aluminum with minimum thickness of 1.3 mm. The support and ring
shall be coated with electrostatic powder. The clip shall be made from
stainless steel.
11.3.1.6.1 The optical system shall comprise of optical lens reflector and
glass diffuser (if applicable). It shall give good even light
distribution with minimal glare in both the axial and transverse
planes.
11.3.1.6.2 When applicable, the reflector shall be made of high purity anodized
aluminium with at least 99.85% pure aluminium with low iridescent /
iridescent free mirror finished(e.g.polished aluminium). The
thickness of the reflector shall be minimum 0.5 mm.
11.3.1.6.3 Photometric data for the luminaires shall be made available and
submitted. The required photometric data for the luminaires shall
be Polar Curve, Utilization Factor, Luminance Distribution Table,
Downward Light Output Ratio, Upward Light Output Ratio, Light
Output Ratio and Spacing to Mounting Height Ratio.
11.3.1.7. Connection cables shall be terminated in a termination block
marked ‘L’
and ‘N’ for connection of the incoming
wires. For Class 1 Luminaires, a
brass direct pressure type earth terminal shall be provided in the LED driver
system near the termination block for
earth connection.
This earth
terminal shall be clearly marked with the standard earth terminal symbol.
11.3.1.7.1 For separated optical and LED control gear, electrical connection
of the LED control gear and optical system shall be through a
plug and socket ( i.e. male / female connection unit ) It shall be
made from non-flammable material and shall be rated at 10A. It
shall comply to MS IEC 60838-2-2.
11.3.1.7.2 Heat Resistant (HR) 105˚C cable shall be used to connect the
optical system and LED control gear and shall be of stranded
type. It shall not be more than 300 mm long. The cable shall be
enclosed in a cable sleeve HR 105˚C.
11.3.1.7.3 Wiring shall be done in a neat way to avoid contact with heat
producing components. A means of clamping the electrical cable
shall be provided. The cable clamp arrangement shall not
damage the insulation of the cables.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11 - 14 of 18
11.3.1.7.4 Where optical and control gear system are not integrated, both
the optical and control gear system shall be provided with
hooks or other suitable means for hanging purposes.
11.3.1.8. The LED Downlight shall comply to the following characteristic:
Characteristic
Description
Light Source
Lighting Class LED
Power Supply
230V +10, -6%, 50Hz
Correlated Colour
Temperature
(CCT)
Colour Rendering
Index
2700K,3000K,
3500K
4000K, 4500K
≥ 80
≥ 80
≥ 850
Lumens
Luminaire
Efficacy
≥ 850
≥ 75lm/W
≥ 75lm/W
Rated Lifetime
LED
Photobiological
Safety Class
Total Harmonic
Distortion (THD)
≥ 80
≥ 950
≥ 75lm/W
≥ 60˚
Beam Angle
Power
Consumption
Power Factor
Ambient
Temperature
5000K,6500K
≤ 20W
≥ 0.90
-20˚C to 35˚C
≥ 50,000 hours, 70% lumen maintenance at Ta=25˚C
Exempt group ( IEC 62471)
≤ 20%
Table 11.4.1: Characteristics of LED Downlight
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11 - 15 of 18
11.3.1.9. The manufacturer shall provide a minimum 5 years period warranty
certificate as stated in the defect liability / warranty / contract period
(whichever is applicable) for the complete luminaire to guarantee the long
life expectancy and maintenance-free luminaire. Warranty declaration shall
be filled and signed by manufacturer. Failure in the functioning and
operation of the LED luminaire within the warranty period will result in the
replacement of the whole luminaire or required components by the
manufacturer at no cost to the JKR.
11.3.1.10. Illuminance test shall be carried out every 6 months during defect liability
/ warranty / contract period (whichever is applicable) to ensure the
performance of the installed system conform to the design requirement as
per JKR specifications. This test shall also confirm the lumen maintenance
of the luminaire.
11.3.1.10.1 The luminaire manufacturer shall provide calibrated illuminance
meter and have the capacity and competency to carry out the
illuminance test during the testing of the installed lighting system.
11.3.1.11. Conformity with Standards
The LED luminaire shall comply with and be tested to the relevant latest edition
of Malaysia Standard or other relevant international standard as below:
Item
Criteria
Relevant Standard
MS IEC 60598-1
Luminaires – Part 1: General requirements and
tests
MS IEC 60598-2-1
Safety &
construction
Luminaire
Luminaires. Part 2: Particular requirements.
Section One: Fixed general purpose luminaires
MS IEC 60598-2-2
Luminaires. Part 2: Particular requirements, Part 2
- Section 2: Recessed luminaires
Safety &
construction
LED driver
MS IEC 61347-1
Lamp control gear – Part 1: General and safety
requirements
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11 - 16 of 18
Item
Criteria
Relevant Standard
MS IEC 61347-2-13
Lamp control gear- Part 2-13 – Particular
requirement for d.c or a.c supplied
electronic controlgear for LED modules.
Safety &
construction
Safety
Safety
LED module
MS IEC 62031
LED modules for general lighting –
Safety specifications
Lamp holder
MS IEC 60838-2-2
Miscellaneous lampholders – Part 2-2 –
Particular requirements – connectors for LED
modules
LED
IEC 62471
lamps/module Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp
(eye protection) systems
LED driver
Performance
MS IEC 62384
DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for
LED modules – Performance requirements
MS 62722-1
Luminaire Performance - Part 1: General
LED
Luminaires
Requirements
MS 62722-2-1
Luminaire Performance - Part 2-1: Particular
Requirements for LED Luminaires
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11 - 17 of 18
Item
Criteria
Photometric
Performance
Relevant Standard
IES LM-79-08
Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric
Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products
LED Light
Source
(*by LED
Manufacturer)
IES LM-80-08
Approved Method: Measuring Lumen
Maintenance of LED Light Sources
LED Light
Source
(*by LED
Manufacturer)
IES TM 21-11
Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of
LED Light Sources
IEC 61547
Equipment For General Lighting PurposesEMC Immunity Requirements
Safety
EMC
Performance
IEC 61000-3-2
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY
(EMC) – Part 3-2: Limits – Limits for harmonic
current emissions (equipment input current
≤16 A per phase)
CISPR 15 (BS EN 50015)
Limits and Methods of Measurement of Ratio
Disturbance Characteristics of Electrical
Lighting And Similar Equipment
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
11.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 4
LUMINAIRES
Page: S11 - 18 of 18
11.4 INSTALLATION OF LUMINAIRES
11.4.1 For luminaires with pendant lampshade, the wiring shall terminate in ceiling
rose. Connection from ceiling rose to lamp holder in the luminaire shall be by 3
core flexible cord of not less than 0.75 sq. mm. The flexible cord may be used
for suspending the luminaires if the total mass of the luminaire does not exceed
2 kg. If the mass of the luminaires exceeds 2kg, a hook shall be installed and
the luminaire shall be suspended from the hook by means of decorative chain
approved by the S.O.'s Representative.
11.4.2 For ceiling mounted and wall mounted luminaires, the wiring shall terminate
directly into terminal block in the luminaires or into a batten lampholder as the
case may be.
11.4.3 For luminaires to be recessed into suspended false ceiling, wiring shall run
through junction box and flexible steel conduit right up to the luminaires as
described in 9.2. The luminaires shall not sit on the ceiling structure but shall
be securely suspended from the floor slabs or beams of roof trusses by means
of suspension rods, brass chains or galvanised steel wires of minimum size
1.6mm diameter or as specified or as directed by the S.O.'s Representative.
11.4.4 Downlight type fluorescent luminaires shall be suspended from the floor slabs.
Where optical and control gear system are not integrated, both the optical and
control gear system shall be provided with hooks, galvanised steel wires of
minimum size 1.6mm diameter and necessary accessories or as specified or
as directed by the S.O.'s Representative. The luminaires shall not sit on the
ceiling structure but shall be securely suspended from the floor slabs or beams
of roof trusses.
11.4.5 Openings required for recessing the luminaire of item 11.4.3 and 11.4.4, shall
be done by the Main Contractor. However the Electrical Contractor shall
provide all details to the Main Contractor.
11.4.6 Where fluorescent luminaires are to be surface mounted on the underside of
soft board or other type of ceilings which is combustible, suitable spacers shall
be inserted between the base of the luminaires and the ceiling such that a
minimum clearance of 10mm exists between the luminaires and the ceiling.
11.4.7 Where fluorescent luminaires are to be suspended from ceiling of floor slab,
suitable suspension rods shall be provided. The wiring shall be terminated into
a terminal block in the suspension channel. Connection from the terminal block
to the luminaires shall be by 3 core flexible cord as mentioned above. The
flexible cord shall be concealed inside the suspension assembly.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
12.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
LAMPS
Page: S12- 1 of 15
12.0 LAMPS
12.1
TUBULAR FLUORESCENT LAMP
12.1.1 The tubular fluorescent lamp shall comply with MS IEC 60081 and MS IEC 61195
and shall be bi-pin type. The lamp characteristic shall be as per Table 12A:
Nominal
Diameter
(mm)
Nominal Power Base Min. lumens Nominal
Colour ILCOS Proprietary Rated
Length
(W)
(after 100 Colour Rendering code
Code
Lifespan
(mm)
hrs/25°C)
Temp
Index
(hrs)
(Kelvin)
(Ra)
26
600
18
G13
1300
26
1200
36
G13
3250
16
550
14
G5
1100
16
550
24
G5
1700
16
1150
28
G5
2400
16
1150
54
G5
4150
4000 &
6500
4000 &
6500
4000 &
6500
4000 &
6500
4000 &
6500
4000 &
6500
80 -89
FD
T8
10,000
80 - 89
FD
T8
10,000
80 - 89
FDH
T5
20,000
80 - 89
FDH
T5
20,000
80 - 89
FDH
T5
20,000
80 - 89
FDH
T5
20,000
Table 12A : Lamp Characteristics for Tubular
Fluorescent
12.2
COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMP WITHOUT INTEGRAL CONTROL GEAR
12.2.1 The compact fluorescent lamp without integral control gear shall comply with
IEC 60901 and IEC 61199 and shall be 2/4-pin type and of 2/4-limb and shall
be rated for 8000 hours life at rated voltage. The lamp characteristic shall be
as per Table 12B.
Min.
Power
(watt)
10
13
18
26
Base
G24d-1/
lumens
(after
600
Nominal Colour Colour Rendering
Temperature
(Kelvin)
4000
G24q-1
G24d-1/
G24q-1
G24d-2/
G24q-2
900
855
1200
1130
G24d-3/
1800
4000
G24q-3
1700
6500
6500
4000
6500
4000
6500
Index
(Ra)
code
80 -89
FSQ
80 - 89
FSQ
80 - 89
FSQ
80 - 89
FSQ
Table 12B: Lamp Characteristics for Compact Fluorescent
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ILCOS
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
12.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
LAMPS
Page: S12- 2 of 15
12.3
COMPACT FLUORESCENT LAMP WITH INTEGRAL CONTROL GEAR
12.3.1 The compact fluorescent lamp with integral control gear shall comply with
IEC 60968 and IEC 60969, and shall be of E14 or E27 screw type base and
shall be guaranteed for 10000 hours life at rated voltage. Unless otherwise
specified, they shall have an outer cylindrical or spherical diffusing bulb.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
12.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
LAMPS
Page: S12- 3 of 15
12.4
LED LAMP
12.4.1
LED BULB
12.4.1.1 The bulb shall be of type approved by Suruhanjaya Tenaga (ST) . The bulb
shall comply with the relevant Malaysian Standards or IEC Standards and other
relevant standards in terms of safety and performance criteria. The bulb shall
comply to MS IEC 62560, MS 62722, IES LM-79 -08, IES LM-80-08, IEC
62471, MS IEC 60061 Series, MS 62612, IEC 61547, MS IEC 61000-3-2, BS
EN 55015 or CISPR 15 and fit to luminaires that comply to MS IEC 60598
Series.
12.4.1.2 The bulb shall be designed and constructed that it is capable of providing the
service for which is intended. It shall be manufactured under “Lighting Class
LED” and shall be commercially available.
12.4.1.3 The bulb shall be designed and manufactured to suit with existing available
lamp holder that fits lamp cap as per standard IEC 60061 (e.g. E27 / E26 and
GU5.3 (MR16)). The housing of the bulb shall be made from aluminum,
polycarbonate or other material that sufficiently proven to resistant to heat and
flame. Material used for the construction of the bulb shall be recyclable.
12.4.1.3.1
For self ballasted LED bulb (e.g. E26 / E27 and GU5.3), the bulb
shall be manufactured as a unit which cannot be dismantled
without being permanently damaged, non- repairable and factorysealed unit. It shall be provided with a lamp cap and incorporating
a LED light source, LED control gear (LED driver) and any
additional elements necessary for stable operation of the light
source.
12.4.1.3.2
For non self-ballasted LED bulb (e.g. for GU5.3), the LED control
gear (LED driver) shall comply to MS IEC 61347-2- 13, MS IEC
62384, IEC 61547, BS EN 55015 or CISPR 15 for radio frequency
interference suppression and MS IEC 61000-3-2 for harmonics
distortion. The Insulation protection shall be of Class II. Rated
maximum operating temperature of the LED control gear (LED
driver) shall not exceed 70°C. The connection system shall comply
to MS IEC 60838-2-2. LED module shall comply to MS IEC 62031
and shall be of the type approved by Suruhanjaya Tenaga (ST).
12.4.1.4 The bulb shall be new and totally enclosed. The beam angle shall be as
specified / requirement of the intended application.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
12.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
LAMPS
Page: S12- 4 of 15
12.4.1.5 The bulb shall be complete with thermal management unit (heat sink), surge
and overvoltage protection and suitable for supply voltage of 230V, +10%, 6% at 50Hz with power factor corrected to at least 0.9 lagging and shall not
produce voltage disturbance / fluctuation to the electrical supply system.
12.4.1.5.1
The bulb shall operate well within the ratings with due
consideration for the local conditions (high humidity of 95% RH
and ambient temperature of 35°C)
12.4.1.5.2
Harmonics distortion for LED control gear shall be within the
limits in accordance with MS IEC 61000-3-2. However, total
harmonics distortion shall be less than 20%. The LED driver
shall operate and maintain consistent light output over voltage
variation from +10% to -6% of the rated voltage and power
factor of not less than 0.9 lagging.
12.4.1.6 The LED luminous flux output of LED light source shall not be depreciated
to below 70% of the original output during life hours. The initial luminous
flux shall not be less than 90% of the rated luminous flux.
12.4.1.7 The LED module shall not be driven more than the rated LED drive current.
12.4.1.8 The bulb which incorporating multiple numbers of LEDs or LED modules
shall continue to operate even though there is failure of a partial number
of LEDs or LED modules.
12.4.1.9 Photometric data for the bulb shall be made available. The required
photometric data for the bulb shall be Polar Curve, Utilization Factor,
Luminance Distribution Table, Downward Light Output Ratio, Upward Light
Output Ratio, Light Output Ratio and Spacing to Mounting Height Ratio.
12.4.1.10 The lamp caps interchangeability shall comply to MS IEC 60061. The bulb
shall come into its intended position with no permanent deformation when
inserted into lamp holder and shall be capable of easy and correct
positioning by the user. The bulb shall not be fall apart from its cap in any
mounting / burning position.
12.4.1.11 The manufacturer shall provide a minimum 5 years period warranty
certificate as stated in the defect liability / warranty / contract period
(whichever is applicable) for the complete bulb to guarantee the long life
expectancy and maintenance free bulb. Warranty declaration shall be
filled and signed by manufacturer. Failure in the functioning and operation
of the LED luminaire/lamp within the warranty period will result in the
replacement of the whole luminaire or required components by the
manufacturer at no cost to the government.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
12.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
LAMPS
Page: S12- 5 of 15
12.4.1.12 Illuminance test shall be carried out every 6 months during defect liability /
warranty / contract period (whichever is applicable) to ensure the
performance of the installed system conform to the design requirement as
per JKR specifications. This test will also confirm the lumen maintenance
of the bulb.
12.4.1.12.1 The bulb supplier shall provide calibrated illuminance meter and
have the capacity and competency to carry out the illuminance
test during the testing of the installed lighting system.
12.4.1.13 The bulb shall comply to the following characteristic:
Characteristic
Light Source
Lamp Cap
Correlated Colour
Temperature, CCT
Description
Lighting Class LED
E26/E27
2700K,3000K,
4000K/4100K,
3500K
4500K
Power Supply
Power
Consumption
Power Factor
230V +10%, -6%, 50Hz
≤9W
≤9W
≥ 450
≥ 550
System Efficacy
≥ 55lm/W
≥ 60lm/W
Ambient Temperature
Rated Lifetime
LED Photobiological
Safety Class
Heat sink material
≤7W
≥ 0.90
Total Luminous
Flux (Lumens)
Color Rendering
Index, CRI
GU5.3(MR16)
2700K, 3000K
≥ 80
≥ 200
≥ 50lm/W
≥ 80
-20˚C to 35˚C
≥ 40,000 hours, 70% lumen maintenance at Ta=25˚C
Exempt group ( IEC 62471)
Aluminium
Diffuser / housing type
Frosted
≤20%
Total Harmonic
Distortion (THD)
Table 12.4.1 Characteristic of LED Bulb
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
12.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
LAMPS
Page: S12- 6 of 15
Figure 12.4.1: Overview of System Composed of Self Ballasted LED Lamp
(Informative)
12.4.1.14 Conformity with Standards
The bulb shall comply with and be tested to the relevant latest edition of
Malaysia Standard or other relevant latest international standard as below:
Item
Safety & construction
Criteria
Luminaire
& Lamps
Relevant Standard
MS IEC 62560
Self-ballasted LED-lamps for general
lighting services by voltage > 50V –
Safety specifications
MS IEC 60598-1:
Luminaires – Part 1: General
requirements and tests
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
12.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
LAMPS
Page: S12- 7 of 15
Item
Criteria
Relevant Standard
MS IEC 60598-2-1
Luminaires. Part 2: Particular
requirements. Section Two: Fixed general
purpose luminaires
MS IEC 60598-2-2
Luminaires Part 2 :Particular requirements
- Section 2: Recessed luminaires
MS IEC 61347-1
Lamp control gear – Part 1: General
and safety requirements
LED driver
LED module
Lamp caps
and holder
Safety
Lamp holder
Safety
lamps/modul
(eye
MS IEC 61347-2-13
Lamp control gear- Part 2-13 – Particular
requirement for d.c or a.c supplied
electronic controlgear for LED modules.
MS IEC 62031
LED modules for general lighting –
Safety specifications
MS IEC 60061
International recommendations regarding
lamp caps and holders together with
gauges for the control of interchangeability
MS IEC 60838-2-2
Miscellaneous lampholders – Part 2-2 –
Particular requirements – connectors
for LED modules
LED
protection)
IEC 62471
Photobiological safety of lamps and
lamp systems
Performance
LED driver
MS IEC 62384
DC or AC supplied electronic control
gear for LED modules – Performance
requirements
Performance
LED
Luminaires
MS 62722-1
Luminaire Performance - Part 1: General
Requirements
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
12.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
LAMPS
Page: S12- 8 of 15
Item
Criteria
Performance
LED Lamp
Relevant Standard
MS 62722-2-1
Luminaire Performance - Part 2-1:
Particular Requirements for LED
Luminaires
MS 62612
Self Ballasted LED-Lamps For General
Lighting Services- Performance
Requirements
Performance
Photometric
IES LM-79-08
Approved Method: Electrical and
Photometric Measurements of SolidState Lighting Products
Performance
LED Light
Source
(*by LED
Manufacturer)
IES LM-80-08
Approved Method: Measuring Lumen
Maintenance of LED Light Sources
Performance
LED Light
Source
(*by LED
Manufacturer)
IES TM 21-11
Projecting Long Term Lumen
Maintenance of LED Light Sources
MS IEC 61547
Equipment For General Lighting
Purposes- EMC Immunity Requirements
Safety
EMC
Performance
IEC 61000-3-2
ELECTROMAGNETIC
COMPATIBILITY (EMC) –Part 3-2:
Limits – Limits for harmonic current
emissions (equipment input current
≤16 A per phase)
CISPR 15 (BS EN 50015)
Limits and Methods of Measurement of
Ratio Disturbance Characteristics of
Electrical Lighting And Similar
Equipment
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
12.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
LAMPS
Page: S12- 9 of 15
12.4.2
LED DOUBLE CAPPED LAMPS (T8 LED TUBES)
12.4.2.1 T8 LED Tubes shall be of the type approved by Suruhanjaya Tenaga (ST).
12.4.2.2 T8 LED Tubes shall comply with the relevant Malaysian Standards or IEC
standards and other relevant standards where applicable in terms of
safety and performance criteria. It shall be manufactured under “Lighting
Class LED” and shall be commercially available.
12.4.2.3 T8 LED Tubes, electronic control gear (LED driver) and accessories shall
comply with MS IEC 61347-1, MS IEC 61347-2-13, MS IEC 62031, MS
IEC 60838-2-2, MS IEC 60061, MS IEC 62384, MS 62722-1, MS 627222-1, IES LM-79-08, IES LM-80-08, IES TM 21-11, IEC 62471, IEC 61547,
IEC 61000-3-2, BS EN 55015 or CISPR 15 and shall fit to luminaires that
comply to MS IEC 60598-1, MS IEC 60598-2-1 and MS IEC 60598-2-2.
12.4.2.4 The T8 LED Tubes shall be designed and manufactured to suit standard
T8 bi-pin fluorescent lamps and capable of providing the service for which
is intended. The manufacturers shall provide complete technical
installation manual & maintenance manual.
12.4.2.5 The T8 LED Tubes shall be suitable for supply voltage of 230V, +10%, 6% at 50Hz with power factor corrected to at least 0.9 lagging and shall
not produce voltage disturbance or fluctuation to the electrical supply
system during the mode of operation.
12.4.2.6 The T8 LED Tubes shall operate well within the ratings with due
consideration for the local conditions (high humidity up to 95% RH and
ambient temperature of 35°C).
12.4.2.7 Interchangeability of consumable
maintenance purposes.
components
is
preferred
for
12.4.2.8 T8 LED Tubes shall have housing made from Aluminum or Polycarbonate
or other materials that sufficiently proven resistance to heat and flame.
12.4.2.9 Material used for the construction of the T8 LED Tubes shall be recyclable.
12.4.2.10 The T8 LED Tubes shall be new, totally enclosed and shall have
protection against contact with live or moving parts inside the enclosure.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
12.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
LAMPS
Page: S12- 10 of 15
12.4.2.11 The electronic control gear (LED Driver) shall comply with MS IEC 613471, MS IEC 61347-2-13 & MS IEC 62384 while LED Module shall comply
with MS IEC 62031 and shall be of the type approved by Suruhanjaya
Tenaga (ST).
The possible combination systems composed of LED Modules and LED
Driver are described in Figure 12.4.2 below (Please note that MS IEC
62560: Self Ballasted LED Lamp is not applicable for T8 LED Tubes).
Figure 12.4.2: Overview of System Composed of LED Modules and
Control gear (Informative)
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
12.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
LAMPS
Page: S12- 11 of 15
12.4.2.12 LED modules with integrated control gear and equipped with lamp cap
(i.e. self- ballasted lamp), intended for retrofit applications (thereby to
replace existing lamps with identical lamp caps) shall comply with
requirement of IEC 60968.
12.4.2.13 The lamp holders and caps shall comply with MS IEC 60061 and shall
be made of polycarbonate material. The T8 LED Tubes shall fit into its
intended position with no permanent deformation when inserted into
lamp holder and shall be capable of easy and correct positioning by the
user. The lamp cap shall be G13 type and total weight of T8 LED Tubes
plus lamp cap shall not exceed 500 g as specified in MS IEC 60598-1.
12.4.2.14 The T8 LED Tubes shall be constructed with protection against
accidental contact with live parts when the tubes are installed.
12.4.2.15 Harmonics distortion shall be within the limits in accordance with MS
IEC 61000-3-2 and total harmonics distortion shall be less than 20%.
The T8 LED Tubes shall operate and maintain consistent light output
over voltage variation from +10%, -6% of the rated voltage and power
factor of not less than 0.9 lagging.
12.4.2.16 The LED luminous flux output of LED light source shall not be depreciated
to below 70% of the original output during life hours. The initial luminous
flux shall not be less than 90% of the rated luminous flux.
12.4.2.17 The T8 LED Tubes which incorporating multiple numbers of LEDs or
LED modules shall continue to operate even though there is failure of a
partial number of LEDs or LED modules.
12.4.2.18 The LED / LED module shall not be driven more than the rated drive current.
12.4.2.19 Photometric data for the T8 LED Tubes shall be made available and
submitted to S.O.’s Representatives . The required photometric data for
the tubes shall be Polar Curve, Utilization Factor, Luminance
Distribution Table, Light Output Ratio and Spacing To Mounting Height
Ratio.
12.4.2.20 Conformity testing during manufacture of T8 LED Tubes shall be
carried out at 100% of production as per MS IEC 62031 with the
combination of measurement of input power at rated voltage, current
and electrical test shall be as specified in MS IEC 60598-1.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
12.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
LAMPS
Page: S12- 12 of 15
12.4.2.21 The manufacturer shall provide a minimum 5 years period warranty
certificate as stated in the defect liability / warranty / contract period
(whichever is applicable) for the complete LED Tubes to guarantee the
long life expectancy and maintenance free bulb. Warranty declaration
shall be filled and signed by manufacturer. Failure in the functioning and
operation of the LED luminaire/tube within the warranty period will result
in the replacement of the whole luminaire or required components by
the manufacturer at no cost to the government.
12.4.2.22 Illuminance test shall be carried out every six (6) months during defect
liability / warranty / contract period (whichever is applicable) to ensure
the performance of the installed system conform to the design
requirement as per JKR specifications. This test will also confirm the
lumen maintenance of the LED Tube.
12.4.2.22.1
The supplier/manufacturer shall provide calibrated
illuminance meter and have the capacity and competency
to carry out the illuminance test during the testing of the
installed lighting system.
12.4.2.23 The T8 LED Tubes shall be bi-pin type and the minimum characteristic
shall be as per Table 12.4.2 below:
Specifications
600mm T8
1200mm T8
Total Luminous Flux (lumens)
≥ 840 lm
≥ 1400 lm
Power, W
≤ 11 W
≤ 20 W
Ingress of Protection, IP
Min IP2X
≥ 0.9
Power Factor
System Efficacy, lm/W
Correlated Colour Temperature, CCT
≥ 70 lm/W
≥ 80 lm/W
2700K, 3000K, 3500K, 4000/4100K
4500K, 5000K, 6500K
Colour Rendering Index, CRI
≥ 80
Diffuser/Lens Type
Frosted
Beam Angles
≥ 120°
Total Harmonic Distortion, THD
< 20 %
Lifespan of T8 LED Tubes, Lx@hrs
≥ L70@30 000
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
12.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
LAMPS
Page: S12- 13 of 15
Specifications
Classifications; Integrated, built-in
or independent
Lamp cap
Housing material
600mm T8
1200mm T8
Integrated / built in
G13
Aluminum, Polycarbonate
Heat sink material
Aluminum
LED Photo biological class
(Group risk of eye safety)
Working temperature, T
Exempt Risk group (as per IEC 62471)
-20°C to +45°C
Working humidity
Up to 95% RH
Dimension: Length (mm) x Diameter
(mm)
Weight, g
Typical 600 x 26
Typical 1200 x 26
Typical 280
Typical 280
Table 12.4.2: Characteristics of T8 LED Tubes
12.4.2.24 Conformity with Standards
The T8 LED Tubes shall comply with and be tested to the relevant latest
edition of Malaysia Standard or other relevant latest international
standard as below:
Item
Criteria
Relevant Standard
MS IEC 60598-1
Luminaires – Part 1: General requirements
and tests
MS IEC 60598-2-1
Safety &
construction
Luminaire
Luminaires. Part 2: Particular requirements
Section One: Fixed general purpose
luminaires
MS IEC 60598-2-2
Particular requirements , Part 2- Section
2: Recessed luminaires
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
12.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
LAMPS
Page: S12- 14 of 15
Item
Criteria
Relevant Standard
MS IEC 61347-1
Lamp control gear – Part 1: General and
safety requirements
LED driver
LED module
Lamp caps
and holder
MS IEC 61347-2-13
Lamp control gear- Part 2-13 – Particular
requirement for d.c or a.c supplied electronic
controlgear for LED modules.
MS IEC 62031
LED modules for general lighting – Safety
specifications
MS IEC 60061
International recommendations regarding lamp
caps and holders together with gauges for the
control of interchangeability
Safety
Lamp holder
MS IEC 60838-2-2
Miscellaneous lampholders – Part 2-2 –
Particular requirements – connectors for LED
modules
Safety
LED
lamps/module
(eye
protection)
IEC 62471
Photobiological safety of lamps and lamp
systems
Performance
LED driver
Performance
LED
Luminaires
MS IEC 62384
DC or AC supplied electronic control gear for
LED modules – Performance requirements
MS 62722-1
Luminaire Performance - Part 1: General
Requirements
MS 62722-2-1
Luminaire Performance - Part 2-1: Particular
Requirements for LED Luminaires
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
12.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
LAMPS
Page: S12- 15 of 15
Item
Criteria
Performance
Photometric
Performance
LED Light
Source
(*by LED
Performance
Relevant Standard
IES LM-79-08
Approved Method: Electrical and Photometric
Measurements of Solid-State Lighting Products
IES LM-80-08
Approved Method: Measuring Lumen
Manufacturer)
Maintenance of LED Light Sources
LED Light
Source
(*by LED
Manufacturer)
IES TM 21-11
Projecting Long Term Lumen Maintenance of
LED Light Sources
IEC 61547
Equipment For General Lighting PurposesEMC Immunity Requirements
Safety
EMC
Performance
IEC 61000-3-2
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC)
–Part 3-2: Limits – Limits for harmonic current
emissions (equipment input current ≤16
A per phase)
CISPR 15 (BS EN 50015)
Limits and Methods of Measurement of Ratio
Disturbance Characteristics of Electrical
Lighting And Similar Equipment
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
13.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
CEILING FANS
Page: S13- 1 of 2
13.0 CEILING FANS
13.1
Ceiling fans offered shall be comply with MS IEC 60335-1, MS 1597 and MS 1220
and of JKR approved brand and model. For 1500mm sweep ceiling fan, minimum
3
air delivery at rated voltage at full speed shall be not less than 210 m /min. Safety
thermal fuse (130˚C, 2A) shall be incorporated against power surge and overheat.
13.2
All parts of the suspension system of the ceiling fan such as the fan hook,
shank assembly, down rod, motor shaft etc. shall be secured by means of high
tensile steel shackle bolts; locknuts complete with washers and spring washers
and split pins. Split pins shall be positioned as close as possible to the locknuts
after the latter have been properly tightened. Instructions as follows, in multi
languages, shall be prominently displayed at the midway of the suspension rod:
“AMARAN - Ketatkan Semua Nut”. (In Malay & English)
13.3
Ceiling fans shall be provided with a supplementary independent suspension
system (safety wire rope) event of failure of the rod suspension system, the fan
motor will be safely suspended by this safety wire rope from the fan hook and
electricity supply to the ceiling fan shall be disconnected. Disconnection of
electricity supply to the ceiling fan shall be accomplished without snapping or
damaging the supply cable of the ceiling fan point. It shall also not result in
exposing any live terminal within the ceiling fan.
13.4
The material used for the safety wire rope shall be anti-corrosive type. Design
and construction of the safety wire rope and disconnection of electricity supply
shall be subject to the approval of JKR. These features must be assembled in
the manufacturer's factory.
13.5
Standard rod ceiling fans shall be preassembled in the manufacturer’s factory. The
down rod shall be minimum 225mm (factory supplied) and more than 225mm of
modified (non standard rod) must supplied by the same manufacturer, similar
material, complete with safety wire rope, marking and installation instruction.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
13.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
CEILING FANS
Page: S13 - 2 of 2
13.6
The rubber suspension bush shall properly fit the shank assembly. The upper
canopy shall be so secured that it will not slide downward. All ceiling fan shall
be provided with suitable earth terminal. The capacitors used shall be of dry
self-healing, metalised polypropylene type.
13.7
All ceiling fans shall be provided with matching speed regulator of the ventilated
type complete with earth terminal. The regulator knob shall be secured in such
a way that it can only be removed by a tool. Fan shall be fitted with wellbalanced blades with proper identification to prevent mixing of blades.
13.8
All ceiling fan points shall be completed with speed regulator mounting block and 3
way connector. Where a ceiling fan is installed near a beam, the suspension rod of
the ceiling fan shall be of suitable length such that there is a clearance of not less
than 75mm between the underside of the beam and the fan blades.
13.9
Capacitors for use with ceiling fan motors shall comply with IEC 60252-1. The
rated voltage shall be at least 500VAC with a rated frequency of 50Hz and a
maximum permissible operating temperature of 85˚C.
13.10 The windings of the capacitors shall be contained in a casing made from fire
retardant material and shall be totally encapsulated with a thermosetting resin.
13.11 The capacitors shall be designed for a minimum life expectancy of 10,000 hours
(Class B as defined in IEC 60252-1) when operating continuously at the rated
voltage, temperature and frequency.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
14.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
EARTHING
Page: S14 - 1 of 5
14.0 EARTHING
14.1
All system earthing and equipment earthing shall comply with Electricity
Regulations 1994 and relevant parts of MS IEC 60364.
14.2
The protective conductor, copper tape and earth electrode shall comply with BS
EN 13601.
14.3
All protective conductors shall be of high conductivity copper conductor either
stranded or solid, continuous throughout the whole lengths and without joints.
In the instance where joints cannot be avoided, then the joints shall be of
exothermic welding type. Mechanical clamps may only be used upon approval
of the S.O. The joint shall be robust design and protected from mechanical
damage and corrosion. Before connecting the protective conductor, the metal
works, the conductors and the metal work at the point of contact, including the
clamps, shall be thoroughly cleaned of surface corrosion or paint and tinned to
ensure that good electrical contact is made.
14.4
Every circuit of a switchboard, distribution board, control board and tap-off
units, all lighting points, lighting switches, fan points, fan switches, three pin
switched or unswitched socket-outlets, power point etc. shall be provided with
circuit protective conductors. All exposed conductive parts and extraneous
conductive parts shall be effectively bonded to earth.
14.5
Unless otherwise specified, the minimum cross sectional area of the protective
conductors shall be in accordance with the following Tables/Clause in the MS
IEC 60364-5-54: (a) Circuit protective conductors - Table 54.3 (or BS 7671 Table 54G)
(b) Earthing conductors - Table 54.3 (where buried in the soil, the
cross-sectional areas shall be in accordance with Table 54.2 or BS
7671 Table 54A)
(c) Bonding conductors - Clause 544 (or BS 7671 Clause 547)
14.6
Where connections are made at switchgear and such items of electrical
equipment the protective conductors shall terminate in a cable lug or other
approved means.
14.7
In the case of MICC cables, the copper outer sheath may be utilised as earth
protective conductor provided that at the termination of each cable run the
copper sheath is effectively bonded to earth.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
14.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
EARTHING
Page: S14 - 2 of 5
14.8
Cable glands shall be installed for termination of armoured cables. It shall be
mechanical type complying with BS EN 50262. Each cable gland shall be
installed with back nuts (lock nuts) for plain hole fixing.
14.9
Cable gland shall be installed for termination of steel armoured multicore
cables and shall comply with BS EN 50262. The cross sectional of a protective
conductor connecting a gland earth tag washer to the earth terminal of an
enclose shall be selected in accordance with table 54.3 of MS IEC 60364-5-54.
Cross-sectional area
of line conductor S
2
(mm )
Minimum cross-sectional area of the corresponding
protective conductor
2
(mm )
If the protective conductor If the protective conductor is
is of the same material
not of the same material
as the line conductor
as the line conductor
S ≤ 16
S
k1 x S
k2
16 < S ≤ 35
16
k1 x 16
k2
S
2
k1 x S
k2 2
S > 35
Table 54.3 of MS IEC 60364-5-54 – Minimum cross-sectional area of
protective conductors
Mechanically protected
Mechanically unprotected
2
Protected against corrosion
2
2.5 mm Cu
16 mm Cu
2
2
10 mm Fe
16 mm Fe
2
Not protected against
25 mm Cu
corrosion
50 mm Fe
2
Table 54.2 of MS IEC 60364-5-54 (BS 7671 Table 54A) – Minimum crosssectional areas of earthing conductors buried in the soil
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
14.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
EARTHING
Page: S14 - 3 of 5
14.10 The cable gland for aluminium armoured single-core cables shall be made of
non-ferrous material.
14.11
In the case of solid earthing, main earthing terminals or bars mounted on
porcelain insulators shall be provided external to the switchboard on the wall
near to the switchboard as indicated in the drawings. Unless otherwise
specified, main earthing bar shall be of tinned copper bar of dimension as in
Table 14A with respect to the prospective earth fault current. Main earthing bar
shall be of sufficient length to accommodate termination for all protective
conductors, earthing conductors and main equipotential bonding conductors of
electrical installation, lightning protection system bonding conductor and
generator installation bonding conductor. Means shall be provided for
disconnecting the earthing conductors to permit measurement of the resistance
of the earthing arrangements. The joints shall be disconnectable only by means
of a tool, and shall be mechanically strong to ensure electrical continuity. A
Permanent label marked with words ‘Main Earthing Bar - Safety Electrical
Connections - Do Not Remove’ shall be installed near to the main earthing bar.
All connections to the main earthing bars shall be soundly made and
electrically satisfactory by means of bolts and nuts with spring washers and jam
nuts.
14.12 Two sets of earthing conductors of copper tape dimension as in Table 14A shall
be provided to connect the main earthing bar to two different earth electrodes.
The earthing conductors shall be buried in the ground at a depth of not less
than 600mm below finished ground level.
14.13 Protective conductors between switchboard and main earthing bar shall be
linked by copper tape of same cross sectional area as the main earthing bar.
Prospective Earth fault
Main Earthing Bar
Earthing Conductors
duration
I ≤ 10 kA
(Width x Thickness )
(No. x Copper tape size)
25 mm x 3 mm
2 sets of 1 x 25mm x 3mm
10 kA < I ≤ 25 kA
25 mm x 6 mm
2 sets of 1 x 25mm x 3mm
25 kA < I ≤ 30 kA
30 mm x 6 mm
2 sets of 2 x 25mm x 3mm
30 kA < I ≤ 40 kA
40 mm x 6 mm
2 sets of 2 x 25mm x 3mm
40 kA < I ≤ 50 kA
50 mm x 6 mm
2 sets of 2 x 25mm x 3 mm
currents (I) for 1s
Table 14A: Dimensions of Main Earthing Bar and Earthing Conductors
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
14.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
EARTHING
Page: S14 - 4 of 5
14.14 Earth electrodes shall be of copper-jacketed steel core rods with 16mm
nominal diameter and supplied in 1500mm length and shall have provision for
screw coupling with another standard length. The copper jacket of 99.9 % pure
electrolytic copper shall be of minimum radial thickness 0.25mm and shall be
molecularly bonded to the steel core to ensure that the copper jacket and steel
core are non separable. Each earth electrode shall be driven 3000mm in depth.
Where the desired earth resistance value cannot be achieved after the first
earth electrode have been driven, sufficient number of earth electrodes in
parallel shall be installed outside the resistance area until required value is
reached. Mutual separation between two earth electrodes shall be more than,
but less than twice, the driven depth of the earth electrode. Earth electrodes
shall not be installed close to a metallic fence. Unless the metallic fence is
separately earthed, the fence shall be separated from the electrical earthing
system by at least 2000mm. Interconnection between different earth electrodes
shall be by means of 25mm x 3mm annealed copper tape.
14.15 In cases where there is insufficient land area, an alternative earthing system
shall be proposed for the S.O. approval.
14.16 Where the location of the installation is such that it is not possible in practice to
provide the two auxiliary earth electrodes for the test, two test earth electrodes
namely potential test probe and current test probe shall be installed. The test
earth electrodes shall be one length of 1500mm in depth. The current test
probe shall be placed 30m from the first earth electrodes with potential test
probe midway between. Test leads of 2.5 sq. mm PVC insulated cable
connecting test earth electrodes shall be terminated independently on the
porcelain insulators next to the main earthing terminals or bars. The test leads
shall be protected by means of non metallic conduit and buried in the ground at
a depth of not less than 600mm below finished ground level. Termination shall
be identified with permanent labels durably and legibly marked with words
‘Potential Earth Test Probe - Do Not Remove’ and ‘Current Earth Test Probe Do Not Remove’. Similar labels of not less than 4.75mm high shall be
permanently fixed in a visible position at earth electrodes.
14.17 The connection of the earthing conductor and/or the earth electrode to the earth
electrode shall be soundly made by the use of plumbed joints, either by brazing
o
using zinc-free material with a melting point of at least 600 C or by exothermic
welding.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
14.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
EARTHING
Page: S14 - 5 of 5
14.18 Each earth electrodes shall be provided with heavy duty type inspection
chamber with removable cover. The inspection chamber shall be of square or
round type and tested in accordance with MS 26: Part 2. The minimum size of
square type inspection chamber shall be 300mm (width) x 300mm (length) x
180mm (height) and for round type inspection chamber, the minimum size shall
be 300mm (diameter) x 180mm (height). The working load of the inspection
chamber shall be minimum 4500kg. Lifting hook shall be provided in the cover.
The brand name shall be durably marked on the removable cover.
14.19 Residual current operated circuit breaker (RCCB) shall be provided with
minimum cross sectional area 16mm2 green PVC insulated copper conductor
cable as earthing conductors, one set of two (2) length of 1500mm earth
electrodes, inspection chambers and removable covers. However, if they are
connected to a main earthing system, separate earth electrode need not be
provided.
14.20 A permanent label durably marked with words ‘Safety Electrical Connection –
Do Not Remove’, in legible type not less than 4.75mm high, shall be
permanently fixed in a visible position at or near: 14.20.1 The point of connection of every earthing conductor to an
earth electrode, and
14.20.2 The point of connection of every bonding conductor to
extraneous conductive parts.
14.21
In addition, each earthing point shall be identified by permanent label legibly
marked with the words ‘MSB Earth’, ‘SSB Earth’, ‘RCCB Earth’ or any other
appropriate words permanently fixed to the point of connection of every
earthing conductor and earth electrode.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
15.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
LABELLING
Page: S15 - 1 of 1
15.0
LABELLING
15.1
Labels shall be fitted on the outside of all switchgears, fusegears, distribution
boards, sub switchboards and main switchboards by means of non-corrodable
screws or rivet or any other method approved by the S.O.'s Representative.
The labels shall be of laminated plastic with engraved lettering with details such
as type of equipment, rating, setting, to/from where it is connected etc.
15.2
The exact wording of the labels shall be agreed with the S.O.'s Representative.
Single line mimic schematic circuit diagram shall be provided at the facial of the
main switchboards showing the connection of all switchgears with respect to
busbars indicating the incoming and outgoing feeders. The diagram shall be
single line of width 20mm with yellow perspex strip rivetted on the outside front
cover of the switchboard with arrow head indicating the direction of supply
incoming to the switchgears.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
16.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SWITCHROOM
Page: S16 - 1 of 1
16.0 SWITCHROOM
16.1
Approved type of rubber mat shall be provided in front of the switchboards and
any other control boards. The rubber mat shall extend to the full length of the
switchboards, and shall be of thickness not less than 6mm and width 1000mm.
Standard notices displaying the words 'BAHAYA' and 'DILARANG MASUK' and
Electric Shock Treatment Chart shall be provided and installed at a place as
required in accordance with Electricity Regulations 1994. Signage with words
‘BILIK SUIS UTAMA’, ‘BILIK SUIS’, ‘BILIK KHIDMAT ELEKTRIK’ and
‘DILARANG MEROKOK’ shall be installed for all rooms containing electrical
switchboard and equipment to the satisfaction of the S.O.'s Representative.
16.2
All electrical switchrooms shall be provided with one unit 9kg dry powder fire
extinguisher for A, B, C class of fire complete with pressure gauge, discharge\
hose with nozzle installed on wall bracket. The extinguisher shall be certified by
Jabatan Bomba Dan Penyelamat Malaysia valid to be used for a period of
twelve months from the completion date of the Contract.
16.3
All trenches in the switchrooms shall be clear from debris and filled up with clean
sand to a level above cable ducts. All cable duct entry into the cable trench shall be
sealed tight with cement against water and rodent entry. As-installed layout plans,
schematic wiring diagrams and plans showing cable routes and positions of
earthing point with reference to easily recognizable buildings and structures shall
be suitably framed up in the switchroom. These plans and diagrams shall be in
addition to the 4 sets of prints required to be submitted to the S.O.'s
Representative, after completion of the project as stated in 20.2.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SECTION:
17.0
REQUIREMENTS FOR ANTI
CORROSIVE TYPE INSTALLATIONS
Page: S17 - 1 of 4
17.0
REQUIREMENT FOR ANTI CORROSIVE TYPE INSTALLATIONS
17.0.1 Installation at coastal areas (defined as within 3km from the coast) and other
areas deemed necessary, material used shall be of rust proof type and/or anti
corrosive type or specially treated. The cost of the material used and treatment
applied is deemed to be included in the prices quoted.
17.0.2 Areas within 3km to 5km from the coast, special treatment for salt-spray
environment is applicable for external installation only.
17.1
WIRING
17.1.1 Conduit shall preferable be buried in the wall or buried in the concrete ceiling
/ soffit of slab.
17.1.2 In the false ceiling, conduit used shall be of rigid high impact PVC type grade
Heavy Duty Code No. 4421.
17.1.3 Surface conduit wiring if any, must be with the approval of S.O. Steel conduits
shall not be used except for emergency circuits. It shall be in rigid high impact
PVC conduit grade Heavy Duty Code No. 4421 with its associated system
accessories.
17.1.4 Cable trunking and cable tray system shall be of hot dipped galvanized sheet
steel. All trunking elbows, offset and combination elbows, adaptors and tees
shall be of same thickness as the straight trunking and shall be the type
manufactured and supplied by the same trunking manufacturer. Any cut edges
shall be painted with galvanized paint. All screws and nuts used shall be made
from brass/stainless steel.
17.1.5 All support accessories such as angle iron, brackets, etc. must be of hot
dipped galvanized sheet steel.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SECTION:
17.0
REQUIREMENTS FOR ANTI
CORROSIVE TYPE INSTALLATIONS
Page: S17 - 2 of 4
17.2
SWITCHBOARDS (MAIN SWITCHBOARD, SUB SWITCHBOARD AND
DISTRIBUTION BOARD)
17.2.1
All switchboards shall be installed within enclosed electrical service rooms.
17.2.2
All switchboards shall be of stainless steel material (Grade SS 316).
17.2.3
All screws and nuts shall be of brass/stainless steel.
17.2.4 Special Treatment For Housings Of Electrical Items Used In SaltSprayed Environment as per 17.6 shall be applied.
17.3
SWITCHES, SWITCHED SOCKET OUTLETS AND UNSWITCHED SOCKET
OUTLETS
17.3.1
For concealed installation, metalclad type back boxes shall be of
galvanized sheet steel.
17.3.2 For surface and outdoor installation, switches, switched socket outlets and
unswitched socket outlets shall be of sealed or anti corrosive type.
17.4
LUMINAIRES
17.4.1
Fluorescent luminaires installed at external areas (e.g. covered walkways,
corridors) and non air-conditioned rooms, shall be of anti corrosive type with
a minimum Ingress Protection of IP65.
17.4.2
Other than rust proof luminaires, all other luminaires (whether recessed or
surfaced mounting, together with all its related installation accessories i.e.
steel wires, suspension rods) shall undergo anti corrosive treatment process
as per 17.6.
17.4.2.1 All screws and nuts shall be of brass/stainless steel.
17.4.3
Special Treatment For Housings Of Electrical Items Used In Salt-Sprayed
Environment as per 17.6 shall be applied.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SECTION:
17.0
REQUIREMENTS FOR ANTI
CORROSIVE TYPE INSTALLATIONS
Page: S17 - 3 of 4
17.5 CEILING FANS AND EXHAUST FANS
17.5.1 All fans shall be of rust proof type.
17.5.2 Anti corrosive treatment for ceiling fan shall be similar to luminaires.
17.5.3 Special Treatment For Housings Of Electrical Items Used In Salt-Sprayed
Environment as per 17.6 shall be applied.
17.6
SPECIAL TREATMENT FOR HOUSINGS OF ELECTRICAL ITEMS USED IN
SALT-SPRAYED ENVIRONMENT
17.6.1 The treatment shall produce a housing of high resistance to corrosion with a
durable finish with smooth reflective white paint. Both the inside and outside of
the metal housing shall be finished with double powder coatings of hybrid
epoxy polyester compounds. All these housings shall undergo surface
preparation and surface pre-treatment before application of first powder
coating.
17.6.2 The surface preparation shall consist of firstly chemical cleaning to effectively
remove mill scale, rust, contaminants and corrosive compounds; followed by
solvent cleaning and degreasing to remove oil or grease. After rinsing, the
cleaned surface shall immediately undergo zinc phosphate surface pretreatment. However, prior to zinc phosphate surface pre-treatment, the surface
shall be conditioned with a recommended conditioner. The pre-treated surface
shall then be rinsed and dried in the oven before undergoing first powder
coating application.
17.6.3 The pre-treated surface shall undergo application of first powder coating and
baked in oven. The curing time and temperature shall be as recommended by
the powder coating system manufacturer, otherwise at the temperature 204 ºC
for 10 minutes. The film thickness of the first powder coating shall be within 50
to 80 microns.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SECTION:
17.0
REQUIREMENTS FOR ANTI
CORROSIVE TYPE INSTALLATIONS
Page: S17 - 4 of 4
17.6.4 Next, the part shall be inspected for any defect before applying second powder
coating. The second powder coat shall be applied and then the part shall be
baked in oven for the recommended time and temperature. The film thickness
of the second powder coating shall be within 50 to 80 microns. The finished
part shall then be inspected for any defects. The finished colour shall be white.
17.6.5 Each fan blade and housing, luminaire housing and switchboard housing shall
be labeled “Double Hybrid Epoxy Polyester Powder Coating”. For identification
purposes they shall also carry a model/serial number, brand name and date of
manufacture.
17.6.6 The manufacturer shall give warranty/guarantee for the special treatment to the
metal parts against corrosion for at 12 months from the date of installation at
the site. This warranty/guarantee shall cover full replacement of all defective
parts including installation at site at the manufacturer’s expense. The
manufacturer shall replace and install the defective parts within 1 week after
joint inspection at site.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
18.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
TEST, TEST INSTRUMENTS AND TEST
CERTIFICATES
Page: S18 - 1 of 2
18.1
TEST AND CALIBRATION OF MEASURING AND TEST INSTRUMENTS
18.1.1 The test instruments shall be designed, manufactured, tested and shipped in
accordance with IEC 61010-1 and IEC 61557-1. All measuring and test
instruments used for testing of the electrical installations and, calibration and
test for the protection relays shall be regularly tested and calibrated by the
manufacturers or accredited calibration laboratories for their functionality and
accuracy. The measurement accuracy of reading shall be + 10 % for analog
and digital instruments. Test and Calibration Reports or Certificates for the
measuring and test instruments issued by the calibration laboratory shall be
valid for 2 years from the date of issuance.
18.1.2 The instruments and their Test and Calibration Reports or Certificates shall be
submitted to S.O.’s Representative for verification 2 weeks before testing of the
electrical installations being carried out. No test on the electrical installations
shall be carried out without prior approval of the S.O.’s Representative.
Notwithstanding the validity of the aforesaid Reports or Certificates the
measuring and test instruments shall be re-calibrated if so required by the
S.O.’s Representative after any mechanical or electrical mishandling. Fee
required for the testing and calibrating of the measuring and test instruments is
deemed to be included in the Contract.
18.2
TEST AND TEST CERTIFICATES
18.2.1 After the installation work has been completed and before Certificate of
Practical Completion is issued, the electrical installations (covered under this
part of the Contract shall be tested as prescribed in Electricity Regulations
1994 and IEC 60364-6 and any other tests deem necessary by the S.O.'s
Representative. In the event the installation fails to pass any of these tests, the
Electrical Contractor shall take such measures as are necessary to remedy the
defects and the installation shall not be considered as completed until all such
tests have been passed.
18.2.2 The tests to be carried out where relevant, by the Electrical Contractor shall
consist of the following. In the absence of test method in IEC 60364-6, then the
testing method adopted shall be as per BS 7671: 18.2.2.1 Continuity of protective conductors including main and
supplementary equipotential bonding conductors.
18.2.2.2 Continuity of ring final circuit conductors.
18.2.2.3 Insulation resistance.
18.2.2.4 Protection by automatic disconnection of the supply:
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
18.0
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
TEST, TEST INSTRUMENTS AND TEST
CERTIFICATES
Page: S18 - 2 of 2
18.2.2.4.1 Operation of residual current devices (RCDs)
18.2.2.4.2 Measurement of the resistance of the earth electrode
18.2.2.5 Polarity.
18.2.2.6 Functional and operational tests.
18.2.3 The following additional tests shall be carried out as and when instructed:
18.2.3.1
18.2.3.2
18.2.3.3
18.2.3.4
18.2.3.5
18.2.3.6
Protection by Separated Extra Low Voltage (SELV), Protective
Extra Low Voltage (PELV), or by electrical separation.
Insulation resistance/impedance of floor and wall.
Measurement of earth fault loop impedance.
Check of phase sequence.
Verification of voltage drop.
Prospective fault current (BS 7671)
18.2.4 All RCDs shall be checked and tested for their effectiveness in operation
within specified sensitivity and tripping time. All protection relays and device
shall be checked, tested and calibrated by an Electrical Services Engineer
registered with Suruhanjaya Tenaga.
18.2.5 The Electrical Contractor shall arrange with the Electrical Services Engineer to
conduct and carry out the stability and functionality test, check and calibration
of the protection relays and device. Fee required for the test, check and
calibration as described above is deemed to be included in the Contract.
18.2.6 The S.O.'s Representative reserves the right to be present at all tests and the
Electrical Contractor shall give at least 1 week notice in writing to the S.O.'s
Representative for this purpose. In any case, no test shall be carried out
without prior approval of the S.O.'s Representative. Copies of all the test
certificates together with As-Installed Drawings properly bound and titled shall
be submitted to the S.O.'s Representative within 1 week after the completion
of the testing.
18.2.7 Supervision and Completion Certificate and Test Certificate including copies
of all the test results and drawings as prescribed in Electricity Regulations
1994 shall be submitted to the S.O.’s Representative within two weeks after
the completion of the testing. The Certificates shall be properly bound in hard
cover and titled.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
19.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
Page: S19 - 1 of 1
19.0 SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
19.1 During the Defects Liability Period, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible
for the service and maintenance work for the complete installation. All works shall
be carried out by competent person. All labour, material, tools and parts
necessary to rectify the defect due to manufacturing/installation faults shall be
supplied/executed at the Electrical Contractor's cost.
19.2 The service and maintenance to be performed and defects to be rectified and
making good shall include but not limited to the following: 19.2.1 Replacing or making good all luminaires, control gears, capacitors, lamps,
switches, sockets-outlets, switched socket outlets, power points, fuses,
MCCB, MCB, ACB, RCCB, push buttons, contactors, starters, meters etc.
19.2.2 Replacing all consumable items that do not meet the manufacturer’s
guaranteed/declared life span or supplying 5% of the total quantity of
lamps of each type used in the project.
19.2.3 Replacing and making good all loose and burnt cables and termination, all
mechanical support linkage, earth electrode chambers and covers,
conduits, trunkings etc.
19.2.4 Making good any damage to roads, buildings, drains, cables, pipes,
concrete areas, paved areas etc. which had not been properly made
good arising out of his work.
19.2.5
19.3
All other works as deemed necessary by the S.O.'s Representative.
All works shall be carried out as soon as the Electrical Contractor is being informed
by the S.O.'s Representative or the occupant and shall be carried out immediately
and completed within a reasonable time except under emergency situation as
stipulated in the Supplementary Conditions for Electrical Work. If the Electrical
Contractor fails to comply with the above requirements, the S.O.'s Representative
reserves the right to engage another party to carry out the work, in which case, the
Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all the expenses incurred.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
20.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SHOP DRAWINGS, AS-INSTALLED
DRAWINGS, MANUALS AND TOOLS
Page: S20 - 1 of 3
20.0
SHOP DRAWINGS, AS-INSTALLED DRAWINGS, MANUALS AND TOOLS
20.1
SHOP DRAWINGS
20.1.1 2 sets of prints of shop drawings for construction and/or installation shall be
submitted to the S.O.’s Representative for approval. The Electrical Contractor shall
prepare and submit shop drawings for the whole work or parts of the work at least
minimum 2 weeks before the work begins. If the shop drawings submitted are not
acceptable by the S.O.’s Representative, the Electrical Contractor shall amend and
re-submit the shop drawings within 2 weeks from the date of return of the shop
drawings. No work including fabrication of the switchboards shall be carried out
without the shop drawings being approved by the S.O.’s Representative.
20.1.2 The shop drawings shall include and show the following:
20.1.2.1 The dimensioned general arrangements, layouts and positions of
luminaires, wiring accessories such as switches and switched socket
outlets, switchgears, distribution boards, switchboards and all others
necessary for the complete electrical installations as specified in the
Drawings and/or Bill of Quantities;
20.1.2.2 Circuits and switching arrangements including schematic line diagrams
of the installation;
20.1.2.3 The dimensioned general arrangements, layouts and routes of final
circuits;
20.1.2.4 The dimensioned general arrangements, layouts, routes and positions
of all lateral and vertical mains and/or submains;
20.1.2.5 The dimensioned layouts and positions of all holes and cut through in
the walls and floors for the lateral and vertical mains and/or submains;
20.1.2.6 The dimensioned general arrangements and layouts of the equipment
and the schematic line diagram of the switchboards;
20.1.2.7 Cable routes for all cables laid underground, in ducts and trenches;
20.1.2.8 The dimensioned general arrangements and layout of earthing system
including routes for earthing conductors and positions of earth
electrodes. The cost of all these shop drawings, whether or not
provided in the Bill of Quantities, is deemed to be included in the
Contract.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
20.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SHOP DRAWINGS, AS-INSTALLED
DRAWINGS, MANUALS AND TOOLS
Page: S20 - 2 of 3
20.2 AS-BUILT DOCUMENT AND TOOLS
20.2.1 As-Built document shall consist of but not limited to the As-Installed drawings,
manuals, certificates, catalogues, inventories and parts lists.
20.2.2 The As-Installed drawing shall comprise of:20.2.2.1 Site plan
20.2.2.2 Schematic Wiring Diagram
20.2.2.3 Electrical Layout Plans
20.2.2.4 Control Circuits drawings
20.2.2.5 Layout plans of cable routes
20.2.2.6 Earthing points with reference to easily recognisable buildings and
structures.
20.2.3 These drawings shall be labelled at the lower right hand corner with the Electrical
Contractor's name and address, date of commissioning, scale, drawing number
(the drawing number to be obtained from the S.O.'s Representative), title and
following particulars: JABATAN KERJA RAYA
CAWANGAN KEJURUTERAAN ELEKTRIK
CONTRACT NO.:
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
SECTION:
20.0
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 2
SHOP DRAWINGS, AS-INSTALLED
DRAWINGS, MANUALS AND TOOLS
Page: S20 - 3 of 3
20.2.4 If the drawings submitted are not according to the actual installation at site and/or
not acceptable to the S.O.'s Representative, the Electrical Contractor shall
amend and re -submit the drawings within two weeks from the date of return of
the drawings to the satisfaction of the S.O.'s Representative.
20.2.5 Manuals and documents for ACB, MCCB and other important electrical
switchgears shall be supplied.
20.2.6 The manual shall comprise of:20.2.6.1 Installation manual;
20.2.6.2 Operation manual;
20.2.6.3 Service and Maintenance Manual;
20.2.6.4 Parts List;
20.2.6.5 Product Data and catalogue;
20.2.6.6 Product Test Certificates;
20.2.7 Certificates shall comprise of:All Testing Certificates (as per section 18.2)
20.2.8 Catalogues, parts lists, inventories, shall be as per project requirements
20.2.9 Each of the As-Built documents shall be bound together with hard cover and
submitted in minimum four (4) sets upon issuance of Certificate of Practical
Completion of the project.
20.2.10 In addition, one set of the As-Installed drawing shall be submitted in the form of
tracing/original document, and two sets in CD ROM.
20.2.11 Special tools required for the operation, service and maintenance of ACB,
MCCB and other equipment shall also be provided.
20.2.12 The cost of all these prints, manuals, tools etc. is deemed to be included in the
Contract.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SECTION:
21.0
LIST OF STANDARD
Page: S21 - 1 of 10
STANDARD
DESCRIPTION
SPECIFICATION FOR PVC INSULATION AND SHEATH OF
MS 138
ELECTRIC CABLES
SPECIFICATION FOR 'KELUAR' SIGNS (INTERNALLY
MS 983
ILLUMINATED) (SECOND REVISION)
SPECIFICATION FOR DIRECT ACTING INDICATING
MS 925
ELECTRICAL MEASURING INSTRUMENTS AND THEIR
ACCESSSORIES
MS 619:PART 2-22 PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS-LUMINAIRES FOR
EMERGENCY LIGHTING (FIRST REVISION)
MS 1202
SPECIFICATION FOR CURRENT TRANSFORMERS
HOUSEHOLD AND SIMILAR ELECTRICAL APPLIANCES MS 1597: PART 2SAFETY - PART 2-80: PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS FOR
80
FANS
PERFORMANCE AND CONSTRUCTION OF ELECTRIC
MS 1220
CIRCULATING FANS AND REGULATORS
METHODS OF TESTING CONCRETE PART 2 : METHODS
MS 26: PART 2
OF TESTING HARDENED CONCRETE
SPECIFICATION FOR PVC-INSULATED CABLES FOR
MS 274
ELECTRICITY SUPPLY
SPECIFICATION FOR CONDUCTORS IN INSULATED
MS 69
CABLES AND CORDS
SPECIFICATION FOR COPPER FOR ELECTRICAL
PURPOSES, WIRE FOR GENERAL ELECTRICAL
MS 280
PURPOSES FOR INSULATED CABLES AND FLEXIBLE
CORDS
SPECIFICATION FOR PVC INSULATION AND SHEATH OF
MS 138
ELECTRIC CABLES
MS 275-1
SPECIFICATION FOR STEEL CONDUITS & FITTINGS WITH
METRIC THREADS OF ISO FORM FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION PART 1 : STEEL CONDUITS, BENDS &
COUPLERS (INTERNATIONALLY ACCEPTABLE SIZES)
MS 1534: PT 1
SPECIFICATION FOR CONDUIT SYSTEMSFOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION : PART 1 : GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
MS 1534:PT2 :SEC1 SPECIFICATION FOR CONDUIT SYSTEMS FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION :PART 2 : PARTICULAR
REQUIREMENTS :SECTION 1 : RIGID CONDUIT SYSTEMS
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SECTION:
21.0
LIST OF STANDARD
Page: S21 - 2 of 10
STANDARD
MS 616
MS 589
MS 1577
MS 1873
MS 770
MS 769
MS 141: PT 2
MS IEC 60038
MS IEC 60335-1
IEC 61035-2-2
IEC 61035-2-3
MS IEC 60598-1
MS IEC 60598-2-1
MS IEC 60598-2-2
DESCRIPTION
SWITCHES FOR HOUSEHOLD AND SIMILAR FIXEDELECTRICAL INSTALLATION: PART 1 : GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
SPECIFICATION FOR 13A PLUGS, SOCKET OUTLETS,
ADAPTORS AND CONNECTION UNITS
SPECIFICATION FOR 15 A PLUGS AND SOCKET-OUTLETS
FOR DOMESTIC AND SIMILAR PURPOSES
BOXES AND ENCLOSURES FOR ELECTRICAL
ACCESSORIES FOR HOUSEHOLD AND SIMILAR FIXED
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SPECIFICATION FOR CEILING ROSES
SPECIFICATION FOR BAYONET LAMPS - CAPS
LAMPHOLDERS AND B.C. ADAPTORS
SPECIFICATION FOR BALLASTS FOR TUBULAR
FLUORESCENT LAMPS : PART 2: PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS
IEC STANDARD VOLTAGES
HOUSEHOLD AND SIMILAR ELECTRICAL APPLIANCES –
SAFETY - PART 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SPECIFICATION FOR CONDUIT FITTINGS FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS - PART 2: PARTICULAR
SPECIFICATIONS - SECTION 2: CONDUIT FITTINGS OF
INSULATING MATERIAL
SPECIFICATION FOR CONDUIT FITTINGS FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS - PART 2: PARTICULAR
SPECIFICATIONS - SECTION 3: FITTINGS FOR FLEXIBLE
CONDUITS OF METAL, INSULATING OR COMPOSITE
MATERIALS AND FOR PLIABLE CONDUITS OF METAL OR
COMPOSITE MATERIALS
LUMINAIRES PART 1 : GENERAL REQUIREMENTS AND
TEST(SECOND REVISION)
LUMINAIRES PART 2 : PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS.
SECTION ONE: FIXED GENERAL PURPOSE LUMINAIRES
LUMINAIRES PART 2: PARTICULAR
REQUIREMENTS.SECTION TWO: RECESSED LUMINAIRES
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SECTION:
21.0
LIST OF STANDARD
Page: S21 – 3 of 10
STANDARD
MS IEC 60439-3
MS IEC 60439-5
MS IEC 61084
MS IEC 61537
MS IEC 60669-1
MS IEC 61643-1
MS IEC 60947-1
MS IEC 60947-2
MS IEC 60947-3
MS IEC 60947-4-1
DESCRIPTION
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROLGEAR
ASSEMBLIES – PART 3: PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS
FOR LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROLGEAR
ASSEMBLIES INTENDED TO BE INSTALLED IN PLACES
WHERE UNSKILLED PERSONS HAVE ACCESS FOR THEIR
USE – DISTRIBUTION BOARDS
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROLGEAR
ASSEMBLIES - PART 5: PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS FOR
ASSEMBLIES INTENDED TO BE INSTALLED OUTDOORS IN
PUBLIC PLACES - CABLE DISTRIBUTION CABINETS (CDCS)
FOR POWER DISTRIBUTION IN NETWORKS
CABLE TRUNKING AND DUCTING SYSTEMS FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION PART 1: GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
CABLE TRAY SYSTEMS AND CABLE LADDER SYSTEMS
FOR CABLE MANAGEMENT
SWITCHES FOR HOUSEHOLD AND SIMILAR FIXED
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION PART 1: GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES CONNECTED TO LOWVOLTAGE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS – PART 1:
PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS AND TESTING METHODS
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROLGEAR –
PART 1 : GENERAL RULES
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND CONTOLGEAR - PART
2: CIRCUIT-BREAKERS
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROLGEAR-PART
3: SWITCHES, DISCONNECTORS,SWITCHDISCONNECTORS AND FUSE-COMBINATION UNITS
LOW - VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROLGEAR PART 4-1: CONTACTORS AND MOTOR- STARTERS ELECTROMECHANICAL CONTACTORS AND MOTORSTARTERS
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SECTION:
21.0
LIST OF STANDARD
Page: S21 – 4 of 10
STANDARD
MS IEC 60439-1
MS IEC 61643-12
MS IEC 61643-331
MS IEC 61643-311
MS IEC 60364-5-54
MS IEC 60364-5-52
MS IEC 60439-2
MS IEC 60928
MS IEC 60929
MS IEC 61184
MS IEC 61000-3-2
DESCRIPTION
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND
CONTROLGEAR ASSEMBLIES – PART 1:TYPE-TESTED
AND PARTIALLY TYPE-TESTED ASSEMBLIES
LOW-VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES – PART 12 :
SURGE PROTECTIVE DEVICES CONNECTED TO LOWVOLTAGE POWER DISTRIBUTION SYSTEMS – SELECTION
AND APPLICATION PRINCIPLES
COMPONENTS FOR LOW-VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIVE
DEVICES - PART 331: SPECIFICATION FOR METAL OXIDE
VARISTORS (MOV)
COMPONENTS FOR LOW-VOLTAGE SURGE PROTECTIVE
DEVICES - PART 311: SPECIFICATION FOR GAS
DISCHARGE TUBES (GDT)
PERATURAN-PERATURAN ELEKTRIK 1994
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS – PART 5-54 :
SELECTION AND ERECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT:
EARTHING ARRANGEMENTS, PROTECTIVE CONDUCTORS
AND PROTECTIVE BONDING CONDUCTORS
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION OF BUILDINGS -PART 5-52:
SELECTION AND ERECTION OF ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
- WIRING SYSTEMS
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR ANDCONTROLGEAR
ASSEMBLIES –PART 2 : PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS
FOR BUSBAR TRUNKING SYSTEMS
SPECIFICATION FOR A.C SUPPLIED ELECTRONIC
BALLASTS FOR TUBULAR FLUORESCENT LAMPSGENERAL AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS.
SPECIFICATION FOR A.C SUPPLIED ELECTRONIC
BALLASTS FOR TUBULAR FLUORESCENT LAMPSPERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS.
BAYONET LAMPHOLDERS
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC) - PART 3 :
LIMITS - SECTION 2 : LIMITS FOR HARMONIC CURRENT
EMISIONS (EQUIPMENT INPUT CURRENT LESS THAN AND
EQUAL TO 16A PER PHASE)
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SECTION:
21.0
LIST OF STANDARD
Page: S21 - 5 of 10
STANDARD
MS IEC 61048
MS IEC 61049
MS IEC 60155
MS IEC 60400
MS IEC 61347-1
MS IEC 61347-2-3
MS IEC 61347-2-8
MS IEC 61000
MS IEC 61008-1
MS IEC 61008-2-1
MS IEC 61009-1
MS IEC 61009-2-1
DESCRIPTION
AUXILIARIES FOR LAMPS - CAPACITORS FOR USE IN
TUBULAR FLUORESCENT AND OTHER DISCHARGE LAMP
CIRCUITS - GENERAL AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
CAPACITORS FOR USE IN TUBULAR FLUORESCENT AND
OTHER DISCHARGE LAMP CIRCUITS PERFORMANCE
REQUIREMENTS
GLOW-STARTERS FOR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
LAMPHOLDERS FOR TUBULAR FLUORESCENT LAMPS AND
STARTERHOLDERS (FIRST REVISION)
LAMP CONTROL GEARPART 1:GENERAL AND SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
LAMP CONTROL GEAR-PART 2-3:PARTICULAR
REQUIREMENTS FOR A.C SUPPLIED ELECTRONIC
BALLASTA FOR FLUORESCENT LAMPS
LAMP CONTROLGEAR – PART 2-8: PARTICULAR
REQUIREMENTS FOR BALLASATS FOR FLUORESCENT
LAMPS
ELECTROMAGNETIC COMPATIBILITY (EMC)
RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT-BREAKERS
WITHOUT INTEGRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION FOR
HOUSEHOLD AND SIMILAR USES (RCCBs) - PART 1:
GENERAL RULES
RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT- BREAKERS
WITHOUT INTEGRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION FOR
HOUSEHOLD AND SIMILAR USES (RCCB’s) -PART 2-1 :
APPLICABILITY OF THE GENERAL RULES TO RCCB’s
FUNCTIONALLY INDEPENDENT OF LINE VOLTAGE
RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT-BREAKERS WITH
INTEGRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION FOR HOUSEHOLD
AND SIMILAR USES (RCBOs) - PART 1: GENERAL RULES
RESIDUAL CURRENT OPERATED CIRCUIT-BREAKERS WITH
INTEGRAL OVERCURRENT PROTECTION FOR HOUSEHOLD
AND SIMILAR USES (RCBOS) – PART 2-1: APPLICABILITY
OFTHE GENERAL RULES TO RCBOS FUNCTIONALLY
INDEPENDENT OF LINE VOLTAGE
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SECTION:
21.0
LIST OF STANDARD
Page: S21 - 6 of 10
STANDARD
MS IEC 60898-1
MS IEC 60898-2
MS IEC 62305
DESCRIPTION
ELECTRICAL ACCESSORIES - CIRCUIT-BREAKERS FOR
OVERCURRENT PROTECTION FOR HOUSEH OLD AND
SIMILAR INSTALLATIONS - PART 1: CIRCUIT-BREAKERS
FOR A.C. OPERATION
CIRCUIT-BREAKERS FOR OVERCURRENT PROTECTION
FOR HOUSEHOLD AND SIMILAR INSTALLATIONS - PART
2:CIRCUIT-BREAKERS FOR A.C. AND D.C. OPERATION
PROTECTION AGAINST LIGHTNING - PART 1: GENERAL
PRINCIPLES (FIRST REVISION)
MS IEC 60838
MISCELLANEOUS LAMPHOLDERS
MS IEC 60238
EDISON SCREW LAMPHOLDERS (FIRST REVISION)
INSTRUMENT TRANSFORMERS - PART 1: CURRENT
TRANSFORMERS
DIRECT ACTING INDICATING ANALOGUE ELECTRICAL
MEASURING INSTRUMENTS AND THEIR ACCESSORIES
ELECTRICAL AND ELECTRONIC MEASUREMENT
EQUIPMENT - EXPRESSION OF PERFORMANCE
IEC 60044-1
IEC 60051
IEC 60359
IEC 60255
IEC 60269
MEASURING RELAYS AND PROTECTION EQUIPMENT
LOW-VOLTAGE FUSES - PART 1: GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
IEC 60445
BASIC AND SAFETY PRINCIPLES FOR MAN-MACHINE
INTERFACE, MARKING AND IDENTIFICATION IDENTIFICATION OF EQUIPMENT TERMINALS, CONDUCTOR
TERMINATIONS AND CONDUCTORS
IEC 60947-6-1
LOW-VOLTAGE SWITCHGEAR AND CONTROLGEAR – PART
6-1: MULTIPLE FUNCTION EQUIPMENT- TRANSFER
SWITCHING EQUIPMENT
IEC 60598-2-22
MS IEC 60529
LUMINAIRES –
PART 2-22: PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS – LUMINAIRES
FOR EMERGENCY LIGHTING
DEGREES OF PROTECTION PROVIDED BY ENCLOSURES
(IP CODE)
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SECTION:
21.0
LIST OF STANDARD
Page: S21 - 7 of 10
STANDARD
IEC 60502
IEC 60702
IEC 60331
IEC 60332-1
IEC 60332-3
IEC 61034
IEC 60423
IEC 61386-1
IEC 61386-21
IEC 60614-1
IEC 60614-2-2
IEC 60670-1
IEC 60901
IEC 61199
DESCRIPTION
POWER CABLES WITH EXTRUDED INSULATION AND THEIR
ACCESSORIES FOR RATED VOLTAGES FROM 1 KV (UM =
1,2 KV) UP TO 30 KV (UM = 36 KV)
MINERAL INSULATED CABLES AND THEIR TERMINATIONS
WITH A RATED VOLTAGE NOT EXCEEDING 750 V
TESTS FOR ELECTRIC CABLES UNDER FIRE CONDITIONS CIRCUIT INTEGRITY
TESTS ON ELECTRIC AND OPTICAL FIBRE CABLES UNDER
FIRE CONDITIONS.
TESTS ON ELECTRIC AND OPTICAL FIBRE CABLES UNDER
FIRE CONDITIONS
MEASUREMENT OF SMOKE DENSITY OF CABLES BURNING
UNDER DEFINED CONDITIONS
CONDUIT SYSTEMS FOR CABLE MANAGEMENT - OUTSIDE
DIAMETERS OF CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATION (L-S1)S AND THREADS FOR CONDUITS AND
FITTINGS
CONDUIT SYSTEMS FOR CABLE MANAGEMENT - PART 1:
GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
CONDUIT SYSTEMS FOR CABLE MANAGEMENT - PART 21:
PARTICULAR REQUIREMENTS - RIGID CONDUIT SYSTEMS
CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION SPECIFICATION
PART 1
CONDUIT FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION. PARTICULAR
SPECIFICATIONS. SPECIFICATIONS FOR RIGID PLAIN
CONDUITS OF INSULATING MATERIAL
BOXES AND ENCLOSURES FOR ELECTRICAL
ACCESSORIES FOR HOUSEHOLD AND SIMILAR FIXED
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION (L-S1)S - PART 1: GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
SINGLE-CAPPED FLUORESCENT LAMPS - PERFORMANCE
SPECIFICATIONS
SINGLE-CAPPED FLUORESCENT LAMPS - SAFETY
SPECIFICATIONS
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SECTION:
21.0
LIST OF STANDARD
Page: S21 - 8 of 10
STANDARD
IEC 60968
IEC 60969
IEC 60252-1
IEC 61010-1
IEC 61557-1
IEC 60364-6
MS IEC 60081
MS IEC 61195
IEC 60754-2
IEC 61035-1
IEC 61035-2-1
IEEE Std C62.41.2
DESCRIPTION
SELF-BALLASTED LAMPS FOR GENERAL LIGHTING
SERVICES - SAFETY REQUIREMENTS
SELF-BALLASTED LAMPS FOR GENERAL LIGHTING
SERVICES - PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
AC MOTOR CAPACITORS - PART 1: GENERAL PERFORMANCE, TESTING AND RATING - SAFETY
REQUIREMENTS - GUIDANCE FOR INSTALLATION AND
OPERATION
SAFETY REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL EQUIPMENT
FOR MEASUREMENT, CONTROL, AND LABORATORY USE PART 1: GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
ELECTRICAL SAFETY IN LOW VOLTAGE DISTRIBUTION
SYSTEMS UP TO 1 000 V A.C. AND 1 500 V D.C. EQUIPMENT FOR TESTING, MEASURING OR MONITORING
OF PROTECTIVE MEASURES - PART 1: GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS
LOW-VOLTAGE ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION - PART 6:
VERIFICATION
DOUBLE-CAPPED FLUORESCENT LAMPS PERFORMANCE SPECIFICATIONS (IEC 60081:2003, IDT)
DOUBLE - CAPPED FLUORESCENT LAMPS - SAFETY
SPECIFICATIONS (IEC 61195 : 1999, IDT)
TEST ON GASES EVOLVED DURING COMBUSTION OF
ELECTRIC CABLES - PART 2: DETERMINATION OF
DEGREE OF ACIDITY OF GASES EVOLVED DURING THE
COMBUSTION OF MATERIALS TAKEN FROM ELECTRIC
CABLES BY MEASURING PH AND CONDUCTIVITY
SPECIFICATION FOR CONDUIT FITTINGS FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION PART 1: GENERAL
REQUIREMENTS.
SPECIFICATION FOR CONDUIT FITTINGS FOR
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION PART 2: PARTICULAR
SPECIFICATIONS - SECTION 1: METAL CONDUIT FITTINGS.
IEEE RECOMMENDED PRACTICE ON CHARACTERIZATION
OF SURGES IN LOW-VOLTAGE (1000 V AND LESS) AC
POWER CIRCUITS
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SECTION:
21.0
LIST OF STANDARD
Page: S21 - 9 of 10
STANDARD
BS 5467
BS 6346
BS 6387
BS EN 50086-1
BS 1710
BS 4800
BS 1322
BS EN 13601
BS 7671
BS EN 55015
BS EN 50262
IEC 60614-2-5
MS 1873 PART 24
IEC 60670-24
DESCRIPTION
ELECTRIC CABLES. THERMOSETTING INSULATED,
ARMOURED CABLES FOR VOLTAGES OF 600/1000 V AND
1900/3300 V
ELECTRIC CABLES. PVC INSULATED, ARMOURED CABLES
FOR VOLTAGES OF 600/1000 V AND 1900/3300 V
SPECIFICATION FOR PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS FOR
CABLES REQUIRED TO MAINTAIN CIRCUIT INTEGRITY
UNDER FIRE CONDITIONS
SPECIFICATION FOR CONDUIT SYSTEMS FOR CABLE
MANAGEMENT. GENERAL REQUIREMENTS
SPECIFICATION FOR IDENTIFICATION OF PIPELINES AND
SERVICES
SCHEDULE OF PAINT COLOURS FOR BUILDING PURPOSES
SPECIFICATION FOR AMINOPLASTIC MOULDING
MATERIALS
COPPER AND COPPER ALLOYS. COPPER ROD, BAR AND
WIRE FOR GENERAL ELECTRICAL PURPOSES
REQUIREMENTS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
LIMITS AND METHODS OF MEASUREMENT OF RADIO
DISTURBANCE CHARACTERISTICS OF ELECTRICAL
LIGHTING AND SIMILAR EQUIPMENT
CABLE GLANDS FOR ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
SPECIFICATIONS FOR CONDUITS FOR ELECTRICAL
INSTALLATIONS - PART 2: PARTICULAR SPECIFICATIONS
FOR CONDUITS - SECTION 5: FLEXIBLE CONDUITS
BOXES AND ENCLOSURES FOR ELECTRICAL
ACCESSORIES FOR HOUSEHOLD AND SIMILAR FIXED
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS - PART 24: PARTICULAR
REQUIREMENTS FOR ENCLOSURES FOR HOUSING
PROTECTIVE DEVICES AND SIMILAR POWER CONSUMING
DEVICES (IEC 60670-24:2005, IDT)
BOXES AND ENCLOSURES FOR ELECTRICAL
ACCESSORIES FOR HOUSEHOLD AND SIMILAR FIXED
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATIONS - PART 24: PARTICULAR
REQUIREMENTS FOR ENCLOSURES FOR HOUSING
PROTECTIVE DEVICES AND SIMILAR POWER CONSUMING
DEVICES (IEC 60670-24:2005, IDT)
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
INTERNAL
ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION
(L-S1)
CKE.LS.01.01.(04).2017
Date: Jan 2018
Section Revision: 3
SECTION:
21.0
LIST OF STANDARD
Page: S21 – 10 of 10
STANDARD
MS 2112-3
MS 2112-4
IEC 60688
IEC 62471
IEC 61547
IEC 61347-2-13
IEC 62384
IEC 62031
IEC 60838-2-2
IES LM-79-08
IES LM-80-08
DESCRIPTION
ELECTRIC CABLE AND WIRE - POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC)
INSULATED CABLES OF RATED VOLTAGES UP TO AND
INCLUDING 450/750 V - PART 3: NON-SHEATHED CABLES
FOR FIXED WIRING
ELECTRIC CABLE AND WIRE - POLYVINYL CHLORIDE (PVC)
INSULATED CABLES OF RATED VOLTAGES UP TO AND
INCLUDING 450/750 V - PART 4: SHEATHED CABLES FOR
FIXED WIRING
ELECTRICAL
MEASURING
TRANSDUCERS
FOR
CONVERTING A.C. AND D.C. ELECTRICAL QUANTITIES TO
ANALOGUE OR DIGITAL SIGNALS
PHOTOBIOLOGICAL SAFETY OF LAMPS AND LAMP
SYSTEMS
EQUIPMENT FOR GENERAL LIGHTING PURPOSES – EMC
IMMUNITY REQUIREMENT
LAMP CONTROLGEAR – PART 2-13: PARTICULAR
REQUIREMENT FOR D.C. OR A.C. SUPPLIED ELECTRONIC
CONTROLGEAR FOR LED MODULES
DC OR AC SUPPLIED FOR CONTROL GEAR FOR LED
MODULES – PERFORMANCE REQUIREMENTS
LED MODULES FOR GENERAL LIGHTING – SAFETY
SPECIFICATIONS
MISCELLANEOUS LAMPHOLDER PART 2-2: PARTICULAR
REQUIREMENTS – CONNECTORS FOR LED MODULES
APPROVED METHOD: ELECTRICAL AND PHOTOMETRIC.
MEASUREMENTS OF SOLID STATE LIGHTING PRODUCTS
APPROVED METHOD: MEASURING LUMEN MAINTENANCE
OF LED LIGHT SOURCES
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE INTERNAL ELECTRICAL INSTALLATION ©
Hak Cipta: April 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page i of iii
SECTION
CONTENT
PAGE
1.0
General
S1-1 of 1
2.0
Types of Cables
S2-1 of 2
3.0
Cable Routes
S3-1 of 1
4.0
Length of Cable
S4-1 of 1
5.0
Cable Trench
S5-1 of 1
6.0
Cable Ducts
S6-1 of 1
7.0
Traffic Safety and Control
S7-1 of 1
8.0
Cable Laying and Installation
8.1
Cable Laid Direct in Ground
8.2
Cable Installed in Cable Channel
8.3
Cable Run on Walls and Underfloor Slabs
8.4
Cable Run on Cable Tray
8.5
Cable Run on Cable Ladder
S8-1 of 7
9.0
Cable Termination, Cable Jointing and Cable Lug
9.1
Cable Termination for Armoured Cable
9.2
Cable Jointing
9.3
Cable Lug
9.4
Bi-metal Cable Lug
S9-1 of 7
10.0
Cable Markers
S10-1 of 3
11.0
Testing and Commissioning
11.1 Test Instruments
11.2 Test and Test Certificates
S11-1 of 1
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: ii of iii
SECTION
CONTENT
PAGE
12.0
Service and Maintenance
S12-1 of 1
13.0
Working Drawings, As Installed Drawings and
As Built Documents
S13-1 of 2
13.1
13.2
13.3
14.0
Working Drawings
As Installed Drawings
As Built Documents
List of Standards
S14-1 of 2
`
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta: 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE
UNDERGROUND CABLE
(L-S3)
Revision: 1
Date: September 2020
Page: iii of iii
FIGURE
CONTENT
PAGE
1
Cable Laid Direct In Ground
S8-2 of 7
2
uPVC Cable Protective Cover
S8-3 of 7
3
Markings of Cable Lug
S9–5 of 7
4
Markings of Bi-Metal Cable Lug
S9–7 of 7
5
Cable Marker – Joint Sign & Lettering
S10–1 of 3
6
Cable Marker – Directional Sign & Letter
S10–2 of 3
7
Cable Marker – Construction
S10–3 of 3
TABLE
CONTENT
PAGE
1
uPVC Cable Protective Cover Dimension
S8–3 of 7
2
Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of
Protective Conductors
S9–2 of 7
3
Material Specification for Cable Lug
S9–4 of 7
4
Finishing Specification for Cable Lug
S9–4 of 7
5
6
Material Specification for Copper Bi-Metal
Cable Lug
Material Specification for Aluminium Barrel BiMetal Cable Lug
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
S9–6 of 7
S9–6 of 7
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S1 - 1 of 1
1.0
GENERAL
1.1 SCOPE
1.1.1 This section of the Specification describes and specifies requirements for the
supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning and handing over in
approved working order and maintenance during the Defects Liability Period of
the underground cabling works in accordance with the Conditions of Contracts,
Bill of Quantities, Drawings and other related documents.
1.2
STANDARDS
1.2.1
All standards shall conform to the latest Malaysia Standards (MS), International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), MS IEC, British Standard (BS), and /or BS
EN standard.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S2 - 1 of 2
2.1
TYPES OF CABLES
2.1
This specification shall cover the following types of cables: -
2.1.1 PVC/SWA/PVC Cable (Polyvinyl Chloride / Steel Wire Armoured / Polyvinyl Chloride)
- Cable shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with MS 2103. The conductors
shall be of Class 2 (stranded conductors) plain aluminium or plain annealed copper in
accordance with MS IEC 60228 insulated with polyvinyl chloride (PVC) suitable for a
voltage of 600/1000 V laid together and bedded with PVC, armoured with galvanised
steel wires and sheathed with PVC. The maximum conductor temperatures during
normal operation is 70°C in accordance with MS 2103. The conductor shall be of
annealed copper or else specified.
2.1.2 PVC/AWA/PVC Cable (Polyvinyl Chloride / Aluminium Wire Armoured / Polyvinyl
Chloride) - Cable shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with MS 2101. The
conductors shall be of Class 2 (stranded conductors) plain aluminium or plain annealed
copper in accordance with MS IEC 60228 insulated with polyvinyl chloride (PVC)
suitable for a voltage of 600/1000 V laid together and bedded with PVC, armoured with
aluminium wires and sheathed with PVC. The maximum conductor temperatures during
normal operation is 70°C in accordance with MS 2101. The conductor shall be of
annealed copper or else specified.
2.1.3 XLPE/SWA/PVC Cable (Cross-linked Polyethylene / Steel Wire Armoured / Polyvinyl
Chloride) - Cable shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with MS 2107 or IEC
60502-1. The conductors shall be of Class 2 (stranded conductors) plain aluminium or
plain annealed copper in accordance with MS IEC 60228 insulated with cross-linked
polyethylene (XLPE), suitable for a voltage of 600/1000 V laid together and bedded
with extruded PVC, armoured with galvanised steel wires and sheathed with PVC. The
maximum conductor temperature during normal operation is 90°C in accordance with
IEC 60502-1. The conductor shall be of annealed copper or else specified.
2.1.4 XLPE/AWA/PVC Cable (Cross-linked Polyethylene / Aluminium Wire Armoured /
Polyvinyl Chloride) - Cable shall be manufactured and tested in accordance with MS
2105 and IEC 60502-1. The conductors shall be of Class 2 (stranded conductors) plain
aluminium or plain annealed copper in accordance with MS IEC 60228 insulated with
cross-linked polyethylene (XLPE), suitable for a voltage of 600/1000 V laid together
and bedded with extruded PVC, armoured with aluminium wires and sheathed with
PVC. The maximum conductor temperatures during normal operation is 90°C in
accordance with IEC 60502-1. The conductor shall be of annealed copper or else
specified.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S2 - 2 of 2
2.1.5 All cable shall be legibly and durable marked on the external surface of the cable with
at least the following elements;
a) Manufacturer’s identification,
b) Voltage designation,
c) Manufacturing year and the standard number.
d) Number of core (optional)
e) Nominal cross-sectional area and type of conductor (optional)
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S3 - 1 of 1
3.0
CABLE ROUTES
3.1
Cable routes shown in the Drawings are for tendering purpose only. The Electrical
Contractor shall submit working drawings as required in Section 13.0 of the proposed
routes and peg out the cable routes for the approval of the S.O / S.O's Representative
prior to excavation of the cable trenches. The work programme for excavation of
cable trenches, cable piping, laying of cables, reinstatement of trenches etc. shall be
submitted to the S.O / S.O's Representative for approval one week before execution
of the work.
3.2
The Electrical Contractor shall make available all necessary insurance or guarantee
and shall also ensure all approvals are obtained from relevant authorities prior to
commencing works. The Electrical Contractor shall be responsible in making good any
damage to buildings, tarmacs, pavements, concrete areas, slopes, drains, culverts,
pipes, etc. which had not been properly make good arising out of his work.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S4 - 1 of 1
4.0
LENGTH OF CABLE
4.1
The length of cable each indicated in the Drawings and/or Bill of Quantities is for
tendering purpose only. The Electrical Contractor shall ascertain the length of each
cable required before ordering. Actual length of each cable installed shall be
measured on site and the Electrical Contractor shall be paid according to the unit rate
in the Contract. However, the rates quoted shall include wastage due to cutting to
lengths, terminations, etc.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S5 - 1 of 1
5.0
CABLE TRENCH
5.1
Unless otherwise specified, cable trenches shall be 750mm depth below finished
ground level. The trenches shall be of sufficient width to enable provision of adequate
spacing between cables but in any case, shall be of minimum 450mm wide.
5.2
Trenches shall be kept as straight as possible and shall have vertical sides which
shall be protected where necessary to avoid subsidence and damage. The bottom of
the trenches shall be firm and of smooth contour and any other objects likely to
damage the cable sheathing shall be removed. The material excavated from the
trenches shall be placed or removed so as to prevent nuisance or damage to adjacent
areas or buildings.
5.3
The trench excavation and filling-in shall be executed that all roads, walls, sewers,
drains, pipes, cables, structures, etc. shall be reasonably secured against risk of
subsidence damage. Provision shall be made, during excavation and until interim
restoration has been completed, for reasonable access of persons and vehicles to
the areas of buildings adjacent to the trenches.
5.4
The Electrical Contractor shall provide pumps and other appliances for the necessary
pumping required for the disposal of water to prevent any risk of the cables and other
materials to be laid in the trenches being detrimentally affected. Where necessary,
bailing shall be provided.
5.5
Where trenches pass from a footway to a roadway or at other positions where a change
of level is necessary, the bottom of the trench shall rise or fall gradually as per S.O /
S.O’s Representative approval.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S6 - 1 of 1
6.0
CABLE DUCTS
6.1
At road crossings, sewerage pipe crossings, water pipe crossings, paved areas,
concrete areas, and where specified by the S.O / S.O's Representative, cables shall
be protected by heavy duty galvanised iron class B or class C (Road work), or heavy
duty uPVC Class D or High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) PN10 pipes buried to a
depth of 900mm below finished ground level. The pipes shall be of heavy-duty type,
complying with MS 863 or MS 628 or MS 1058 respectively and complete with
screwed and socketed joints. Unless otherwise specified the pipes shall be 150mm in
diameter. Where it is necessary to cross drains, culverts or similar obstructions, which
is too deep for the cables to be buried below, galvanised iron class B or uPVC class
D pipes as specified above shall be provided. All ducts shall be extended at least
600mm beyond paved areas, concrete areas, drains, road crossings, pipe crossings,
etc.
6.2
Cable entering a building shall be protected by heavy duty galvanised iron class B or
or heavy-duty uPVC class D or High-Density Polyethylene (HDPE) PN10 or
complying with MS 863 or MS 628 or MS 1058 respectively as specified of 150mm in
diameter completed with bend pieces, and buried under the ground beam. The ducts
shall be installed with a gradient to drain away any water in the ducts. All ducts passing
through walls shall be effectively sealed and made water resistant internally (in
between cables) and externally (in between pipes).
6.3
The number of cables installed in each duct shall be such that the space factor shall
be of maximum 40%. A draw wire shall be provided for each duct.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S7 - 1 of 1
7.0
TRAFFIC SAFETY AND CONTROL
7.1
When work is being carried out beside any public road or other existing road,
appropriate temporary signage for warning signs shall be erected by the Electrical
Contractor. The form, placing and light of the temporary signs must comply with all
local and national regulations, Arahan Teknik Jalan JKR and safety codes for road
works.
7.2
Where it is necessary for any trench, pit or manhole to be left open overnight, ample
flashing lights (blinkers) shall be placed at each end and at intervals not greater than
10 metres. In built up areas barricades shall be erected along the length of the trench
pit or manhole in addition to flashing lights. Flag-men shall be stationed at strategic
locations to control prevailing traffic. Where necessary or as directed by the S.O /
S.O’s Representative.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S8 - 1 of 7
8.0
CABLE LAYING AND INSTALLATION
8.0.1
All cables shall be handled, laid and installed according to this specification, MS IEC
60364-5-52 and cable manufacturer's recommendations by using proper installation
equipment and tools.
8.0.2
All cables shall be supplied in complete length to suit the circuits they serve, and no
straight through joints shall be used. Straight through joints or other approved joints in
the cable, will only be permitted in very exceptional circumstances such as arising
from unavoidable limitations in manufacturing length. If straight through joints or other
approved joints is permitted, the cost of such joints shall be borned by the Electrical
Contractor. No joints in the cable will be allowed unless approved in writing by S.O /
S.O's Representative.
8.0.3
The minimum internal bending radius of the cable shall be of minimum 12 times the
overall diameter of the cable. Wherever cables are cut, the ends shall be immediately
sealed in an approved manner unless it is intended to proceed with cable jointing for
termination straight away.
8.0.4
No cable shall be laid and covered up in the absence of the S.O / S.O’s
Representative.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S8 - 2 of 7
8.1
CABLE LAID DIRECT IN GROUND
8.1.1
Before cable is laid, the trench shall be thoroughly inspected, any debris and sharp
objects shall be removed. The bottom of the trench shall be covered with a layer of
75mm of washed river sand. The cables shall then be laid on this bedding in an orderly
manner without overlapping and crossing each other. After laying the cables, a layer
of 75mm of washed river sand shall cover the cables and carefully spread over the
trench before placing the cable protective covers as shown in Figure 1.
Figure 1: Cable Laid Direct In Ground
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S8 - 3 of 7
8.1.2
Unless otherwise specified, uPVC cable protective covers complying with BS EN
12613 shall be of polyvinylchloride without plasticizer type with specific density
between 1.37g/cm3 to 1.42g/cm3 as shown in Figure 2, Figure 3 and Table 1 approved
by the S.O / S.O’s Representative. The uPVC cover shall be resistant to aggressive
soils and of dimension 150mm / 250mm wide and 1000mm long. The covers shall be
single coloured green and top side shall be embossed with standard danger sign and
bold letters “BAHAYA! KABEL ELEKTRIK DI BAWAH”. The covers shall be
provided with male and female interlocking device. The covers are laid together
lengthwise from end to end along the entire cable route and they are held together
tightly by the interlocking device. At least 25 mm overhang on each side of the cable
shall be provided to protect the cable underneath.
Figure 2: uPVC Cable Protective Cover
SIZE (mm)
150/1000
a
150
b
1000
c
35
d
50
t
2.0
250/1000
250
1000
60
100
2.0
Table 1 : uPVC Cable Protective Cover Dimension
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S8 - 4 of 7
8.1.3
If the cable protective covers are of clay bricks, the bricks shall be new, well burnt and
in complete pieces. They shall be laid lengthwise from end to end along the entire
route of the underground cable if the cable size is not more than 120mm2. For cable
size more than 120mm2, more than one row of the bricks shall be laid. Each shall be
separately protected by these bricks and the cover shall have at least 25mm overhang
on each side of the cable.
8.1.4
The trench shall then be backfilled with earth and shall be consolidated after every
150 mm of backfilling using a mechanical rammer / compactor. Multi-strand orange
nylon rope of minimum (six) 6 mm diameter shall be laid at a depth of 300mm along
the trench to identify the cable route. At every 10 meters interval, an extra (two) 2
meters length of nylon rope shall be coiled. The finished surface shall be left proud by
50mm to allow for subsidence and the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for
the removal of any surplus to a position indicated by the S.O / S.O's Representative.
8.1.5
The surface of the refilled trench shall be temporarily reinstated and maintained in a
thoroughly safe condition until complete consolidation of the soil is achieved. As soon
as the soil has consolidated, the trenches shall be made good to the original conditions
to the satisfaction of the S.O / S.O's Representative.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S8 - 5 of 7
8.2
CABLE INSTALLED IN CABLE CHANNEL
8.2.1
Method of installation of cables in cable channel shall be in accordance with Method
in Table A.52.3 of MS IEC 60364-5-52.
8.2.2
Cables laid at the bottom of the trenches shall be in accordance with Table A.52.3 of
MS IEC 60364-5-52.
8.2.3
The trenches inside the buildings shall be filled with washed river sand above cable
ducts.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S8 - 6 of 7
8.3
CABLE RUN ON WALLS AND UNDER FLOOR SLABS
8.3.1
Cable run on walls and under floor slabs shall be mounted on perforated hot dipped
galvanised sheet steel cable trays or cable ladders. Method of installation of the cables
shall be in accordance with Table A.52.3 of MS IEC 60364-5-52. The construction and
finished of the cable trays or cable ladders and the method of installation of the cables
on the cable trays shall be as described in L-S1 Specification.
8.4
CABLE RUN ON CABLE TRAY
8.4.1
The cable tray system shall comply with MS IEC 61537 and shall be fabricated from
perforated hot dipped galvanized sheet steel complete with all necessary bends, tee
pieces, adaptors and other accessories. The perforated hot dipped galvanised sheet
steel cable trays shall be minimum of (two) 2.0mm thickness. The hangers, brackets
and other suspending and supporting structures shall be hot dipped galvanized. All
brackets shall be securely fastened with steel raw bolts and nuts. Samples of cable tray
and bracket shall be submitted to the S.O / S.O's Representative for approval prior to
installation.
8.4.2
The cable trays shall be suspended from floor slabs by hangers or mounted on wall by
brackets at 600mm interval.
8.4.3
Whenever cable trays pass through floors or fire-resistant walls, the cables shall be
sealed with fire resisting barrier of non-hygroscopic fire-resisting material at minimum
(two) 2-hour fire rating. The floor openings and wall openings shall also be sealed with
similar type of compound.
8.4.4
To provide electrical continuity, all cable tray joints shall be bridged by means of tinned
copper tape of dimension not less than 25 mm x 3 mm.
8.4.5
The minimum bending radius shall be not less than 12 times the cable overall diameter
and steel bend spacing not more than 500mm for vertical run and 1000mm for horizontal
run. All steel bend complying with BS EN 61914 for cables on cable trays shall be
installed by bolts, washers and nuts. All cable tray tees, intersection units, adaptor units
etc. shall be factory manufactured.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S8 - 7 of 7
8.5
CABLE RUN ON CABLE LADDER
8.5.1
Cable ladder system shall comply with MS IEC 61537 and fabricated from mild steel
and finished in hot-dipped galvanised steel complete with all necessary horizontal
elbow, horizontal tee, horizontal cross, reducer straight, outside riser, inside riser,
reducer left, reducer right, cable clamp, cantilever arm, hold down clip/clamp, hanger
bar, vertical bar for welded type and horizontal splice plate for screwed type. The sheet
steel shall be minimum of (two) 2.0mm thickness.
8.5.2
Cable ladder may either be suspended from floor slabs by hangers or mounted on walls
or vertical structure by cantilever arm. Cable ladder shall be supported rigidly and
adequately by external spring hangers mounted on channel base. The cable ladder shall
be supported at maximum intervals of 3000mm for vertical runs and 1500mm for
horizontal runs so that the cable ladder will not be in contact with the wall or floor slab
surfaces. The spring hangers shall be supplied by the cable ladder manufacturer. All
supports, hangers and structures shall be robust in construction and adequately
installed to cater for the weights of the cables and ladder supported on them so that
cable ladder and cables will not sag.
8.5.3
All cable ladder joints shall be bridged by means of tinned copper tape of dimension not
less than 25mm x 3mm for electrical continuity.
8.5.4
Minimum bending radius shall be not less than 12 times the cable overall diameter and
steel bend spacing not more than 500mm for vertical run and 1000mm for horizontal
run. All steel bend complying with BS EN 61914 for cables on cable ladder shall be
installed by bolts, washers and nuts. All cable ladder tees, intersection units, adaptor
units, etc. shall be factory manufactured.
.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S9 - 1 of 7
9.0
CABLE TERMINATION, CABLE JOINTING AND CABLE LUG
9.0.1
All cable termination and jointing works shall only be carried out in the presence of the
S.O / S.O's Representative. A plastic laminated plate engraved with details such as size
of cable, number of core, date of commissioning, date of jointing, length of cable,
distance of cable joint, etc. shall be securely fixed near the termination. All cable
terminations and jointing shall be undertaken by Certified Cable Jointer (PK1) as
prescribed in Electricity Regulations 1994. The Electrical Contractor shall submit the
certificate of Certified Cable Jointer to S.O / S.O’s Representative.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S9 - 2 of 7
9.1
CABLE TERMINATION FOR ARMOURED CABLE
9.1.1
PVC/SWA/PVC, PVC/AWA/PVC, XLPE/SWA/PVC and XLPE/AWA/PVC cable shall
be provided with compression cable gland for termination.
9.1.2
Cable glands shall be installed for termination of armoured cables. It shall be
mechanical type complying with BS EN 50262. Each cable gland shall be installed
with back nuts (lock nuts) for plain hole fixing.
9.1.3
Cable gland shall be installed for termination of steel armoured multicore cables and
shall comply with BS EN 50262. The cross sectional of a protective conductor
connecting a gland earth tag washer to the switchboard earthing bar shall be selected
in accordance with Table 54.3 of MS IEC 60364-5-54 (Table 2).
Crosssectional area
of line
conductor S
Minimum cross-sectional area of the
corresponding protective conductor
(mm)2
If the protective
If the protective conductor
conductor is not of the
is of the same material as
(mm)2
same material
the line conductor
as the line conductor
𝑘1
𝑆 ≤ 16
𝑆
𝑥𝑆
𝑘2
𝑘1
𝑥 16
16 < 𝑆 ≤ 35
16
𝑘2
𝑘1 𝑆
𝑆
𝑆 > 35
𝑥
𝑘2 2
2
Table 2: Minimum Cross-Sectional Area of Protective Conductors
9.1.4
The heat shrinkable termination materials used shall be supplied in a complete kit to
suit various sizes of cable and to provide stress control, non-tracking and
environmentally sealed termination. It shall consist of high permittivity, high resistivity,
heat shrinkable, stress control, UV stable, non-tracking polymeric materials and heat
activated sealant to prevent ingress of moisture and contamination. The termination
shall meet the sequence test of IEC 60112 and the conductors shall be identified by
colour.
9.1.5 Protective conductor for single core aluminium wire armoured underground cables shall
be of aluminium braided type.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S9 - 3 of 7
9.2
CABLE JOINTING
9.2.1
The type of cable boxes, compound and jointing materials used shall be factory
manufactured. Cast iron joint boxes shall be used, and all jointing kits shall be
approved by the S.O / S.O’s Representative before joints being carried out. Every
cable joint shall be started and finished on the same day. Whenever cables are to be
jointed openly during wet weather conditions, the Electrical Contractor shall take all
necessary precautions to prevent moisture getting into the cables. Phasing and
Insulation Resistance tests shall be carried out and witness by S.O / S.O’s
Representative before jointing is commenced.
9.2.2
Core numbers printed on the papers shall be observed when jointing and whenever
possible such numbers shall be maintained throughout the system. Core number '0',
'1', '2' and '3' shall denote as neutral, red, yellow and blue phases respectively. In the
case of two core cables, number '1' shall denote the phase conductor and '0' the
neutral. Crossing of core in the boxes shall be avoided wherever possible but
connections shall be consistent with the foregoing requirements. The jointing of cables
shall be undertaken by Certified Cable Jointer (PKI) as prescribed in Electricity
Regulations 1994. The Electrical Contractor shall submit the certificate of Certified
Cable Jointer to S.O / S.O’s Representative.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S9 - 4 of 7
9.3
CABLE LUG
9.3.1 Cable lug shall comply with MS 1540.
9.3.2
The copper material for the cable lug shall comply with the following specifications:
Description
Specification
Material type
Copper
Grade of copper
Electrolytic Tough Pitch Copper
(ETP Grade)
Electrical conductivity of
copper
99% IACSa
Purity of copper
99.9%
a
Note: IACS - International Annealed Copper Standard
Table 3: Material Specification for Cable Lug
9.3.3
The finishing for the cable lug shall comply with the following specifications:
Description
Specification
Finishing type
Electro tin plating
Purity of tin
99%
Minimum thickness of tin
3 micron
plating
Table 4: Finishing Specification for Cable Lug
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S9 - 5 of 7
9.3.4 The cable lug shall be clearly marked by stamping the conductor size on the palm of
the cable lug, as shown in Figure 3:
Legend
1
Manufacturer’s symbol representation (for the minimum cable size of 70mm2 and
above)
2
Conductor size 120mm2
3
Cable lug material and corresponding cable material type (for the minimum cable
size of 70mm2 and above
Figure 3: Markings of Cable Lug
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S9 - 6 of 7
9.4
BI-METAL CABLE LUG
9.4.1 Cable lug used for aluminium armoured cables termination shall be of bimetal type.
9.4.2 Connector comprising a copper palm, friction welding to an aluminium barrel, for
connecting aluminium conductor to an equipment copper terminal. The bi-metal cable
lugs mentioned in MS 2584, applies to crimp type bi-metal lugs for low voltage
applications.
9.4.3 The copper material for the bi-metal cable lug shall comply with the following
specifications: Description
Specification
Grade of Copper
Electrolytic Tough – Pitch (ETP)
Electrical conductivity of copper
≥99% IACSa
Purity Of Copper
99% IACSa
Finishing
Natural
Note: aIACS - International Annealed Copper Standard
Table 5: Material Specification for Copper Bi-Metal Cable Lug
9.4.4 The aluminium barrel shall comply with the following specifications: Description
Specification
Grade of Aluminium
1050-0
Purity Of Aluminium
Minimum 99.5%
Finishing
Natural
Table 6: Material Specification for Aluminium Barrel Bi-Metal Cable Lug
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S9 - 7 of 7
9.4.5 Bi-metal cable lug shall be clearly marked by stamping the conductor size, model or
part number and manufacturer’s marking or symbol as per Figure 4.
9.4.6 Additionally, the barrel of the bi-metal cable lugs shall be embossed or printed with the
name of manufacturer. Marked on the barrel as shown in figure 4:
Legend
A
150
KKKK
Manufacturer’s marking or symbol
Conductor size 150mm2
Name of manufacturer
Figure 4: Markings of Bi-Metal Cable Lug
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S10 - 1 of 3
10.0
CABLE MARKERS
10.0.1 Cable marker with lettering and sign as shown in Figure 5 and Figure 6 shall be
provided by the Electrical Contractor at every change in direction of underground cable
routes and at every 15m on straight run. Cable markers shall be of heavy duty
reinforced concrete construction. The cable marker and its actual locations shall be
approved by the S.O / S.O's Representative.
10.0.2 The cable marker shall be of trapezoidal block with 100mm square top face, 150mm
square bottom face and 400mm in height as shown in Figure 7. The top face shall be
indented with bold lettering 'L.V.' and directional sign indicating the direction/directions
of the cable route. The lettering and directional sign shall be fully painted orange
colour. The cable marker shall be buried to a depth of 300mm. Cable joint marker of
similar construction but with the lettering and sign as shown in Figure 7 shall be
provided and installed at every cable joint in the similar manner.
Lettering: 40mm (H) x 30mm (L) x 10mm (W) x 5mm (D)
Figure 5: Cable Marker – Joint Sign & Lettering
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S10 - 2 of 3
Lettering: 40mm (H) x 30mm (L) x 10mm (W) x 5mm (D)
Figure 6: Cable Marker- Directional Sign & Letter
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S10 - 3 of 3
Figure 7: Cable Marker – Construction
Note:
1. All covers to be 40mm (W)
2. Grade 20 (1:2:4) concrete 20mm (3/4) aggregate
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S11 - 1 of 1
11.0
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
11.1
TEST INSTRUMENTS
11.1.1 All measuring and test instruments used for testing and commissioning of the installations
shall be regularly tested and calibrated by the manufacturers or accredited calibration
laboratories for their functionality and accuracy. Test and Calibration Reports or
Certificates for the measuring and test instruments issued by the calibration laboratory
shall be valid for two (2) years from the date of issuance.
11.1.2 The instruments and their Test and Calibration Reports or Certificates shall be submitted
to S.O / S.O’s Representative for verification two (2) weeks before testing of the
installations being carried out. No test on the installations shall be carried out without
prior approval of the S.O / S.O’s Representative. Notwithstanding the validity of the
aforesaid Reports or Certificates the measuring and test instruments shall be recalibrated if so required by the S.O / S.O’s Representative after any mechanical or
electrical mishandling. Fee required for the testing and calibrating of the measuring and
test instruments is deemed to be included in the Contract.
11.2
TEST AND TEST CERTIFICATES
11.2.1 After the installation work has been completed and before Certificate of Practical
Completion is issued, the whole system shall be tested for compliance and performance
as follows: 11.2.1.1 Insulation Resistance Test
11.2.1.2 Continuity Test
11.2.2 The S.O / S.O’s Representative reserves the right to be present at all tests and the
Contractor shall give at least one week notice in writing to the S.O / S.O’s Representative
for this purpose. In any case, no test shall be carried out without prior approval of the S.O
/ S.O’s Representative. A copy of test results certified by competent person shall be
submitted to the S.O / S.O’s Representative. Copies of all the test certificates together
with As Installed Drawings properly bound and titled shall be submitted to the S.O / S.O’s
Representative within one week after the completion of the testing.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S12 - 1 of 1
12.0
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
12.1
During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall be responsible for the service
and maintenance work of the complete installation. All works shall be carried out by
competent person. All labour, material, tools and parts necessary to rectify the defect
due to manufacturing or installation faults shall be supplied and/or executed at the
Contractor's cost.
12.2
The service and maintenance to be performed and defects to be rectified and making
good shall include but not limited to the following: 12.2.1
Replace or make good any defective cables, cable joints and cable terminations
12.2.2
Replace any broken or defective cable markers
12.2.3
Making good any damage to roads, buildings, drains, existing cables, pipes,
concrete areas, paved areas, slopes, drains, culverts etc. which had not been
properly made good arising out of his work; and
12.2.4
Any other works deemed necessary by the S.O / S.O’s Representative.
12.3 All works shall be carried out as soon as the Contractor is being informed by the S.O /
S.O’s Representative or the occupant, and shall be completed within a reasonable time
except under emergency situation. If the Contractor fails to comply with the above
requirements, the S.O / S.O’s Representative reserves the right to engage another party
to carry out the work, in which case, the Contractor shall be responsible for all the
expenses incurred.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S13 - 1 of 2
13.0
WORKING DRAWINGS, AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS AND AS BUILT DOCUMENTS
13.1
WORKING DRAWINGS
Within 2 weeks after award of the Tender, the Electrical contractor shall submit to the
S.O / S.O’s Representative for his approval dimensioned general arrangement and
section drawings of the equipment ordered. These drawings are to be submitted in
quadruplicate. The drawings submitted are to be modified if necessary as requested
by the S.O / S.O’s Representative and re-submitted for final approval.
13.2
AS INSTALLED DRAWINGS
13.2.1 The as installed drawings shall comprise of: 13.2.1.1
Site plan;
13.2.1.2
External cable routes;
13.2.1.3
Site and type of cables; and
13.2.1.4
Location and type of joint.
13.2.2 These drawings shall be labelled at the lower right hand corner with the Electrical
Contractor's name and address, date of commissioning, scale, drawing number (the
drawing number to be obtained from the S.O. / S.O’s Representative), title and
following particulars: JABATAN KERJA RAYA
CAWANGAN KEJURUTERAAN ELEKTRIK
CONTRACT NO.:
13.2.3
If the drawings submitted are not according to the actual installation at site and/or not
acceptable to the S.O / S.O’s Representative, the Contractor shall amend and resubmit the drawings within two weeks from the date of return of the drawings to the
satisfaction of the S.O / S.O’s Representative.
13.2.4
In addition, one (1) set of the as installed drawing shall be submitted in the form of
original document, and four (4) sets in physical digital storage.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S13 - 2 of 2
13.3
AS BUILT DOCUMENTS
13.3.1
As built document shall consist of but not limited to the as installed drawings, manuals,
certificates, catalogues and inventories. Manual and documents for the installation
shall be supplied. It shall comprise of: 13.2.5.1
Inventories;
13.2.5.2
Product data and catalogue;
13.2.5.3
Product test certificates; and
13.2.5.4
Installation test results.
13.2.6
Each of the as built documents shall be bound together with hard cover and submitted
in minimum four (4) sets upon issuance of Certificate of Practical Completion of the
project.
13.2.7
The cost of all these prints, manuals, tools etc. whether or not provided in the Bill of
Quantities, is deemed to be included in the Contract.
13.2.8
One set of the as installed drawing shall be properly framed up in the MSB Room.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S14 - 1 of 2
14.0
LIST OF STANDARDS
STANDARD
BS EN 12613
DESCRIPTION
Plastics Warning Devices For Underground Cables And Pipelines With
Visual Characteristics (British Standard)
BS EN 50262 Cable Glands For Electrical Installation
BS EN 61914 Cable Cleats For Electrical Installation
IEC 60112
IEC 60502-1
Method For Determination Of The Proof And The Comparative Tracking
Indices Of Solid Insulating Materials
Power Cables With Extruded Insulation And Their Accessories For Rated
Voltages From 1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV) Up To 30 kV (Um = 36 kV) – Part 1:
Cables For Rated Voltages Of 1 kV (Um = 1.2 kV) And 3 kV (Um = 3.6 kV)
MS 628
Specification For Unplasticised PVC ((uPVC) Pipes For Water Supply.
MS 863
Non-Alloy Steel Tubes Suitable For Welding AndThreading – Technical
Delivery Conditions
MS 1058
Polyethylene (PE) Piping System For Water Supply
MS 1540
Specification For The Material, Marking And Dimensions Of Crimp Type
Cable Lugs For Use With Copper Conductors In Low Voltage Applications
MS 2101
Electric Cable And Wire: 600/1000 (Um = 1.2 kV) Single Core PVC
Insulated Cable – Armoured
MS 2103
Electric Cable And Wire: 600/1000 (Um = 1.2 kV) Multi Core PVC
Insulated Cable – Armoured
MS 2105
Electric Cable And Wire: 600/1000 (Um = 1.2 kV) Single Core XLPE
Insulated Cable – Armoured
MS 2107
Electric Cable And Wire: 600/1000 (Um = 1.2 kV) Multi Core XLPE
Insulated Cable – Armoured
MS 2584
Crimp Type Copper Aluminium Bi-Metal Lugs For Use With Compact
Copper Conductor In Single And Multi Core Power Cable In Low Voltage
Applications – Specification For The Material, Marking, Dimensions And
Type Test.
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.03.(01).2020
Date Issued: April 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE Revision: 1
UNDERGROUND CABLE
Date: September 2020
(L-S3)
Page: S14 - 2 of 2
STANDARD
MS IEC
60228
MS IEC
60364-5-52
MS IEC
60364-5-54
MS IEC
61537
DESCRIPTION
Conductors Of Insulated Cables
Electrical Installations Of Buildings -Part 5-52: Selection And Erection
Of Electrical Equipment – Wiring Systems
Electrical Installations Of Buildings -Part 5-54: Selection And Erection
Of Electrical Equipment – Earthing Arrangements And Protective
Conductors
Cable Tray Systems And Cable Ladder Systems For Cable
Management
SPECIFICATION FOR LOW VOLTAGE UNDERGROUND CABLE
© Hak Cipta : 1999 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia
L-S9
May 2011
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik
Jabatan Kerja Raya Malaysia
.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
CONTENT
Date: May 2011
Page: i of iii
SECTION
CONTENT
REVISION
PAGE
1.0
General
1.1 Scope
1.2 Standards
1
S1/1
2.0
Class of Lightning Protection System
2.1 Class of Lightning Protection System
1
S2/1-S2/1
3.0
Air Termination System
3.1 General
3.2 Air Termination System
1
S3/1-S3/2
4.0
Down Conductor System
4.1
Down Conductor System
4.2
Natural Down Conductor System
1
S4/1-S4/2
5.0
Joints And Bonds
5.1
Joints And Bonds
1
S5/1
6.0
Testing Joints
6.1
Testing Joints
1
S6/1
7.0
Fixings, Clamps And Supports
7.1
Fixings, Clamps And Supports
1
S7/1
8.0
Earth Termination System
8.1
Earth Termination System
1
S8/1
9.0
Earth Electrodes
9.1
Earth Electrodes
1
S9/1
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta : 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
CONTENT
Date: May 2011
Page: ii of iii
SECTION
CONTENT
REVISION
PAGE
10.0
Lightning Flash Counters
10.1
Lightning Flash Counters
1
S10/1
11.0
Test, Test Instruments And Test
Certificates
1
S11/1-11/2
11.1
11.2
Test And Calibration Of Measuring And Test Instruments
Test And Test Certificates
12.0
Service And Maintenance
12.1
Service And Maintenance
1
S12/1
13.0
Shop Drawings, As-Built Document And
Tools
1
S13/1-S13/4
1
A/1-A/7
13.1
13.2
Shop Drawings
As- Built Document & Tools
Appendix A
Table 1:– Relation between lightning
protection levels (LPL) and class of LPS
Table 2: Maximum values of rolling sphere
radius, mesh size and protection angle
corresponding to the class of LPS
Table 3: Minimum thickness of metal sheets
or metal pipes in air-termination systems.
Table 4: Typical values of the distance
between down-conductors and between ring
conductors according to class of LPS
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta : 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
CONTENT
Date: May 2011
Page: iii of iii
SECTION
CONTENT
Table 5: LPS Material and conditions of use
Table 6: Material, configuration and
minimum cross-sectional area of airtermination conductors, air-termination rods
and down conductors.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta : 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
REVISION
PAGE
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
1.0
Revision: 1
GENERAL
Date: May 2011
Page: S1 - 1 of 1
1.1
SCOPE
This section of the specification describes and specifies requirements for the
supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning, handing over in approved
working order and maintenance thereof during the Defects Liability Period (DLP) of
the whole lightning protection system (LPS) in accordance with the Specification,
Supplementary Notes, Bills of Quantities, Conditions of Contracts, Drawing etc.
The lightning protection system shall include air termination system, down
conductor system, joints and bonds, testing joints, lightning flash counter, earth
termination system, and other accessories incidental to the completion of the
whole system as specified in the Drawings and/or Bills of Quantities.
1.2
STANDARDS
Generally, methods and materials used for the construction and installation of the
LPS shall comply in accordance with MS IEC 62305:2007 and IEC 62561.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
2.0
Revision: 1
CLASS OF LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM
Date: May 2011
Page: S2 - 1 of 1
2.1
CLASS OF LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
Four classes of LPS (I to IV) are defined in MS IEC 62305-1 corresponding to
lightning protection levels as shown in Table 1 (see Appendix A: Table 1) and the
class of required LPS shall be selected on the basis of a risk assessment.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
3.0
Revision: 1
AIR TERMINATION SYSTEM
Date: May 2011
Page: S3 – 1 of 2
3.1
GENERAL
Air termination components installed on a structure shall be located at corners,
exposed points and edges (especially on the upper level of any facades) in
accordance with one or any combination of the following methods:
– the protection angle method;
– the rolling sphere method;
– the mesh method.
The values for the protection angle, rolling sphere radius and mesh size for each
class of LPS shall be as per Table 2 of MS IEC 62305-3 (see Appendix A : Table
2).
For the determination of the volume protected only the real physical dimensions
of the metal air termination system shall be considered.
3.2
AIR TERMINATION SYSTEM
Air termination system shall consist of a network of vertical and horizontal
conductors generally as shown in the Drawings. All salient points of the structure
shall be incorporated in the air termination system. All metallic projections,
chimneys, ducts, gutters, vent pipes, guard rails, aerial masts, etc. on or above
the main surface of the roof of the structure whether shown in the Drawings or
not shall be bonded to and form part of the air termination system. Air terminals
or vertical finials shall be provided if specified in the Drawings and/or Bills of
Quantities.
For structures taller than 60m, a lateral air termination system shall be installed
on the upper part typically the topmost 20% of the height of the structure for
protection against flashes to the side of the structure. If there is metal façade, it
must be bonded and form part of the air termination system.
In addition, for structures taller than 120m, all parts which may be endangered
above 120m shall be protected.
Unless otherwise specified, air termination system other than the air terminals
or vertical finials shall be of 25mm x 3mm annealed copper tape. Should other
materials be specified, it shall conform to Table 5 and 6 of MS IEC 62305-3
(see Appendix A : Table 5 & Table 6).
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
3.0
Revision: 1
AIR TERMINATION SYSTEM
Date: May 2011
Page: S3 – 2 of 2
The method and nature of the fixing shall be simple, solid and permanent. The
air termination system shall be secured to the structure by means of purpose
made conductive fixtures at the intervals not exceeding 500mm. Purpose made
supports for securing the air termination system onto the roof tiles and ridge tiles
shall be used. Conductive fixtures shall be of same material as the air termination
system.
In the case of metal cladding roof where it cannot be considered as air
termination components, the air termination system shall be secured to the
metal roof structures by means of non-metallic purpose made. Intervals
between fixings shall not exceed 500mm.
In the case of metal cladding roof to be used as air termination components, the
minimum thickness of metal sheets shall conform to Table 3 of MS IEC 62305-3
(see Appendix A : Table 3).
Air termination rods shall be of rounded or tappered pointed end and made of
copper. Unless specified otherwise in the Drawings and/or Bills of Quantities,
they shall be minimum of 300mm in length and 16mm diameter with lock nut. The
base for supporting the air termination rods on the flat surface or ridges shall be
of same material as the air termination system.
If portions of the structure vary considerably in heights, any necessary air
termination system of the lower portions shall, in addition to their own down
conductors, be bonded to the down conductors of the taller portions.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
4.0
Revision: 1
DOWN CONDUCTOR SYSTEM
Date: May 2011
Page: S4 - 1 of 2
4.1
DOWN CONDUCTOR SYSTEM
Unless otherwise specified, down conductor system shall be 25mm x 3mm
annealed copper tapes installed around the outside walls of the structure.
Should other materials be used, it shall conform to Table 5 and 6 of MS IEC
62305-3. (see Appendix A: Table 5 & Table 6).
Down conductors shall not be installed in gutters or down-spouts even if they are
covered by insulating material. No down conductors shall be routed inside the
service ducts. A down conductor should be installed at each exposed corner of
the structure, where it is possible.
The down conductor shall be installed in such a way that its path is as direct as
possible between air termination system and earth termination system. It shall be
as straight as possible along the shortest path without sharp bends or upward
sections. They shall be securely fixed at intervals not exceeding 500 mm by
means of conductive fixtures same material as the down conductor systems
The bend radii shall not be less than 200mm. Deep re-entrant loops, routing
round parapet or cornices shall be avoided. However, a maximum height
increase of 400mm is permissible for passing over a parapet wall with a slope of
maximum 450. Where this is not possible, the installation shall conform to Clause
6.3 MS IEC 62305. All wall or other building penetrations shall be made in a
manner to prevent the ingress of water/water moisture and PVC sleeves shall be
provided.
The number of down conductor shall not be less than two and should be
distributed around the parameter of the structure to be protected subject to
architectural and practical constraint. Typical values of the distance between
down conductors with the relevant class of LPS shall be as per Table 4 of MS
IEC 62305-3 (see Appendix A : Table 4).
All exposed down conductors may be painted with the decorative colour paint of
the same colour for the wall finishes.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
4.0
Revision: 1
DOWN CONDUCTOR SYSTEM
Date: May 2011
Page: S4 - 2 of 2
4.2
NATURAL DOWN CONDUCTOR SYSTEM
If specified in the drawing and/or Bill of Quantities natural conductors such as
reinforcing bars and structural steelwork may be used as a down conductor
system provided that they are electrically continuous and adequately earthed.
When using a particular rod of the reinforcement steel as the down conductor,
care should be taken in the route to earth to ensure that the rod that is located in
the same position will be used all the way down, thereby providing direct
electrical continuity.
Steelwork within reinforced concrete structures is considered to be electrically
continuous provided that the major part of interconnections of vertical and
horizontal bars are welded or otherwise securely connected. Connections of
vertical bars shall be welded over a length not less than 30mm or properly
clamped.
The electrical continuity of the reinforcing bars shall be determined by electrical
testing between the uppermost part and ground level. An additional conductor
may be used to enhance the natural down conductor system if the overall
electrical resistance is greater than 0.2 Ohms. The additional conductor shall be
bonded to the reinforcement bars by means of purpose made clamps conforming
to IEC 62561 at 1 meter intervals.
The type and size of the conductor used shall conform to Table 5 and 6 of MS
IEC 62305-3 (see Appendix A: Table 5 & Table 6).
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
5.0
Revision: 1
JOINTS AND BONDS
Date: May 2011
Page: S5 - 1 of 1
5.1
JOINTS AND BONDS
The lightning protection system should have as few joints as possible.
Joints and bonds shall be made mechanically and electrically effective by means
of purpose made copper clamps or by exothermic welding or brazing. Contact
surfaces shall first be cleaned then inhibited from oxidation with a suitable noncorrosive compound. With overlapping joints, the length of the overlap shall not
be less than 20mm.
All metal works, including water pipes, gas pipes, handrails, air conditioning units,
metal cladding, metal roof etc in the vicinity of the LPS shall be bonded to it, to
avoid the danger of side flashing.
Where it is necessary to bond the copper conductor to any other metallic surface,
this must be done by bolting or riveting. Care should be taken when attaching
copper to a dissimilar metal to prevent electrolytic corrosion in that the joints are
to be thoroughly cleaned and subsequently sealed. Proprietary bi-metallic
connectors shall be used. LPS earth shall be bonded to the Main Earthing Bar,
as well as any other earthing system present in the structure.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta : 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
6.0
Revision: 1
TESTING JOINTS
Date: May 2011
Page: S6 - 1 of 1
6.1
TESTING JOINTS
Each down conductor shall be provided with a testing joint along the route of the
down conductor except in the case of natural down-conductors combined with
foundation earth electrodes. The testing joints shall be of purpose made copper
clamps or of the same material of the down conductor. Unless otherwise
specified, each testing joint shall be installed at 2500mm above the ground level.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
7.0
Revision: 1
FIXING, CLAMPS AND SUPPORTS
Date: May 2011
Page: S7 - 1 of 1
7.1
FIXING, CLAMPS AND SUPPORTS
All fixings, clamps and supports for the air termination system and down
conductors of the lightning protection system shall be purpose made for use in
the installation. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, they shall be of copper
alloy, naval brass or gunmetal.
The Electrical Contractor is required to submit installation methods and samples
for fixings, clamps and supports for the approval of the S.O.’s Representative
before installation.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
8.0
Revision: 1
EARTH TERMINATION SYSTEM
Date: May 2011
Page: S8 - 1 of 1
8.1
EARTH TERMINATION SYSTEM
An earth termination system shall be connected to each down conductor. Earth
termination system shall be by 25mm x 3mm annealed copper tapes connecting
the down conductor at the testing joint to the earth electrodes or reinforcing bars.
The connection of the down conductor to the earth electrode of the earth
termination system shall be soundly made by exothermic welding or brazing. The
portion of the earth termination system between testing joint and ground may be
enclosed in PVC casing of suitable size.
The earth termination system shall be of Type B arrangement in accordance with
Clause 5.4.2.2 of MS IEC 62305-3. This type of arrangement comprises either a
ring conductor external to the structure to be protected, in contact with the soil for
at least 80% of its total length or a foundation earth electrode. Such earth
electrodes may also be meshed.
The earth electrode of the type B arrangement shall be inter-connected by ring
conductor 25mm x 3mm annealed copper tapes to form earth termination system
and preferably be buried at a depth of at least 500mm and at a distance of about
1m around the external walls. The copper tapes shall be identified by permanent
labels legibly marked with words "Lightning Protection Earth – Do Not Remove"
permanently fixed at 1000mm intervals. The connection of two copper tapes shall
be soundly made by exothermic welding or brazing.
Each earth termination connected to the down conductor shall have a resistance to
earth not exceeding 10 Ohms. The entire of the LPS shall have a combined
resistance to earth not exceeding 10 Ohms.
Bonding conductor of 25mm x 3mm annealed copper tapes shall be provided for
connection between the earth termination for the lightning protection system at the
testing joint and the Main Earthing Bar for the electrical installation.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
9.0
Revision: 1
EARTH ELECTRODES
Date: May 2011
Page: S9 - 1 of 1
9.1
EARTH ELECTRODES
Earth electrode shall be of copper-jacketed steel core rods with 16mm diameter
and supplied in 1500mm length and shall have provision for screw coupling with
another standard length. The copper jacket of 99.9 % purity electrolytic copper
shall be of minimum radial thickness 0.25mm and shall be molecularly bonded to
the steel core to ensure that the copper jacket and steel core are not separable.
Each earth electrodes shall be driven 3000mm in depth.
Where the desired earth resistance value cannot be achieved after the first earth
electrode have been driven, sufficient number of earth electrodes in parallel shall
be installed outside the resistance area until required value is reached. Mutual
separation between two earth electrodes shall be more than the driven depth of the
earth electrode but less than twice the driven depth. Interconnection between
different earth electrodes shall be by means of 25mm x 3mm annealed copper
tape.
The connection of the annealed copper tape to the earth electrode shall be soundly
made by exothermic welding or brazing.
Each earth electrode shall be provided with heavy-duty type inspection chamber
with removable cover. The compressive strength of the inspection chamber and
cover shall be minimum 6 N/mm2. Lifting hook shall be provided on the cover.
Each earth electrode shall be identified by permanent label legibly marked with
words "Lightning Protection Earth – Do Not Remove" permanently fixed at the
point of connection of every down conductor to an earth termination system.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
10.0
Revision: 1
LIGHTNING FLASH COUNTERS
Date: May 2011
Page: S10 - 1 of 1
10.1
LIGHTNING FLASH COUNTERS
Where lightning flash counter is specified in the Drawing and/or Bills of
Quantities, the counter shall be of outdoor weather proof type and shall be
triggered whenever it encounters a 1.5 kA impulse current in 1.5 microseconds
duration. The counter shall record up to minimum 9,999 lightning strikes. The
counter shall be installed on the most direct down conductor above the testing
joint or any location indicated in the Drawing and, in any case, at the height of
about 2500mm above ground level.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
11.0
Revision: 1
TEST, TEST INSTRUMENTS AND
TEST CERTIFICATES
Date: May 2011
Page: S11 - 1 of 2
11.1
TEST AND CALIBRATION OF MEASURING AND TEST INSTRUMENTS
All measuring and test instruments used for testing of the LPS installations
shall be regularly tested and calibrated by the manufacturers or test and
calibration laboratories for their functionality and accuracy. Basic
measurement accuracy for these instruments shall be within 5 %. In the case
of analogue instruments, a basis accuracy of 2 % of full-scale deflection
shall be provided. Test and Calibration Reports or Certificates for the
measuring and test instruments issued by the test and calibration laboratory
shall be valid for two years from the date of issuance. The instruments and
their Test and Calibration Reports or Certificates shall be submitted to S.O.’s
Representative for verification two weeks before testing of the electrical
installation being carried out. No test on the electrical installation shall be
carried out without prior approval of the S.O.’s Representative.
Notwithstanding the validity of the aforesaid Reports or Certificates the
measuring and test instruments shall be re-calibrated if so required by the
S.O.’s Representative after any mechanical or electrical mishandling. Fee
required for the testing and calibrating of the measuring and test instruments
is deemed to be included in the Contract.
11.2
TEST AND TEST CERTIFICATES
After the installation work has been completed and before Certificate of
Practical Completion is issued, the whole LPS for electrical installation
covered under this part of the Contract shall be tested in accordance with
MS IEC 62305 and any other tests deem necessary by the S.O.'s
Representative. In the event the installation fails to pass any of these tests,
the Electrical Contractor shall take such measures as are necessary to
remedy the defects and the installation shall not be considered as completed
until all such tests have been passed.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
11.0
Revision: 1
TEST, TEST INSTRUMENTS AND
TEST CERTIFICATES
Date: May 2011
Page: S11 - 2 of 2
The tests to be carried out by the Electrical Contractor shall consist of the
following tests as a minimum requirement: a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Continuity of air termination system.
Continuity of air termination system and the down conductors.
Continuity of the down conductor and earth termination.
Continuity of earth termination system.
Continuity of earth termination and the main earthing bar for the
electrical installation
f) Earth electrode resistance.
g) Earth termination resistance.
Fee required for the tests as described above is deemed to be included in
the Contract.
The S.O.'s Representative reserves the right to be present at all tests and the
Electrical Contractor shall give at least one-week notice in writing to the S.O.'s
Representative for this purpose. In any case, no test shall be carried out without
prior approval of the S.O.'s Representative. Copies of all the test certificates
together with as-installed Drawings properly bound and titled shall be submitted
to the S.O.'s Representative within one week after the completion of the testing.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
12.0
Revision: 1
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
Date: May 2011
Page: S12 - 1 of 1
12.1
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
During the DLP, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the service and
maintenance work for the complete installation. All works shall be carried out by
the competent person. All labour, material, tools and parts necessary to rectify
the defect due to manufacturing/installation faults shall be supplied/executed
at the Electrical Contractor's cost.
The service and maintenance to be performed and defects to be rectified and
making good shall include but not limited to the following: (a)
Replacing or making good all lightning flash counters that do
not meet the manufacturer’s guarantees and warranties.
(b)
Replacing and making good all loose joints and terminations,
all mechanical support linkage, earth electrode chambers and
covers, etc.
(c)
Making good any damage to roads, buildings, drains, cables,
pipes, concrete areas, paved areas etc. which had not been
properly made good arising out of his work.
(d)
All other works as deemed necessary by the S.O.'s
Representative.
All works shall be carried out as soon as the Electrical Contractor is being
informed by the S.O.'s Representative or the occupant and shall be
completed within a reasonable time except under emergency situation as
stipulated in the Supplementary Conditions for Electrical Work. If the
Electrical Contractor fails to comply with the above requirements, the S.O.'s
Representative reserves the right to engage another party to carry out the
work, in which case, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all the
expenses incurred.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
13.0
Revision: 1
SHOP DRAWINGS, AS-BUILT
DOCUMENT AND TOOLS
Date: May 2011
Page: S13 - 1 of 4
13.1
SHOP DRAWINGS
Two sets of prints of shop drawings for construction and/or installation shall be
submitted to the S.O.’s Representative for approval. The Electrical Contractor
shall prepare and submit shop drawings for the whole work or parts of the work at
least two weeks before the work begins. If the shop drawings submitted are not
acceptable by the S.O.’s Representative, the Electrical Contractor shall amend
and re-submit the shop drawings within two weeks from the date of return of the
shop drawings. No work shall be carried out without the shop drawings being
approved by the S.O.’s Representative. The shop drawings shall include and
show the following:
a) The dimensioned general arrangements, layouts, positions and
routes of air termination system, down conductors, earth terminations and
all others necessary for the complete LPS installation as specified in the
Drawings and/or Bills of Quantities;
b) Elevations views of the LPS;
c) The dimensioned general arrangements, layouts, positions and routes of
bonding conductors;
d) The dimensioned general arrangements, layouts, positions and routes of
earth terminations and their earth electrodes.
e) All other drawings as deemed necessary by the S.O.'s Representative.
The cost of all these shop drawings, whether or not provided in the Bills of
Quantities,
is
deemed
to
be
included
in
the
Contract.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
13.0
Revision: 1
SHOP DRAWINGS, AS-BUILT
DOCUMENT AND TOOLS
Date: May 2011
Page: S13 - 2 of 4
13.2
AS-BUILT DOCUMENT AND TOOLS
As-Built document shall consist of but not limited to the As-Installed drawings,
manual, certificates, catalogues, inventories and parts lists.
The As- Installed drawings shall comprise of:(a)
Site plan;
(b)
Layout Plans;
(c)
Elevations views of the LPS;
(d)
Layout plans of conductor routes and earthing points with
reference to easily recognisable buildings and structures.
(e)
All other drawings as deemed necessary by the S.O.'s
Representative.
These drawings shall be labelled at the lower right hand corner with the
Electrical Contractor's name and address, date of commissioning, scale,
drawing number (the drawing number to be obtained from the S.O.'s
Representative), title and following particulars: JABATAN KERJA RAYA
CAWANGAN KEJURUTERAAN ELEKTRIK
CONTRACT NO.:
If the drawings submitted are not according to the actual installation at site
and/or not acceptable by the S.O.'s Representative, the Electrical Contractor
shall amend and re-submit the drawings within two weeks from the date of
return of the drawings to the satisfaction of the S.O’s Representatives.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
13.0
Revision: 1
SHOP DRAWINGS, AS-BUILT
DOCUMENT AND TOOLS
Date: May 2011
Page: S13 - 3 of 4
Manuals and documents for lightning flash counters and other important
equipment shall be supplied.
It shall comprise of:(a)
Brief description of the installation/system
(b)
Installation manual
(c)
Operation manual;
(d)
Service And Maintenance Manual;
(e)
Parts List;
(f)
Product Data And Catalogue;
(g)
Product Test Certificates;
Certificates shall comprise of:All Testing Certificates (as per section 11.2)
Catalogues, parts lists, inventories, shall be as per project requirements.
Each of the As- Built documents shall be bound together with hard cover and
submitted in minimum four (4) sets upon issuance of Certificate of Practical
Completion (CPC) of the project.
In addition, one set of the As-Installed drawing shall be submitted in the form of
tracing/original document and two sets in CD ROM.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
13.0
Revision: 1
SHOP DRAWINGS, AS-BUILT
DOCUMENT AND TOOLS
Date: May 2011
Page: S13 - 4 of 4
Special tools required for the operation, service and maintenance of lightning flash
counters and other equipment shall also be provided.
The cost of all these prints, manuals, tools etc. is deemed to be included in the
Contract.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
APPENDIX A
Date: May 2011
Page: A - 1 of 7
LPL
Class of LPS
I
I
II
II
III
III
IV
IV
TABLE 1 – Relation between lightning protection levels (LPL) and class of LPS (see MS IEC
62305-1)
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
APPENDIX A
Date: May 2011
Page: A - 2 of 7
Protection Method
Rolling sphere radius r
Mesh size W
Protection angle
m
M
α°
I
20
5x5
II
30
10 x 10
III
45
15 x 15
IV
60
20 x 20
Class of LPS
See figure below
TABLE 2 – Maximum values of rolling sphere radius, mesh size and protection angle
corresponding to the class of LPS
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
APPENDIX A
Date: May 2011
Page: A - 3 of 7
Class of LPS
Material
Thickness
t
mm
a
Thickness
t’
mm
Lead
-
2,0
Steel (stainless,
galvanized)
4
0,5
Titanium
4
0,5
Copper
5
0,5
Aluminium
7
0,65
Zinc
-
0,7
b
I to IV
a
t prevents puncture, hot spot or ignition
b
t’ only for metal sheet if it is not important to prevent puncture, hotspot or ignition problems.
The metal cladding can be considered as natural air termination components and part of an LPS in
accordance with Clause 5.1.3 of MS IEC 62305-3, provided that:
–
the electrical continuity between the various parts is made durable (e.g. by means of brazing,
welding, crimping, seaming, screwing or bolting);
–
the thickness of the metal sheet is not less than the value t’ given in Table 3 of MS IEC 623053 if it is not important to prevent puncture of the sheeting or to consider ignition of any readily
combustible materials underneath (see Appendix : Table 3);
–
the thickness of the metal sheet is not less than the value t given in Table 3 if it is necessary to
take precautions against puncture or to consider hot spot problems;
–
they are not clad with insulating material.
TABLE 3 – Minimum thickness of metal sheets or metal pipes in air-termination systems
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
APPENDIX A
Date: May 2011
Page: A - 4 of 7
Class of LPS
Typical Distance
m
I
10
II
10
III
15
IV
20
TABLE 4 – Typical values of the distance between down-conductors and between ring
conductors according to class of LPS
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
APPENDIX A
Date: May 2011
Page: A - 5 of 7
Use
Corrosion
Material
In open air
Copper
In earth
In concrete
Solid
Solid
Solid
Stranded
Stranded
Stranded
As coating
As coating
Resistance
Good in many
environments
Increased by
Sulphur
compounds
May be
destroyed
by
galvanic
coupling
with
-
Organic
materials
Hot
galvanized
steel
Solid
Solid
Solid
Acceptable in air, in
concrete and in
benign soil
High chlorides
content
Copper
Stainless
Steel
Solid
Solid
Solid
Good in many
environments
High chlorides
content
-
Stranded
Stranded
Stranded
Solid
Unsuitable
Unsuitable
Good in atmospheres
containing low
concentrations of
sulphur and chloride
Alkaline
solutions
Copper
Solid
Solid
Unsuitable
Acid soils
Copper
As coating
As coating
Good in atmospheres
with high
concentration of
sulphates
Aluminium
Stranded
Lead
Stainless
Steel
NOTE 1 This table gives general guidance only. In special circumstances more careful corrosion immunity considerations
are required (see Annex E).
NOTE 2 Stranded conductors are more vulnerable to corrosion than solid conductors. Stranded conductors are also
vulnerable where they enter or exit earth/concrete positions. This is the reason why stranded galvanized steel is not
recommended in earth.
NOTE 3 Galvanized steel may be corroded in clay soil or moist soil.
NOTE 4 Galvanized steel in concrete should not extend into the soil due to possible corrosion of the steel just outside the
concrete.
NOTE 5 Galvanized steel in contact with reinforcement steel in concrete may, under certain circumstances, cause
damage to the concrete.
NOTE 6 Use of lead in the earth is often banned or restricted due to environmental concerns.
TABLE 5 – LPS Material and conditions of use
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
APPENDIX A
Date: May 2011
Page: A - 6 of 7
Material
Copper
Configuration
50 8)
Solid tape
Solid round
7)
Solid round
Tin plated copper 1)
Aluminium alloy
Hot dipped galvanized
steel 2)
3), 4)
200
1.7 mm min. diameter of each strand
8)
16 mm diameter
2 mm min. thickness
50 8)
8 mm diameter
Stranded
50 8)
1.7 mm min. diameter of each strand
Solid tape
70
3 mm min. thickness
7)
8)
Solid round
50
Stranded
50 8
1.7 mm min. diameter of each strand
Solid tape
50 8)
2.5 mm min. thickness
Solid round
50
8 mm diameter
Stranded
50 8)
1.7 mm min. diameter of each strand
Solid round 3)
200 8)
16 mm diameter
Solid tape
50 8)
2.5 mm min. thickness
50
8 mm diameter
Solid round
9)
Solid round
3), 4), 9)
Solid tape 6)
Solid round
6)
200
1.7 mm min. diameter of each strand
8)
3), 4)
16 mm diameter
50 8)
2 mm min. thickness
50
8 mm diameter
70 8)
Stranded
Solid round
8 mm diameter
50 8)
Stranded
Stainless steel 5)
8 mm diameter
50 8)
Solid tape
Solid round
Aluminium
50
2 mm min. thickness
8)
50 8)
Stranded
Comments 10)
Minimum crosssectional areas
mm2
200
1.7 mm min. diameter of each strand
8)
16 mm diameter
1)
Hot dipped or electroplated minimum thickness coating of 1 μm.
2)
The coating should be smooth, contimuous and free from flux stains with a minimum thickness coating of 50 μm.
3)
Applicable for air-termination rods only. For applications where mechanical stress such as wind loading is not
critical, a 10 mm diameter, 1 m long maximum air-termination rod with an additional fixing may be used.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
APPENDIX A
Date: May 2011
Page: A - 7 of 7
4)
Applicable to earth lead-in rods only.
5)
Chromium ≥ 16%, nickel ≥ 8%, carbon ≤ 0.07%.
6)
For stainless steel embedded in concrete, and/or in direct contact with flammable material, the minimum sizes
should be increased to 78mm 2 (10 mm diameter) for solid round and 75mm2 (3 mm minimum thickness) for solid
tape.
7)
50 mm2 (8 mm diameter) may be reduced to 28 mm2 (6 mm diameter) in certain applications where mechanical
strength is not an essential requirement. Consideration should, in this case, be given to reducing the spacing of the
fasteners.
8)
If thermal and mechanical considerations are important, these dimensions can be increased to 60 mm 2 for solid tape
and to 78 mm2 for solid round.
9)
The minimum cross-section to avoid melting is 16 mm 2 (copper), 25 mm2 (aluminium), 50 mm2 (steel) and 50 mm2
(stainless steel) for a specific energy of 10 000 kJ/Ω. For further information see Annex E.
10)
Thickness, width and diameter are defined at ± 10%.
TABLE 6 –
.
Material, configuration and minimum cross-sectional area of air-termination
conductors, air-termination rods and down conductors
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
No
1
2
3
Pindaan kpd
Dokumen
Utama
Baru (1)
2
RINGKASAN
Tarikh
Aug 1999
Feb 2013
Feb 2015
Catatan
Spesifikasi asal.
Tambahan: Addendum No.1 revision 1 to L-S20 Specification
for Road Lighting Installation (August 1999)
Tambahan: Addendum No.2 to L-S20 Specification for Road
Lighting Installation (August 1999)
*** Helaian ini hanya untuk rekod sahaja. Tidak perlu disertakan bersama dokumen tender.
Pengerusi J/K
Penggubal
Noorfadzilah bt
Ramlee, BPR E
Noorfadzilah bt
Ramlee, BPR E
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
ITEM
CONTENTS
PAGE
1.0
GENERAL
1
2.0
ROAD LIGHTING LUMINARIES
1
2.1
General
1
2.2
Conformity With Standards
1
2.3
Construction And Components
2
2.3.1
General
2
2.3.2
The Optical System
3
2.3.3
Lamp
4
2.3.4
Lampholder And Associated Supports And Brackets
4
2.3.5
Electrical Control Gear
5
2.3.6
Internal Wiring, Terminal Block And Earthing Terminal
6
3.0
PHOTOMETRIC DATA
7
4.0
SAMPLE OF LUMINAIRES
7
5.0
SCHEDULE AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON
LUMINAIRES
8
6.0
PROJECTS BASED ON THE 'TURNKEY', 'DESIGN AND
BUILD' OR 'BUILD-OPERATE-TRANSFER' (B.O.T)
APPROACH
8
7.0
OUTDOOR WEATHERPROOF FEEDER PILLARS
8
7.1
General
8
7.2
Fabrication
8
7.3
Factory Inspection
9
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
i/iv
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
ITEM
CONTENTS
PAGE
7.4
Foundation
9
7.5
Earthing
10
7.6
Switching Circuit
10
7.7
Contactors
10
7.8
By-Pass Switch And Selector Switch
10
7.9
Miniature Circuit Breakers
10
7.10
Termination
11
8.0
COLUMNS AND BRACKETS
11
8.1
General
11
8.2
Design Loading
11
8.3
Fabrication
11
8.3.1
Hot Dip Galvanised Steel Columns
11
8.3.2
Pre-stressed Spun Concrete Columns
12
8.3.3
Fibreglass Reinforced Columns
12
8.4
Material
13
8.4.1
Hot Dip Galvanised Steel Columns
13
8.4.2
Pre-stressed Spun Concrete Columns
13
8.4.3
Fibreglass Reinforced Columns
14
8.5
Protection Against Corrosion
15
8.5.1
Hop Dip Galvanised Steel Columns
15
8.5.2
Pre-stressed Spun Concrete Columns
16
8.5.3
Fibreglass Reinforced Columns
16
8.6
Bracket Arms
16
8.7
Spigots
16
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
ii/iv
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
ITEM
CONTENTS
PAGE
8.8
Doors, Door Openings And Opening For Wiring To
Decorative Signs/Lights
16
8.9
Baseboard
17
8.10
Earthing Terminal
17
8.11
Service Slots
17
8.12
Flange And Anti-Sink Base Plate
17
8.12.1
Hot Dip Galvanised Steel Columns
17
8.12.2
Pre-stressed Concrete Columns
17
8.12.3
Fibreglass Reinforced Columns
17
8.13
Factory Testing Of The Columns
18
8.13.1
Hot Dip Galvanised Steel Columns
18
8.13.2
Pre-stressed Concrete Columns
19
8.13.3
Fibreglass Reinforced Columns
20
8.14
Terminal Block
21
8.15
Cable Terminations And Internal Wiring
21
8.16
Erection Of Columns
21
9.0
CABLES AND DUCTS
22
10.0
SHOP DRAWINGS
22
11.0
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
23
12.0
TESTING AND TEST CERTIFICATES
23
13.0
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
24
14.0
AS-INSTALLED DRAWINGS, MANUALS AND TOOLS
25
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
3
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
ITEM
CONTENTS
PAGE
Appendix A-1
Schedule Of Luminaire (400W HPSV/SON)
27
Appendix A-2
Schedule Of Luminaire (250W HPSV/SON)
29
Appendix A-3
Schedule Of Luminaire (150W HPSV/SON)
31
Appendix A-4
Schedule Of Luminaire (100W HPSV/SON)
33
Appendix B
Schedule Of Technical Data - HPSV Lamps
35
Appendix C
Schedule Of Technical Data - Control Gear
(Ballast, Ignitor and Capacitor)
36
Appendix D
Submission Of Computer Plots
38
Description Of The Layout
39
Appendix D1-1
Appendix D1-2
Illuminance On The 'Grid A' (Typical For 3 Lane
Road)
40
Appendix D1-3
Illuminance On The 'Grid A' (Observer's Position:
X= - 60.0m Y= Lw/2 H=1.5m)
41
Appendix D1-4
Longitudinal Uniformity For Each Lane
42
Appendix D2-1
Tabulated Summary Of Lighting Level Calculation /
Data (Luminance) For Road Lighting Installation
43
Appendix D2-2
Tabulated Summary Of Lighting Level Calculation /
Data (Illuminance) For Road Lighting Installation
44
Appendix E
Technical Schedule Of Columns And Bracket Arms
45
Appendix F
Voltage Drop Calculation For The Road Lighting
Installation
47
Appendix G
Service And Maintenance For The Road Lighting System
48
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
4
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
This section of the Specification describes and specifies requirements for the supply, delivery,
storage, assembly, installation, erection, testing, commissioning, handing over in approved
working order and maintenance during the Defects Liability Period of the Road Lighting
Installation in accordance with the Specification, Notes, Bill of Quantities (B.Q.), Conditions
of Contract and Drawings.
1.2
The Road Lighting Installation shall include all luminaires, fittings, brackets, spigots, other
supporting devices, columns, feeder pillars, bases, cables, switchgears and all necessary ancillary
equipment, foundations, ducting and all other necessary equipment for a complete road lighting
system in accordance with the details shown on the Drawings, Bill of Quantities.(B.Q.), Notes,
Appendices and as specified herein.
2.0
ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRES
2.1
General
The luminaire shall be complete with integral control gears as a unit and shall be designed for
both side entry and post top mounting and suitable for use with 100W/150W/250W/400W
High Pressure Sodium Vapour (HPSV or SON) Tubular Lamp and on a supply voltage of 240
Volt, +5%, -10%, 50 Hz.
2.2
Conformity With Standards
The luminaire and its associated electrical components shall comply with and be tested to the
following IEC Standards together with all current amendments.
ITEM
STANDARD
Luminaire
IEC 60598 Parts 1 & 2
Lamp
IEC 60662
Lampholder
IEC 60598 Part 1
Ballast
IEC 60922 & IEC 60923
Ignitor
IEC 60926 & IEC 60927
Capacitor
IEC 61048/61049
Others
Relevant IEC Standards
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
1/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
2.3
Construction And Components
2.3.1
General
i.
The luminaire shall be so designed and constructed that it is capable of providing the
service for which it is intended. Sound engineering
principles shall be adopted
throughout and the luminaire shall be designed to enable ease of maintenance and
replacement of lamp, control gear, reflector and lampholder without the use of special
tools.
ii.
The main supporting structure of the luminaire shall be constructed from die-cast
aluminium alloy material such that no undue deterioration in its safety, performance or
appearance during normal life when operating in all climatic conditions prevailing in a
tropical country such as heavy rains, high winds, high humidity and hot day-time
temperatures. It shall be robustly constructed to withstand vibration in normal use.
iii.
The luminaire shall be designed so that condensation shall not fall on any operating part
which may fail or deteriorate as a result.
iv.
All luminaires shall be new, totally enclosed and protected against contact with live or
moving parts inside the enclosure. The following Index of protection (IP) are required:-
IP 55 or higher for the optical compartment of the luminaires.
IP 43 or higher for the main luminaire housing and control gear compartment.
Full details of the IP system can be referred to in IEC 60529.
v.
Access to the interior of the luminaire shall be from the top. Bottom access is not
acceptable.
vi.
Material used for the construction of the luminaire shall be recyclable. Glass/Fibre
glass reinforced polyester (GRP/FRP) material is not acceptable.
vii.
Hinges and clips of the top housing cover if used, shall be robust and made of stainless
steel and simple to operate and shall not be liable to accidental detachment during
installation or maintenance.
viii. The top cover or luminaire canopy giving access to the interior of the luminaire shall in
the closed position, be firmly attached to the fixed position of the luminaire. In the
open position, it shall be attached in such a way that there is no likelihood of it
becoming accidentally detached and thereby damaging any part of the luminaire or the
bracket or the column.
ix.
Attachment of the luminaire to its bracket arm shall be by means of clamps or jam bolts
and designed to accommodate spigot sizes as shown in the table. A minimum of 2
(two) locking bolts / jam screws shall be provided.
x.
The minimum depth of penetration of the bracket arm shall be as shown in the table.
The mounting arrangement and attachment of the luminaire shall be such as to
withstand a
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
2/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
windspeed of 150 km per hour on the projected surface of the assembly without due
deflection.
Rating of Lamp
xi.
2.3.2
Diameter of
Bracket (mm.)
Diameter for Side
Entry (mm.)
100 Watt
50
40 - 60
Min.Depth of
Penetration
(mm.)
100
150 Watt
50
40 - 60
100
250 Watt
50
40 - 60
100
400 Watt
50
40 - 60
110
All parts which carry the weight of the luminaire and internal accessories shall be
provided with suitable locking devices to prevent the dislodgment of any part of the
luminaire by vibration either in service or during maintenance.
The Optical System
i.
The design of the optical system shall incorporate a one piece full bowl reflector and
shall be replaceable as a unit, independent of the canopy. The reflector shall be made of
at least 99.85% pure aluminium with a minimum thickness of 1 mm., be electrically
brightened, anodised and chemically treated to give high reflectance.
ii.
The optical compartment shall be tested and certified to IP 55 or higher.
iii.
The luminaire shall incorporate provisions to enable adjustments to shift the main light
distribution towards the axis of the road to suit different road widths. Such adjustments
shall be simple and positive and shall be firmly retained in clearly identified positions.
Photometric data shall be supplied for the particular distribution recommended in a
given installation. These data may be supplied in computer diskettes together with
software in the CIE format.
iv.
The bowl shall be designed and constructed such that when in the closed position, it
will be firmly held. The bowl shall be easily detached from the canopy without having
to use any tool and at the same time will not be detached when in the opened position
during maintenance. If an IP66 rating is specified for the optical compartment, the bowl
shall be designed, constructed and totally sealed to the reflector to form a single
removable optical unit.
v.
The bowl shall be made of glass or acrylic material. Where acrylic material is used, it
shall be stabilised against deformation, deterioration or discolouration due to the lamp
and/or solar radiation.
vi.
The bowl shall be clear or prismatic. In the case of prismatic bowls, the fluted surface
shall form the inner surface to facilitate cleaning.
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
3/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
vii.
2.3.3
The gasket shall be a one piece tropicalised weather resistant type made of suitable soft
resilient material that will not cause crazing of the bowl. The gasket shall form an
integral part of the bowl such that any bowl change will necessitate a change of the
gasket.
Lamp
i.
The lamp to be accommodated in the luminaire shall be 100/150/250/400 watt tubular
clear type High Pressure Sodium Vapour (HPSV) lamp.
ii.
The lamp shall comply with the requirements of IEC 60662 together with all current
amendments.
iii.
The minimum lumen output specifications of the lamp shall be as follows:-
Lamp
Lumen Output (Lm)
Lamp
Cap
Type
Colour
Corrected
Temperature
C.C.T
Initial,
at 100 hrs.
100 Watt
E 40
2000 K - 2100 K
9500
9200
150 Watt
E 40
2000 K - 2100 K
14500
13500
250 Watt
E40
2000 K - 2100 K
28000
26500
400 Watt
E40
2000 K - 2100 K
48000
46000
After
2000 hrs.
iv. The lamp shall not take longer than 4 minutes after the initial ‘switch on’ to attain 80% of
its guaranteed lumen output at the rated voltage 240 Volts, +5%, -10% and frequency 50
Hertz. The re-ignition period after an interruption of the supply shall not be longer than 1
minute to attain 80% of its lumen output.
v. The average luminous flux of the lamp shall not depreciate more than 10% of initial value
after 10,000 switched operating hours.
vi. The average mortality rate for the 100/150/250/400 watt HPSV lamp shall not be greater
than 10% at 12,000 switched operating hours.
2.3.4
Lampholder And Associated Supports And Brackets
i.
The lampholder shall be made of non-metallic, heat resistant material and be rigidly
fixed onto the optical compartment.
ii.
The lampholder shall be an E40 type for the 100/150/250/400 watt HPSV lamp. The
lampholder shall be complete with an appropriate brake system to prevent loosening of
the lamp.
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
4/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
2.3.5
iii.
The lampholder together with its supports and brackets shall withstand normal usage
throughout the life of the luminaire.
iv.
A lamp fully inserted shall be rigidly held with its axis substantially concident with that
of the lampholder under the normal conditions of wind, vibration and mechanical
shock.
v.
The E40 lampholder shall be rated for 4.5kV pulse.
Electrical Control Gear
A. General
i.
The luminaire shall be furnished complete with integral electrical control gear
comprising of inductive ballast, capacitor and ignitor.
ii.
The electrical control gear shall be mounted on a suitable module unit and shall be
easily removable and replaceable as a unit without the use of any special tools.
iii.
Electrical connection and disconnection of the electrical control gear unit from the
luminaire shall be through a plug and socket type connection/terminal block such that
incoming supply cables need not be removed when removing the electrical control gear
module.
B. Ballast
i.
The ballast shall be solidly filled with polyester compound and enclosed in a sheet steel
or die cast aluminium container or vacuum impregnated with polyester resin of not less
than thermal class ‘H’ (180 °C in accordance with IEC 60085).
ii.
The ballast shall be reactor type and comply fully with IEC 60922 - “Ballast for
Discharge Lamps : General and Safety Requirements” and IEC 60923 - “Ballast for
discharge lamps (excluding tubular fluorescent lamps) - Performance Requirements”.
iii.
The rated voltage of the ballast shall be 240 Volt, 50 Hz (Nominal) and shall be
suitable for operation on a 240 Volt, +5%, -10%, 50 Hz supply system. All terminals
shall be of screw connector type.
The lamp current crest factor of the ballast shall not exceed 1.8 for ±6% voltage
variations. At normal operating temperature, the maximum ballast losses, as per
IEC 60923 shall not exceed 16 Watt for the 100 Watt HPSV lamp, 18 watts for the 150
watt HPSV lamp, 27 watts for the 250 watt HPSV lamp and 39 watts for the 400 watt
HPSV lamp.
iv.
v.
The rated maximum operating temperature of the ballast winding (tw) shall not be less
than 130 °C whereas the maximum winding temperature rise (∆t) shall not be more
than 70 °C.
C. Ignitor
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
5/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
i.
The ignitor shall be solid state, fully electronic, timed, superimposed multiple-pulse
type which does not require the use of tapped ballast to ignite the HPSV lamp.
ii.
The ignitor shall be fully encapsulated and totally sealed against the ingress of
moisture.
iii.
The ignitor shall have a casing temperature rating of not less than 90 ºC.
iv.
The case of the unit shall carry a label showing the connections and
listing the
operating voltage and the precautions to take during its removal. The ignitor shall be
mounted with nut and lock washer.
v.
The ignitor shall comply with and be tested to IEC 60926 and IEC 60927 together with
all current amendments.
D. Capacitor
2.3.6
i.
The capacitors shall comply with and be tested to IEC 61048/61049.
ii.
The capacitors shall have a minimum voltage rating of 250 Volt and a casing
temperature rating not less than 85 ºC and shall be of sufficient capacity to raise the
power factor of the circuit to not less than 0.85 lagging. The capacitors shall be housed
in extruded aluminium or thermoplastic cannisters and mounted with nut and lock
washer.
iii.
Capacitors shall not be fused but incorporate a safety discharge resistor.
Internal Wiring, Terminal Block And Earthing Terminal
A. Internal Wiring
i.
The luminaire shall be completely pre-wired, requiring only the connection of the
electrical power supply cables to the terminal and the earth continuity conductor to the
earthing terminal.
ii. The control gear looping cables shall be non-hygroscopic heat resistant copper-core
flexible cable, with a temperature rating of not less than 105 °C and marked on the
insulation and securely clipped. The minimum size of the cable shall not be less than 1
sq. mm.
iii. PTFE insulation or the equivalent, rated to a minimum of 250 °C shall be used for leads
to the lampholder.
B Terminal Block
i.
A readily accessible barriered terminal block with the ‘live’ and ‘neutral’ connections
clearly and indelibly marked for the connection of incoming supply cables shall be
provided as close as possible to the point of entry of the supply cables. The terminal
block shall be made of non-inflammable material.
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
6/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
ii.
A means of clamping the electrical supply cables shall be provided in the luminaire to
relieve the terminations of strain where they are connected to the terminals. The cable
clamp arrangement shall not damage the insulation of the cables.
C Earthing Terminal
3.0
i.
A separate terminal for the connection of an earth continuity conductor, clearly and
indelibly marked shall be provided.
ii.
All exposed metal parts and other parts accessible when the luminaire is opened for
maintenance and liable to become live in the event of an insulation fault shall be
permanently and reliably connected to this earthing terminal.
PHOTOMETRIC DATA
The following Photometric Data relevant to each luminaire type shall be provided together
with the Tender submission.
i)
Isolux Diagram
ii)
iii)
Utilization Factor Curves
Polar Curves of the folowing C-Planes : 0°/180°; 90°/270°; maximum intensity
plane.
iv)
Downward Light Output Ratio.
v)
Downward and Upward Flux Fractions
Tender documents without the appropriate Photometric Data will be disqualified.
4.0
SAMPLE OF LUMINAIRES
4.1
Tenderers may be required to submit a sample each of the various luminaires offered after the
closing date of the tender submission. Such luminaires submitted shall be furnished complete
with control gear, lamp, wiring, etc. as per the tenderer’s offer in the tender document
together with supply cable and a 13 Ampere plug, ready for test.
4.2
The name and address of the tenderer shall be affixed onto the samples of the luminaire.
4.3
Delivery of the ‘SAMPLES’ shall be within a period of ONE WEEK immediately following
the request from JKR.
4.4
Tenderers who fail to submit the ‘SAMPLES’ of the luminaires within this stipulated
period shall be disqualified.
4.5
Tenderers shall arrange to collect back the samples on notification.
5.0
SCHEDULE AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON LUMINAIRES.
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
7/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
5.1
Tenderers are required to furnish the comprehensive information and technical particulars as
stipulated in the APPENDICES A, B, C and D.
5.2
The information required in each Appendix shall be completed fully and correctly and all
technical data entered therein shall be substantiated with relevant pamphlets and test
certificates from the manufacturers or the recognized testing authorities.
5.3
Failure to fulfil the above said requirements shall result in the disqualification of the
tender.
6.0
PROJECTS BASED ON THE 'TURNKEY', 'DESIGN AND BUILD' OR 'BUILDOPERATE-TRANSFER' (B.O.T.) APPROACH.
6.1
In the case of 'Turnkey' or ‘Design and Build’ or ‘Build-Operate-Transfer’ (B.O.T.) type
projects, the Road Lighting System shall be designed in accordance with the
recommendations set forth in the CIE 115 - 1995 “Recommendations For The Lighting Of
Roads For Motor And Pedestrian Traffic”. The Tenderer shall obtain the consent of JKR
for the classifications of “Description of Road”, “Conflict Areas” and “Lighting Class” from
JKR for the whole road system prior to designing the layout of the Road Lighting System.
6.2
This Specification applies to such projects.
7.0
OUTDOOR WEATHERPROOF FEEDER PILLARS
7.1
General
The Feeder Pillars shall be supplied completely assembled with control gear and all internal
electrical and mechanical interconnections and structural parts for voltages up to and including
1000 volts A.C. It shall comply with and be tested to the requirements of IEC 60439 - 1 and
IEC 60439 - 5.
7.2
Fabrication
The Electrical Contractor shall submit design drawings showing the plan, elevations, sections,
layout and construction details of the feeder-pillar for the approval of the S.O’s Representative
prior to fabrication. The plinth, foundation work, ducting, etc. shall be included in the design
drawing.
The feeder-pillar housing shall comprise of a drip canopy with sufficient overhang, rigid
welded channelled steel framework as specified in the Drawings and/or Bill of Quantities
and/or Notes. Anti-corrosive treatment shall be applied to the pillar and it shall be painted . A
non perishable resilient gasket shall be provided all around the edge of the feeder door.
On the front and rear sides of the feeder-pillar, the following sign and lettering of 90 mm height
shall be stencilled in red paint:
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
8/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
BAHAYA VOLTAN
ELEKTRIK
415 V
Side panels and front and back doors shall be fabricated from 12 swg sheet steel as specified in
the Drawings. The feeder pillar shall rest on an angle iron base where suitable holes have been
prepared to accomodate foundation bolts and to secure the feeder-pillar onto the concrete
foundation.
The door of the feeder pillar shall be rigidly reinforced bonded and hinged internally to the
main frame to prevent unauthorised access. The feeder pillar shall be of lockable type as
approved by the S.O’s Representative. The feeder-pillar shall be self-ventilated and
weatherproof, and such ventilation openings shall be protected by wire mesh to prevent the
entry of vermins, rodents and birds.
A suitable size wire mesh glass window shall be provided to facilitate reading of the kWH
meter.
A pocket of suitable size for housing A4 size documents shall be fitted onto the inside of
feeder-pillar as specified in the Drawings.
The hinged door must be earthed using copper braid as shown in the Drawings.
If a stainless steel feeder pillar is specified, all material including framework, panels, bolts and
nuts used in the manufacture shall be totally stainless steel. The side panels and front and back
doors shall be fabricated from 14 SWG stainless steel. No additional anti-corrosion and paint
treatment are required unless otherwise stated.
7.3
Factory Inspection
The Electrical Contractor shall make arrangements for a joint inspection and to witness the
electrical tests at the factory prior to transportation to the site of the feeder pillars. All costs
incurred shall be deemed to be included in the tender price. Test certificates shall be issued
upon completion of all tests.
7.4
Foundation
The site for the foundation of the feeder-pillar shall be excavated and filled where required,
compacted and levelled before the reinforced concrete base is constructed to a minimum of
300 mm. (or otherwise specified ) above the finished ground level and 700 mm. below the
finished ground level. Cable entry ducts shall also be provided as specified in the Drawings.
7.5
Earthing
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
9/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
The earthing system for the feeder-pillar shall comply with the requirements of MS IEC 60364,
BS 7671:1992 (formerly known as the IEE Wiring Regulations), JKR, JBEG and in
accordance with the Drawings.
Each feeder-pillar shall be effectively earthed by using 16mm. diameter copper jacketed steel
core rods, 25mm x 3mm copper tape and heavy duty inspection chamber with removable cover,
etc.
7.6
Switching Circuit
The time switch supplied for the control of the luminaires etc, shall be of the synchronous/step
motor wound handset dial, plug-in type. It shall incorporate a 24 hours spring reserve. The time
switch shall be suitably rated and operational on 220/240 V, 50 Hz supply.
7.7
Contactors
The contactor supplied shall comply to IEC 60947-4 with uninterrupted ratings, mechanical
duty class 2 and utilisation category of minimum AC3. The contactor coils shall be fully
tropicalised and wound for continuous operation for 240/415 V, 50 Hz supply. The contacts of
the contactor shall be rated for the breaking capacity on the connected load.
7.8
By-pass Switch and Selector Switch
A single and three phase by-pass switch as applicable shall be connected in parallel with the
contactor for use in the event of the failure of the contactor. This by-pass switch shall be
manufactured to B.S. 5419 and shall be capable of breaking the load connected without undue
wear or damage. A four position selector switch shall be provided to select the mode of
operation and shall be appropriately labelled.
7.9
Miniature Circuit Breakers.
Unless otherwise indicated in the Drawings and/or Bill of Quantities, miniature circuit breakers
(MCBs) shall have breaking capacity not less than 6 kA (rms) and of B-type with Class 3
energy limiting characteristics. They shall comply with IEC 60898, fully tropicalised and
suitable for use on a 240/415 V, 50Hz A.C. system and in an ambient temperature of 40oC.
They shall be quick-make, quick-break and trip free type complete with de-ion arc interrupters.
The tripping elements shall be of thermal magnetic type with inverse time delay overcurrent
and instantaneous short circuit characteristics. The response to overload shall be independent of
variations on ambient temperature.
They shall be manually operated by means of toggle type handle having visual indication of
whether the breaker is opened, closed or tripped. Multiple breakers shall be provided with a
common trip mechanism for simultaneous operation of all the poles.
7.10
Termination
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
10/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
All cables terminated into the various components including incoming and outgoing cables
must be terminated through compression glands and heat shrinkable sleeves.
8.0
COLUMNS AND BRACKETS.
8.1
General
Unless otherwise specified, all columns and brackets shall be tapered octagonal or tapered
round type, made up of hot dip galvanised steel interchangeable sections or pre-stressed spun
concrete columns or fibreglass reinforced material to comply in all respects to the Drawings,
Bill of Quantities and Notes. They shall be manufactured to comply with the relevant sections
of the latest edition of B.S. 5649 (EN 40) or ANSI C-136.20 and ASTM D4923-89, or other
approved international standards. The base plate, if any, (for planted type columns), brackets
arms and spigots shall be manufactured as separate units suitable for mounting or fixing onto
the columns. The data for the columns and brackets shall be provided in Appendix ‘E’.
8.2
Design loading
The columns shall be designed to withstand loading comprising of:
i.
Loads of wind speed up to 35m/sec.
ii.
The loads due to the weight of the column and accessories, luminaires and associated
control gear, the bracket arms and spigots.
iii.
Other applied loads
8.3
Fabrication
8.3.1
Hot Dip Galvanised Steel Columns
Each column section shall be mechanically formed and longitudinally welded by continuous
automatic gas shielded electric arc process (M.I.G. Process) or continuous automatic electric
resistance welding, to B.S. 5135:1984. The sections shall be constructed so as to overlap each
other by a minimum of 1.5 times the diameter of the immediate lower section (external across
face dimension) and to be easily assembled on site by using simple tools without employing
welding. The manufacturer shall provide a mark on the finished column sections indicating the
minimum overlapping position of 1.5 times the external across-face dimension.
8.3.2
Pre-stressed Spun Concrete Columns
i.
Pre-stressed Concrete wires and reinforcement
Pre-stressed Concrete (PC) wires, Non Tension (NT) wires and Spiral wires shall be cut
to correctly coincide with the shapes and dimensions specified in the Drawings. The PC
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
11/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
wires and reinforcement wires shall be arranged so that they are uniformly distributed
in the cross-section of the concrete column.
All steel reinforcement shall have a concrete cover of not less than 9mm.
Pre-stressed concrete columns shall also comply to BS 607 : Part 2 1970.
ii.
Moulding
Moulds used shall be sufficiently rigid in order to withstand the pre-stressing forces.
The PC wires shall be tensioned in advance, before the compaction process.
iii.
Concrete
The quality of the concrete and the curing process used shall be such that the
compressive strength of the concrete at 28 days in age is greater than 49.0 N/mm2 in
accordance with the tests stipulated in JIS A 1132 and JIS A 1108.
8.3.3
Fibreglass Reinforced Columns
i.
Type 1.
Each column section shall be mechanically formed by a centrifugation process. Textile
glass fabrics shall be used as reinforcement with the majority of fibre. Fibre only shall
be used to stabilize the fabric for extraordinary longitudinal alignment for main
reinforcement of the tension direction. On one side of the fabric a chopped strand mat
shall be provided to shear strength required in case of impact, compression or torsion.
The column section shall be produced and cured in a one-way operation, including the
resin and colour pigmentation process.
ii.
Type 2.
The columns shall be made from continuous E-glass roving, encapsulated in a high
temperature cured, corrosion resistant, epoxy resin matrix. The glass shall be wound
under tension, and at required angles to provide suitable axial and transversal
mechanical properties. The columns shall be cured by a process which allows the
epoxy resin to migrate to the surface of the column giving it an exceptionally smooth
and uniform finish. The glass content shall be approximately 65% by weight.
8.4
Material
8.4.1
Hot Dip Galvanised Steel Columns.
The column and accessories shall be fabricated from the following materials :
MATERIAL
COMPONENT
Column and Door
Steel to BS EN 10025 Grade Fe 510C or
BS EN 10025 Fe 430C or
BS 1387:1985 or JIS G3452:1978
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
12/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
Bracket
Spigot
8.4.2
Arm and
Steel to BS EN 10025 Fe 430C or
BS 1387:1985 or JIS G3452:1978
Base Flange
Steel to BS EN 10025 Fe 360A
Base Plate
Steel to BS EN 10025 Fe 360A
Pre-stressed Spun Concrete Columns
The column and accessories shall be manufactured/fabricated from the following materials.
COMPONENT
MATERIAL
1) Concrete grade 50 (50 N/mm2)
2) P.C Wire shall conform to JIS G 3536
Column
3) N.T Wire & reinforcement bar shall
conform to JIS G 3532
4) Spiral wire shall conform to JIS G 3532
8.4.3
Door & Spigot
Steel to BS EN 10025 Grade Fe 510C or BS
EN 10025 Fe 430C or BS 1387 : 1985 or JIS G 3452 : 1978
Bracket Arm
Steel to BS EN 10025 Fe 430C or BS 1387 : 1985 or JIS G
3452 : 1978
Base Plate
Steel to BS EN 10025 Fe 360A
Fibreglass Reinforced Columns
i.
Type 1
The column and accessories shall be fabricated from the following materials :
COMPONENT
MATERIAL
Column and Door
Fibreglass mat and thermoplastic polyester
resin combination
Bracket Arm and Spigot
Bracket arm -seamless steel with polyurethane
coating.
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
13/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
Spigot - galvanised steel
Base Flange
Galvanised steel
Pigmentation Of Colour:
The colour pigmentatation of the columns shall be guaranteed for at least 15 years of
use.
Electrical Properties:
The columns shall comply with the following electrical properties:
Surface resistivity
Resistivity
Creep resistance
Dielectric strength
Insulation class
VDE 0303
VDE0303
DIN 53482
DIN 53482
DIN53480
DIN53481
II
∼ 1013Ω
15
∼ 10 Ω
KA3c
about 30 kV/mm
The flame retardancy properties shall be similar to that of the type 2 composite
columns.
Mechanical Properties:
The columns shall comply with the following mechanical properties:
Tensile strength
Flex elongation
Flexural strength
Flex E-modulus
Impact strength
Heat distortion temperature
ii.
DIN 53455
DIN 53455
DIN 53452
DIN 53452
DIN 53453
DIN 53458
∼ 2.500 kp/cm2
∼ 7.5%
∼ 1.700 kp/cm2
∼ 70.000 kp/cm2
∼ 50 kp/cm2
above maximum of standard.
Type 2.
The column and accessories shall be facricated from the following materials:
MATERIAL
COMPONENT
Column and Door
E-glass roving and epoxy resin matrix. The
door may also be fabricated from aluminium
or galvanised steel.
Bracket Arm and Spigot
Bracket arm - Same material as column or
galvanised steel.
Spigot/tenon - aluminium
Base Flange
Galvanised steel
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
14/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
Flame Resistance:
Columns shall not contain chlorine halogen gases or other toxic materials in excess of
trace levels which shall always be within the safe OSHA limits. When the column
material is subjected to 3 consecutive 60 second flame applications, it shall self
extinguish within 5 seconds after the last flame application. Flame resistance shall be in
accordance with ASTMD635.
The fibreglass reinforced material shall be non-conductive.
8.5
Protection Against Corrosion
8.5.1
Hot Dip Galvanised Steel Columns
Individual sections of the column, base-plate, door, spigots and bracket arms shall be protected
against corrosion by hot dip galvanising, internally and externally in accordance with B.S.
729:1971 or ASTM Standard A123. All welding work shall be done before galvanising.
The treatment prior to galvanising shall include degreasing, rinsing, pickling, further rinsing
and fluxing.
The minimum average weight of the zinc coating shall be 460 g/m2 for any individual test area.
The galvanised column and spigots/bracket arms shall be of prime finish and of good
uniformity, i.e. free from injurious defects, such as blister, flux or any uncoated spot.
The planted section of the column shall be factory-coated with bitumen using the hot dipping
process conforming to AASHTO M 190.
8.5.2
Pre-stressed Spun Concrete Columns
All exposed metal parts of the concrete columns shall be treated and protected against
corrosion.
8.5.3
Fibreglass Reinforced Columns
Fibreglass reinforced columns shall not erode, rot or corrode and shall not deteriorate in the
Malaysian tropical climate coupled with high sunshine and heavy rainfall, together with other
severe evironmental conditions of salt-laden air, acid rain, acid soil and marshy soil and shall be
finished in a UV-resistant surface.
A range of colour finish shall be available for the columns, with no colour fading over time.
Unless otherwise specified, the finish of the column shall be smooth.
8.6
Bracket Arms
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
15/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
Bracket arms shall be of suitable outreach as indicated in the Drawings and/or the B.Q. Unless
otherwise indicated in the Drawings and/or B.Q. the bracket arms shall be arranged to give a 5
degree uplift. A spigot of approved material and of appropriate dimensions for the luminaire
shall be welded or suitably attached at the base of the bracket arms. In the case of a steel
bracket arm, after welding and related work, the bracket arm shall be treated as per clause 8.5
before being hot-dip galvanised.
8.7
Spigots
Steel spigots or spigots made of other approved material shall be supplied and installed as
indicated in the Drawings and/or B.Q. and treated as per clause 8.5 in the case of steel.
8.8
Doors, Door Openings and Opening for Wiring to Decorative Signs/Lights
A hingged weather-proof flush-type or overlapping door, hingged on the upper side with
provision to hold the fully opened (180° from the closed position) hingged door in place, shall
be provided complete with an anti-vandal locking device over the door opening of each column
as shown in the relevant Drawings. The door openings shall have internal reinforcement to
compensate for the loss of stiffness of the column caused by forming the door openings.
In addition, an opening of 16 mm. diameter complete with rubber plug shall be provided on the
column at a height of 5.6 m above the finished ground level for wiring to decorative
lighting/signs. The opening shall be located on the same side of the column as the door
opening.
8.9
Baseboard
A piece of galvanised perforated steel baseboard shall be included in the base compartment for
cable termination of the control gear assembly. The baseboard shall have suitable dimensions as
indicated in the Drawings and securely fixed in position inside the column.
8.10
Earthing Terminal
Columns shall be provided with a corrosion-resistant earthing terminal having substantial
contact surface for the attachment of an earthing lead. The terminal shall be provided close to
the door opening inside the columns. Where a bolt is used, it shall be at least 6 mm. in diameter
and 20mm. in length and provided with two suitable washers and nuts. Unless otherwise
specified , the bolt, nuts and washers shall be made of stainless steel.
8.11
Service Slots
For the planted type column, the service slot shall be on the same side and vertically below the
service door.
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
16/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
For the flange mounted type of column, the cable entry shall be through the flange plate having
a hole of suitable diameter as shown in the Drawings and a suitable duct for cable entry shall
also be provided at the concrete base.
8.12
Flange and Anti-sink Base Plate
8.12.1 Hot Dip Galvanised Steel Columns
For the flange mounted type of column, a flange plate of substantial thickness as shown in the
Drawings shall be welded onto the column. As for the planted type column, a detachable antisink base plate shall be supplied. The anti-sink plate, bolt, and nut etc. shall be hot-dip
galvanised after manufacture and treated as in clause 8.5.
8.12.2 Pre-stressed Concrete Columns
For concrete columns, a flange plate shall be assembled and cast together with concrete during
the manufacturing process.
8.12.3 Fibreglass Reinforced Columns
i.
Type 1.
For the flange mounted type column, a flange plate with a rod adapted to the column
shall be assembled. The base plate/concrete shell, bolt, and nut etc. shall be hot dip
galvanised steel assembled on concrete foundation as per Drawings.
Prefabricated foundation shall be constructed to the column manufacturer's
recommendations.
ii.
Type 2.
In the case of the flange-mounted column, a hot-dipped galvanised steel base plate of
thickness and dimensions as shown in the Drawings shall be welded to the attachment
collar. The attachment collar shall be bonded and mechanically secured to the inside of
the column. All required anchor bolts, nuts and washers shall be galvanised steel type
and supplied by the column manufacturer.
In the case of the planted column, the base of the column shall be enlarged via two
integral anti-rotation bosses, located 180° from each other and appropriately centred
above the column butt. These bosses shall be large enough to effectively prevent
rotation and pull-out of the column and shall be formed by the column manufacturer.
8.12.4
Where the concrete base for the flange mounted columns are included in the Electrical
Contractor’s work, the bolts and nuts for mounting the flanged mounted columns shall be
supplied by the column manufacturer.
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
17/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
8.13
Factory Testing of the Columns
A sample of all types of columns and bracket arms shall be tested at the factory of
manufacture in the presence of the S.O's Representatives. The tests shall comprise of :
8.13.1 Hot Dip Galvanised Steel Columns
a)
Dimensional and Weight Measurements of column and bracket.
b)
Temporary Deflection Test :
The column is to be mounted horizontally and rigidly supported for the distance
equivalent to the planting depth from the base, and loaded, as a cantilever at a point
from the top of the column (excluding the bracket arm). The temporary deflection
measured at the point of application of load shall not exceed 150 mm. and the load to
cause 150 mm. deflection at the top of the column (excluding the bracket arm) shall
not be less than the folowing figures:
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
1340
1120
1230
800
700
550
480
COLUMN MOUNTING
HEIGHT (m)
Load to cause 150 mm
deflection at top of
column (excluding
bracket arm) (≥N)
The deflection test shall be carried out with the column placed in the two weakest
positions.
c)
Galvanising Test :
The columns and brackets shall be subjected to the galvanising thickness test as laid
down in BS 729:1971.
d)
Bitumen Test :
The bitumen coating on the column base shall be subjected to thickness test.
e)
Material Test :
Steel material used for the manufacturing of columns and brackets shall be subjected
to test for compliancee with BS EN 10025 (Grade 43C or Grade 50C). The supplier
shall state the test method and the reference standards together with the tender. The
test method and the reference standards shall be subject to the approval of the S.O.'s
Representative.
f)
Welding Test :
The welded portions of the columns and brackets shall be subjected to the welding
test as stipulated in the British Standard B.S. 5135 or equivalent Standard approved
by the S.O.’s Representative.
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
18/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
The minimum percentage penetration for the longitudinal seam weld shall be 60%.
g)
Mechanical Property Test :
A small piece of steel plate of adequate size shall be cut off from the base of the
sample column for this test.
The tensile strength and yield of the sheet metal shall be measured. The test results
shall comply with the limits specified in BS EN 10025 for Grade 510C and 430C
steel as follows :
Fe 510C
Fe430C
Tensile Strength
(N/mm2)
490 to 640
430 to 580
Yield Strength
(Min. N/mm2)
355
275
8.13.2 Pre-stressed Concrete Columns
i.
Bending Strength Test
This test shall be carried out in accordance with JIS A 5309.
When the design load of 1.5kN is applied, cracks exceeding 0.25 mm in width shall not
appear. When the design load is removed there shall be no cracks exceeding 0.05mm
in width.
ii.
Breaking Test
This test shall be carried out in accordance to JIS A 5309. The load is applied to the
column in one of the two loading directions until the column is broken. The breaking
load shall be more than twice the design load.
iii.
Inspection
a)
Quantity of Column to be Inspected
Inspection of the appearance, shape and dimensions shall be performed on all
columns.
Inspection of the concrete cover shall be performed on the column that was
subjected to the breaking test.
The bending strength test shall be conducted on three column sampled from a
batch of 1000 columns or part thereof.
The breaking test shall be performed on one of three columns used in the
bending strength test.
b)
Determination of Acceptability
All columns shall comply to the specification with respect to appearance,
shape and dimensions.
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
19/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
When all the three columns subjected to the bending strength test comply with
the specification, then all the columns in the batch shall be accepted.
When one column does not conform with the specification during the bending
strength test, the test shall be repeated one or two sampled columns. When
both columns conform to the specification, all columns in the batch shall be
accepted except for the initially rejected column.
When test column does not comply to the specification, the test shall be
repeated with two more sampled columns.
When both columns conform, all the columns in the batch shall be accepted
except for the initially rejected column.
8.13.3 Fibreglass Reinforced Columns
Fibreglass Reinforced Columns shall be tested to the relevant sections of the applicable BS,
VDE, DIN, ANSI/AASHTO as the case requires, to ensure compliance with the mechanical
properties, strength, stiffness, flame retardancy, accepted deflection tolerances and breaking
point loading including testing under full wind loading condition.
8.13.4 All test and measuring equipment shall be provided by the column manufacturer and all such
test and measuring equipment shall be certified to have been calibrated by an accredited
laboratory for testing and calibration. Proof of validity of the calibration shall be submitted to
the S.O’s Representative for approval prior to making arrangements for the factory testing.
8.13.5 A verified Test Report for the tests on the columns shall be submitted by the manufacturer.
8.13.6 All expenses incurred for the tests shall be borne by the Electrical Contractor and shall be
deemed to have been included in the Contract Price.
8.14
Terminal Block
The terminal block shall be of a type manufactured for use in road lighting installation. They
shall have facilities for double fusing loop-in loop-out terminals. The cut-out bases shall have a
supply cable contact block rating of at least 50A and shall be capable of accepting circular
cable cores up to 25 mm2 copper 2 core or 4 core as required. The cut-out shall be provided
with adequate shrouding to prevent cross phasing with live metal parts.
8.15
Cable Terminations and Internal Wiring
An appropriate type of earthing clamp shall be provided to bond the armouring of the cables
which shall be effectively earthed.
Cable glands c/w hot-dipped galvanised mild steel L-bracket shall be used for all armoured
cable termination.
The cables, including the earthing cable, from the road lighting cut-outs to the luminaires shall
not be less than 2.5 mm2 pvc. They shall be bundled together with cable ties and terminated
with lugs.
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
20/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
8.16
Erection of Columns
Columns shall be installed in accordance with the manufacturer's recommendation and as per
Drawings. The Electrical Contractor shall peg out the positions of the columns for the approval
of the S.O’s Representative before planting the columns or before the construction of the
concrete bases in the case of flange mounted columns.
The columns shall be erected such that the service doors shall face the opposite side to the
oncoming traffic except at parapets of bridges and retaining walls. At such locations the
orientation of the service doors shall be determined by the S.O’s Representative. After erecting
the column, the backfill shall be compacted by means of a suitable ramming equipment and the
uprightness of the columns shall be verified with the use of a plumb line or equivalent device.
9.0
CABLES AND DUCTS
Road lighting cables and their installation shall be in compliance with the latest JKR
Specification for Low Voltage Underground Cable, and to any additional notes mentioned in
the Drawings and Notes to Tenderers.
Ducts for road crossing, etc. shall be laid in accordance with the Drawings, B.Q. and
appropriate sections of the Specification.
Cables in the central median shall be laid close to the columns and as far away as possible from
the edge of the pavement. The minimum distance from the edge of the pavement shall be 1
metre or as directed by the S.O’s Representative.
Cables along the road shoulders shall be laid as far away as possible from the usable shoulder
width or as directed by the S.O’s Representative.
Data for voltage drop calculations for all the road lighting circuits shall be give in the format of
Appendix F - “Voltage Drop Calculation For The Road Lighting Installation”, together
with the detailed calculations.
10.0
SHOP DRAWINGS
Two sets of prints of shop drawings for construction and/or installation shall be submitted to the
S.O.’s Representative for approval. The Electrical Contractor shall prepare and submit shop
drawings for the whole work or parts of the work at least two weeks before the work begins. If
the shop drawings submitted are not acceptable by the S.O.’s Representative, the Electrical
Contractor shall amend and re-submit the shop drawings within two weeks from the date of
return of the shop drawings. No work including fabrication of the feeder pillars shall be carried
out without the shop drawings being approved by the S.O.’s Representative.
The shop drawings shall include and show the following:
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
21/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
The dimensioned general arrangements, layouts and positions of columns and luminaires, feeder
pillars, and all others necessary for the complete road lighting installation as specified in the
Drawings and/or Bill of Quantities;
Circuits and switching arrangements including schematic line diagrams of the installation;
The dimensioned general arrangements and layouts of the equipment and the schematic line
diagram of the feeder pillars;
Cable routes for all cables laid underground, in ducts and trenches;
The dimensioned general arrangements and layout of earthing system including routes for
earthing conductors and positions of earth electrodes.
The cost of all these shop drawings, whether or not provided in the Bill of Quantities, is deemed
to be included in the Contract.
11.0
CONSTRUCTION REQUIREMENTS
Adequate warning signs including flashing lights, luminous signs and flagmen shall be
provided for the safety of the road user and general public. The general arrangement and
location of temporary warning signs shall be in strict accordance with ARAHAN TEKNIK
(JALAN) 2C/85 and amendments, published by Cawangan Jalan, Ibu Pejabat JKR Malaysia,
Kuala Lumpur. All workers on the site shall be appropriately dressed with luminous jackets and
the work area adequately cordoned. No night work shall be permitted without the prior
approval of the S.O’s Representative. All warning signs shall conform to standard JKR
requirements. Adequate illuminated, flashing and luminous warning signs shall be provided
during the night time.
The maximum trenching distance and working area for the day shall be determined after prior
consultation with the S.O’s Representative. The mobile trenching method shall be employed as
far as is practicable and all excavations, installation of ducting/sand/cabling/bricks/accessories,
backfilling, compacting and cleaning up shall be executed in one coordinated operation to
expeditiously complete the work and therefore minimise inconvenience and danger to the
public. The carriageway and road shoulder area including all work area shall be cleared of all
debris and cleaned after each day’s work
All excess excavated material and construction material shall be removed from the site and no
such material shall be permitted to be left by the road side without the consent of the S.O’s
Representative.
12.0
TESTING AND TEST CERTIFICATES
On completion of the installation work on site and before the Certificate of Practical
Completion is issued, the Electrical Contractor shall at his own expense, arrange for all
necessary tests to be carried out on the installation by competent person as part of the tests
required of him for the whole installation under this contract. The tests to be carried out shall be
as prescribed in the Electricity Regulations 1994, B.S. 7671: 1992 including all amendments
(formerly known as the IEE Wiring Regulations), IEC 60364 and other tests deemed necessary
by the S.O.'s Representative.
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
22/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
In the event the installation fails any of these tests, the Electrical Contractor shall, at his own
expense, take such measures as are necessary to remedy the defects and the installation shall
not be considered as completed until it complies with the requirements of all such tests.
The tests to be carried out by the Electrical Contractor shall consist of the following tests
(where applicable) :a) Continuity of final circuit conductors.
b) Continuity of protective conductors including main and supplementary equipotential
bonding.
c) Insulation resistance.
d)
e)
f)
g)
h)
i)
j)
k)
l)
m)
Insulation of site-built assemblies.
Protection by electrical separation.
Protection by barriers or enclosures provided during erection.
Insulation of non-conducting floors and walls.
Polarity.
Earth fault loop impedance.
Earth electrode resistance.
Fuctional testing of all types of switches and switchgear.
Alignment and uprightness of the columns and the tilting angle of the bracket arms.
Luminance and illuminance readings in accordance with the computer plots.
Two sets of Supervision and Completion Certificate and Test Certificate including copies of all
the test results and drawings as prescribed in the Electricity Regulations 1994 shall be
submitted to the S.O.’s Representative within two weeks after the completion of the testing.
The aforesaid Certificates shall be properly bound in hard cover and titled.
13.O
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
During the Defects Liability Period, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the
service and maintenance for the complete installation. All works shall be carried out by
competent person. All labour, tranport, equipment, materials, tools and parts necessary to
service the installation and/or rectify the defect due to manufacturing/installation faults shall be
supplied/executed at the Electrical Contractor’s cost.
The Electrical Contractor shall provide a three-monthly report in the manner of Appendix G.
The service and maintenance to be performed and defects to be rectified and made good shall
include but not limited to the following :a)
Replacing or making good all luminaires, lamps, ballasts, capacitors, ignitors, control
gears, switches, socket outlets, isolators, mcb, mccb, fuses, time switches, contactors,
relays, meters, etc.
b)
Replacing all consumable items that do not meet the manufacturer’s guaranteed or
declared lifespan.
c) Straightening columns and replacing missing doors, covers and locking devices.
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
23/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
d)
Replacing and making good all loose/damaged cable terminations, damaged cables,
mechanical support linkages, earth electrode chambers and covers, etc.
e)
Making good damage to roads, buildings, drains, cables, pipes, concrete areas, paved
areas, turfed areas, etc. which was his responsibility to make good but which had not
been properly rectified.
f) All other works deemed necessary by the S.O.’s Representative.
All works shall be carried out as soon as the Electrical Contractor is informed by the S.O.’s
Representative or the owner and shall be completed within a reasonable time except under
emergency situation as stipulated in the Supplementary Conditions for Electrical Work. If the
Electrical Contractor fails to comply with the above requirements, the S.O.’s Representative
reserves the right to engage a third party to carry out the work, in which case, the Electrical
Contractor shall be responsible for all the expenses incurred.
14.0
AS-INSTALLED DRAWINGS, MANUALS AND TOOLS
Within three calendar months after the practical completion of the project, one set of true to
scale negative (110/115 gm./sq.m. ISO A0 or A1 size) and four sets of prints for each of the
following drawings shall be submitted :a)
Site plan
b)
Schematic Wiring Diagrams and Control Circuit Drawings
c)
Road Lighting Layout Plans
d)
Layout plan of cable routes and earthing points, with reference to easily recognisable
landmarks, buildings and structures.
These drawings shall be properly stencilled and shall have at the lower right corner the
Electrical Contractor's name and address, date of commissioning, scale, drawing number (the
drawing number shall be obtained from the S.O.'s Representative), title and the following
particulars:JABATAN KERJA RAYA MALAYSIA
CAWANGAN ELEKTRIK
CONTRACT NO:
TENDER NO :
If the drawings submitted are not acceptable to the S.O.’s Representative, the Electrical
Contractor shall amend and resubmit the drawings within two weeks from the date of
notification by the S.O.’s Representative.
If required and specified elsewhere, in addition to the aforesaid negatives and prints, the asinstalled drawings shall be stored in electronic media or any other media as specified. The
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
24/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
electronic media shall be floppy disks and/or CD as specified which can be readily retrieved by
computer. The software programme shall be AutoCAD of a release specified or of the latest
release. Two sets or copies of the as-installed drawings in the format required, appropriately
titled and stored in container or casing, shall be submitted.
In addition, four sets of the following manuals/brochures and documents, suitably bound, shall
be submitted to the S.O’s Representative:
a)
Installation manual
b)
Operation manual
c)
Service and Maintenance Manual
d)
Parts List
c)
Product data and catalogues
d)
Product Test Certificates
Each of the above sets of prints together with the manuals shall be in a stiff cover ring file. In
addition, a set of A4 size schematic drawings shall be laminated and placed inside the pockets
of the Feeder Pillars.
Special tools required for the operation, service and maintenance of the feeder pillars and
switchgear, columns and other equipment shall also be provided.
The cost of all these prints, manuals and tools shall be deemed to be included in the Contract
Price.
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
25/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
APPENDIX A-1
SCHEDULE OF LUMINAIRE (400W HPSV/SON)
ITEM
A
DESCRIPTION
DATA/MATERIAL
MAKE
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of manufacture
3 Brand of Luminaire
4 Model of Luminaire
B
MATERIAL
5 Lamp Compartment
6 Control Gear Compartment
7 Sealing Gasket
8 Reflector
9 Cover Bowl
10
Lampholder
11
Bowl Retainer Catch
C
PHOTOMETRY
12
Standard Position
13
Facilities for Directional Light Control
14
Optical Compartment (Degree of Protection)
15
Control Gear Compartment (Degree of Protection)
...cont. pg. 28/49
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
26/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
APPENDIX A-1
SCHEDULE OF LUMINAIRE (400W HPSV/SON)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DATA/MATERIAL
16
Relevant Standard of Conformity
17
Total Light Output Ratio - TLOR
18
Downward Light Output Ratio-DLOR
19
Direction of maximum intensity measured from the
downward vertical (Cd/1000 lm)
20
Maximum intensity at 80° from the downward
vertical (Cd/1000 lumen)
21
Maximum intensity at 88° from the downward
vertical (Cd/1000 lumen)
22
Maximum intensity above the horizontal (Cd/1000
lumen)
23
Relevant pamphlets to substantiate the above
mentioned data and test certificates to be enclosed
……………………………..
T/t, Nama & Cop Pengilang
…………………………………………
T/t, Nama & Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
APPENDIX A-2
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
27/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
SCHEDULE OF LUMINAIRE (250W HPSV/SON)
ITEM
A
DESCRIPTION
DATA/MATERIAL
MAKE
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of manufacture
3 Brand of Luminaire
4 Model of Luminaire
B
MATERIAL
5 Lamp Compartment
6 Control Gear Compartment
7 Sealing Gasket
8 Reflector
9 Cover Bowl
10
Lampholder
11
Bowl Retainer Catch
C
PHOTOMETRY
12
Standard Position
13
Facilities for Directional Light Control
14
Optical Compartment (Degree of Protection)
15
Control Gear Compartment (Degree of Protection)
...cont. pg. 30/49
APPENDIX A-2
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
28/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
SCHEDULE OF LUMINAIRE (250W HPSV/SON)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DATA/MATERIAL
16
Relevant Standard of Conformity
17
Total Light Output Ratio - TLOR
18
Downward Light Output Ratio-DLOR
19
Direction of maximum intensity measured from the
downward vertical (Cd/1000 lm)
20
Maximum intensity at 80° from the downward
vertical (Cd/1000 lumen)
21
Maximum intensity at 88° from the downward
vertical (Cd/1000 lumen)
22
Maximum intensity above the horizontal (Cd/1000
lumen)
23
Relevant pamphlets to substantiate the above
mentioned data and test certificates to be enclosed
……………………………..
T/t, Nama & Cop Pengilang
…………………………………………
T/t, Nama & Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
29/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
APPENDIX A-3
SCHEDULE OF LUMINAIRE (150W HPSV/SON)
ITEM
A
DESCRIPTION
DATA/MATERIAL
MAKE
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of manufacture
3 Brand of Luminaire
4 Model of Luminaire
B
MATERIAL
5 Lamp Compartment
6 Control Gear Compartment
7 Sealing Gasket
8 Reflector
9 Cover Bowl
10
Lampholder
11
Bowl Retainer Catch
C
PHOTOMETRY
12
Standard Position
13
Facilities for Directional Light Control
14
Optical Compartment (Degree of Protection)
...cont. pg. 32/49
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
30/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
APPENDIX A-3
SCHEDULE OF LUMINAIRE (150W HPSV/SON)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DATA/MATERIAL
15
Control Gear Compartment (Degree of Protection)
16
Relevant Standard of Conformity
17
Total Light Output Ratio - TLOR
18
Downward Light Output Ratio-DLOR
19
Direction of maximum intensity measured from the
downward vertical (Cd/1000 lm)
20
Maximum intensity at 80° from the downward
vertical (Cd/1000 lumen)
21
Maximum intensity at 88° from the downward
vertical (Cd/1000 lumen)
22
Maximum intensity above the horizontal (Cd/1000
lumen)
23
Relevant pamphlets to substantiate the above
mentioned data and test certificates to be enclosed
……………………….. ……
T/t, Nama & Cop Pengilang
…………………………………………
T/t, Nama & Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
31/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
APPENDIX A-4
SCHEDULE OF LUMINAIRE (100W HPSV/SON)
ITEM
A
DESCRIPTION
DATA/MATERIAL
MAKE
1 Manufacturer
2 Country of manufacture
3 Brand of Luminaire
4 Model of Luminaire
B
MATERIAL
5 Lamp Compartment
6 Control Gear Compartment
7 Sealing Gasket
8 Reflector
9 Cover Bowl
10
Lampholder
11
Bowl Retainer Catch
C
PHOTOMETRY
12
Standard Position
13
Facilities for Directional Light Control
14
Optical Compartment (Degree of Protection)
15
Control Gear Compartment (Degree of Protection)
...cont. pg. 34/49
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
32/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
APPENDIX A-4
SCHEDULE OF LUMINAIRE (100W HPSV/SON)
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
DATA/MATERIAL
16
Relevant Standard of Conformity
17
Total Light Output Ratio - TLOR
18
Downward Light Output Ratio-DLOR
19
Direction of maximum intensity measured from the
downward vertical (Cd/1000 lm)
20
Maximum intensity at 80° from the downward
vertical (Cd/1000 lumen)
21
Maximum intensity at 88° from the downward
vertical (Cd/1000 lumen)
22
Maximum intensity above the horizontal (Cd/1000
lumen)
23
Relevant pamphlets to substantiate the above
mentioned data and test certificates to be enclosed
………………………....…..
T/t, Nama & Cop Pengilang
…………………………………………
T/t, Nama & Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
APPENDIX B
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
33/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA - HPSV LAMPS
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
400W
1
Manufacturer
2
Country of manufacture
3
Model number
4
Lamp type
5
Wattage
6
Efficacy (Lumen/Watt)
7
Operating position
8
Rated life (Hours)
9
Luminous flux after 100 burning hours
10
Colour temperature (K)
11
Operating voltage
12
Operating lamp current
13
Max. starting current
14
18
Waveband in which 80% of the spectral
energy distribution will occur
Time to reach 80% of max. luminous
flux after switching
Time to re-strike after power
interruption
Light depreciation after 5000 burning
hours
Mortality rate after 5000 burning hours
19
Relevant Standards of conformity
20
Relevant pamphlets to substantiate the
above-mentioned data and test
certificates to be enclosed
15
16
17
………………………...…..
T/t, Nama & Cop Pengilang
250W
150W
100W
…………………………………………
T/t, Nama & Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
APPENDIX C
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
34/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA - CONTROL GEAR
BALLAST FOR THE FOLLOWING HPSV LAMPS
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
400W
1
Manufacturer
2
Model number
3
Country of manufacture
4
Nominal wattage
5
Losses (in watts)
6
Rated max. operating temperature of
ballast winding - tw (°C)
7
8
Max. winding temperature rise (°C)
Impedance
9
Resistance
10
Inductance
11
Lamp current crest factor
12
Power factor before correction
13
Power factor after correction
14
Expected life
250W
150W
100W
∆t
……………………………..
T/t, Nama & Cop Pengilang
………………………………………….
T/t, Nama & Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
...cont. pg. 37/49
APPENDIX C
SCHEDULE OF TECHNICAL DATA - CONTROL GEAR
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
35/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
IGNITOR FOR THE FOLLOWING HPSV LAMPS
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
1
Manufacturer
2
Model number
3
Country of manufacture
4
Nominal voltage
5
Peak ignition voltage
6
Losses (in watts)
7
Max. housing temperature (°C)
8
Max. operating temperature (°C)
9
10
Conventional or electronic
superimposed pulse type
Timed type ( Yes / No )
11
Guaranteed life (no. of strikes)
400W
250W
150W
100W
CAPACITOR FOR THE FOLLOWING HPSV LAMPS
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
1
Manufacturer
2
Model number
3
Country of manufacture
4
Capacitance
5
Material of container
400W
……………………………..
T/t, Nama & Cop Pengilang
250W
150W
100W
…………………………………………
T/t, Nama & Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
APPENDIX D
SUBMISSION OF COMPUTER PLOTS.
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
36/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).13
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
Electrical Contractors are required to submit computer plots of typical road sections as per
format described in the layouts given.
APPENDIX D1 (1 to 4) - Computer Calculation Format For Road Lighting Installation
(To be submitted for various typical layout and sections as given in
the Tender Document or obtained from JKR)
APPENDIX D2 (1 to 2) - Tabulated Summary Of Lighting Level Calculation/Data For Road
Lighting Installation
The computer plots shall also be attached.
In addition, the photometric data of item 3.0 shall be submitted.
All the above plots and data shall be certified by the respective manufacturer.
...................................................................
Tandatangan dan Nama Kontraktor Elektrik
.....................................
Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
………………
Tarikh
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
37/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
APPENDIX D1-1
DESCRIPTION OF THE LAYOUT
1
Cross section (transversally)
* Road surface type : R ……
Lave = 2 cd/m2
Cht
Uo = Lmin/Lave ≥ 40%
Ul= Lmin/Lmax ≥ 70%
Lw
T.I. ≤ 15% (Threshold Increment)
Mw
* Qo : ………..
* Maintenance factor : …………
Rw
* Source : HPSV(Son-T) ………….Watts
* Flux (klm) : …………. klm
Tilting Angle : 50
Position of the calculation grids
Plan view
[m]
* Overhang : …………………….
SR (Surround Ratio) ≥ 0.5
Cs
X
LEGEND:
Grid A
Y
Cht - Column height (m)
Cs - Column spacing (m)
Lw - Lane width (m)
Mw - Median width (m)
Rw - Road width (m)
*
- Data to be filled in by JKR/Designer
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
©Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik JKR Malaysia
39/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
APPENDIX D1-2
ILLUMINANCE ON THE 'GRID A' (TYPICAL FOR 3 LANE ROAD)
Y[m]
[LUX]
Lw(17/6)
Lw(15/6)
Lw(13/6)
Lw(11/6)
Lw(3/2)
Lw(7/6)
Lw(5/6)
Lw/2
Lw/6
X[m]
0.0
0.1Cs
0.2Cs
0.3Cs
0.4Cs
0.5Cs
0.6Cs
Eave =
Lux
Uo = Emin/Eave =
%
Emin =
Lux
Ug = Emin/Emax =
%
Emax =
Lux
0.7Cs
0.8Cs
0.9Cs
Type of luminaire : ………………………
Data for 30 points per lane.
LEGEND :
Cs - Column spacing in metres
Lw - Lane width in metres
Tandatangan Pengilang
Tandatangan Kontraktor Elektrik
Cop Pengilang
Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
Nama:
Nama:
Jawatan:
Jawatan:
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
©Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik JKR Malaysia
40/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
APPENDIX D1-3
LUMINANCE ON THE 'GRID A' (TYPICAL FOR A 3-LANE ROAD)
(Observer's position : X= - 60.0m Y= Lw/2 H= 1.5m)
[CD/M2]
Y[m]
Lw(17/6)
Lw(15/6)
Lw(13/6)
Lw(11/6)
Lw(3/2)
Lw(7/6)
Lw(5/6)
Lw/2
Lw/6
X[m]
0.0
0.1Cs
0.2Cs
0.3Cs
0.4Cs
0.5Cs
0.6Cs
Lave =
cd/m2
Uo = Lmin/Lave =
Lmin =
cd/m2
Ul = Lmin/Lmax = _______%
Lmax =
cd/m2
0.7Cs
0.8Cs
0.9Cs
%
Type of luminaire : ………………………
Data For 30 Points Per Lane
LEGEND :
Cs - Column spacing in metres
Lw - Lane width in metres
Tandatangan Pengilang
Tandatangan Kontraktor Elektrik
Cop Pengilang
Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
Nama:
Nama:
Jawatan:
Jawatan:
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
©Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik JKR Malaysia
41/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
APPENDIX D1-4
LONGITUDINAL UNIFORMITY FOR EACH LANE (FOR A 3-LANE ROAD)
Observer on the axis Y = + Lw/2 m
X=
0.0
0.1Cs
0.2Cs
0.3Cs
0.4Cs
0.5Cs
0.6Cs
0.7Cs
0.8Cs
0.9Cs
[m]
2
L=
[cd/m ]
UgI1 = Lmin/Lmax =
%
Observer on the Y = + Lw(3/2) m
X=
0.0
0.1Cs
0.2Cs
0.3Cs
0.4Cs
0.5Cs
0.6Cs
0.7Cs
0.8Cs
0.9Cs
[m]
2
L=
[cd/m ]
UgI2 = Lmin/Lmax =
%
Observer on the Y = + Lw(15/6) m
X=
0.0
0.1Cs
0.2Cs
0.3Cs
0.4Cs
0.5Cs
0.6Cs
0.7Cs
0.8Cs
0.9Cs
[m]
2
L=
[cd/m ]
UgI3 = Lmin/Lmax =
%
Tandatangan Pengilang
Tandatangan Kontraktor Elektrik
Cop Pengilang
Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
Nama:
Nama:
Jawatan:
Jawatan:
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
©Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik JKR Malaysia
42/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
APPENDIX D2-1
TABULATED SUMMARY OF LIGHTING LEVEL CALCULATION/DATA (LUMINANCE) FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
PROJEK :
NO. RUJUKAN : PKR(L)
Luminaire Brand / Model No. : ………………………………
Please key in the results from the computer print-out or exact calculated values into the table below.
Luminance (cd/m2 )
VARIOUS ROAD
CROSS-SECTIONS/
JUNCTIONS NUMBER#
WATTAGE
MOUNTING
SPACING
HEIGHT
(m)
(L av)
2
(cd/m )
(L min)
2
(cd/m )
(L max)
2
(cd/m )
Uo =
(Lmin/Lav)
Ul =
(Lmin/Lmax)
GLARE
SR
COMPUTER
THRESHOLD
SURROUND
CALCULATION
INCREMENT
RATIO
NUMBER
NOTES:1. The Tenderer shall provide the required data for all sections/junctions of the Road Lighting Installation.
2. The Tenderer shall make duplicate copies of this Form to be filled as necessary.
3. The coss-sections/junctions numbers are given in the Tender Document.
Tandatangan, Nama,
Alamat dan Cop
Pembekal
: ……………………………………
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
©Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik JKR Malaysia
Tarikh : …………….
Tandatangan, Nama,
Alamat dan Cop
Kontraktor Elektrik : .....................................................................
43/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
APPENDIX D2-2
TABULATED SUMMARY OF LIGHTING LEVEL CALCULATION/DATA (ILLUMINANCE) FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION.
PROJEK :
NO. RUJUKAN : PKR(L)
Luminaire Brand / Model No. : ……………………..
Please key in the results from the computer print-out or exact calculated values into the table below.
VARIOUS ROAD
CROSS-SECTIONS/
JUNCTIONS #
Illuminance (lux)
WATTAGE
MOUNTING
HEIGHT
SPACING
(m)
(E av)
(E min)
(E max)
COMPUTER
Uo=
Ug=
Emin/Eave Emin/Emax
CALCULATION
NUMBER
NOTES:1. The Tenderer shall provide the required data for all sections/junctions of the Road Lighting Installation.
2. The Tenderer shall make duplicate copies of this Form to be filled as necessary.
3. The cross-sections/junctions numbers are given in the Tender Document.
Tandatangan, Nama,
Tandatangan, Nama,
Alamat dan Cop
Pembekal
: ………………………………… Tarikh :……………….
Alamat dan Cop
Kontraktor Elektrik : .....................................................
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
©Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik JKR Malaysia
44/49
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
APPENDIX E
TECHNICAL SCHEDULE OF COLUMNS AND BRACKET ARMS
ITEM
1
DESCRIPTION
DATA
COLUMN
a Name of manufacturer
b Address & country of manufacturer/fabricator
of column
c Type of column
Hot-Dipped Galvanised Steel / * Pre*Delete whichever not applicable.
Stressed Spun Concrete /* Fibreglass
Reinforced Type 1/Type2* Others.*
d Compliance with relevant section of
*Delete whichever not applicable.
BS 5649 (EN40)*
ANSI C-136.20 & ASTM D 4923-89*
Others (Specify)*...............................
e Name of hot-dip galvanising company
f Address & country of manufacturer of steel
tubes
g Galvanising standards & minimum. weight
per m2. (g/ m2)
h Overall height of column (m)
i Tapering ratio
j Weight of columns (kg) - Whole
Upper section
Lower section
k Thickness of steel column (mm.) /
Concrete wall thickness (mm)
l Name of company applying bituminous paint
m Address of company applying bituminous
paint
n Dry film thickness of bituminous paint (mm)
o Equivalent weight of bituminous coating per
sq.m. (g/m2 )
p Longitudinal seam weld minimum
penetration (%)
q Reference standard of welding test
(Latest relevant B.S.)
…………………………….
T/t, Nama & Cop Pengilang
………………………………………
T/t, Nama & Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
...cont. pg. 46/49
APPENDIX E
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
45
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
TECHNICAL SCHEDULE OF COLUMNS AND BRACKET ARMS
ITEM
2
DESCRIPTION
DATA
BRACKET ARM
a Name of manufacturer
b Address & country of manufacturer
c Material of bracket arm
d Name of hot dip galvanising company
e Bracket arm projection (m)
f Grade of steel used/standards complied
g Weight of bracket (kg)
h Thickness of steel bracket (mm)
…………………………….
T/t, Nama & Cop Pengilang
………………………………………
T/t, Nama & Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
46
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision: 2
Date: Feb 2013
APPENDIX F
VOLTAGE DROP CALCULATION FOR THE ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
PROJEK :
FEEDER PILLAR No. (To be filled for each Feeder Pillar) :
REFERENCE DATA :LUMINAIRES WATTAGE : ………………………….. CURRENT (Amps.) PER LUMINAIRE : ………………………. CABLE SIZE AND TYPE : ………………………..
VOLTAGE DROP FOR THE ABOVE CABLES.
CIRCUIT
ITEM
No.
Please insert the data below for
TOTAL
each phase. (Refer Tender Drawings)
VOLT DROP
PHASE
1
Circuit 'a'
2
Circuit 'b'
(if any)
3
Circuit 'c'
(if any)
QTY*
TOTAL WATTS
CATATAN
(Volts)
R
Y
B
R
Y
B
R
Y
B
NOTES :1. The total voltage drop along the one complete circuit for each phase
must not exceed 20 volts.
2. The Tenderer shall attach together with this Form the complete voltage drop calculation.
Tandatangan, Nama, Alamat dan Cop Kontraktor
Elektrik:
...........................................................................
...........................................................................
3. All calculation shall be in accordance with the Tender Drawings.
...........................................................................
4. * - State the quantity of luminaires in this particular circuit.
Tarikh : .......................................
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
47/49
APPENDIX G
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE FOR THE ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
(For use during the Defects liability Period)
PROJEK :
NO. RUJUKAN : PKR(L)
Period of Service and Maintenance : ( ……/.…../..…… to ……/.…../..….. ) (dd/mm/yyyy)
Schedule of work to be carried out at 3 monthly intervals.
ITEM
A
DESCRIPTION
ACTION
REMARK
COLUMNS
(Please specify column number/circuit under
REMARK' for any defects found)
1 Column Number or circuit label
2 Ensure all columns straight
3 Ensure all service door covers intact
4 Replace missing service doors
5 Clear debris around base/foundation
6 Check Labels present and clean
7 Check for column damage
8 Others (please specify)
B
BASE SECTION - CABLE TERMINATION
1 Check all cable termination for signs of loose
contact and corrosion
2 Clean and tighten where necessary
3 Replace faulty MCBs, junction boxes for each
column
C
LUMINAIRES
1 Check functionality
2 Replace faulty lamp
...cont. pg. 49/49
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
48/49
APPENDIX G
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE FOR STREET LIGHTING SYSTEM
(For use during the Defects liability Period)
PROJEK :
Period of Service and Maintenance : ( ……./..….../..……. to ….…/..….../...…... ) (dd/mm/yyyy)
Schedule of work to be carried out at 3 monthly intervals.
ITEM
DESCRIPTION
ACTION
REMARK
3 Replace faulty ignitor
4 Replace faulty capacitor
5 Replace faulty ballast
6 Clean luminaire bowl (once in 12 months)
D
FEEDER PILLARS
1 Check and clean Feeder Pillars - both internally
and the surrounding area.
2 Check and replace faulty components - MCBs,
timeswitches, relays, cabling, luminaires,
contactors, changeover switch, etc.
E
TESTING AND RECORDS
1 Test system/installation and record all test
results, inspection and work done
PERAKUAN KONTRAKTOR ELEKTRIK
Kami mengaku telah melaksanakan
kerja-kerja penyelenggaraan seperti
tercatit dalam kedua-dua muka surat
borang Appendix G.
Tandatangan
Kontraktor Elektrik :
Nama :
Alamat &
Cop rasmi :
Adalah disahkan kerja-kerja di atas telah
dilaksanakan dan perkara-perkara bertanda
**(asterisk) perlu/akan diambil tindakan
oleh Kontraktor Elektrik
Tandatangan Pegawai JKR :
Nama :
Jawatan :
Tarikh :
Tarikh :
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
;Hak Cipta :1999 Cawangan Elektrik
JKR Malaysia
49/49
ADDENDUM NO. 1 REVISION 1
TO
L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
(August 1999)
SECTION A2.0: ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRES – LED
This addendum is additional to Section 2.0 of L-S20 :
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION (August 1999)
and shall be read together with the complete specifications.
ADDENDUM NO.1
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
SECTION:
A2.0
ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRES LED
Date: Feb 2013
Page: SA2 - 1 of 9
A2.1
General
Luminaires utilising Light Emitting Diode (LED) as light source are also known as Solid
State Lighting (SSL).
Solid State Lighting (SSL) i.e LED luminaire system shall be complete with electronic
control gear (driver), thermal management unit , surge & overvoltage protection and
design for side entry suitable for supply voltage of 230 Volt, +10%, -6%, 50 Hz.
Computer simulation for lighting level calculation shall be supplied (prepared and submitted)
to meet the design criteria and lighting class required (APPENDIX D1 – 1.1A) in accordance
with MS 825: Code of Practice for the Design of Road Lighting. The simulation shall be
generated using internationally recognised design software. (e.g. Dialux, Calculux, Ulysee
etc.)
A2.2
Conformity With Standards
All products proposed must have product certification from accredited certification bodies.
LED luminaire shall be tested to comply with the current prevailing standards as below and of
latest version:No.
1.0
Item
Luminaire
Safety
Relevant IEC Standards
MS IEC 60598-2-3
Performance
MS 62722-1
Performance
IES LM-79-08
Performance
IES TM 21-11
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
2.0
2.1
Control Gear
(LED Driver)
Safety
MS IEC 61347-2-13
IEC 61347-2-13
Name of standard
Luminaires - Part 2-3: Particular
Requirements – Section 3:
Luminaires for Road and Street
Lighting
Luminaire Performance – part 2-1 :
Particular Requirement for LED
Luminaires
Approved Method: Electrical and
Photometric Measuruments od Solid
State Lighting Products
Projecting Long Term Lumen
Maintenance of LED Light Sources
Lamp Control Gear – Part 2-13 –
Particular Requirement for DC
ADDENDUM NO.1 REV. 1 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2013 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.1
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
SECTION:
A2.0
ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRES LED
Date: Feb 2013
Page: SA2 - 2 of 9
No.
Item
Performance
2.2
3.0
4.0
Lamp Holder
Safety
Relevant IEC Standards
MS IEC 62384
IEC 62384 ed 1.1
MS IEC 60838-2-2
(IEC 60838-2)
Miscellaneous lampholders – Part2-2
– Particular Requirements –
Connectors for LED Modules.
MS IEC 62504
IEC 62504 (Ed. 1)
IEC / PAS 62707 Ed. 1
General Lighting: LEDs and LED
Modules – Terms and Defination.
LED – Binning – Part 1: General
Requirements and White Grid
LED Modules for General Lighting
– Safety Requirements
Method of Measurement of Centre
Beam Intensity and Beam Angle (s)
of Reflector Lamps
Approved Method: Measuring
Lumen Maintenance of LED Light
Sources
LED Modules for General Lighting
– Safety Specifications
4.4
LED
Term &
Defination
Performance
(General)
Performance
(Modules)
Peformance
(Lamps)
Performance
(Light Source)
IES LM-80-08
4.5
4.6
Safety
(Modules)
MS IEC 62031
IEC 62031(Edition 1.0)
AMD.1.ed 1
IEC 61231
IEC 62471 ed 1.0
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.7
4.8
Safety (Lamps)
Safety (Eye
Protection)
Safety (Eye
Protection)
MS 62717
IEC/TR 61341
IEC/TR 62471-2
4.9
10.0
Connector
Safety
Name of standard
or AC supplied Electronic Control
Gear for LED Modules.
DC or AC supplied Electronic
Control Gear for LED Modules –
Performance Requirements
IEC 61984
International Lamps Coding Systems
Photobiological Safety of Lamps and
Lamp Systems
Photobiological Safety of Lamps and
Lamp Systems – Part 2:Guidance on
Manufactoring Requirements
Relating to Non-Laser Optical
Radiation Safety
Connectors – Safety Requirement
and Test
ADDENDUM NO.1 REV. 1 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2013 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.1
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
SECTION:
A2.0
ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRES LED
Date: Feb 2013
Page: SA2 - 3 of 9
No.
11.0
Item
EMC
Performance
Relevant IEC Standards
IEC 61547 Edition 2.0
Performance
IEC 61000-3-2 Edition 3.2
Performance
CISPR 15:2005 (BS EN 50015)
Lighting
Design
Performance
MS 825
11.1
11.2
11.3
12.0
12.1
Name of standard
Equipment for General Lighting
Purposes – EMC Immunity
Requirements
Electromagnectic Compability
(EMC) – Part 3-2: Limits – Limits
for Harmonic Current Emmissions
(Equipment Input Current ≤16 A per
phase)
Limits and Methods of Measurement
of Ratio Disturbance Characteristics
of Electrical Lighting and Similar
Equipment
Code of Practice for The Design of
Road Lighting
A2.3
Construction And Components
a)
The luminaire shall be so designed and constructed that it is capable of providing
the service for which it is intended. Sound engineering principles shall be adopted
throughout and the luminaire shall be designed to enable ease of maintenance and
replacement of light source, optical lens, electronic control gear, thermal
management unit, reflector and holder without the use of special tools.
b)
The main supporting structure of the luminaire shall be constructed from die-cast
aluminium alloy material such that no undue deterioration in its safety, performance
or appearance during normal life when operating in all climatic conditions prevailing
in a tropical country such as heavy rains, strong winds, high humidity and hot daytime temperatures. It shall be robustly constructed to withstand vibration in normal
use.
c)
The luminaire shall be designed so that condensation shall not fall on any operating
part which may fail or deteriorate the performance of luminaire.
ADDENDUM NO.1 REV. 1 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2013 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.1
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
SECTION:
A2.0
ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRES LED
Date: Feb 2013
Page: SA2 - 4 of 9
d)
All luminaires shall be new, totally enclosed and protected against contact with live
or moving parts inside the enclosure. Ingress Protection Index (IP) of LED luminaire
shall be minimum IP65. Full details of the IP system can be referred to in MS IEC
60529.
e)
The compartment for electronic control gear and light module shall preferably be
separated. Access to the electronic control gear (driver) compartment shall
preferably be from the top.
f)
Material used for the construction of the luminaire shall be recyclable.
g)
Hinges, screws and clips if used, shall be robust and made of stainless steel, simple
to operate and shall not be liable to accidental detachment during installation or
maintenance.
h)
In the open position, it shall be attached in such a way that there is no
likelihood of it becoming accidentally detached and thereby damaging any part of
the luminaire, the bracket or the column.
i)
Attachment of the luminaire to its bracket arm shall be by means of clamps or jam
bolts and designed to accommodate spigot size of the luminaires. A minimum of
two ( 2) locking bolts / jam screws shall be provided.
j)
The minimum penetration depth of the bracket arm is 100mm. The mounting
arrangement and attachment of the luminaire shall be such as to withstand a
windspeed of 42 m/s on the projected surface of the assembly without due deflection.
k)
All parts which carry the weight of the luminaire and internal accessories shall be
provided with suitable locking devices to prevent the dislodgement of any part of
the luminaire by vibration either in service or during maintenance.
l)
All parts shall operate well within the ratings with due consideration for the local
conditions (high humidity of 80% RH, hot (live) ambient temperature of 35OC).
m)
Interchangeability of consumable components is preferred for maintenance purposes.
A2.3.1 Light Source
a)
The light source for LED luminaires shall be of high powered LED type. The LED light
module shall not be driven more than the rated LED drive current.
ADDENDUM NO.1 REV. 1 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2013 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.1
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
SECTION:
A2.0
ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRES LED
Date: Feb 2013
Page: SA2 - 5 of 9
b)
The lumen output of LED luminaires (system efficacy) shall be minimum 90 lm/W. The
usable lifetime of LED (lumen maintenance) at 36,000 hours shall not be less than 80%
(L80 @ 36,000 hours). The system efficiency shall take into consideration the LED
efficacy, driver efficiency, optical efficiency and thermal efficiency and shall not be
less than 80%.
c)
The Correlated Colour Temperature (CCT) for LED luminaire shall range between
2500K to 3500K.
d)
Photobiological safety of LED module or LED luminaires shall not be more than Risk
Group 1 (as per IEC 62471).
A2.3.2 The Optical System
The optical system shall comprise of optical lens, reflector (if any) and luminaire cover.
a)
Optical Lens
The optical lens shall be made of UV resistant material (eg. poly methyl methacrylate
(PMMA), UV stabilized polycarbonate, silicon, etc) and shall be stabilised against
deformation, deterioration or discolouration due to the lamp and/or solar radiation
(UV).
b)
Reflector
The reflector if any shall be made of at least 99.85% pure aluminium with a minimum
thickness of 1 mm, be electrically brightened, anodised and chemically treated to give
high reflectance.
c)
Luminaire Cover (Secondary Optics)
Luminaire cover shall be provided to protect the optical lens from accumulation of dust
and for easy cleaning of the luminaire. It shall be made UV resistant material suitable
for outdoor used (in accordance with standard UL746C or equivalent).
For covers that is designed as light diffuser/disperser, it shall be made of
clear tampered glass.
d)
The gasket used shall be silicone, one piece weather resistant type that will not cause
crazing of the luminaire cover. The gasket shall form an integral part of the
luminaire cover such that any cover change will necessitate a change of the gasket.
ADDENDUM NO.1 REV. 1 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2013 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.1
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
SECTION:
A2.0
ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRES LED
Date: Feb 2013
Page: SA2 - 6 of 9
A2.3.3 Thermal Management Unit
The luminaire shall be provided with suitable thermal management unit to effectively
dissipate heat generated from LED.
A2.3.4 Electronic Control Gear (LED Driver)
a)
Electronic control gear (LED driver) shall comprise of electronic circuit board,
converter, built-in power factor correction unit (≥0.9), internal surge protective device
(SPD) and THD <20%. The driver shall be able to withstand short circuit current,
overload, over voltage and over temperature. The driver shall have self cooling system.
LED driver shall be placed close to LED where possible to reduce electromagnetic
interference.
b)
The input range of the driver shall function correctly at the supply voltage and shall
allow for normal variation and surges (230V, +10%, -6%, 50 Hz).
c)
The working temperature for the driver shall suit the local condition.
d)
Ingress Protection Index (IP) of the driver shall be minimum IP65 as per MS IEC
60529.
A2.3.5 Surge Protective Device (SPD)
a)
Internal/Built-In SPD
The driver shall be protected against lightning surge with an internal surge protector
devices (SPD) of not less than 15kA with a let-through voltage of less than 350V test at
2kV, 1.2/50µSec open circuit and 1kA, 8/20µSec short circuit.
b)
External SPD
To enhance the driver life span and prolong the internal SPD performance, the external
SPD may be installed within the column after the modular termination box for safety
and ease of maintenance.
If required, the external SPD shall be rated not less than 20kA with a let- through
voltage of less than 850V tested at 6kV, 1.2/50µSec open circuit test and 3kA,
8/20µSec short circuit test .
The SPD shall be Full Mode (L-N, L-E, N-E) protection with a working voltage of
275Vac series connection and complete with LED indicator.
ADDENDUM NO.1 REV. 1 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2013 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.1
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
SECTION:
A2.0
ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRES LED
Date: Feb 2013
Page: SA2 - 7 of 9
A 2.3.6 Internal Wiring and Earthing Terminal
2.3.6.1 Internal Wiring
a)
The luminaire shall be completely pre-wired, requiring only the connection of the
electrical power supply cables to the terminal and the earth continuity conductor to the
earthing terminal.
2.3.6.2 Earthing Terminal
a)
A separate terminal for the connection of an earth continuity conductor, clearly and
permanently marked shall be provided. The installation shall comply to MS 60364.
b)
All exposed metal parts and other parts accessible when the luminaire is opened for
maintenance and liable to become live in the event of an insulation fault shall be
permanently and reliably connected to this earthing terminal.
A2.4
Computer Simulation for Lighting Level Calculation
2.4.1
Computer simulation for lighting level calculation shall include Photometric Data
w h i c h c o mp r i s e s o f t h e f o l l o w i n g:
i)
Isolux Diagram
ii)
Utilization Factor Curves
iii)
Polar Curves of thefollowing C-Planes :
intensity plane
iv)
Downward Light Output Ratio
v)
Downward and Upward Flux Fractions
0°/180°;
90°/270°;
maximum
Tender documents submitted without the appropriate Computer
Simulation will be disqualified.
ADDENDUM NO.1 REV. 1 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2013 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.1
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
SECTION:
A2.0
ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRES LED
Date: Feb 2013
Page: SA2 - 8 of 9
2.4.2
Tenderers are required to furnish comprehensive information and technical particulars as
stipulated in:i) APPENDIX D1 – Computer Calculation Format for Road Lighting Installation
(To be submitted for Road 1and Road 2 as given in Attachment A)
ii) APPENDIX D2 – Tabulated Summary of Lighting Level Calculation / Data For Road
Lighting Installation
The computer plots shall also be attached.
All the above plots and data shall be certified by the respective manufacturer.
A2.5
Schedule and Technical Information on LED Luminaires
2.5.1
Tenderers are required to furnish comprehensive information and technical particulars
as stipulated in Attachment B (Product Features).
2.5.2
The information required in the attachment shall be completed fully and correctly. All
technical data entered therein shall be substantiated with relevant pamphlets and test
certificates from the manufacturers or the recognized testing authorities.
Failure to fulfill the above requirements shall result in the disqualification of the
tender.
ADDENDUM NO.1 REV. 1 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2013 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.1
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
SECTION:
A2.0
ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRES LED
Date: Feb 2013
Page: SA2 - 9 of 9
A2.6 Warranty
2.6.1 System Warranty
The manufacturer / distributor shall provide a 5 year warranty certificate for the
complete luminaire system to guarantee the longlife expectancy and maintenance free
luminaire. Warranty declaration shall be filled and duly signed by distributor /
manufacturer as per Attachment C. Failure in the functioning and operation of the LED
luminaire within the warranty period will result in the replacement of the whole
luminaire or required components by the manufacturer/distributor at no cost to the
government.
2.6.2 Performance Warranty
Luminance and illuminance test shall be carried out every six (6) months during defect
liability period, to ensure the performance of the installed system conform to designed
requirement. These tests will also confirm the lumen maintenance of the luminaire.
The contractor together with luminaire supplier shall carry out the above test and the
result must meet the design criteria as submitted in the computer simulation.
Note :
1. System Efficacy
=
2. System Efficiency
=
3. Maintenance Factor
=
LED Efficacy X Driver Efficiency X Optical Efficiency X Thermal Efficiency
System Efficacy (Luminaire Lumen Output)
LED Efficacy (Light Source Lumen Output)
Lamp Lumen Maintenance Factor X Luminaire Maintenance Factor
ADDENDUM NO.1 REV. 1 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2013 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ATTACHMENT A-1
Road1
L
j
L
j
Centerline
.-.- .
..
I
1.
.:-
IIIII
...
...
C:, er
...
Lll
lijj
al
...
...
al
...
e
C:, er
•
•
Utilities
reserve
.-.-.
..-.-..
Drain
reserve
Utilities
reserve
1Carriageway
Carriageway
Carriageway
Carriageway
Drain
reserve
,,,.
Ul
;:,1
!
DESIGN REQUIREMENT: UGH114Ga.ASS ME1 (t.tSB25)
u
u
Road2
ATTACHMENT A-2
L
J
L
J
Centerline
........... .:-.I..
·
..
.....
u
tllltlee
,_
Drain
re-
...
-=..
...
Col'l'logeway
...
Corrtaoeway
...
CorrlagewGy
Ill
,Ill
" r
.
Me
!aI
...
Col'l'logeway
...
Corrtaoeway
...
...
=•r
Carriageway
•
...
=:·
1-
........
Drain
utlllll•
reHrve
...
..-ve
=I
............
u
...
........
Road 1
ATIACHMENT A-3
o.5m
D.5m
Varill
(IIIIIX. l.Drn)
2.0m
1.5m
J.5m
J.5m
J.5m
J.5m
Varin
(max. J.Om)
(max. l.Drn)
Drain
reserve
Utilities
reserve
Vlries
Paved
shoulaer
Carriageway
Carriageway
Carriageway
Carriageway
Drain
reserve
2.5m
Median
Varill
(mil. 1.Dm)
DESIGN REQUIREMENT : UGHTING CLASS MEl (MS825}
,.,.l.lllllnancll (mtl. ndlbllnld).
LM
lmM)
2.0
Oweral lkllormlly, Uo (min)
Lon nal Unlfomly, Ll (mln)
0.4
0.7
1lnlhald IIICIII!Bit, 11 (IIICII I) SR, S4mUid Rullo (min)
Glare)
10
0.5
Lamp Yalntenance factor
D.8
ATTACHMENT A-4
Road 2
1.5111
........
(111111. l.llm)
Carriageway
Carriageway
Carriageway
Carriageway
Carriageway
\ala
(min. 1.0111)
DESIGN REQUIREMENT : UGHTING ClftSS ME1 (MS825)
......._._..
...!/11/tl)
lD
_._..,Uo(olli
...,._-.,IL(olli
_......,11-10
-t
u
IL7
10
- ...• Mt
u
--u
Attachment B
ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRE
PRODUCT FEATURES
NO.
BRAND:
ITEM
MODEL FOR ROAD 1:
1
1.1
MODEL FOR ROAD 2:
Technical Specification
Input Requirements
Voltage,Hz
Models available
Power Connection Type
1.2
Output Parameters
Power Consumption (@120 VAC)
Power Factor
≥ 0.9
Total Harmonic Distortion
≤ 20%
Colour Rendering Index, CRI (Ra)
Luminous Intensity Distribution
Provided?
Test Temperature that photometry is
produced
Lighting Class (results from Computer
Simulation)
Maintenance Factor
(MF= LLMFxLMF)
Column Height (10m / 12m)
Column span / spacing
2
Additional Information
Country of Manufacture
Product of:
Project reference
3
3.1
ADDENDUM NO.1 to L-S20: Requirement on LED
Construction And Components
Gross Weight
Materials Casing / Body
Ingress Protection
(sealed with silicon gasket)
IP65
Jam bolts for clamping/securing/lock
spigot to bracket arm
Operating Parameters
Operating Temperature
hot(live)/cold(lab)
Ambient Temperature
Ta = 35°C
Working Humidity
RH> 80%
Adendum No.1 Revision 1 to L-S20
1
Attachment B
ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRE
PRODUCT FEATURES
NO.
BRAND:
ITEM
MODEL FOR ROAD 1:
3.2
Light Source
A.
Type of LED
MODEL FOR ROAD 2:
High Powered LED
LED drive current
B.
Brand of LED
C.
Luminaire/System Efficacy (Lumen/w)
Min : 90 lm/W
LED Efficacy (lumen/W)
D.
LED Lumen Maintenance L80@36,000
(Effective Burning Hours, Useable lifetime )
E.
Luminaire/System Efficiency
(lLuminaire lumens output : light source /LED
lumens output )
Luminaire Lumens Output
a) Electronic Control Gear (DRIVER)
Efficiency
Max.lumen depreciation =
80% at 36,000hrs
LLO = Efficacy x
(a x b x c) ≥ 80%
b) Optical Efficiency
c) Thermal Management Efficiency,Tj
F.
The Correlated Colour Temperature
(CCT)
3.3
The Optical System
A.
Component of Optical System
B.
Optical Lens
2500K < CCT < 3500K
Material : Poly Methyl Methacrylate / UV stabilized polycarbonate /
Silicon
C.
Reflector
Material : 99.85% pure aluminium with a minimum thickness of
1mm
D.
Luminaire Cover (secondary optics)
a. designed as light diffuser
b. designed as cover only
E.
Silicon Gasket
3.4
Thermal Management Unit
A.
Material Type
B.
Heat sink thermal resistance
Adendum No.1 Revision 1 to L-S20
Tampered Glass
UV Resistant Material
one piece weather
resistant type
(W/oC)
2
Attachment B
ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRE
PRODUCT FEATURES
NO.
BRAND:
ITEM
MODEL FOR ROAD 1:
3.5
Electronic Control Gear (LED Driver) System
A.
Component of LED Driver
B.
Protection features
MODEL FOR ROAD 2:
withstand short circuit
current, overload, over
voltage and over
temperature.
Surge Suppressor
Power Factor Correction
C.
Cooling System of LED Driver
D.
Input Range
E.
DC Output Range
F.
Working Temperature for LED Driver
G.
Ingress Protection Index (IP)
3.6
Internal Wiring and Earthing Terminal
self-cooling
(230V, +10%, -6%, 50 Hz).
to suit local condition
Min : IP65
Completely Pre-wired
3.7
Warranty
System Warranty:
Warranty Period for the complete
luminaire (LED Driver, Optical System,
Housing, Thermal Management)
3.8
A
5 year warranty certificate
Conformity With Standards
Luminaire
MS62722-1
MS IEC 60598-2-3
IES LM-79-08
IES TM 21-11
B
Control Gear (LED Driver)
MS IEC 61347-2-13
MS IEC 60838-2-2
Adendum No.1 Revision 1 to L-S20
3
Attachment B
ROAD LIGHTING LUMINAIRE
PRODUCT FEATURES
NO.
ITEM
BRAND:
MODEL FOR ROAD 1:
C
MODEL FOR ROAD 2:
Lamp Holder
MS IEC 60838-2-2
D
LED
MS IEC 62504
IEC/PAS 62707 Ed. 1
MS 62717
IEC/TR 61341
IES LM-80-08
MS IEC 62031
IEC 61231
IEC 62471 Ed. 1
IEC/TR 62471-2
E
Connector
IEC 61984
F
Electromagnetic Compatibility (EMC)
IEC 61547
IEC 61000-3-2
BS EN 55015
Adendum No.1 Revision 1 to L-S20
4
Attachment C
WARRANTY DECLARATION
PROJECT:
Declaration by Distributor/Manufacturer:
We hereby guarantee that the complete LED luminaire systems supplied is
maintenance free and come complete with 5 years warranty. Should any of the LED
luminaires fail to function at anytime within the warranty period we, the
distributor/manufacturer, will duly replace the LED luminaire complete with
necessary components at our own cost.
Signature of distributor/manufacturer:
Name of Authorized Personnel:
Official stamp:
Date:
* Warranty certificate is attached
Adendum No. 1 Revision 1 to L-S20
ADDENDUM NO.2
TO
L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION (August
1999)
APPENDIX D1-1.1A : DESIGN CRITERIA APPENDIX D11.2A : DESCRIPTION OF THE LAYOUT APPENDIX D1-2A :
ILLUMINANCE MEASUREMENT GRID APPENDIX D1-3A :
LUMINANCE MEASUREMENT GRID
APPENDIX D1-4A : LONGITUDINAL UNIFORMITY FOR EACH LANE
This addendum shall be read together with the complete
specifications.
ADDENDUM NO.2 TO L-S20
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
APPENDIX D1
Date: February 2015
Page: 1 of 7
1.
Page 3/49, item 2.3.2 – The Optical System
(iii) The luminaire shall incorporate provisions to enable adjustments to shift the
main light distribution towards the axis of the road to suit different road widths.
Such adjustments shall be simple and positive and shall be firmly retained in
clearly identified positions. Photometric data shall be supplied for the
particular distribution recommended in a given installation. These data may be
supplied in computer diskettes together with software in the CIE format.
to be replaced with
(iii) The luminaire shall incorporate provisions to enable adjustments to shift the
main light distribution towards the axis of the road to suit different road widths.
Such adjustments shall be simple and positive and shall be firmly retained in
clearly identified positions. Photometric data shall be supplied for the
particular distribution recommended in a given installation. These data may be
supplied in Compact Disc (CD) together with software according to the current
prevailing MS/CIE format.
2.
Page 37/49
to be replaced with
Page 2 of 7- Addendum No. 2 to Specification for Road Lighting Installation.
3.
Appendix D1-1 (Page 39/49), Appendix D1-2 (Page 40/49), Appendix D1-3
(Page 41/49), Appendix D1-4 (Page 42/49)
to be replaced with
Appendix D1-1.1A, Appendix D1-1.2A, Appendix D1-2A, Appendix D1-3A,
Appendix D1-4A
ADDENDUM NO.2 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2015 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.2 TO L-S20
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
APPENDIX D1
Date: February 2015
Page: 2 of 7
The Electrical Contractors are required to submit computer plots of road sections as stated
in Appendix D2-1
The Electrical Contractors shall also filled up the Appendix below:1) APPENDIX D1-1.1A, 1.2A
- Design Criteria
2) APPENDIX D1- (2A to 4A)
- Computer Calculation Format for Road Lighting
Installation (To be submitted for various layout and
sections as stated in Appendix D2-1)
3) APPENDIX D2 - (1 to 2)
- Tabulated Summary of Lighting Level Calculation/Data
For Road Lighting Installation
The computer plots shall also be attached.
In addition, the photometric data of item 3.0 shall be submitted.
All the above plots and data shall be certified by the respective manufacturer/supplier.
_
Tandatangan Kontraktor Elektrik
_
Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
Nama
:
Jawatan
:
ADDENDUM NO.2 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2015 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.2 TO L-S20
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
APPENDIX D1
Date: February 2015
Page: 3 of 7
APPENDIX D1 – 1.1A
DESIGN CRITERIA
*Road Lighting Class
: ME
/ CE
*Road Surface Type
: Asphalt / Concrete
Luminance Coefficient, Qo
=
Average Luminance, Lave
≥
Overall Uniformity, Uo
≥
Longitudinal Uniformity, Ul
≥
Threshold Increment, TI
≤
Surround Ratio, SR
≥
*Maintenance Factor , MF
:
*Column Height , H
:
m
* Column spacing (m)
:
m
*Lamp Type
:
*Lamp Wattage
:
W
Flux (klm)
:
klm
Lamp Tilting Angle
:
*Arm Length
:
*Overhang
*Setback
:
:
Note :
* Data to be filled by Designer
Maintenance Factor , MF =
Luminaire MF
X
Lamp Lumen MF
ADDENDUM NO.2 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2015 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.2 TO L-S20
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
APPENDIX D1
Date: February 2015
Page: 4 of 7
APPENDIX D1 – 1.2A
DESCRIPTION OF THE LAYOUT
LEGEND
S = Column Spacing (m)
WL = Lane Width (m)
WR = Carriageway Width (m)
ADDENDUM NO.2 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2015 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.2 TO L-S20
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
APPENDIX D1
Date: February 2015
Page: 5 of 7
APPENDIX D1-2A
ILLUMINANCE MEASUREMENT GRID
Lane 1
Lane 2
Lane 3
Eave =
lux
E max
=
E min =
lux
Uo= Emin/Eave =
Tandatangan Pengilang/Pengedar
Tandatangan Kontraktor Elektrik
Cop Pengilang/Pengedar
Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
Nama
Nama
:
Jawatan :
:
Jawatan :
ADDENDUM NO.2 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2015 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
lux
%
ADDENDUM NO.2 TO L-S20
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
APPENDIX D1
Date: February 2015
Page: 6 of 7
APPENDIX D1-3A
LUMINANCE MEASUREMENT GRID
Lane 1
Lane 2
Lane 3
Lave =
cd/m2
Uo= Lmin/Lave =
%
L min =
cd/m2
Ul = L min/L max =
%
L max =
_cd/m2
SR =
Tandatangan Pengilang/Pengedar
Tandatangan Kontraktor Elektrik
Cop Pengilang/Pengedar
Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
Nama
Nama
:
Jawatan :
:
Jawatan:
ADDENDUM NO.2 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2015 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.2 TO L-S20
SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(02).2013
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision of addendum: 0
APPENDIX D1
Date: February 2015
Page: 7 of 7
APPENDIX D1-4A
LONGITUDINAL UNIFORMITY FOR EACH LANE
Ul1 = L min / L max =
%
Ul2 = L min / L max =
%
Ul3 = L min / L max =
%
Tandatangan Pengilang/Pengedar
Tandatangan Kontraktor Elektrik
Cop Pengilang/Pengedar
Cop Kontraktor Elektrik
Nama
Nama
:
Jawatan :
:
Jawatan:
ADDENDUM NO.2 TO SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© Hak Cipta: 2015 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.3
TO
L-S20: SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
(August 1999)
INTEGRATED SOLAR LED ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
This addendum shall be read together with the complete
specifications.
ADDENDUM NO.3 TO L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© 2020 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.3
TO
L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(03).2020
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision Of Addendum : 0
INTEGRATED SOLAR LED
ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
Date : Oktober 2020
Page: i of i
SECTION
CONTENT
PAGE
1.0
General
1/12
2.0
Construction
1/12
3.0
Components
2/12 - 5/12
3.1 LED Luminaire
3.2 Solar Photovoltaic (PV) Module
3.3 Rechargeable Deep Cycle Battery
3.4 Solar Charge Controller
3.5 Lighting Column
4.0
Schedule and Technical Information on
Integrated Solar LED Road Lighting System
5/12
5.0
Warranty
6/12
6.0
Conformity with Standards
6/12
Appendix A
8/12 - 11/12
Appendix B
12/12
ADDENDUM NO.3 TO L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© 2020 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.3
TO
L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(03).2020
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision Of Addendum : 0
INTEGRATED SOLAR LED
ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
Date : Oktober 2020
Page: 1 of 12
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
This section of the Specification describes and specifies requirements for the supply,
delivery, installation, testing, commissioning and handing over in approved working
order and maintenance during the Defects Liability Period of the underground cabling
works in accordance with the Conditions of Contracts, Bill of Quantities, Drawings
and other related documents.
1.2
All standards shall conform to the latest Malaysia Standards (MS), International
Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), MS IEC, British Standard Institution (BS), and /or
BS EN standard.
2.0
CONSTRUCTION
2.1
An integrated solar LED road lighting system is an outdoor lighting luminaire system
used for illuminating road or an amenity. A basic solar road lighting luminaire
components are:
1.1.1
1.1.2
1.1.3
1.1.4
1.1.5
LED Luminaire;
Solar Photovoltaic (PV) Module;
Rechargeable Deep Cycle Battery;
Solar Charge Controller and
Lighting Column
2.2
Solar Photovoltaic (PV) module, rechargeable deep cycle battery, solar charge
controller and light source of the integrated solar LED luminaire shall be in one
enclosure. The Solar PV module shall provide electricity to charge the battery during
daytime. The battery’s charging shall be controlled by a solar charge controller. The
operation of the luminaire shall be controlled by a control circuit either by using
voltage or current sensor.
2.3
The configuration of integrated solar LED road lighting system shall be designed to
be robust and shall withstand the harsh environment condition as the system will be
continuously exposed to sun, rain, fog, pollution etc. The integrated solar road lighting
system installed shall enhance the aesthetic of the city or road.
2.4
The rough service of integrated solar LED road lighting system shall have adequate
resistance to vibrations. The luminaire shall comply with the vibration test according
to IEC 60598-1, Section 4.20: Rough service luminaires – Vibration requirements.
ADDENDUM NO.3 TO L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© 2020 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.3
TO
L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(03).2020
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision Of Addendum : 0
INTEGRATED SOLAR LED
ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
Date : Oktober 2020
Page: 2 of 12
3.0
COMPONENTS
3.1
LED Luminaire
3.1.1
The luminaire shall be designed by using solid state lighting i.e. Light Emitting Diode
(LED) as a light source.
3.1.2
The LED luminaire and its associated electrical components and technical
specifications shall be designed and comply with L-S20: Specification for Road
Lighting Installation (Addendum No.1: Road Lighting Luminaires – LED).
3.1.3
The LED luminaire shall be designed and constructed to be capable of providing the
required lighting performance level as follows:
a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
f)
Solar module shall be sized such that they can provide sufficient energy
to the system for the intended service life of 25 years;
System losses shall be considered including dust and dirt, wiring losses,
electronics losses and charging losses;
Batteries shall be sized for a minimum life cycle of 2,000 cycles at 80%
Depth of Discharge (DOD);
The average luminous flux of luminaire shall not depreciate more than
30% from initial value at 50,000hours (L70 @ 50,000hours);
Lighting levels which include luminance and illuminance shall be at rated
levels for determining battery size for two (2) days of autonomy at 100%
intensity of luminaire for 12 hours operation. If different lighting levels at
different times of the night is specified with reference to PD CEN/TR
13201-1: Road Lighting - Guidelines on selection of lighting classes,
detailed traffic flow analysis shall be carried out for determining luminance
and time setting;
The solar lighting system shall be based on a 12 VDC or 24 VDC system
voltage.
3.1
Solar Photovoltaic (PV) Module
3.2.1
The solar PV module shall be of crystalline type. Both monocrystalline and
polycrystalline technology PV modules are allowed in the system. The solar PV
module shall be brand new and have a certificate of testing conforming to MS IEC
61215.
ADDENDUM NO.3 TO L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© 2020 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.3
TO
L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(03).2020
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision Of Addendum : 0
INTEGRATED SOLAR LED
ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
Date : Oktober 2020
Page: 3 of 12
3.2.2
The rated power of solar PV module shall be designed to meet the following criteria:
a)
Number of hours of operation of luminaire per day;
b)
Total wattage of the luminaire.
3.2.3
The solar PV module efficiency shall not be less than 12%. Efficiency of the solar PV
module is defined as the ratio of energy output from solar PV module to input energy
from the sun; maximum power, Pmp (W) over irradiance (in W/m2) multiply by area
(m2) at Standard Test Condition (STC).
3.2.4
The solar PV module shall consist of the following information:
a)
Name of the manufacturer of solar PV Module;
b)
Model number and type;
c)
Month and year of manufactured;
d)
I-V curve of module;
e)
Peak wattage of module;
f)
Open circuit voltage (Voc);
g)
Short circuit current (Isc);
h)
Maximum current (Imp);
i)
Maximum voltage (Vmax);
j)
Maximum power (Pmp);
k)
Serial number of the module.
3.2.5
The solar PV module shall be designed with the following features:
a)
Covering material : Highly transparent, reflective, tempered solar glass;
b)
Junction box : Junction box with integrated 3 bypass diodes, IP65,
welded contacts, fully encapsulated;
c)
Plugs : Touch-proof plug connectors with polarity reversal protection,
MC3 or MC4;
d)
Dynamic load (wind load) : 2.4 kN/m² (2,400 Pa);
e)
Permitted operating temperature : -10oC to +85oC;
f)
10° - 15° tilting angle of solar panel
g)
Warranties :
i)
Linear performance warranty of 25 years.
ii)
Degradation of power shall be as per table 1A :
ADDENDUM NO.3 TO L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© 2020 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.3
TO
L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(03).2020
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision Of Addendum : 0
INTEGRATED SOLAR LED
ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
Date : Oktober 2020
Page: 4 of 12
Year
Degradation of actual power
versus nominal power
1
97%
2 - 24
96.3% – 80.9%
(0.7 % annual degradation)
≥ 25
80.7%
Table 1A - Degradation of actual power versus nominal power
3.3
Rechargeable Deep Cycle Battery
3.3.1
Batteries are used to store the electricity generated by the solar PV module. Battery
shall conform to the latest IEC 62133.
3.3.2
The battery shall be only Lithium-ion or Lithium polymer or Lithium iron phosphate
battery type.
3.3.4
The lithium batteries shall be designed with the following features:
a)
System voltage : 12 VDC or 24 VDC;
b)
Operating temperature : -5°C to 60°C;
c)
Cycle efficiency : not less than 90%;
d)
Minimum life cycle : 2,000 cycles at 80% Depth of Discharge (DOD);
e)
Sufficient autonomy : minimum of two (2) overcast or rainy days;
f)
Discharge time : minimum of 12 hours
3.4
Solar Charge Controller
3.4.1
Solar charge controllers shall be used to control the charging of the batteries. Since
the output from solar PV module are variable and needs adjustments, solar charge
controller fetches the variable voltage and current from solar PV module to suit the
safety of the batteries. Solar charge controller shall conform to the latest IEC
62109-1
ADDENDUM NO.3 TO L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© 2020 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.3
TO
L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(03).2020
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision Of Addendum : 0
INTEGRATED SOLAR LED
ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
Date : Oktober 2020
Page: 5 of 12
3.4.2
The main functions of solar charge controllers are to prevent over-charging of
batteries from solar PV module, over-discharging of batteries to the load and to
control the functionalities of the load.
3.4.3
The solar charge controller shall be designed with the following features:
a)
Total electronic efficiency : minimum 90% at full load;
b)
Humidity : 95% non-condensing;
c)
Terminations : Connectors;
d)
Operating Temperature : 0oC to 50oC;
e)
Storage Temperature : 0oC to 70oC;
f)
Protections : Reverse current protection from battery to solar PV
module;
g)
No moving parts, switches or buttons;
h)
Timer functions available for lighting control;
i)
System voltage : 12 VDC or 24 VDC;
j)
Over-voltages from PV module;
k)
Protection against lighting surges (voltages and current);
l)
High temperature and overload protection;
m) Open circuit protection without battery;
n)
Infrared remote-control programming accessory (if specified);
o)
Internet of Things (IoT) readiness (if specified)
3.5
Lighting Column
3.5.1
Lighting column shall comply with L-S20: Specification for Road Lighting Installation.
It shall be designed and fabricated to withstand loading of all integrated solar LED
road lighting components.
4.0
SCHEDULE AND TECHNICAL INFORMATION ON INTEGRATED SOLAR LED
ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
4.1
Tenderers are required to furnish comprehensive information and technical
particulars as stipulated in Appendix A (Technical Schedule of Integrated Solar
LED Road Lighting)
4.2
The information required in Appendix A shall be fully and correctly completed. All
technical data entered therein shall be substantiated with relevant catalogues and
test reports from the manufacturers and the accredited testing authorities
respectively.
ADDENDUM NO.3 TO L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© 2020 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.3
TO
L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(03).2020
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision Of Addendum : 0
INTEGRATED SOLAR LED
ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
Date : Oktober 2020
Page: 6 of 12
5.0
WARRANTY
5.1
The manufacturer / distributor shall provide a 5 years’ warranty certificate for the
complete integrated solar LED luminaire to guarantee the long life expectancy and
maintenance free luminaire.
5.2
Warranty declaration shall be filled and duly signed by manufacturer / distributor as
per Appendix B. Failure in the functioning and operation of the integrated solar LED
luminaire within the warranty period will result in the replacement of the whole
luminaire or required components by the manufacturer / distributor at no cost to the
government.
5.3
The warranty shall cover failure due to external factor such as phenomenal influences,
etc. The cost to replace the integrated solar LED luminaire from uninstall to reinstall
new replaced luminaire shall be borne by the manufacturer / distributor .
6.0
CONFORMITY WITH STANDARDS
The luminaire shall comply with and be tested to the relevant latest edition of
Malaysia Standard or other relevant international standard as below:
Item
Safety and
Performance
Criteria
Luminaire
Design
Solar Photovoltaic
(PV) Module
Safety
Rechargeable
Deep Cycle
Battery
Relevant Standards
IEC 60598-1
Luminaires - Part 1: General requirements and
tests
and other relevant standards as stated in
L-S20 Specification
MS IEC 61215
Crystalline silicon terrestrial photovoltaic (PV)
modules
IEC 62133
Secondary cells and batteries containing alkaline or
other non-acid electrolytes – Safety requirements
for portable sealed secondary lithium cells, and for
batteries made from them, for use in portable
applications – Part 2: Lithium systems
ADDENDUM NO.3 TO L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© 2020 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.3
TO
L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(03).2020
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision Of Addendum : 0
INTEGRATED SOLAR LED
ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
Date : Oktober 2020
Page: 7 of 12
Item
Safety
Safety and
Performance
Design
Criteria
Relevant Standards
Solar Charge
Controller
IEC 62109-1
Safety of power converters for use in photovoltaic
power systems - Part 1: General requirements
Lighting Column
Refer L-S20 Specification
Road Lighting
PD CEN/TR 13201-1
Road Lighting - Guidelines on selection of lighting
classes
ADDENDUM NO.3 TO L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© 2020 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
ADDENDUM NO.3
TO
L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(03).2020
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision Of Addendum : 0
INTEGRATED SOLAR LED
ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
Date : Oktober 2020
Page: 8 of 12
APPENDIX A
TECHNICAL SCHEDULE OF INTEGRATED SOLAR LED ROAD LIGHTING
Project: ……………………………………………………………………………………
DESCRIPTION
UNIT
DESIGN
REQUIREMENT/
SPECIFICATION:
- JKR
A1
GENERAL
1
Distributor
Please attach letter
2
Letter of Warranty
Please attach letter
A2
LED LUMINAIRE
Please attach
catalogue
Please attach
catalogue
1
Manufacturer
2
Brand & Model
3
Efficacy (lm/W)
4
Wattage (W)
W
5
Correlated Colour Temperature
(Kelvin)
K
lm/W
≥ 100
2500 - 3500
6
Control Features
a) Automatic dusk to
dawn function
b) PIR function not
allowed
c) Dimming function
(minimum pre-set
required)
i)…… hours/ …... %
ii)….. hours/ …… %
iii)….. hours/ ….. %
7
Rated Lifetime
L70 @ 50,000hours
ADDENDUM NO.3 TO L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© 2020 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
OFFERED
SPECIFICATION
ADDENDUM NO.3
TO
L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(03).2020
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision Of Addendum : 0
INTEGRATED SOLAR LED
ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
Date : Oktober 2020
Page: 9 of 12
DESCRIPTION
A3
UNIT
DESIGN
REQUIREMENT/
SPECIFICATION:
- JKR
SOLAR PV MODULE
Please attach
catalogue
Please attach
catalogue
Minimum module
capacity shall be
designed as per
wattage & hours of
operation of LED
luminaire offered in
Part A2
1
Manufacturer
2
Brand & Model
3
Module Capacity
4
PV module type
5
Minimum Module Efficiency at
Standard Test Condition (STC)
6
I-V curve of module
7
Open circuit voltage (Voc)
Volt
≥ 22
8
Short circuit current (Isc)
Ampere
≥9
9
Maximum current (Imp)
Ampere
≥ 8.5
10
Maximum voltage (Vmp)
Volt
≥ 18.8
11
Maximum power (Pmp)
Watt
≥ 100
12
Lifetime
year
25
Watt
Monocrystalline or
Polycrystalline
%
≥ 12
Please attach Solar
PV datasheet
ADDENDUM NO.3 TO L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© 2020 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
OFFERED
SPECIFICATION
ADDENDUM NO.3
TO
L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(03).2020
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision Of Addendum : 0
INTEGRATED SOLAR LED
ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
Date : Oktober 2020
Page: 10 of 12
DESCRIPTION
A4
UNIT
DESIGN
REQUIREMENT/
SPECIFICATION:
- JKR
RECHARGEABLE DEEP
CYCLE BATTERY
1
Manufacturer
2
Brand & Model
3
Battery Type
4
Cycle Efficiency
Please attach
catalogue
Please attach
catalogue
Please attach
catalogue
%
≥ 90
a) Please provide
detail calculation
b) Battery shall be
designed to ensure
sufficient supply for
the whole operation
of Solar LED
luminaire (from dusk
to dawn)
c) Capacity shall be
designed as per type
of LED luminaire &
solar PV module
offered in Part A2
5
Battery Capacity & Quantity
Ah
6
Operating Temperature
°C
7
Charging Mode
8
Days of Autonomy
day
≥2
9
Discharge time
hour
≥ 12
-5°C to 60°C
Included
ADDENDUM NO.3 TO L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© 2020 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
OFFERED
SPECIFICATION
ADDENDUM NO.3
TO
L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(03).2020
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision Of Addendum : 0
INTEGRATED SOLAR LED
ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
Date : Oktober 2020
Page: 11 of 12
DESCRIPTION
A5
UNIT
DESIGN
REQUIREMENT/
SPECIFICATION:
- JKR
SOLAR CHARGE
CONTROLLER
1
Manufacturer
Please attach
catalogue
2
Brand & Model
Please attach
catalogue
3
Electronic Protections
Please attach
catalogue
over-voltage
warning,
reverse polarity
overload, high
temperature,
reverse polarity
a) Solar Input
b) Load Output
4
Efficiency
≥ 90%
5
Humidity
95% Non condensing
6
Operating Temperature Range
7
8
0
C
0oC to 50oC
System voltage
V
12 VDC or 24 VDC
Maximum charging current
A
Please provide detail
calculation
ADDENDUM NO.3 TO L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© 2020 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
OFFERED
SPECIFICATION
ADDENDUM NO.3
TO
L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD
LIGHTING INSTALLATION
CKE.LS.01.20.(03).2020
Date Issued: Aug 1999
Revision Of Addendum : 0
INTEGRATED SOLAR LED
ROAD LIGHTING SYSTEM
Date : Oktober 2020
Page: 12 of 12
APPENDIX B
WARRANTY DECLARATION
PROJECT:
Declaration by Manufacturer / Distributor:
We hereby guarantee that the complete integrated solar LED luminaire supplied is maintenance
free and complete with 5 years’ warranty. Shall any part of the integrated solar LED luminaire
fail to function at any time within the warranty period we, the manufacturer / distributor, shall duly
replace the integrated solar LED luminaire complete with necessary components, labour and
installation at our own cost.
Signature of manufacturer / distributor:
Name of Authorized Personnel:
Official stamp:
Date:
* Warranty certificate is attached
ADDENDUM NO.3 TO L-S20 : SPECIFICATION FOR ROAD LIGHTING INSTALLATION
© 2020 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
CONTENTS
Date: Feb 2014
Page: i of iii
SECTION
1.0
2.0
3.0
4.0
5.0
CONTENT
General
PAGE
0
S1/1-S1/1
1.1
Scope
1
1.2
Technical Particulars
1
1.3
Guarantees
1
1.4
Electrical System
1
1.5
Deviations to Specification
1
Description
0
S2/1-S2/2
2.1
System Description
1
2.2
Emergency Voice Alarm (EVA)
1
Input Signals
0
S3/1-S3/2
3.1
Input Signals
1
3.2
Emergency Paging
1
3.3
General Paging
1
3.4
Background Music
2
Inputs Management
0
S4/1-S4/3
4.1
Inputs Management
1
4.2
Basic
1
4.3
Modular Mixer
1
4.4
Matrix
2
Signal Amplification
5.1
6.0
REVISION
Amplifier
Output Control And Monitoring
6.1
0
Output Control And
S5/1-S5/1
1
0
S6/1-S6/2
1
Monitoring
6.2
Amplifier Monitoring Unit
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
1
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
CONTENTS
Date: Feb 2014
Page: ii of iii
SECTION
CONTENT
6.3
REVISION
Amplifier Automatic Change-
PAGE
1
over Unit
7.0
6.4
Zone Selector
2
6.5
Volume Control (Attenuator)
2
Loudspeaker
0
S7/1-S7/2
7.1
Loudspeaker
1
7.2
Recessed Ceiling Speaker
1
7.3
Surface Mounted box
1
Speaker
7.4
8.0
Horn Speaker
Equipment Rack
2
0
S8/1-S8/2
8.1
General
1
8.2
Equipment Rack
1
8.3
24V DC power Supply
2
8.4
24V DC Back-up Power
2
Supply
9.0
10.0
Infrastructure And Wiring
0
S9/1-S9/2
9.1
Infrastructure
1
9.2
Service Colour Identification
1
9.3
Cable
1
Installation Of Ceiling
0
S10/1
0
S11/1-S11/2
Loudspeaker And Volume Control
11.0
Test, Test Instruments And Test
Certificates
11.1
Test, And Calibration of
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
1
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
CONTENTS
Date: Feb 2014
Page: iii of iii
SECTION
CONTENT
REVISION
PAGE
Measuring And Test
Instruments
11.2
Test And Test Certificates
1
12.0
Service And Maintenance
0
S12/1
13.0
Catalogue, Shop Drawings, As
0
S13/1-S13/3
Built Documents And Tools
13.1
Manufacturer’s Catalogues
1
and Drawings
13.2
Shop Drawings
1
13.3
As Built Documents And
2
Tools
13.4
As Installed Drawings
2
13.5
Manuals
2
14.0
List of Standards
0
S14/1
Annex A
Schedule of Particulars and
0
A/1-A/17
Guarantees
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
1.0
GENERAL
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S1 - 1 of 1
1.1
Scope
1.1.1
This section of the Specification describes and specifies requirements for the
supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning, handing over in approved
working order and maintenance during the Defects Liability Period of the whole
Public Address (P.A) System in accordance with the Specification, Schedule of
Technical Data, Supplementary Notes, Bill of Quantities, Conditions of Contract,
drawings etc.
1.2
Technical Particulars
1.2.1
Tenderers shall submit at the time of tendering all catalogues, detailed technical
particulars and guarantees in respect of the equipment offered, which shall be
binding. No departure from these technical particulars and guarantees will be
permitted except with the written approval of the Superintendent Officer’s (S.O.’s)
representative. Not withstanding any description, drawings, illustrations or
pamphlets which may be submitted with the tender, all details other than those
stated by the Tenderers in the schedule of departures from specification, at the
time of tendering, will be deemed to be in full conformity with the specification.
1.2.2
Additionally the details of the P.A system main equipment supplier or suppliers
shall be furnished in Appendix A.
1.3
Guarantees
1.3.1
The Tenderers shall guarantee the equipment to be supplied under this contract
against faulty design, materials and workmanship at the manufacturer’s works
within the defect liability period (DLP).
1.4
Electrical System
1.4.1
All equipment shall be rated for operation on a 240/415 V, 3 phase, 4 wire, 50 Hz
system with solidly earthed neutral
1.5
Deviations to Specification
1.5.1
Any deviations, alternatives or substitutions of the materials as detailed in this
specification shall be clearly stated in the tenderer’s offer. In the absence of such
indication, it will be deemed that the tenderer is offering to supply goods fully in
accordance with this specification.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
2.0
DESCRIPTION
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S2 - 1 of 2
2.1
System Description
2.1.1
The types of P.A System shall be one or combination of the following types,
distinguished mostly at the signal management stage which are basic, modular
or matrix.
2.1.2
Core equipment such as mixer-amplifier, pre-amplifier, power amplifier,
monitoring unit, change-over unit, zone selector etc. for signal management,
amplification and, output and control monitoring shall come from the same
manufacturer (brand). Loudspeakers and accessories other than those above
may be sourced from same or different manufacturer (brand).
2.1.3
The types can briefly be described as follows:2.1.3.1 Basic – It is normally based on mixer-amplifier (pre-amplifier c/w built-in
amplifier) or pre-amplifier input management systems. Usual application
is in small installation where input sources requirement are fixed and no
expansion is expected.
2.1.3.2 Modular Mixer – It is characterised by having input management system
which is modular, flexible and interchangeable. The number of inputs can
be varied while the input types can be changed based on needs. Inputs
are managed by input cards which are plugged-in to the main frame or
enclosure. It can be configured for multiple inputs and multiple outputs.
2.1.3.3 Matrix – It has an input management system by which signals are
processed digitally and allows for matrix routing of outputs. Simultaneous
broadcasting from multiple input sources to different zones can be
achieved.
2.2
Emergency Voice Alarm (EVA)
2.2.1
Emergency voice alarm (EVA) is a public address system that functioned as
voice alarm during an emergency in a building. The EVA requirement which is
part of the voice communication system is specified in the Malaysian Uniform
Building By Laws 1984. A system that was designed and specified as an EVA
shall clearly be stated so in the drawing and/or bill of quantities.
2.2.2
It shall have equipments that were certified to be in conformance with BS EN
60849:1998 or in accordance with BS 5839-8:2013. This certification shall clearly
be indicated in the supporting documents submitted. In EVA the following shall
be the minimum primary levels of priorities:-
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
2.0
DESCRIPTION
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S2 - 2 of 2
2.2.2.1 Evacuate – An emergency situation that requires an immediate
evacuation;
2.2.2.2 Alert – Dangerous situations are developing nearby and warning of
pending evacuation; and
2.2.2.3 Non-emergency – Normal operation.
2.2.3
The system design and distribution of the loudspeakers shall be capable of
addressing these primary levels of priorities.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
3.0
INPUT SIGNALS
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S3 - 1 of 2
3.1
Input Signals
3.1.1
P.A system shall be equipped as a minimum standard with the following input
facilities which are emergency paging, general paging and background music.
3.1.2
The inputs priority shall be emergency paging, followed by general paging and
background music. The minimum performance for the input signals facilities shall
be as follows.
3.2
Emergency Paging
3.2.1
The function of emergency paging is to allow authorities to broadcast short
announcements through the P.A system during an emergency or evacuation.
Emergency paging microphone designed to be used in EVA shall conform to the
requirement of BS 5839-8:2013 or BS EN 60849:1998 or BS EN 54-16.
3.2.2
The microphone used shall be of a dynamic hand-held type. It shall be of unidirectional or omni-directional polar pattern type that is designed for close talking
applications and fitted with push to talk side button, and electronically balanced
for excellent speech reproduction. Frequency response shall be of minimum
350Hz – 8kHz. The microphone shall be constructed in a manner where it will be
easy to use in times of emergency.
3.3
General Paging
3.3.1
The system is intended for normal announcement and paging purposes during
day to day operations. It shall be equipped with a slim gooseneck, dynamic or
condenser type microphone complete with a sturdy base. The microphone shall
be of uni-directional polar pattern type. Frequency response shall be of minimum
150Hz – 10kHz. The system shall be equipped with built-in or attached keypad
for zone paging. It shall be capable of zone paging with the minimum numbers as
indicated in the drawings or bill of quantities. At minimum it shall have all call and
all clear capabilities, and chime features.
3.3.2
At minimum a paging microphone shall be located at the room where the
equipment rack is located. For paging microphone that is being specified as
remotely located away from this, the design shall ensure that the signal loss
occurred is kept at minimum and will not affect the quality of the voice
transmission. Balanced cable connection shall be considered for application of
more than 5 metres.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
3.0
INPUT SIGNALS
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S3 - 2 of 2
3.4
Background Music
3.4.1
The P.A system shall be equipped with background music facilities. The system
shall at minimum be provided with a complete tuner and CD player. Equipment
provided shall comply to all applicable safety standards and approved by the
relevant authorities. It shall be of 19” rack mountable type and being properly
integrated into the P.A system.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
4.0
INPUTS MANAGEMENT
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S4 - 1 of 3
4.1
Inputs Management
4.1.1
The design of the input signal management shall clearly be identified as one of
the types mentioned in Section 2.0, para 2.1 of this specification. The followings
shall be the minimum performance specifications of the input management
system for each type.
4.2
Basic
4.2.1
Input signals management shall be done using a pre-amplifier with the minimum
number of inputs as indicated in the drawings or bill of quantities. It shall be
mountable on a standard 19” rack. A mixer amplifier based system shall only be
used when specified as so, otherwise a separate pre-amplifier shall be the
minimum requirement.
4.2.2
The pre-amplifier shall be equipped minimally with master gain and individual
gain control for each channel. Bass and treble control shall be provided
individually or as master levels. The pre-amplifier shall have minimum frequency
response of 100Hz – 10kHz (at -3dB).
4.2.3
The inputs shall be suitable for microphone or line inputs in the form of XLR, DIN
or RCA. Low level microphone XLR input shall have sensitivity between -60dBU
(0.78mV) to 0dBU (775mV) and be provided with phantom power supply for
microphone. Auxiliary line input shall have sensitivity between -12dBU (200 mV)
to 9dBU (2.2V). There shall be facilities for priority control. Priority in descending
order shall be fireman/emergency microphone, general paging microphone, and
BGM. Relay contacts for priority and emergency control shall be provided.
4.2.4
It shall have nominal output level range suitable for the amplification input.
4.3
Modular Mixer
4.3.1
A main frame or enclosure shall be provided to house all the modular cards with
the minimum number of allocated slot as indicated in the drawings or bill of
quantities. It shall come complete with a built-in power supply system and printed
circuit board (PCB) for the modular cards to be plugged in. Facilities shall be
made available (if specified so) for the main frame or enclosure to be able of
interconnection to another frame or enclosure to increase the capabilities of the
P.A system. Facilities for priority and program shall be made available to the
modular system.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
4.0
INPUTS MANAGEMENT
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S4 - 2 of 3
4.3.2
Modular cards shall be provided for the inputs as shown in the drawings or bill of
quantities. It shall not however be less than the minimum number of inputs as
indicated in Section 3.0 para 3.1 of this specification. Each input may require one
or more modular cards to make it fully functional and this is deemed to be
included whether or not it is explicitly mentioned in the drawings or bill of
quantities. Modular card shall be able to be plugged in directly to the PCB without
the needs of extra wiring to make it operational.
4.3.3
The input card shall have a minimum frequency response of 100Hz – 15kHz (at 3dB). Microphone input cards shall be provided for low level signal microphone
type or line signal type or both as indicated in the drawings or bill of quantities.
For low level signal microphone type input card, it shall have sensitivity between 60dBU (0.78mV) to 0dBU (775mV) and be provided with phantom power supply
for microphone. For auxiliary line level it shall have sensitivity between 12dBU (200 mV) to 9dBU (2.2V).
4.3.4
A dedicated output card shall be provided for the system. It shall have input
sensitivity between -20dBU to 0dBU and a minimum frequency response of
100Hz – 10kHz (at -3dB).
4.4
Matrix
4.4.1
The digital matrix system shall have the minimum number of inputs and outputs
as indicated in the drawings or bill of quantities. The inputs shall not however be
less than the minimum number of inputs as indicated in Section 3.0 para 3.1 of
this specification. For modular type, each input may require one or more modular
cards to make it fully functional and this is deemed to be included whether or not
it is explicitly mentioned in the drawings or bill of quantities. The number of
outputs shall correspond to the number of zones intended for the system. Each
output shall be able to channel signal exclusively to an external amplifier. Multiple
inputs shall be able to be broadcasted simultaneously to multiple outputs or
zones.
4.4.2
For modular type, a main frame or enclosure shall be provided to house all the
necessary cards. It shall come complete with a power supply system and printed
circuit board (PCB) for the cards to be plugged in. The matrix system shall be
expandable (if specified so) by means of additional unit, main frame or enclosure.
If more than one number of units, main frames or enclosures are required for the
full functioning of the P.A system, it shall be deemed to be included whether or
not they are being explicitly mentioned in the drawings or bill of quantities. Signal
processing shall be done digitally by an on-board microprocessor or attached
central processing card. It shall be able to coordinate all the activities on-board or
of the attached cards and communicate with an external PC for configuration.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
4.0
INPUTS MANAGEMENT
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S4 - 3 of 3
4.4.3
Each input or modular input card shall be provided with digital signal processing
facilities. At minimum a high (10kHz) and low (100Hz) frequency signal
processing shall be made available. The input shall have a minimum frequency
response of 100Hz – 10kHz (at -3dB). Microphone input cards shall be provided
for low level signal microphone type or line signal type or both as indicated in the
drawings or bill of quantities. For low level signal microphone type input card, it
shall have sensitivity between -60dBU (0.78mV) to 0dBU (775mV) and be
provided with phantom power supply for microphone. For auxiliary line level it
shall have sensitivity between -12dBU (200 mV) to 9dBU (2.2V).
4.4.4
Dedicated output or output cards corresponding to the total number of zones
connected shall be provided. All the necessary software and initial configuration
of the matrix system is deemed to be included whether or not they are explicitly
mentioned in the drawings or bill of quantities.
4.4.5
Inputs management system designed for use in EVA shall conform to the
requirement of BS 5839-8:2013 or BS EN 60849:1998 or BS EN 54-16.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
5.0
SIGNAL AMPLIFICATION
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S5 - 1 of 1
5.1
Amplifier
5.1.1
The P.A system shall be run in a 100V amplified line. The amplifier shall operate
from both mains power and on a 24 V DC back-up battery power supply for
emergency back-up, with automatic switchover capabilities.
5.1.2
Amplifier shall be mountable on a standard 19” rack and equipped with
thermostat controlled side fan which should only be active if the operating
temperature exceeds a factory pre-set level. The overheat protection function
shall be able to switch off the amplifier when the internal temperature reaches a
critical limit. The power amplifiers shall also be equipped with built-in circuitry to
protect against overload and short circuits. It shall have status indicators for
supply on and audio level meter. Amplifier for the use in EVA shall conform to the
requirement of BS 5839-8:2013 or BS EN 60849:1998 or BS EN 54-16.
5.1.3
Amplifier shall be rated in watt RMS as specified in the drawings or bill of
quantities. It shall be rated according to the total number of speakers connected
multiplied by their respective tapping wattages, plus a minimum twenty percent
(20%) headroom for spares. It shall have a minimum frequency response of
100Hz – 10kHz (at -3dB). Line input sensitivity nominal level shall be between
775mV – 1V with input impedance >10,000 Ohm. Signal to noise ratio shall be >
60dB and total harmonic distortion (THD) < 1% at 1kHz.
5.1.4
The amplifier shall have a balanced input and loop-through outputs to ensure
easy connection between amplifiers. Standby amplifier shall be provided for the
P.A system in the event of one duty amplifier fails. One (1) standby shall be
provided for every five (5) duty amplifiers and it shall be rated based on the
highest wattage of the duty amplifiers.
5.1.5
Where a large number of power amplifiers are present, sequential power
switcher shall be provided to ensure that the mains or stand-by power supply can
cope with the initial switch-on surge.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
6.0
OUTPUT CONTROL AND
MONITORING
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S6 - 1 of 2
6.1
Output Control And Monitoring
6.1.1
The P.A system shall be equipped with facilities for output signals control and
monitoring. The following facilities shall be provided as minimum requirements
which are amplifier monitoring unit, amplifier automatic change-over unit, zone
selector and volume control (attenuator).
6.1.2
Additionally the system designed for EVA shall be capable of monitoring the
integrity of the loudspeaker circuits. The built-in or external monitoring system
shall be capable of identifying faults such as open and short circuit. Any
associated equipment or accessories required for the full operation of the
monitoring system shall deemed to be included whether or not it is explicitly
mentioned in the drawing or bill of quantities. The output control and monitoring
equipment designed for use in EVA shall conform to the requirement of BS 58398:2013 or BS EN 60849:1998 or BS EN 54-16.
6.1.3
The minimum performance for the output signals control and monitoring facilities
shall be as follows.
6.2
Amplifier Monitoring Unit
6.2.1
A built-in or an external monitoring unit system whichever specified, capable of
monitoring the 100V line output level of each amplifier shall come as a standard.
It shall have at minimum the number of inputs (ways) corresponding to the
number of amplifiers to be monitored as specified in the drawings or bill of
quantities. For a built-in system clear indication shall be displayed to indicate
correct operation of each amplifier. The external system shall be mountable on a
standard 19” rack and equipped with built-in speaker, visual level meter, amplifier
selection buttons and channel indicators.
6.3
Amplifier Automatic Change-over Unit
6.3.1
The changeover unit system shall be of fully automated unmanned type complete
with all the necessary equipment whether or not specifically mentioned in the
drawings or bill of quantities. It can be built-in inside the amplifier or as a
separate equipment. Changeover shall be performed at both input and output
sections, and at any one time only a failed duty unit shall be replaced by a
standby amp to avoid overloading. The unit shall have at minimum input
channels for five(5) duty and one(1) standby amplifiers, and shall be capable to
be cascaded for P.A system with more than five(5) duty amplifiers. Each channel
contact shall be rated at 100V and based on the wattage of the amplifier
connected to it.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
6.0
OUTPUT CONTROL AND
MONITORING
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S6 - 2 of 2
6.3.2
For a separate changeover system, the unit shall be mountable on a standard
19” rack. A buzzer alert with switch and indicators to indicate normal, fault and
changeover operations shall be provided at the front panel. For a built-in system
similar status indicators shall be provided.
6.4
Zone Selector
6.4.1
Facility for zone selection shall be provided based on the number of amplifier
inputs and zones as specified in the drawings or bill of quantities. Each zone
contact shall be rated at 100V and based on the wattage of the amplifier or load
connected to it. It shall have zone selection buttons at the front panel and
complete with all call and all clear paging facilities. Active zone shall be
highlighted by an individual indicator.
6.5
Volume Control (Attenuator)
6.5.1
The volume control (attenuator) shall be rated at 100V and the total wattage of
the speakers connected to it. In any case the rated power shall not be less than
5W. It shall be equipped with a minimum of five (5) attenuation level while a builtin emergency relay shall be provided to allow overriding.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
7.0
LOUDSPEAKER
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S7 - 1 of 2
7.1
Loudspeaker
7.1.1
The loudspeaker design and distribution shall be able to deliver a required sound
pressure level (SPL) of 10dB above the ambient noise (in dBA) measured onaxis at the listening plane, but not less than 65 dBA or exceeding 95 dBA for
internal installation. Loudspeakers shall be located to provide as uniform
coverage as possible with variation in SPL in the coverage area kept below 10
dB.
7.1.2
The loudspeaker distribution shall be divided into several functional and practical
zones. In the event that the system was designed for EVA, the zoning shall be
capable of assisting in an orderly evacuation of the premise. A staircase core
shall ideally be assigned with only one zone to increase voice intelligibility and
clarity of information.
7.1.3
For ceiling and box speaker, the listening plane shall be between 1.0m to 1.8m
above finish floor level. In any case, the loudspeaker shall not have SPL/1W less
than 85dB (1kHz, @1m) for internal application (ceiling and box speaker) and
100dB (1kHz, @1m) for external application (horn speaker). Loudspeaker shall
be rated in watt RMS at 100V line as specified in the drawings or bill of
quantities. It shall be equipped with a built-in multiple tapping transformers to
allow for speaker wattage selection. Frequency response shall be at minimum
120Hz – 10kHz (at -3dB) for ceiling and box speaker, and 500Hz – 5kHz (at 3dB) for horn speaker.
7.1.4
Loudspeaker for use in EVA shall conform to the requirement of BS 5839-8:2013
or BS EN 60849:1998 or BS EN 54-24. Additionally, each type of loudspeaker
shall conform to the following minimum specifications.
7.2
Recessed Ceiling Speaker
7.2.1
Ceiling speaker shall be used at locations where suspended ceiling is provided.
Unless specified as otherwise, the diameter of the speaker shall not exceed
200mm. It shall come complete with back metal enclosure, mesh grille and of
spring mounted installation type, and in finishes approved by the S.O
representative. The loudspeaker shall have opening angle of minimum 90° (at
1kHz/-6dB).
7.3
Surface Mounted Box Speaker
7.3.1
Box speaker shall be provided at locations where surface/wall mounted is
preferred and at staircase areas. It shall be constructed of ABS materials and in
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
7.0
LOUDSPEAKER
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S7 - 2 of 2
finishes approved by the S.O representative. The loudspeaker shall have
opening angle of minimum 90° (at 1kHz/-6dB).
7.4
Horn Speaker
7.4.1
Horn speaker shall be installed for external application requiring clear voice
intelligibility. It shall be constructed from light-weight aluminium enclosure and
has an IP65 rating. The minimum angle of coverage shall be 70° (at 1kHz/-6dB)
horizontally and vertically.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
8.0
EQUIPMENT RACK
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S8 - 1 of 2
8.1
General
8.1.1
The equipment rack and its associated accessories shall preferably be located at
a centrally located room. They shall conform to the following minimum
specifications.
8.2
Equipment Rack
8.2.1
All P.A system equipment shall be mounted in a standard nineteen inch (19”)
equipment rack. The equipment rack shall be of the floor standing type complete
with castor wheel and heavy-duty levelling feet, and height not exceeding 40U.
The rack shall be of stamped metal plate or other approved material of thickness
at least 3mm (frame) and 2mm (panel) with black epoxy coating, internal
reinforcement and provided with side vents for air ventilation complete with antivermin net. At minimum two (2) numbers of low noise ventilation fans shall be
installed at the top of the rack mounted inside a dedicated compartment.
8.2.2
Front perspex panel shall be provided for easy monitoring of status indicators. It
shall be adequate in size to house all the necessary equipment. The rack shall
be constructed such that all equipment can be withdrawn from the front for
servicing and maintenance. The arrangement of all the audio equipment in the
rack shall be determined and proposed by the specialist contractor. It shall allow
for heat to flow and be convected freely minimising any temperature built-up.
Heat generating equipment shall be stacked appropriately with minimum of 1U
separation from other equipment.
8.2.3
The equipment rack shall be provided with lockable door for security reasons.
The design of the rack shall be submitted to the S.O's representative for approval
prior to fabrication. If the rack is standard prefabricated type, catalogue shall be
submitted together with the tender document. A power supply system operating
at 240V 50Hz AC with sufficient rated power shall be provided to feed the entire
P.A system. It shall have power indicators and sufficient socket outlets (in the
equipment rack).
8.2.4
All inter-racking cables shall be deemed included whether or not they are
explicitly mentioned in the drawings or bill of quantities. All wiring within the rack
shall be fixed securely without strain by means of approved nylon/PVC cable ties.
For the purpose of identification, all cables shall be labelled and/or colour coded
accordingly. The wiring shall be arranged in a neat and systematic manner, with
cable supports clear off panel and without crossover.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
8.0
EQUIPMENT RACK
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S8 - 2 of 2
8.3
24V DC Power Supply
8.3.1
A regulated 24V DC power supply shall be provided for equipment operating
continuously on 24V DC. It shall have a nominal ampere rating based on the total
consumption wattage of all equipment connected to it. In any case the rating
shall not however be less than 4A. The mains input shall be 220-240V AC while
the DC output voltage shall not varies more than +/- 1%.
8.3.2
Protection against voltage surge and over-current shall come as standard. The
output DC shall be equipped with protection devices against over-current and for
isolation. There shall be a connection to a 24V DC back-up power supply in case
of mains failure and the changeover shall be automatic. The 24V DC power
supply shall be 19” rack mountable and be provided with front panel visual
indicators for mains, battery and DC out.
8.4
24V DC Back-Up Power Supply
8.4.1
Sealed lead acid batteries of AH capacity as specified shall be provided for the
24V DC back-up power supply complete with charger and rack. The minimum
backed-up period shall be 30 minutes in full load. In the event that the AH
capacity was not specified, the minimum shall be 100AH or for 30 minutes
operation whichever is higher.
8.4.2
The automatic battery charger shall feature automatic charging switches from
boost to float mode when the battery is fully charged. It shall feature high
efficiency thyristors as its power controlling element. The charger shall
incorporate voltage regulation and current limiting features. The charging voltage
shall be as specified by the battery manufacturer. It shall however between 26 –
28V DC with 3 – 10A charging current. It shall has trickle, float or boost charge
mode. There shall be indications for AC mains, charging and low battery. The
voltage and current shall also be displayed. There shall be protection against
overheat, short-circuit, high voltage (30V) and low voltage (21V) cut.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
9.0
INFRASTRUCTURE AND WIRING
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S9 - 1 of 2
9.1
Infrastructure
9.1.1
Unless specified as otherwise in this specification, details for the wiring
infrastructure such as general system of wiring, conduits, trunking, cable ladder
or cable tray shall be referred to the current JKR Specification for Low Voltage
Electrical Installation.
9.2
Service Colour Identification
9.2.1
All metallic conduits and trunking for the P.A system shall be clearly identified
and distinguished from other services. The identification colour for P.A system
services shall be white, with the lettering “P.A.” in black painted over them. The
identification colour shall be applied by painting over the whole length of the
conduits and trunkings and their coverings.
9.2.2
For conduits, the lettering shall be of minimum 19mm height, and painted at an
interval not more than 2000mm. Lettering for trunking shall have a minimum
height of half the width of the respective trunking but need not exceed 50mm in
any case, and painted at an interval not more than 3000mm. Conduits/trunking at
junctions, both sides of service appliance, wall/floor penetration and any other
place where identification is required and necessary shall also be provided with
the same letterings. All letterings shall be clearly legible, and to the satisfaction of
the S.O representative.
9.3
Cable
9.3.1
All loudspeaker wiring shall be installed using twisted pair, PVC insulated, PVC
jacketed, stranded tinned copper conductor of relevant dimension as indicated in
the drawings or bill of quantities. The cable shall be of 300/500V grade as
specified in the current JKR Specification for Low Voltage Electrical Installation
with the appropriate current carrying capacity based on the load carried. The
wiring throughout shall be on the ‘looping-in system’ and no ‘tee’ or other types of
joints are allowed. No reduction of the strands allowed at all terminals. All strands
shall be effectively secured by approved means.
9.3.2
To ensure maximum integrity, loudspeaker wiring for EVA shall be installed using
a fire resistant cable as specified in the current JKR Specification for Low Voltage
Electrical Installation.
9.3.3
Cable size shall be selected such that signal level attenuation between the
amplifier output and the input of the final loudspeaker point of one particular
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
9.0
INFRASTRUCTURE AND WIRING
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S9 - 2 of 2
circuit does not exceed 10%. Care shall be taken to separate the line level signal
with the loudspeaker circuit, and with the mains cable.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
10.0
INSTALLATION OF CEILING
LOUDSPEAKER AND VOLUME
CONTROL
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S10 - 1 of 1
10.0.1 The installation of the loudspeaker shall be based on a coordinated services
drawing. Loudspeaker mounted on false/suspended ceiling shall be supported
adequately by an approved mean to carry its own weight and not rested directly
on the ceiling. A typical ceiling recessed installation is shown in Figure 1.
10.0.2 Wall mounted loudspeaker shall not be installed at height more than 2500mm
from the finished floor level. Volume controller shall be installed at 1450mm
height and of the same level as other wall mounted accessories such switches,
dimmers etc.
Figure 1: Typical ceiling loudspeaker installation
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
11.0
TEST, TEST INSTRUMENTS AND
TEST CERTIFICATES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S11 - 1 of 2
11.1
Test, And Calibration of Measuring And Test Instruments
11.1.1 All measuring and test instruments used for testing of the P.A installations shall
be regularly tested and calibrated by the manufacturers or accredited calibration
laboratories for their functionality and accuracy. The measurement accuracy of
reading shall be ± 10 % for analogue and digital instruments. Test and
Calibration Reports or Certificates for the measuring and test instruments issued
by the calibration laboratory shall be valid for two (2) years from the date of
issuance.
11.1.2 The instruments and their Test and Calibration Reports or Certificates shall be
submitted to S.O.'s Representative for verification two weeks before testing of the
P.A installations being carried out. No test on the P.A installations shall be
carried out without prior approval of the S.O.'s Representative. Notwithstanding
the validity of the aforesaid Reports or Certificates the measuring and test
instruments shall be re-calibrated if so required by the S.O.'s Representative
after any mechanical or electrical mishandling. Fee required for the testing and
calibrating of the measuring and test instruments is deemed to be included in the
Contract.
11.2
Test And Test Certificates
11.2.1 After the installation work has been completed and before Certificate of Practical
Completion is issued, the whole P.A system shall be tested for compliance and
performance as follows:11.2.1.1
Insulation test of the loudspeaker and volume controller circuit
wiring;
11.2.1.2
Continuity test of the loudspeaker and volume controller circuit
wiring;
11.2.1.3
Functional test to indicate correct operation and performance of all
sound equipment and it associated source equipment;
11.2.1.4
Sound pressure level (SPL) measurement throughout the entire
target area; and
11.2.1.5
Any other tests which may be needed to demonstrate the
satisfactory function of the sound system.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
11.0
TEST, TEST INSTRUMENTS AND
TEST CERTIFICATES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S11 - 2 of 2
11.2.2 The Contractor shall at minimum have the following test equipment available on
site during installation and testing:11.2.2.1
Cable insulation and continuity tester;
11.2.2.2
Pink noise generator;
11.2.2.3
Sound level meter;
11.2.2.4
Oscilloscope; and
11.2.2.5
Calibrated microphone.
11.2.3 The S.O.'s Representative reserves the right to be present at all tests and the
Contractor shall give at least one week notice in writing to the S.O.'s
Representative for this purpose. In any case, no test shall be carried out without
prior approval of the S.O.'s Representative. Copies of all the test certificates
together with As-Installed Drawings properly bound and titled shall be submitted
to the S.O.'s Representative within one week after the completion of the testing.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
12.0
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S12 - 1 of 1
12.0.1 During the Defects Liability Period, the Contractor shall be responsible for the
service and maintenance work of the complete installation. All works shall be
carried out by competent person. All labour, material, tools and parts necessary
to rectify the defect due to manufacturing/installation faults shall be
supplied/executed at the Contractor's cost.
12.0.2 The service and maintenance to be performed and defects to be rectified and
making good shall include but not limited to the following:12.0.2.1
Repairs and replacement of all equipment and accessories that
become faulty due to manufacturing and installation defects
whether it is under the manufacturer’s warranty or not;
12.0.2.2
Replacement and making goods of all wiring and accessories;
12.0.2.3
Making good any damage to roads, buildings, drains, cables,
pipes, concrete areas, paved areas etc. which had not been
properly made good arising out of his work; and
12.0.2.4
All other works
Representative.
deemed
as
necessary
by
the
S.O.'s
12.0.3 All works shall be carried out as soon as the Contractor is being informed by the
S.O.'s Representative or the occupant, and shall be completed within a
reasonable time except under emergency situation. If the Contractor fails to
comply with the above requirements, the S.O.'s Representative reserves the right
to engage another party to carry out the work, in which case, the Contractor shall
be responsible for all the expenses incurred.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
13.0
CATALOGUE, SHOP DRAWINGS, AS
BUILT DOCUMENTS AND TOOLS
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S13 - 1 of 3
13.1
Manufacturer’s Catalogues and Drawings
13.1.1 Manufacturer's catalogues and drawings giving detailed information on the
general installation, technical specification and other useful details shall be
submitted together with the Tender.
13.2
Shop Drawings
13.2.1 Two sets of prints of shop drawings for construction and/or installation shall be
submitted to the S.O.’s Representative for approval. The Contractor shall prepare
and submit shop drawings for the whole work or parts of the work at least two
weeks before the work begins. If the shop drawings submitted are not acceptable
by the S.O.’s Representative, the Contractor shall amend and re-submit the shop
drawings within two weeks from the date of return of the shop drawings. No work
shall be carried out without the shop drawings being approved by the S.O.’s
Representative.
13.2.2 The shop drawings shall include and show the following:13.2.2.1
Co-ordinated dimensioned general arrangements, layouts and
positions of loudspeakers, accessories, equipment racks and all
others necessary for the complete installation;
13.2.2.2
Schematic line diagrams of the installation;
13.2.2.3
The dimensioned general arrangements, layouts and routes of
final circuits;
13.2.2.4
The dimensioned general arrangements, layouts, routes and
positions of all lateral and vertical mains and/or sub-mains;
13.2.2.5
The dimensioned layouts and positions of all holes and cutthrough in the walls and floors for the lateral and vertical mains
and/or sub-mains; and
13.2.2.6
Co-ordinated routes for all cables laid external of the building;
13.2.3 The cost of all these shop drawings, whether or not provided in the Bill of
Quantities, is deemed to be included in the Contract.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
13.0
CATALOGUE, SHOP DRAWINGS, AS
BUILT DOCUMENTS AND TOOLS
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S13 - 2 of 3
13.3
As Built Documents And Tools
13.3.1 As built document shall consist of but not limited to the as installed drawings,
manuals, certificates, catalogues, inventories and parts lists.
13.4
As Installed Drawings
13.4.1 The as installed drawing shall comprise of:13.4.1.1
Site plan;
13.4.1.2
External cable routes;
13.4.1.3
Internal layout plans; and
13.4.1.4
Schematic diagrams.
13.4.2 These drawings shall be labelled at the lower right hand corner with the Electrical
Contractor's name and address, date of commissioning, scale, drawing number
(the drawing number to be obtained from the S.O.'s Representative), title and
following particulars: JABATAN KERJA RAYA
CAWANGAN KEJURUTERAAN ELEKTRIK
CONTRACT NO.:
13.4.3 If the drawings submitted are not according to the actual installation at site and/or
not acceptable to the S.O.'s Representative, the Contractor shall amend and resubmit the drawings within two weeks from the date of return of the drawings to
the satisfaction of the S.O.'s Representative.
13.5
Manuals
13.5.1 Manual and documents for the P.A System installation shall be supplied. It shall
comprise of:13.5.1.1
Installation manual;
13.5.1.2
Operation manual;
13.5.1.3
Service and maintenance manual;
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
13.0
CATALOGUE, SHOP DRAWINGS, AS
BUILT DOCUMENTS AND TOOLS
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S13 - 3 of 3
13.5.1.4
Inventories and parts list;
13.5.1.5
Product data and catalogue;
13.5.1.6
Product test certificates; and
13.5.1.7
Installation test results.
13.6
Each of the as built document shall be bound together with hard cover and
submitted in minimum four (4) sets upon issuance of Certificate of Practical
Completion of the project.
13.7
In addition, one set of the as installed drawing shall be submitted in the form of
tracing/original document, and two sets in CD ROM.
13.8
Special tools if any required for the operation, service and maintenance of the
P.A System equipment shall also be provided.
13.9
The cost of all these prints, manuals, tools etc. whether or not provided in the Bill
of Quantities, is deemed to be included in the Contract.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
14.0
LIST OF STANDARDS
Date: Feb 2014
Page: S14 - 1 of 1
STANDARD
DESCRIPTION
BS 6259 : 1997
The design, planning, installation, testing and maintenance of
sound systems
BS EN 60849 :
1998
Sound systems for emergency purposes
BS 5839-8 : 2013
Code of practice for the design, installation, commissioning and
maintenance of voice alarm systems
BS EN 54-24 :
2008
Components of voice alarm system – loudspeakers
BS EN 54-16 :
2008
Voice alarm control and indicating equipment
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 1 of 17
A.1
Schedule of Particulars and Guarantees
(To be filled in by the Tenderer)
Section
3.2
Parameter
Specification
Emergency Paging Microphone
Brand :
Model no :
Type :
Polar pattern :
Frequency response :
Dynamic
Uni / Omni directional
350Hz – 8kHz
Output level :
Connectors type :
3.3
Paging Microphone
Brand :
Model no :
Polar pattern :
Dynamic /
Condenser
Uni-directional
Frequency response :
150Hz – 10kHz
Built-in or attached keypad : yes/no?
Built-in / attached
Type :
Number of zones :
All call : yes/no?
Yes
All clear : yes/no?
Yes
Chime : yes/no?
Yes
Output level :
Connectors type :
3.4
Background Music
i. AM/FM Tuner
Brand :
Model no :
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
Equipment Offered
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 2 of 17
Section
Parameter
Specification
ii. CD Player
Brand :
Model no :
iii. Other Media (if applicable)
Type :
Brand :
Model no :
4.2
Pre-amplifier
Brand :
Model no :
Total number of inputs :
Number of mono inputs :
Number of line inputs :
Sensitivity (mV or dBU)
Mic input :
-60dBU to 0dBU
Line input :
-12dBU to 9dBU
Frequency response (@ -3dB) :
100Hz – 10kHz
Controls
Master gain (volume) : yes/no?
Channel gain (volume) : yes/no?
Master/channel bass : yes/no?
Master/channel treble : yes/no?
Nominal output level :
Allow for priority control : yes/no?
Yes
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
Equipment Offered
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 3 of 17
Section
4.3
Parameter
Specification
Modular
a) Main frame or enclosure
Brand :
Model no :
Number of slots :
Built-in power supply module :
On board PCB for connectivity :
yes/no?
Allow for priority control : yes/no?
Master bass/treble : yes/no?
b) Modular Input Cards
i. Type (Mic, Aux, Line etc)
Brand :
Mic / Aux / Line
Model no :
Sensitivity
Input 1 :
Input 2 :
Mic: -60dBU to
0dBU
Aux/Line: -12dBU
to 9dBU
Nominal output level :
Frequency response (@ -3dB) :
100Hz – 10kHz
Controls
Gain (volume) : yes/no?
Bass : yes/no?
Treble : yes/no?
ii. Type (Mic, Aux, Line etc)
Mic / Aux / Line
Brand :
Model no :
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
Equipment Offered
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 4 of 17
Section
Parameter
Specification
Sensitivity
Input 1 :
Input 2 :
Mic: -60dBU to 0dBU
Aux/Line: -12dBU
to 9dBU
Nominal output level :
Frequency response (@ -3dB) :
100Hz – 10kHz
Controls
Gain (volume) : yes/no?
Bass : yes/no?
Treble : yes/no?
iii. Type (Mic, Aux, Line etc)
Mic / Aux / Line
Brand :
Model no :
Sensitivity
Input 1 :
Input 2 :
Mic: -60dBU to 0dBU
Aux/Line: -12dBU
to 9dBU
Nominal output level :
Frequency response (@ -3dB) :
100Hz – 10kHz
Controls
Gain (volume) : yes/no?
Bass : yes/no?
Treble : yes/no?
iv. Type (Mic, Aux, Line etc)
Mic / Aux / Line
Brand :
Model no :
Sensitivity
Input 1 :
Mic: -60dBU to 0dBU
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
Equipment Offered
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 5 of 17
Section
Parameter
Input 2 :
Specification
Aux/Line: -12dBU
to 9dBU
Nominal output level :
Frequency response (@ -3dB) :
100Hz – 10kHz
Controls
Gain (volume) : yes/no?
Bass : yes/no?
Treble : yes/no?
v. Type (Mic, Aux, Line etc)
Mic / Aux / Line
Brand :
Model no :
Sensitivity
Input 1 :
Input 2 :
Mic: -60dBU to 0dBU
Aux/Line: -12dBU
to 9dBU
Nominal output level :
Frequency response (@ -3dB) :
100Hz – 10kHz
Controls
Gain (volume) : yes/no?
Bass : yes/no?
Treble : yes/no?
c) Modular Output Cards
Brand :
Model no :
Sensitivity
Input 1 :
Input 2 :
-20dBU to 0dBU
Nominal output level :
Frequency response (@ -3dB) :
100Hz – 10kHz
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
Equipment Offered
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 6 of 17
Section
4.4
Parameter
Specification
Digital Matrix
a) Main unit, main frame or enclosure
Brand :
Model no :
Number of slots/inputs :
Built-in power supply module :
On board PCB for connectivity :
yes/no?
Allow for priority control : yes/no?
Yes
Yes
Yes
Number of outputs :
Managing Software
Operating system :
PC compatible : yes/no?
Yes
b) Inputs
i. Type (Mic, Aux, Line etc)
Brand (if modular):
Mic / Aux / Line
Model no (if modular):
Input sensitivity :
Frequency response (@ -3dB) :
Mic: -60dBU to 0dBU
Aux/Line: -12dBU
to 9dBU
100Hz – 10kHz
Digital signal processing
High : yes/no?
Low : yes/no?
Others (state) :
ii. Type (Mic, Aux, Line etc)
Mic / Aux / Line
Brand (if modular):
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
Equipment Offered
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 7 of 17
Section
Parameter
Specification
Model no (if modular):
Input sensitivity :
Frequency response (@ -3dB) :
Mic: -60dBU to 15dBU
Aux/Line: -12dBU
to 9dBU
100Hz – 10kHz
Digital signal processing
High : yes/no?
Low : yes/no?
Others (state) :
iii. Type (Mic, Aux, Line etc)
Mic / Aux / Line
Brand (if modular):
Model no (if modular):
Input sensitivity :
Frequency response (@ -3dB) :
Mic: -60dBU to 15dBU
Aux/Line: -12dBU
to 9dBU
100Hz – 10kHz
Digital signal processing
High : yes/no?
Low : yes/no?
Others (state) :
iv. Type (Mic, Aux, Line etc)
Mic / Aux / Line
Brand (if modular):
Model no (if modular):
Input sensitivity :
Frequency response (@ -3dB) :
Mic: -60dBU to 15dBU
Aux/Line: -12dBU
to 9dBU
100Hz – 10kHz
Digital signal processing
High : yes/no?
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
Equipment Offered
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 8 of 17
Section
Parameter
Specification
Low : yes/no?
Others (state) :
v. Type (Mic, Aux, Line etc)
Mic / Aux / Line
Brand (if modular):
Model no (if modular):
Input sensitivity :
Frequency response (@ -3dB) :
Mic: -60dBU to 15dBU
Aux/Line: -12dBU
to 9dBU
100Hz – 10kHz
Digital signal processing
High : yes/no?
Low : yes/no?
Others (state) :
5.1
Power Amplifier
i. Amplifier (no.1)
Brand :
Model no :
Power source :
Mains and backup battery
Rated output power in RMS :
Frequency response (@-3dB) :
100Hz – 10kHz
Input sensitivity :
775mV – 1V
Input impedance (Ohm) :
> 10,000 Ohm
Signal to noise ratio (SNR) :
> 60dB
Total harmonic distortion (THD) :
< 1%
Overheat,
overload, shortcircuit
Protection (state):
Indicators (state) :
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
Equipment Offered
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 9 of 17
Section
Parameter
Specification
Controls (state) :
ii. Amplifier (no.2)
Brand :
Model no :
Power source :
Mains and backup battery
Rated output power in RMS :
Frequency response (@-3dB) :
100Hz – 10kHz
Input sensitivity :
775mV – 1V
Input impedance :
> 10,000 Ohm
Signal to noise ratio (SNR) :
> 60dB
Total harmonic distortion (THD) :
< 1%
Overheat,
overload, shortcircuit
Protection (state):
Indicators (state) :
Controls (state) :
iii. Amplifier (no.3)
Brand :
Model no :
Power source :
Mains and backup battery
Rated output power in RMS :
Frequency response (@-3dB) :
100Hz – 10kHz
Input sensitivity :
775mV – 1V
Input impedance :
> 10,000 Ohm
Signal to noise ratio (SNR) :
> 60dB
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
Equipment Offered
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 10 of 17
Section
Parameter
Total harmonic distortion (THD) :
Protection (state):
Specification
< 1%
Overheat,
overload, shortcircuit
Indicators (state) :
Controls (state) :
6.2
Amplifier Monitoring Unit
Brand :
Model no :
Power source :
Number of inputs :
6.3
Built-in monitoring speaker : yes/no?
Yes
Visual level meter : yes/no?
Yes
Amplifier selection button : yes/no?
Yes
Input channel indicator : yes/no?
Yes
Automatic Change-over Unit
Brand :
Model no :
Type :
Built-in / Separate
Power source :
Duty input channel numbers :
Min 5 nos.
Standby input channel numbers :
Min 1 no.
Load rating (W) :
Status indicators :
6.4
Zone Selector
Brand :
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
Equipment Offered
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 11 of 17
Section
Parameter
Specification
Model no :
Power source :
Number of zone :
Load rating (W) :
Indicators :
6.5
Volume controller
Brand :
Model no :
Rated power (@100V) :
Number of attenuation steps :
Min 5 levels
Attenuation (dB)/step :
Overriding voltage :
7.0
Loudspeaker
i) Ceiling loudspeaker (no.1)
Brand :
Model no :
Rated power (@100V) :
Maximum power (@100V) :
Frequency response (-3dB) :
120Hz – 10kHz
SPL level (1W, @1kHz, @1m)
Opening angle (at 1kHz/-6dB) :
Min 90°
Transformer multi-tap (W) @ 100V :
Overall diameter :
ii) Ceiling loudspeaker (no.2)
- Brand :
- Model no :
- Rated power (@100V) :
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
Equipment Offered
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 12 of 17
Section
Parameter
- Maximum power (@100V) :
Specification
120Hz – 10kHz
- Frequency response (-3dB) :
- SPL level (1W, @1kHz, @1m)
Min 90°
- Opening angle (at 1kHz/-6dB) :
- Transformer multi-tap (W) @ 100V :
- Overall diameter :
iii) Ceiling loudspeaker (no.3)
Brand :
Model no :
Rated power (@100V) :
Maximum power (@100V) :
Frequency response (-3dB) :
120Hz – 10kHz
SPL level (1W, @1kHz, @1m)
Opening angle (at 1kHz/-6dB) :
Min 90°
Transformer multi-tap (W) @ 100V :
Overall diameter :
iv) Ceiling loudspeaker (no.4)
Brand :
Model no :
Rated power (@100V) :
Maximum power (@100V) :
Frequency response (-3dB) :
120Hz – 10kHz
SPL level (1W, @1kHz, @1m)
Opening angle (at 1kHz/-6dB) :
Min 90°
Transformer multi-tap (W) @ 100V :
Overall diameter :
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
Equipment Offered
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 13 of 17
Section
Parameter
Specification
v) Box loudspeaker (no.1)
Brand :
Model no :
Rated power (@100V) :
Maximum power (@100V) :
Frequency response (-3dB) :
120Hz – 10kHz
SPL level (1W, @1kHz, @1m)
Opening angle (at 1kHz/-6dB) :
Min 90°
Transformer multi-tap (W) @ 100V :
vi) Box loudspeaker (no.2)
Brand :
Model no :
Rated power (@100V) :
Maximum power (@100V) :
Frequency response (-3dB) :
120Hz – 10kHz
SPL level (1W, @1kHz, @1m)
Opening angle (at 1kHz/-6dB) :
Min 90°
Transformer multi-tap (W) @ 100V :
vii) Horn Speaker (no.1)
Brand :
Model no :
Rated power (@100V) :
Maximum power (@100V) :
Frequency response (-3dB) :
500Hz – 5kHz
SPL level (1W, @1kHz, @1m)
Coverage angle :
70°(H) x 70°(V)
Transformer multi-tap (W) @ 100V :
Construction material :
Light-weight
aluminium
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
Equipment Offered
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 14 of 17
Section
Parameter
IP rating :
Specification
Min IP65
vi) Horn Speaker (no.2)
Brand :
Model no :
Rated power (@100V) :
Maximum power (@100V) :
Frequency response (-3dB) :
500Hz – 5kHz
SPL level (1W, @1kHz, @1m)
Coverage angle :
70°(H) x 70°(V)
Transformer multi-tap (W) @ 100V :
Construction material :
IP rating :
8.0
Light-weight
aluminium
Min IP65
Equipment Rack
i) Rack
- Brand :
- Model no :
ii) 24V DC Power Supply
- Brand :
- Model no :
iii) 24V DC Battery
- Brand :
- Model no :
iv) 24V DC Battery Charger
- Brand :
- Model no :
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
Equipment Offered
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 15 of 17
Section
9.0
Parameter
Specification
Equipment Offered
Wiring
i) Twisted Pair PVC/PVC
- Brand :
- Model no :
ii) Fire Resistant Cable
- Brand :
- Model no :
iii) Conduit
- Brand :
- Model no :
iv) Trunking
- Brand :
- Model no :
NOTE: Tenderer shall enter details at the time of tendering. Technical literature such as
catalogues shall also be submitted as supporting documents. If no details are entered,
and/or no technical supporting documents are enclosed the evaluating officer shall deem
the submission to be incomplete and have the right to reject it.
I hereby acknowledge that the details in the “Schedule of Particulars and Guarantee” are correct
and in accordance with the specification.
Tenderer
Signature
:
Company’s Stamp
Name of tenderer :
Date
:
.................................
Tenderer is required to obtain declaration for the equipment specified in Section 3.0 – 7.0.
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 16 of 17
I/we being the suppliers for the equipment specified in Section 3.0 – 7.0 acknowledge the
responsibility for the equipment supplied and, the associated after sales and service during the
warranty period.
Declaration by Suppliers
i)
Signature
:
Name of supplier
:
Company’s name
:
Registration no :
Equipment to be supplied (list down) :
___________________________________________
___________________________________________
___________________________________________
Company’s Stamp
.................................
ii)
Signature
:
Name of supplier
:
Company’s name
:
Registration no :
Equipment to be supplied (list down) :
___________________________________________
___________________________________________
___________________________________________
Company’s Stamp
.................................
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
ANNEX A
SCHEDULE OF PARTICULARS AND
GUARANTEES
Date: Feb 2014
Page: A - 17 of 17
iii)
Signature
:
Name of supplier
:
Company’s name
:
Registration no :
Equipment to be supplied (list down) :
___________________________________________
___________________________________________
___________________________________________
Company’s Stamp
.................................
iv)
Signature
:
Name of supplier
:
Company’s name
:
Registration no :
Equipment to be supplied (list down) :
___________________________________________
___________________________________________
___________________________________________
Company’s Stamp
.................................
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
© Hak Cipta: 2014 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
6.0
OUTPUT CONTROL AND
MONITORING
(Addendum)
Date: Mac 2018
Page: S6 - 3 of 3
3.1
Voice Alarm Module with Overriding & Priority
3.1.1
Voice Alarm Module with Overriding & Priority is an automatic evacuation broadcasting
function to assist fast and safe evacuations from fire. The broadcasting shall pre-set
depending on fire locations to minimize casualties by providing the first priority zone to
evacuated, evacuation directions for each zone and ways to evacuate from the initial fire
location based on time interval. Evacuations voice module can reproduce and record
high sound quality of sound source by using 256kbps transmission rate on MP3 method.
The entry terminal of recording shall of CD, AUX and MIC.
Technical Specification:
Operating voltage
Data Communication
Inputs
Processor
Message trigger
File format
MP3 quality
Voice recording
Files in single bank
Memory
: 24V DC
: RS485 at 19.2 kbps
: Line inputs – unbalanced via RCA jack
Microphone input – via front phone jack
: 32 bit ARM
: 16 front and rear message
: MP3, WMA, WAV
: 320 kbps
: IMA ADPCM 16 KHz sampling rate
Bit rate – 64 kbps
: Up to 20 per message / button
: MicroSD up to 16 GB
3.2
Fire Alarm Interface
3.2.1
The Fire Alarm Interface a versatile, compact way to distribute and control power for
Access Control Systems with Fire Alarm Interface. The device is an 8 position power
distribution board with individual Relays with input (IN) control for each output (OUT).
Technical Specification:
Operating voltage
USB input
Communication control
Baud rate
Channel input
Channel output
: 24V DC
: USB to RS485 Driver
: RS485
: 19200 bps
: 24 channel
: 4 channel
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
6.0
OUTPUT CONTROL AND
MONITORING
(Addendum)
Date: Mac 2018
Page: S6 - 3 of 3
3.3
Dynamic Handheld Wired Microphone
3.3.1
The Dynamic Handheld Wired Microphone shall be delivers excellent sound for spoken
word and karaoke performance. Available with various cable options and a discrete
On/Off switch. The Wired Handheld Microphone shall minimally comprise the following
technical specifications:Features:




Tailored microphone cartridge design specifically for clarity in the standard
frequency rand of speech
Cardioid polar pattern pick up audio from the source while rejecting unwanted
noise
Updated industrial design with black metallic finish classic silver ball grille
On/Off switch for discrete control of microphone operation
Stand adapter for mounting to a microphone stand
Technical Specification:
Type
Frequency Range
Polar pattern
Output impedance
Sensitivity
Polarity
:
:
:
:
:
:
Connector
:
Dynamic (moving coil)
70Hz to 15kHz
Cardioid
600Ω
-53.5dBV/Pa (2.10mV)
Positive pressure on diaphragm produces positive
voltage in pin 2 with respect to pin 3
Three-pin professional audio (XLR), male
SPECIFICATION FOR PUBLIC
ADDRESS (P.A) SYSTEM
CKE.LS.06.06.(00).2013
Date: Feb 2014
Revision: 0
SECTION :
6.0
OUTPUT CONTROL AND
MONITORING
(Addendum)
Date: Mac 2018
Page: S6 - 3 of 3
3.4
DVD Player
3.4.1
The DVD Player shall minimally comprise the following technical specifications:Technical Specification:
Playable Disc Type
:
Video Decoding Format
Audio Decoding Format
AV I/O
:
:
:
Power Specification
:
DVD-Video/DVD±R/DVD±RW
CD DA/CD-R/CD-RW
VCD 1.1
Color System NTSC, MPEG 2/4, DivX, JPEG
Dolby Digital, LPCM, MP3, WMA
Composite Output, Component Output,
Coaxial Digital Audio Output
AC 110-240V ~ 50/60Hz
L-S9
May 2011
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik
Jabatan Kerja Raya Malaysia
.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
CONTENT
Date: May 2011
Page: i of iii
SECTION
CONTENT
REVISION
PAGE
1.0
General
1.1 Scope
1.2 Standards
1
S1/1
2.0
Class of Lightning Protection System
2.1 Class of Lightning Protection System
1
S2/1-S2/1
3.0
Air Termination System
3.1 General
3.2 Air Termination System
1
S3/1-S3/2
4.0
Down Conductor System
4.1
Down Conductor System
4.2
Natural Down Conductor System
1
S4/1-S4/2
5.0
Joints And Bonds
5.1
Joints And Bonds
1
S5/1
6.0
Testing Joints
6.1
Testing Joints
1
S6/1
7.0
Fixings, Clamps And Supports
7.1
Fixings, Clamps And Supports
1
S7/1
8.0
Earth Termination System
8.1
Earth Termination System
1
S8/1
9.0
Earth Electrodes
9.1
Earth Electrodes
1
S9/1
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta : 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
CONTENT
Date: May 2011
Page: ii of iii
SECTION
CONTENT
REVISION
PAGE
10.0
Lightning Flash Counters
10.1
Lightning Flash Counters
1
S10/1
11.0
Test, Test Instruments And Test
Certificates
1
S11/1-11/2
11.1
11.2
Test And Calibration Of Measuring And Test Instruments
Test And Test Certificates
12.0
Service And Maintenance
12.1
Service And Maintenance
1
S12/1
13.0
Shop Drawings, As-Built Document And
Tools
1
S13/1-S13/4
1
A/1-A/7
13.1
13.2
Shop Drawings
As- Built Document & Tools
Appendix A
Table 1:– Relation between lightning
protection levels (LPL) and class of LPS
Table 2: Maximum values of rolling sphere
radius, mesh size and protection angle
corresponding to the class of LPS
Table 3: Minimum thickness of metal sheets
or metal pipes in air-termination systems.
Table 4: Typical values of the distance
between down-conductors and between ring
conductors according to class of LPS
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta : 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
CONTENT
Date: May 2011
Page: iii of iii
SECTION
CONTENT
Table 5: LPS Material and conditions of use
Table 6: Material, configuration and
minimum cross-sectional area of airtermination conductors, air-termination rods
and down conductors.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta : 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
REVISION
PAGE
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
1.0
Revision: 1
GENERAL
Date: May 2011
Page: S1 - 1 of 1
1.1
SCOPE
This section of the specification describes and specifies requirements for the
supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning, handing over in approved
working order and maintenance thereof during the Defects Liability Period (DLP) of
the whole lightning protection system (LPS) in accordance with the Specification,
Supplementary Notes, Bills of Quantities, Conditions of Contracts, Drawing etc.
The lightning protection system shall include air termination system, down
conductor system, joints and bonds, testing joints, lightning flash counter, earth
termination system, and other accessories incidental to the completion of the
whole system as specified in the Drawings and/or Bills of Quantities.
1.2
STANDARDS
Generally, methods and materials used for the construction and installation of the
LPS shall comply in accordance with MS IEC 62305:2007 and IEC 62561.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
2.0
Revision: 1
CLASS OF LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM
Date: May 2011
Page: S2 - 1 of 1
2.1
CLASS OF LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM
Four classes of LPS (I to IV) are defined in MS IEC 62305-1 corresponding to
lightning protection levels as shown in Table 1 (see Appendix A: Table 1) and the
class of required LPS shall be selected on the basis of a risk assessment.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
3.0
Revision: 1
AIR TERMINATION SYSTEM
Date: May 2011
Page: S3 – 1 of 2
3.1
GENERAL
Air termination components installed on a structure shall be located at corners,
exposed points and edges (especially on the upper level of any facades) in
accordance with one or any combination of the following methods:
– the protection angle method;
– the rolling sphere method;
– the mesh method.
The values for the protection angle, rolling sphere radius and mesh size for each
class of LPS shall be as per Table 2 of MS IEC 62305-3 (see Appendix A : Table
2).
For the determination of the volume protected only the real physical dimensions
of the metal air termination system shall be considered.
3.2
AIR TERMINATION SYSTEM
Air termination system shall consist of a network of vertical and horizontal
conductors generally as shown in the Drawings. All salient points of the structure
shall be incorporated in the air termination system. All metallic projections,
chimneys, ducts, gutters, vent pipes, guard rails, aerial masts, etc. on or above
the main surface of the roof of the structure whether shown in the Drawings or
not shall be bonded to and form part of the air termination system. Air terminals
or vertical finials shall be provided if specified in the Drawings and/or Bills of
Quantities.
For structures taller than 60m, a lateral air termination system shall be installed
on the upper part typically the topmost 20% of the height of the structure for
protection against flashes to the side of the structure. If there is metal façade, it
must be bonded and form part of the air termination system.
In addition, for structures taller than 120m, all parts which may be endangered
above 120m shall be protected.
Unless otherwise specified, air termination system other than the air terminals
or vertical finials shall be of 25mm x 3mm annealed copper tape. Should other
materials be specified, it shall conform to Table 5 and 6 of MS IEC 62305-3
(see Appendix A : Table 5 & Table 6).
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
3.0
Revision: 1
AIR TERMINATION SYSTEM
Date: May 2011
Page: S3 – 2 of 2
The method and nature of the fixing shall be simple, solid and permanent. The
air termination system shall be secured to the structure by means of purpose
made conductive fixtures at the intervals not exceeding 500mm. Purpose made
supports for securing the air termination system onto the roof tiles and ridge tiles
shall be used. Conductive fixtures shall be of same material as the air termination
system.
In the case of metal cladding roof where it cannot be considered as air
termination components, the air termination system shall be secured to the
metal roof structures by means of non-metallic purpose made. Intervals
between fixings shall not exceed 500mm.
In the case of metal cladding roof to be used as air termination components, the
minimum thickness of metal sheets shall conform to Table 3 of MS IEC 62305-3
(see Appendix A : Table 3).
Air termination rods shall be of rounded or tappered pointed end and made of
copper. Unless specified otherwise in the Drawings and/or Bills of Quantities,
they shall be minimum of 300mm in length and 16mm diameter with lock nut. The
base for supporting the air termination rods on the flat surface or ridges shall be
of same material as the air termination system.
If portions of the structure vary considerably in heights, any necessary air
termination system of the lower portions shall, in addition to their own down
conductors, be bonded to the down conductors of the taller portions.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
4.0
Revision: 1
DOWN CONDUCTOR SYSTEM
Date: May 2011
Page: S4 - 1 of 2
4.1
DOWN CONDUCTOR SYSTEM
Unless otherwise specified, down conductor system shall be 25mm x 3mm
annealed copper tapes installed around the outside walls of the structure.
Should other materials be used, it shall conform to Table 5 and 6 of MS IEC
62305-3. (see Appendix A: Table 5 & Table 6).
Down conductors shall not be installed in gutters or down-spouts even if they are
covered by insulating material. No down conductors shall be routed inside the
service ducts. A down conductor should be installed at each exposed corner of
the structure, where it is possible.
The down conductor shall be installed in such a way that its path is as direct as
possible between air termination system and earth termination system. It shall be
as straight as possible along the shortest path without sharp bends or upward
sections. They shall be securely fixed at intervals not exceeding 500 mm by
means of conductive fixtures same material as the down conductor systems
The bend radii shall not be less than 200mm. Deep re-entrant loops, routing
round parapet or cornices shall be avoided. However, a maximum height
increase of 400mm is permissible for passing over a parapet wall with a slope of
maximum 450. Where this is not possible, the installation shall conform to Clause
6.3 MS IEC 62305. All wall or other building penetrations shall be made in a
manner to prevent the ingress of water/water moisture and PVC sleeves shall be
provided.
The number of down conductor shall not be less than two and should be
distributed around the parameter of the structure to be protected subject to
architectural and practical constraint. Typical values of the distance between
down conductors with the relevant class of LPS shall be as per Table 4 of MS
IEC 62305-3 (see Appendix A : Table 4).
All exposed down conductors may be painted with the decorative colour paint of
the same colour for the wall finishes.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
4.0
Revision: 1
DOWN CONDUCTOR SYSTEM
Date: May 2011
Page: S4 - 2 of 2
4.2
NATURAL DOWN CONDUCTOR SYSTEM
If specified in the drawing and/or Bill of Quantities natural conductors such as
reinforcing bars and structural steelwork may be used as a down conductor
system provided that they are electrically continuous and adequately earthed.
When using a particular rod of the reinforcement steel as the down conductor,
care should be taken in the route to earth to ensure that the rod that is located in
the same position will be used all the way down, thereby providing direct
electrical continuity.
Steelwork within reinforced concrete structures is considered to be electrically
continuous provided that the major part of interconnections of vertical and
horizontal bars are welded or otherwise securely connected. Connections of
vertical bars shall be welded over a length not less than 30mm or properly
clamped.
The electrical continuity of the reinforcing bars shall be determined by electrical
testing between the uppermost part and ground level. An additional conductor
may be used to enhance the natural down conductor system if the overall
electrical resistance is greater than 0.2 Ohms. The additional conductor shall be
bonded to the reinforcement bars by means of purpose made clamps conforming
to IEC 62561 at 1 meter intervals.
The type and size of the conductor used shall conform to Table 5 and 6 of MS
IEC 62305-3 (see Appendix A: Table 5 & Table 6).
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
5.0
Revision: 1
JOINTS AND BONDS
Date: May 2011
Page: S5 - 1 of 1
5.1
JOINTS AND BONDS
The lightning protection system should have as few joints as possible.
Joints and bonds shall be made mechanically and electrically effective by means
of purpose made copper clamps or by exothermic welding or brazing. Contact
surfaces shall first be cleaned then inhibited from oxidation with a suitable noncorrosive compound. With overlapping joints, the length of the overlap shall not
be less than 20mm.
All metal works, including water pipes, gas pipes, handrails, air conditioning units,
metal cladding, metal roof etc in the vicinity of the LPS shall be bonded to it, to
avoid the danger of side flashing.
Where it is necessary to bond the copper conductor to any other metallic surface,
this must be done by bolting or riveting. Care should be taken when attaching
copper to a dissimilar metal to prevent electrolytic corrosion in that the joints are
to be thoroughly cleaned and subsequently sealed. Proprietary bi-metallic
connectors shall be used. LPS earth shall be bonded to the Main Earthing Bar,
as well as any other earthing system present in the structure.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta : 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
6.0
Revision: 1
TESTING JOINTS
Date: May 2011
Page: S6 - 1 of 1
6.1
TESTING JOINTS
Each down conductor shall be provided with a testing joint along the route of the
down conductor except in the case of natural down-conductors combined with
foundation earth electrodes. The testing joints shall be of purpose made copper
clamps or of the same material of the down conductor. Unless otherwise
specified, each testing joint shall be installed at 2500mm above the ground level.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
7.0
Revision: 1
FIXING, CLAMPS AND SUPPORTS
Date: May 2011
Page: S7 - 1 of 1
7.1
FIXING, CLAMPS AND SUPPORTS
All fixings, clamps and supports for the air termination system and down
conductors of the lightning protection system shall be purpose made for use in
the installation. Unless otherwise specified elsewhere, they shall be of copper
alloy, naval brass or gunmetal.
The Electrical Contractor is required to submit installation methods and samples
for fixings, clamps and supports for the approval of the S.O.’s Representative
before installation.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
8.0
Revision: 1
EARTH TERMINATION SYSTEM
Date: May 2011
Page: S8 - 1 of 1
8.1
EARTH TERMINATION SYSTEM
An earth termination system shall be connected to each down conductor. Earth
termination system shall be by 25mm x 3mm annealed copper tapes connecting
the down conductor at the testing joint to the earth electrodes or reinforcing bars.
The connection of the down conductor to the earth electrode of the earth
termination system shall be soundly made by exothermic welding or brazing. The
portion of the earth termination system between testing joint and ground may be
enclosed in PVC casing of suitable size.
The earth termination system shall be of Type B arrangement in accordance with
Clause 5.4.2.2 of MS IEC 62305-3. This type of arrangement comprises either a
ring conductor external to the structure to be protected, in contact with the soil for
at least 80% of its total length or a foundation earth electrode. Such earth
electrodes may also be meshed.
The earth electrode of the type B arrangement shall be inter-connected by ring
conductor 25mm x 3mm annealed copper tapes to form earth termination system
and preferably be buried at a depth of at least 500mm and at a distance of about
1m around the external walls. The copper tapes shall be identified by permanent
labels legibly marked with words "Lightning Protection Earth – Do Not Remove"
permanently fixed at 1000mm intervals. The connection of two copper tapes shall
be soundly made by exothermic welding or brazing.
Each earth termination connected to the down conductor shall have a resistance to
earth not exceeding 10 Ohms. The entire of the LPS shall have a combined
resistance to earth not exceeding 10 Ohms.
Bonding conductor of 25mm x 3mm annealed copper tapes shall be provided for
connection between the earth termination for the lightning protection system at the
testing joint and the Main Earthing Bar for the electrical installation.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
9.0
Revision: 1
EARTH ELECTRODES
Date: May 2011
Page: S9 - 1 of 1
9.1
EARTH ELECTRODES
Earth electrode shall be of copper-jacketed steel core rods with 16mm diameter
and supplied in 1500mm length and shall have provision for screw coupling with
another standard length. The copper jacket of 99.9 % purity electrolytic copper
shall be of minimum radial thickness 0.25mm and shall be molecularly bonded to
the steel core to ensure that the copper jacket and steel core are not separable.
Each earth electrodes shall be driven 3000mm in depth.
Where the desired earth resistance value cannot be achieved after the first earth
electrode have been driven, sufficient number of earth electrodes in parallel shall
be installed outside the resistance area until required value is reached. Mutual
separation between two earth electrodes shall be more than the driven depth of the
earth electrode but less than twice the driven depth. Interconnection between
different earth electrodes shall be by means of 25mm x 3mm annealed copper
tape.
The connection of the annealed copper tape to the earth electrode shall be soundly
made by exothermic welding or brazing.
Each earth electrode shall be provided with heavy-duty type inspection chamber
with removable cover. The compressive strength of the inspection chamber and
cover shall be minimum 6 N/mm2. Lifting hook shall be provided on the cover.
Each earth electrode shall be identified by permanent label legibly marked with
words "Lightning Protection Earth – Do Not Remove" permanently fixed at the
point of connection of every down conductor to an earth termination system.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
10.0
Revision: 1
LIGHTNING FLASH COUNTERS
Date: May 2011
Page: S10 - 1 of 1
10.1
LIGHTNING FLASH COUNTERS
Where lightning flash counter is specified in the Drawing and/or Bills of
Quantities, the counter shall be of outdoor weather proof type and shall be
triggered whenever it encounters a 1.5 kA impulse current in 1.5 microseconds
duration. The counter shall record up to minimum 9,999 lightning strikes. The
counter shall be installed on the most direct down conductor above the testing
joint or any location indicated in the Drawing and, in any case, at the height of
about 2500mm above ground level.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
11.0
Revision: 1
TEST, TEST INSTRUMENTS AND
TEST CERTIFICATES
Date: May 2011
Page: S11 - 1 of 2
11.1
TEST AND CALIBRATION OF MEASURING AND TEST INSTRUMENTS
All measuring and test instruments used for testing of the LPS installations
shall be regularly tested and calibrated by the manufacturers or test and
calibration laboratories for their functionality and accuracy. Basic
measurement accuracy for these instruments shall be within 5 %. In the case
of analogue instruments, a basis accuracy of 2 % of full-scale deflection
shall be provided. Test and Calibration Reports or Certificates for the
measuring and test instruments issued by the test and calibration laboratory
shall be valid for two years from the date of issuance. The instruments and
their Test and Calibration Reports or Certificates shall be submitted to S.O.’s
Representative for verification two weeks before testing of the electrical
installation being carried out. No test on the electrical installation shall be
carried out without prior approval of the S.O.’s Representative.
Notwithstanding the validity of the aforesaid Reports or Certificates the
measuring and test instruments shall be re-calibrated if so required by the
S.O.’s Representative after any mechanical or electrical mishandling. Fee
required for the testing and calibrating of the measuring and test instruments
is deemed to be included in the Contract.
11.2
TEST AND TEST CERTIFICATES
After the installation work has been completed and before Certificate of
Practical Completion is issued, the whole LPS for electrical installation
covered under this part of the Contract shall be tested in accordance with
MS IEC 62305 and any other tests deem necessary by the S.O.'s
Representative. In the event the installation fails to pass any of these tests,
the Electrical Contractor shall take such measures as are necessary to
remedy the defects and the installation shall not be considered as completed
until all such tests have been passed.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
11.0
Revision: 1
TEST, TEST INSTRUMENTS AND
TEST CERTIFICATES
Date: May 2011
Page: S11 - 2 of 2
The tests to be carried out by the Electrical Contractor shall consist of the
following tests as a minimum requirement: a)
b)
c)
d)
e)
Continuity of air termination system.
Continuity of air termination system and the down conductors.
Continuity of the down conductor and earth termination.
Continuity of earth termination system.
Continuity of earth termination and the main earthing bar for the
electrical installation
f) Earth electrode resistance.
g) Earth termination resistance.
Fee required for the tests as described above is deemed to be included in
the Contract.
The S.O.'s Representative reserves the right to be present at all tests and the
Electrical Contractor shall give at least one-week notice in writing to the S.O.'s
Representative for this purpose. In any case, no test shall be carried out without
prior approval of the S.O.'s Representative. Copies of all the test certificates
together with as-installed Drawings properly bound and titled shall be submitted
to the S.O.'s Representative within one week after the completion of the testing.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
12.0
Revision: 1
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
Date: May 2011
Page: S12 - 1 of 1
12.1
SERVICE AND MAINTENANCE
During the DLP, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for the service and
maintenance work for the complete installation. All works shall be carried out by
the competent person. All labour, material, tools and parts necessary to rectify
the defect due to manufacturing/installation faults shall be supplied/executed
at the Electrical Contractor's cost.
The service and maintenance to be performed and defects to be rectified and
making good shall include but not limited to the following: (a)
Replacing or making good all lightning flash counters that do
not meet the manufacturer’s guarantees and warranties.
(b)
Replacing and making good all loose joints and terminations,
all mechanical support linkage, earth electrode chambers and
covers, etc.
(c)
Making good any damage to roads, buildings, drains, cables,
pipes, concrete areas, paved areas etc. which had not been
properly made good arising out of his work.
(d)
All other works as deemed necessary by the S.O.'s
Representative.
All works shall be carried out as soon as the Electrical Contractor is being
informed by the S.O.'s Representative or the occupant and shall be
completed within a reasonable time except under emergency situation as
stipulated in the Supplementary Conditions for Electrical Work. If the
Electrical Contractor fails to comply with the above requirements, the S.O.'s
Representative reserves the right to engage another party to carry out the
work, in which case, the Electrical Contractor shall be responsible for all the
expenses incurred.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
13.0
Revision: 1
SHOP DRAWINGS, AS-BUILT
DOCUMENT AND TOOLS
Date: May 2011
Page: S13 - 1 of 4
13.1
SHOP DRAWINGS
Two sets of prints of shop drawings for construction and/or installation shall be
submitted to the S.O.’s Representative for approval. The Electrical Contractor
shall prepare and submit shop drawings for the whole work or parts of the work at
least two weeks before the work begins. If the shop drawings submitted are not
acceptable by the S.O.’s Representative, the Electrical Contractor shall amend
and re-submit the shop drawings within two weeks from the date of return of the
shop drawings. No work shall be carried out without the shop drawings being
approved by the S.O.’s Representative. The shop drawings shall include and
show the following:
a) The dimensioned general arrangements, layouts, positions and
routes of air termination system, down conductors, earth terminations and
all others necessary for the complete LPS installation as specified in the
Drawings and/or Bills of Quantities;
b) Elevations views of the LPS;
c) The dimensioned general arrangements, layouts, positions and routes of
bonding conductors;
d) The dimensioned general arrangements, layouts, positions and routes of
earth terminations and their earth electrodes.
e) All other drawings as deemed necessary by the S.O.'s Representative.
The cost of all these shop drawings, whether or not provided in the Bills of
Quantities,
is
deemed
to
be
included
in
the
Contract.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
13.0
Revision: 1
SHOP DRAWINGS, AS-BUILT
DOCUMENT AND TOOLS
Date: May 2011
Page: S13 - 2 of 4
13.2
AS-BUILT DOCUMENT AND TOOLS
As-Built document shall consist of but not limited to the As-Installed drawings,
manual, certificates, catalogues, inventories and parts lists.
The As- Installed drawings shall comprise of:(a)
Site plan;
(b)
Layout Plans;
(c)
Elevations views of the LPS;
(d)
Layout plans of conductor routes and earthing points with
reference to easily recognisable buildings and structures.
(e)
All other drawings as deemed necessary by the S.O.'s
Representative.
These drawings shall be labelled at the lower right hand corner with the
Electrical Contractor's name and address, date of commissioning, scale,
drawing number (the drawing number to be obtained from the S.O.'s
Representative), title and following particulars: JABATAN KERJA RAYA
CAWANGAN KEJURUTERAAN ELEKTRIK
CONTRACT NO.:
If the drawings submitted are not according to the actual installation at site
and/or not acceptable by the S.O.'s Representative, the Electrical Contractor
shall amend and re-submit the drawings within two weeks from the date of
return of the drawings to the satisfaction of the S.O’s Representatives.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
13.0
Revision: 1
SHOP DRAWINGS, AS-BUILT
DOCUMENT AND TOOLS
Date: May 2011
Page: S13 - 3 of 4
Manuals and documents for lightning flash counters and other important
equipment shall be supplied.
It shall comprise of:(a)
Brief description of the installation/system
(b)
Installation manual
(c)
Operation manual;
(d)
Service And Maintenance Manual;
(e)
Parts List;
(f)
Product Data And Catalogue;
(g)
Product Test Certificates;
Certificates shall comprise of:All Testing Certificates (as per section 11.2)
Catalogues, parts lists, inventories, shall be as per project requirements.
Each of the As- Built documents shall be bound together with hard cover and
submitted in minimum four (4) sets upon issuance of Certificate of Practical
Completion (CPC) of the project.
In addition, one set of the As-Installed drawing shall be submitted in the form of
tracing/original document and two sets in CD ROM.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
SECTION:
13.0
Revision: 1
SHOP DRAWINGS, AS-BUILT
DOCUMENT AND TOOLS
Date: May 2011
Page: S13 - 4 of 4
Special tools required for the operation, service and maintenance of lightning flash
counters and other equipment shall also be provided.
The cost of all these prints, manuals, tools etc. is deemed to be included in the
Contract.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
APPENDIX A
Date: May 2011
Page: A - 1 of 7
LPL
Class of LPS
I
I
II
II
III
III
IV
IV
TABLE 1 – Relation between lightning protection levels (LPL) and class of LPS (see MS IEC
62305-1)
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
APPENDIX A
Date: May 2011
Page: A - 2 of 7
Protection Method
Rolling sphere radius r
Mesh size W
Protection angle
m
M
α°
I
20
5x5
II
30
10 x 10
III
45
15 x 15
IV
60
20 x 20
Class of LPS
See figure below
TABLE 2 – Maximum values of rolling sphere radius, mesh size and protection angle
corresponding to the class of LPS
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
APPENDIX A
Date: May 2011
Page: A - 3 of 7
Class of LPS
Material
Thickness
t
mm
a
Thickness
t’
mm
Lead
-
2,0
Steel (stainless,
galvanized)
4
0,5
Titanium
4
0,5
Copper
5
0,5
Aluminium
7
0,65
Zinc
-
0,7
b
I to IV
a
t prevents puncture, hot spot or ignition
b
t’ only for metal sheet if it is not important to prevent puncture, hotspot or ignition problems.
The metal cladding can be considered as natural air termination components and part of an LPS in
accordance with Clause 5.1.3 of MS IEC 62305-3, provided that:
–
the electrical continuity between the various parts is made durable (e.g. by means of brazing,
welding, crimping, seaming, screwing or bolting);
–
the thickness of the metal sheet is not less than the value t’ given in Table 3 of MS IEC 623053 if it is not important to prevent puncture of the sheeting or to consider ignition of any readily
combustible materials underneath (see Appendix : Table 3);
–
the thickness of the metal sheet is not less than the value t given in Table 3 if it is necessary to
take precautions against puncture or to consider hot spot problems;
–
they are not clad with insulating material.
TABLE 3 – Minimum thickness of metal sheets or metal pipes in air-termination systems
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
APPENDIX A
Date: May 2011
Page: A - 4 of 7
Class of LPS
Typical Distance
m
I
10
II
10
III
15
IV
20
TABLE 4 – Typical values of the distance between down-conductors and between ring
conductors according to class of LPS
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
APPENDIX A
Date: May 2011
Page: A - 5 of 7
Use
Corrosion
Material
In open air
Copper
In earth
In concrete
Solid
Solid
Solid
Stranded
Stranded
Stranded
As coating
As coating
Resistance
Good in many
environments
Increased by
Sulphur
compounds
May be
destroyed
by
galvanic
coupling
with
-
Organic
materials
Hot
galvanized
steel
Solid
Solid
Solid
Acceptable in air, in
concrete and in
benign soil
High chlorides
content
Copper
Stainless
Steel
Solid
Solid
Solid
Good in many
environments
High chlorides
content
-
Stranded
Stranded
Stranded
Solid
Unsuitable
Unsuitable
Good in atmospheres
containing low
concentrations of
sulphur and chloride
Alkaline
solutions
Copper
Solid
Solid
Unsuitable
Acid soils
Copper
As coating
As coating
Good in atmospheres
with high
concentration of
sulphates
Aluminium
Stranded
Lead
Stainless
Steel
NOTE 1 This table gives general guidance only. In special circumstances more careful corrosion immunity considerations
are required (see Annex E).
NOTE 2 Stranded conductors are more vulnerable to corrosion than solid conductors. Stranded conductors are also
vulnerable where they enter or exit earth/concrete positions. This is the reason why stranded galvanized steel is not
recommended in earth.
NOTE 3 Galvanized steel may be corroded in clay soil or moist soil.
NOTE 4 Galvanized steel in concrete should not extend into the soil due to possible corrosion of the steel just outside the
concrete.
NOTE 5 Galvanized steel in contact with reinforcement steel in concrete may, under certain circumstances, cause
damage to the concrete.
NOTE 6 Use of lead in the earth is often banned or restricted due to environmental concerns.
TABLE 5 – LPS Material and conditions of use
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
APPENDIX A
Date: May 2011
Page: A - 6 of 7
Material
Copper
Configuration
50 8)
Solid tape
Solid round
7)
Solid round
Tin plated copper 1)
Aluminium alloy
Hot dipped galvanized
steel 2)
3), 4)
200
1.7 mm min. diameter of each strand
8)
16 mm diameter
2 mm min. thickness
50 8)
8 mm diameter
Stranded
50 8)
1.7 mm min. diameter of each strand
Solid tape
70
3 mm min. thickness
7)
8)
Solid round
50
Stranded
50 8
1.7 mm min. diameter of each strand
Solid tape
50 8)
2.5 mm min. thickness
Solid round
50
8 mm diameter
Stranded
50 8)
1.7 mm min. diameter of each strand
Solid round 3)
200 8)
16 mm diameter
Solid tape
50 8)
2.5 mm min. thickness
50
8 mm diameter
Solid round
9)
Solid round
3), 4), 9)
Solid tape 6)
Solid round
6)
200
1.7 mm min. diameter of each strand
8)
3), 4)
16 mm diameter
50 8)
2 mm min. thickness
50
8 mm diameter
70 8)
Stranded
Solid round
8 mm diameter
50 8)
Stranded
Stainless steel 5)
8 mm diameter
50 8)
Solid tape
Solid round
Aluminium
50
2 mm min. thickness
8)
50 8)
Stranded
Comments 10)
Minimum crosssectional areas
mm2
200
1.7 mm min. diameter of each strand
8)
16 mm diameter
1)
Hot dipped or electroplated minimum thickness coating of 1 μm.
2)
The coating should be smooth, contimuous and free from flux stains with a minimum thickness coating of 50 μm.
3)
Applicable for air-termination rods only. For applications where mechanical stress such as wind loading is not
critical, a 10 mm diameter, 1 m long maximum air-termination rod with an additional fixing may be used.
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING
PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR
STRUCTURES
(L-S9)
CKE.LS.01.09.(01).2011
Date: September 2001
Revision: 1
APPENDIX A
Date: May 2011
Page: A - 7 of 7
4)
Applicable to earth lead-in rods only.
5)
Chromium ≥ 16%, nickel ≥ 8%, carbon ≤ 0.07%.
6)
For stainless steel embedded in concrete, and/or in direct contact with flammable material, the minimum sizes
should be increased to 78mm 2 (10 mm diameter) for solid round and 75mm2 (3 mm minimum thickness) for solid
tape.
7)
50 mm2 (8 mm diameter) may be reduced to 28 mm2 (6 mm diameter) in certain applications where mechanical
strength is not an essential requirement. Consideration should, in this case, be given to reducing the spacing of the
fasteners.
8)
If thermal and mechanical considerations are important, these dimensions can be increased to 60 mm 2 for solid tape
and to 78 mm2 for solid round.
9)
The minimum cross-section to avoid melting is 16 mm 2 (copper), 25 mm2 (aluminium), 50 mm2 (steel) and 50 mm2
(stainless steel) for a specific energy of 10 000 kJ/Ω. For further information see Annex E.
10)
Thickness, width and diameter are defined at ± 10%.
TABLE 6 –
.
Material, configuration and minimum cross-sectional area of air-termination
conductors, air-termination rods and down conductors
SPECIFICATION FOR LIGHTNING PROTECTION SYSTEM FOR STRUCTURES
© Hak Cipta: 2001 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia
SPECIFICATION FOR
TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
CAWANGAN KEJURUTERAAN ELEKTRIK
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
SECTION
CONTENT
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: i of iv
REVISION
PAGE
1.0
GENERAL
1.1 Scope
1.2 Standards and Normative References
1.3 Technical Particulars
1.4 Guarantees
1.5 Electrical System Requirement
2.0
INSTALLATION, CONFIGURATION AND
WORKMANSHIP
2.1 Description
2.2 Certified Installer
2.3 Certified Product Engineer
3.0
TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT
0
S3-1 of 23
3.1 Description
3.2 Types of PBX System
3.2.1 IP PBX System
3.2.2 Hybrid Private Automated Branch Exchange (PABX) System
3.3 Voice Security
3.3.1 Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Gateway
3.3.2 Session Border Controller (SBC)
3.4 Analogue Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Gateway
3.5 Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Media Gateway
3.6 Types of Telephone Set
3.6.1 Description
3.6.2 SIP Phone
3.6.3 IP Phone
3.6.4 Soft Phone
3.6.5 Wireless (WiFi) Phone
3.6.6 SIP/IP Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications (DECT)
Phone
3.6.7 Digital Phone
3.6.8 Single Line Phone (SLT)
3.7 Operator System
3.7.1 Description
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
0
S1- 1 of 2
0
S2/1 of 1
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
SECTION
CONTENT
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: ii of iv
REVISION
PAGE
3.7.2 Basic Operator System
3.7.3 Call Centre System
3.7.4 Multimedia Contact Centre System
4.0
SYSTEM OF CABLING
0
S4-1 of 8
4.1 Description
4.1.1 Cabling System for Fibre To The Premise (FTTP)
4.1.2 Cabling System for VoIP System
4.1.3 Cabling System for Analogue/Digital Telephone System
4.2 Types of Cable
4.2.1 Indoor Fibre Optic Cable
4.2.2 Outdoor Fibre Optic Cable
4.2.3 Overhead Fibre Optic Cable
4.2.4 Structured Cabling System
4.2.5 Indoor Multipair Telephone Cable for Analogue/Digital Telephone
System
4.2.6 Indoor Jumper Cable for Analogue/Digital Telephone System
4.2.7 Outdoor Multipair Underground Telephone Cable for Analogue/Digital
Telephone System
4.2.8 Overhead Multipair Telephone Cable for Analogue/Digital Telephone
System
4.3 Cabling Accessories
4.3.1 Fibre Wall Socket (FWS)
4.3.2 Fibre Termination Box (FTB)
4.3.3 Optical Distribution Frame (ODF)
4.3.4 Single mode Pigtail
4.3.5 Cabling Accessories for Structured Cabling System
4.3.6 Telephone Faceplate for Analogue/Digital Telephone System
4.3.7 Distribution Frame for Analogue/Digital Telephone System
4.3.8 Distribution Point Box for Analogue/Digital Telephone System
4.3.9 Connection/Disconnection Module for Analogue/Digital Telephone
System
4.3.10 Surge Protective Device (SPD)
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
SECTION
5.0
CONTENT
EXTERNAL TELECOMMUNICATION
INFRASTRUCTURE
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: iii of iv
REVISION
0
PAGE
S5-1 of 5
5.1
5.2
Description
Underground Infrastructure
5.2.1 Telecommunication Manhole
5.2.2 Underground ducts
5.3 Overhead Infrastructure
5.3.1 Telecommunication Pole
6.0
TELECOMMUNICATION EARTHING SYSTEM
0
6.1 Description
6.2 Telecommunication Earthing Component
6.2.1 General
6.2.2 Primary Bonding Bar (PBB)
6.2.3 Secondary Bonding Bar (SBB)
6.2.4 Telecommunication Bonding Backbone (TBB)
6.2.5 Telecommunication Bonding Conductor (TBC)
6.2.6 Backbone Bonding Conductor (BBC)
S6-1 of 4
6.3 Telecommunication Earthing System Infrastructure
7.0
LABELLING
0
7.1 Description
7.2 Fibre to The Premise
7.2.1 Optical Distribution Frame
7.2.2 Fibre Termination Box
7.2.3 Fibre Wall Socket
7.3 Analogue/Digital Telephone System
7.3.1 Distribution Frame and Distribution Point Box
7.4 PBX and other Equipment Labelling
7.5 Voice Faceplate Labelling
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
S7-1 of 7
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
SECTION
8.0
CONTENT
TESTING AND COMMISIONING
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: iv of iv
REVISION
PAGE
0
S8-1 of 2
0
S9-1 of 1
0
S10-1 of 3
0
S11-1 of 3
0
S12-1 of 3
0
S13-1 of 2
8.1 Description
8.2 Telephone System Test
9.0
WARRANTY AND SUPPORT
9.1 Description
9.2 Warranty
10.0
SHOP DRAWINGS AND
AS-BUILT DOCUMENT
10.1 Shop Drawings
10.2 As-Built Documents
11.0
APPENDIX
12.0
LIST OF STANDARD AND
NORMATIVE REFERENCES
12.1 List of Standards
12.2 Normative References
13.0
ABBREVIATIONS
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S1- 1 of 2
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
Scope
1.1.1
This section of the Specification describes and specifies requirements for the
supply, delivery, installation, testing, commissioning, and handing over in
approved working order and maintenance during the Defects Liability Period
(DLP) of the whole Telephone System in accordance with Condition of Contract,
Bill of Quantities, Drawings and other related documents.
1.2
Standards and Normative References
1.2.1
The material, equipment and installation shall conform to the principles of the
latest standards and its addendums laid down by the Malaysian Standards (MS),
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC), Institute of Electrical and
Electronics Engineers (IEEE), American National Standard Institute/
Telecommunications Industry Association (ANSI/TIA), International Organization
for Standardization and the International Electrotechnical Commission (ISO/IEC),
International Telecommunications Union Standard (ITU), British Standard (BS),
International Electrotechnical Commision, American Society For Testing and
Material (ASTM) and Malaysia Communications and Multimedia Commision
(MCMC).
1.3
Technical Particulars
1.3.1
The Tenderers shall submit at the time of tendering all catalogues, detailed
technical particulars, name of manufacturers, brand, model numbers and
guarantees in respect of the equipment offered, which shall be binding. No
departure from these technical particulars and guarantees will be permitted
except with the written approval of the Superintendent Officer’s (S.O.’s) / S.O.’s
Representative.
1.4
Guarantees
1.4.1
Tenderers shall guarantee all equipment and material to be supplied under this
contract against faulty design, materials and workmanship at the manufacturer’s
works within the DLP.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S1- 2 of 2
1.5
Electrical System Requirement
1.5.1
All equipment shall be rated for operation on a 230/400V (within the tolerance as
defined in MS IEC 60038; 230/400V, +10%, -6%), 3-phase, 4 wire, 50Hz system
with with solidly earthed neutral.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S2 - 1 of 1
2.0
INSTALLATION, CONFIGURATION AND WORKMANSHIP
2.1
Description
2.1.1
All works shall comply to the specification and be of best engineering practices
and shall be carried out and supervised by qualified, competent and skilled
contractor personnel.
2.1.2
The Contractor shall be responsible for all related works including earthwork,
hacking and making good or any civil work required for the installation. All labour,
material and necessary tools etc. during the works shall be carried out the
Contractor's cost. The Contractor shall ensure the site is in good condition after
the installation completed.
2.2
Certified Installer
2.2.1
The work of installation, termination, testing and commissioning of the cabling
system and external infrastructure shall be conducted and carried out by a
Certified Installer. The Certified Installer shall be a competent person certified by
related cable manufacturer or any related local utility provider. The Contractor
shall submit the list of on-site Certified Installer complete with valid certificates to
the S.O / S.O’s Representative at least two weeks prior to the installation.
2.3
Certified Product Engineer
2.3.1
The work of configuration, testing and commissioning of the equipment installed
shall be conducted and carried out by a Certified Product Engineer. The Certified
Product Engineer shall be a competent person certified by related telephone
equipment manufacturer or principle. The Contractor shall submit the list of onsite Certified Product Engineer complete with valid certificates to the S.O / S.O’s
Representative at least two weeks prior to the installation.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 1 of 23
3.0
TELEPHONE EQUIPMENT
3.1
Description
3.1.1
The telephone equipment generally consists of the following components;
3.1.1.1
3.1.1.2
3.1.1.3
3.1.1.4
3.1.1.5
3.1.1.6
PBX System
Voice Security
Analogue VoIP Gateway
ISDN Media Gateway
Telephone Set
Operator System
3.1.2
All telephone equipment shall be configured according to VLANs, security
policies, IP Addresses of the telephone network that suit to the requirement.
Information of numbers of VLANs, port assignments, permissions, security
policies etc. (where applicable) shall be submitted to S.O / S.O’s Representative
for approval.
3.1.3
The size of telephone system shall be categorized based on the following criteria:
Small business
Medium business
Large business
3.2
Types of PBX System
3.2.1
IP PBX System
: Up to 150 users
: 151 to 1200 users
: Above 1200 users
3.2.1.1 An IP PBX is a fully IP Private Branch Exchange that switches calls between VoIP
(Voice over Internet Protocol) users on local lines while allowing all users to share
a certain number of external phone lines. The typical IP PBX can also switch calls
between a VoIP user and analogue / digital telephone user, or between two
Analogue / digital telephone users as operated by PABX.
3.2.1.2 It is also known as Unified Communications server, which uses packet-switched
network or Local Area Network (LAN) to transmit the signal of voice calls. The
LAN can be either the same network for data signal or dedicated network for voice
signal.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 2 of 23
3.2.1.3 The system shall operate on 48Vd.c (nominal) with positive earthing, and shall
function satisfactorily within a voltage range of 42Vd.c to 54Vd.c for not less than
80% of the calls and shall function satisfactorily within a voltage range of 44Vd.c
to 52Vd.c for 100% of the calls.
3.2.1.4 The input/output of IP PBX, shall comply with VoIP requirements as follows:
Signalling Protocol:
Transport Protocol:
Codec
:
DTMF
Fax protocol
IP assignment
:
:
:
Addressing
:
Open Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) RFC
3261 with an option ITU-T H.323.
User Datagram Protocol (UDP) with an
option Transmission Control Protocol (TCP)
or Secure Real-Time Protocol (SRTP).
ITU-T G.711 (a-law and µ-law) with an option
ITU-T G.722, ITU-T G.726 or ITU-T G.729A.
Inband, RFC 2833.
ITU-T G.711 and/or ITU-T T.38.
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol (DHCP)
and/or Static IP.
support for Internet Protocol version 6 (IPv6)
3.2.1.5 The IP PBX for small business shall comply with the following minimum
technical specifications:
Scalability
Architecture
Ports
Channel
Incoming line
Power supply
Features
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Up to 150 users
Rack mount
2 x Ethernet port (RJ45),
Up to 24 channels
SIP Trunk, Analogue, LTE
Single power supply unit
Call billing, operator system, auto attendance,
directory, soft phones, voice mail
3.2.1.6 The IP PBX for medium business shall comply with the following minimum
technical specifications:
Scalability
Architecture
Ports
Channel
:
:
:
:
151 to 1200 users
Rack mount
2 x GbE port (RJ45)
Up to 128 channels
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
Incoming line
Power supply
Features
:
:
:
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 3 of 23
SIP Trunk
Single power supply unit
Call billing, operator system, auto attendance,
directory, voice mail, messaging, presence,
call centre, soft phones and mobile clients,
voice mail.
3.2.1.7 The IP PBX for large business shall comply with the following mimumum
technical specifications:
Scalability
Architecture
Ports
Channel
Incoming line
High-Availability
between
Power supply
Features
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Above 1200 users
Rack mount
4 x GbE port (RJ45)
Above 128 channels
SIP Trunk
Active-active configuration, change over
Two (2) redundance system seamlessly.
Dual power supply
Call billing, operator system, auto attendance,
directory, voice mail, messaging, presence,
call centre, soft phones and mobile clients,
voice mail.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
3.2.2
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 4 of 23
Hybrid Private Automated Branch Exchange (PABX) System
3.2.2.1 Hybrid PABX system uses analogue / digital phone networks. It can be expanded
by plugging in an additional IP card to communicate using the SIP IP-protocol in
order to connect to IP phones or to a remote IP PBX system.
3.2.2.2 The Hybrid PABX for small business shall comply to the following technical
specifications:
Scalability
Type
Extension Type
Ports
Channel
Incoming line
Power supply
Features
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Up to 150 users
Rack mount
Analogue, digital, SIP
2 x Ethernet port (RJ45)
Up to 24 channels
SIP Trunk, Analogue, LTE
Single power supply unit
Call billing, operator system, auto attendance,
directory, soft phones, voice mail
3.2.2.3 The Hybrid PABX for medium business shall comply with the following
minimum technical specifications:
Scalability
Type
Extension Type
Ports
Channel
Incoming line
Power supply
Features
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
151 to 1200 users
Rack mount
Analogue, digital, SIP
2 x GbE port (RJ45)
Up to 128 channels
SIP Trunk
Single power supply unit
Call billing, operator system, auto attendance,
directory, voice mail, messaging, presence,
call centre, soft phones and mobile clients
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 5 of 23
3.2.2.4 The Hybrid PABX for large business shall comply with the following minimum
technical specifications:
Scalability
Type
Extension Type
Ports
Channel
Incoming line
High-Availability
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Power supply
Features
:
:
Above 1200 users
Rack mount
Analogue, digital, SIP
4 x GbE port (RJ45)
Above 128 channels
SIP Trunk
Active-active configuration, change over
between two redundance system seamlessly.
Dual power supply
Call billing, operator system, auto attendance,
directory, voice mail, messaging, presence,
call centre, soft phones and mobile clients.
3.3
Voice Security
3.3.1
Session Initiation Protocol (SIP) Gateway
3.3.1.1 The SIP Gateway used to transmit voice data from an analogue device to a digital
device or vice versa. The SIP gateways used with analogue/digital phone
systems to enable IP-PRI telecommunication interface standard.
3.3.1.2 The SIP Gateway shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications:
Type
Channel
Power supply
Security
Interoperability
:
:
:
:
:
Rack mount
4 to 128 Channels
Single power supply unit
Topologies hiding and Firewall
Network addressing translation (NAT)
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
3.3.2
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 6 of 23
Session Border Controller (SBC)
3.3.2.1 The SBC used to control and manage real-time multimedia traffic flow between IP
network borders, handling signaling, data, voice and video traffic.
3.3.1.2 The SBC shall comply with the following minimum technical specifications:
Type
Channel
Power supply
Security
:
:
:
:
Rack mount
Above 128 Channels
single power supply unit
i.
Granular access control.
ii.
IP address
and
SIP signaling
concealment
iii. Topologies hiding
and
signaling
overload controls.
iv. IP telephony spam protection.
v. Stateful deep packet inspection.
vi. Signaling media encryption.
vii. Telephony fraud protection.
Interoperability
:
i.
ii.
iii.
Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF)
Header manipulation rules (HMR),
Number and uniform resource identifier
(URI) manipulation.
iv. SIP / H.323 signaling interworking
v. Protocol interworking: Transmission
Control Protocol (TCP), User Datagram
Protocol
(UDP),
Stream
Control
Transmission Protocol (SCTP)
vi. Encryption interworking: Transport Layer
Security (TLS), Mutual TLS, Secure
Real-time Transport Protocol (SRTP)
vii. Network address translation (NAT) and
firewall traversal.
viii. IP address translation: private / public,
IPv4. IPv6
ix. Transcoding
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 7 of 23
3.4
Analogue Voice Over Internet Protocol (VoIP) Gateway
3.4.1
An Analogue VoIP Gateway is a device that convert analogue signal into data
packet for transmission over IP network.
3.4.2
This device used to connect analogue/digital phones, fax machines, and similar
customer-premises devices to a digital phone system or a voice over
IP telephony network.
3.4.3
The digital interface of the Analogue VoIP Gateway consists of an Ethernet port
to connect to an IP network.
3.4.4.
The Analogue VoIP Gateway shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications:
Digital interface
Type
No. of extension
Type of port
Ethernet LAN
Power supply
Protocol
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Features
:
Firmware
Compatibility
:
:
Ethernet Port
Rack Mount
24 numbers
RJ45 or RJ11
100/1000 Mbps
Single power supply unit
H.323 or SIP, encodes and decodes the voice
signal using a voice codec such
as G.711, G.729, SIP
RFC3261
and/or
others.
Primary / Backup SIP Server, dial
tone, Ringing Generator, DC power, caller ID
data and other standard telephone line
signaling
Upgrade via Web-Based
Interoperable with a wide range of IP PBX and
softswitches
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 8 of 23
3.5
Integrated Services Digital Network (ISDN) Media Gateway
3.5.1
The ISDN Media Gateway is a device that convert IP signal to PRI
telecommunication standard for incoming signal from the service provider.
3.5.2
The ISDN Media Gateway shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications:
Digital interface
Type
No. of channel
Type of port
Ethernet LAN
Power supply
Protocol
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Features
Firmware
Compatibility
:
:
:
3.6
Types of Telephone Set
3.6.1
Description
Ethernet Port
Rack Mount Type
30 channels
RJ45 or RJ11
100/1000 Mbps
Single power supply unit
H.323 or SIP and encodes and decodes the
voice signal using a voice codec such
as G.711, G.729, SIP RFC3261 or others.
Primary/ Backup SIP Server
Upgrade via Web-Based
Interoperable with a wide range of IP PBX and
softswitches
3.6.1.1 There are seven (7) types of telephone set as follow:
3.6.1.1.1
3.6.1.1.2
3.6.1.1.3
3.6.1.1.4
3.6.1.1.5
3.6.1.1.6
3.6.1.1.7
SIP Phone
IP Phone
Soft Phone
Wireless (WiFi) Phone
SIP/IP Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunication (DECT) Phone
Digital Phone
Single Line Telephone (SLT)
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
3.6.2
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 9 of 23
SIP Phone
3.6.2.1 The SIP Phone known as the telephone set supported by the Ethernet
specification.
3.6.2.2 The basic SIP Phone shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications:Port
:
2 Nos RJ-45 ports, 10/100/1000BASE-T
Ethernet connection (1 port for the LAN
connection and the other for connecting a
downstream Ethernet device such as a PC),
support PoE
Standard
:
IEEE 802.3af PoE (Class 1), ITU G.711, ITU
G.729a/b, IEEE 802.1p/q, RFC 3261, or latest
Features
:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
xii.
xiii.
xiv.
xv.
Full-duplex speakerphone allows for
flexibility in placing and receiving calls
Message waiting indicator
Speech volume control
Ringer volume control
Ringer pitch control
Line power option, local power option
Support of fixed IP address
Support of Dynamic Host Configuration
Protocol (DHCP) allocated IP address
On hook dialing
Compatible with inductively coupled
hearing aids
Headset jack
Two (2) lines LCD to display telephone
numbers and names
Two line appearances
Full hands free working etc.
Three (3) party audio conferencing
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
Accessories
:
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 10 of 23
Cables are required to connect the phone :
i.
2 x RJ-9 jack for the handset and
headset connection
RJ-45 jack for the LAN connection
(labelled “10/100/1000 SW”).
RJ-45 jack for a second 1000BASE-T
compliant
connection
(labelled
“10/100/1000 PC”).
ii.
iii.
3.6.2.3 The executive SIP Phone shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications:Port
:
2 Nos RJ-45 ports, 10/100/1000BASE-T
Ethernet connection (1 for the LAN connection
and the other for connecting a downstream
Ethernet device such as a PC), support PoE
Standard
:
IEEE 802.3af PoE (Class 1), ITU G.711, ITU
G.729a/b, IEEE 802.1p/q, RFC 3261 or latest
Features
:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
xii.
xiii.
xiv.
Full-duplex speakerphone allows for
flexibility in placing and receiving calls
Message waiting indicator
Speech volume control
Ringer volume control
Ringer pitch control
Line power option, local power option
Support of fixed IP address
Support of DHCP allocated IP address
On hook dialing
Compatible with inductively coupled
hearing aids
Headset jack
Minimum 4.3 inch color LCD to display
telephone numbers and names
Minimum of two line appearances
Minimum 10 Nos Programmable key for
speed dial
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
xv.
xvi.
xvii.
Accessories
:
Phone Directory
Minimum 3 party audio conferencing
Full hands free working
Cables are required to connect the phone :
i.
ii.
iii.
3.6.3
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 11 of 23
2 x RJ-9 jack for the handset and
headset connection
RJ-45 jack for the LAN connection
(labelled “10/100/1000 SW”).
RJ-45 jack for a second 1000BASE-T
compliant
connection
(labelled
“10/100/1000 PC”).
IP Phone
3.6.3.1 IP Phone known as the telephone set supported by the Ethernet specification.
3.6.3.2 The basic IP Phone shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications:Port
:
Standard
:
Features
:
2 Nos RJ-45 ports, 10/100/1000BASE-T
Ethernet connection (1 port for the LAN
connection and the other for connecting a
downstream Ethernet device such as a PC),
support PoE
IEEE 802.3af PoE (Class 1), ITU G.711, ITU
G.729a/b, IEEE 802.1p/q
i.
Full-duplex speakerphone allows for
flexibility in placing and receiving calls
ii.
Message waiting indicator
iii.
Speech volume control
iv.
Ringer volume control
v.
Ringer pitch control
vi.
Line power option, local power option
vii.
Support of fixed IP address
viii.
Support of DHCP allocated IP address
ix.
On hook dialing
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
x.
xi.
xii.
xiii.
xiv.
Accessories
:
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 12 of 23
Compatible with inductively coupled
hearing aids
Headset jack
Minimum 2 lines LCD to display
telephone numbers and names
Minimum of two line appearances
Full hands free working etc.
Cables are required to connect the phone :
i.
2 x RJ-9 jack for the handset and
headset connection
RJ-45 jack for the LAN connection
(labelled “10/100/1000 SW”).
RJ-45 jack for a second 1000BASE-T
compliant
connection
(labelled
“10/100/1000 PC”)
ii.
iii.
3.6.3.3 The Executive IP Phone shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications:Port
:
2 Nos RJ-45 ports, 10/100/1000BASE-T
Ethernet connection (1 port for the LAN
connection and the other for connecting a
downstream Ethernet device such as a PC),
support PoE
Standard
:
IEEE 802.3af PoE (Class 1), IEEE 802.1p/q,
ITU G.711 ,ITU G.729a/b
Features
:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
Full-duplex speakerphone allows for
flexibility in placing and receiving calls
Message waiting indicator
Speech volume control
Ringer volume control
Ringer pitch control
Line power option, local power option
Support of fixed IP address
Support of DHCP allocated IP address
On hook dialing
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
x.
xi.
xii.
xiii.
xiv.
xv.
xvi.
xvii.
xviii.
xix.
xx.
xxi.
xxii.
Accessories
:
Compatible with inductively coupled
hearing aids
Headset jack
4.3 inch color LCD to display telephone
numbers and names
Two line appearances
Full hands free working
10 Nos Programmable key for speed dial
Phone Directory
Speed dialing from PBX system
Boss and Secretary function
Additional key panel
Station name display
Room monitoring for single line
4 party audio conferencing
Cables are required to connect the phone :
i.
ii.
iii.
3.6.4
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 13 of 23
2 x RJ-9 jack for the handset and
headset connection
RJ-45 jack for the LAN connection
(labelled “10/100/1000 SW”).
RJ-45 jack for a second 1000BASE-T
compliant
connection
(labelled
“10/100/1000 PC”).
Soft Phone
3.6.4.1 Soft Phone is a software program for making telephone calls over the internet
using general purpose computer or mobile device.
3.6.4.2 The PC type soft phone shall be applied at office environment or any related
area specified in the design and shall comply with the following minimum
technical specifications:Operating System :
License
:
Windows, MacOS
Sotfware Assurance License and/or User
License
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
Graphical User
Interface (GUI)
Features
:
Protocol
:
Standard
:
Features
:
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 14 of 23
i.
ii.
iii.
Dialpad and Phone number text box
12 button speed dial
Call history for incoming, outgoing and
miss calls.
iv.
Phonebook / Directory
v.
Microphone/Speaker
Volume
adjustment
Transport Layer Security (TLS) / Secure RealTime Transport Protocol (SRTP), Session
Traversal Utilities for Network Address
Translation (STUN)/ Interactive Connectivity
Establishment (ICE)
ITU G.711 ,ITU G.729a/b, H.264, H.263, VP8
Codec
i.
Auto answer incoming calls
ii.
Caller ID Display
iii.
Call Hold
iv.
Do-Not-Disturb
v.
Call Waiting
vi.
Call Forwarding
vii.
Call Barring
viii.
Call Transfer (Blind or Attended)
ix.
Call Conferencing (3 party)
x.
Voice Activity Detection (VAD)
xi.
Support instant messaging
xii.
Echo Cancellation (EC)
xiii.
Microphone Amplification
xiv.
Call Recording in WAV or MP3
xv.
Support PC speaker and USB headset
xvi.
Admin settings with password protection
3.6.4.3 The mobile client soft phone shall be applied at office environment or else and
shall comply with the following minimum technical specifications:Operating System :
Android and IOS
License
:
Software Assurance License and/or User
License
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 15 of 23
Minimum Graphical User Interface (GUI) Features:
:
i.
Dialpad and Phone number text box
ii.
Call history for incoming, outgoing and
miss calls
iii.
Phonebook / Directory
Protocol
:
TLS/SRTP, STUN/ICE
Support
:
Google/Apple push notification for voice calls
Standard
:
ITU G.711 ,ITU G.729a/b, H.264, H.263, VP8
Codec
Features
:
i.
Auto answer incoming calls
ii.
Caller ID Display
iii.
Call Hold
iv.
Do-Not-Disturb
v.
Call Waiting
vi.
Call Forwarding
vii.
Call Barring
viii.
Call Transfer (Blind or Attended)
ix.
Call Conferencing (3 party)
x.
Voice Activity Detection (VAD
xi.
Support instant messaging
xii.
Echo Cancellation (EC)
xiii.
Microphone Amplification
xiv.
Call Recording in WAV or MP3
xv.
Support speaker and bluetooth headset
3.6.5
Wireless (WiFi) Phone
3.6.5.1 WiFi Phone is a telephone using WiFi signal for making telephone calls and
shall comply with the following minimum technical specifications:
Port
:
2 Nos RJ-45 ports, 10/100/1000BASE-T
Ethernet connection (1 port for the LAN
connection and the other for connecting a
downstream Ethernet device such as a PC
etc), support PoE
Standard
:
IEEE 802.3af PoE (Class 1), ITU G.711, ITU
G.729a/b, IEEE 802.1p/q, 801.11a/b/g or
latest, WMM, WEP, WPS, WDS
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
Features
:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
xii.
Accessories
Full-duplex speakerphone allows for
flexibility in placing and receiving calls
Message waiting indicator
Speech volume control
Ringer volume control
Ringer pitch control
Line power option, local power option
Support of fixed IP address
Support of DHCP allocated IP address
On hook dialing
Compatible with inductively coupled
hearing aids
Headset jack
Two (2) lines LCD to display telephone
numbers and names minimum of two
line appearances full hands free working
etc.
:
Cables are required to connect the WiFi
phone :
i.
ii.
iii.
3.6.6
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 16 of 23
2 x RJ-9 jack for the handset and
headset connection
RJ-45 jack for the LAN connection
(labelled “10/100/1000 SW”)
RJ-45 jack for a second 1000BASE-T
compliant
connection
(labelled
“10/100/1000 PC”)
SIP/IP Digital Enhanced Cordless Telecommunications (DECT) Phone
3.6.6.1 The SIP/IP DECT Phone primarily used for creating cordless telephone systems
to carry voice and messaging. The system consists of SIP/IP DECT Server
System, Base Station and Handset Module.
3.6.6.2 The SIP/IP DECT Phone shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications:Operating System :
SIP/IP DECT operating system
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
License
:
Standard
:
Base Station
Features
:
Software Assurance License and/or User
License
DECT encryption, Generic Access Profile
(GAP), SIP, TLS/SRTP
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
Handset Features :
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 17 of 23
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
xii.
xiii.
xiv.
All SIP/IP DECT channels supported for
maximum use of the DECT capacity
(120 duplex)
12 channel base station with support for
8 simultaneous voice channels and 4
channels for switching purposes
Handover and Roaming support
DECT
Standard
Authentication
Algorithm (DSAA) between base and
handset
Integrated SIP/IP DECT dipole antenna
Supports Enhanced SIP/IP DECT
security
Colour LCD handset
Support LCD back light
Polyphonic ringtone
Support vibrator
Duplex hands-free
Support headset jack
Support G.711 Audio Codec
Support G.722 Wide Band Audio Codec
Support Local Phonebook (100 entries)
Support Common Phonebook
Support up to 180 hours of standby
time
Support up to 16 hours of talk time
Support up to 8 narrow band concurrent
calls in a Base Station
Support up to 4 wide band concurrent
calls in a Base Station
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
3.6.7
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 18 of 23
Digital Phone
3.6.7.1 Digital Phone is a type of telephone line that carries voice and/or data by
using digital sampling. By converting Analogue signals to digital, these types of
telephone line allow for more information to be transferred over a single
connection.
3.6.7.2 The Digital Phone shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications:Port
:
1 port RJ11
Accessories
:
Cables are required to connect the Digital
Phone :
i.
2 x RJ-9 jack for the handset and headset
connection
ii.
RJ-11 jack for the cable connectivity
Features
3.6.8
:
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
6 programmable keys
2 lines LCD display
Hands-free, Half Duplex
Soft keys / LCD prompts
Support additional key button
Message waiting indicator
Single Line Telephone (SLT)
3.6.8.1 SLT is a basic phone, similar to telephones that most users might find in their own
homes, made up of a handset and base with a keypad. Though the TDM
basic single line phones are simple, they can allow for additional features as
required to suit the user's needs.
3.6.8.2 The SLT shall comply with the following minimum technical specifications :
Port
Accessories
:
:
1 port RJ11
Cables are required to connect the SLT :
i.
2 x RJ-9 jack for the handset and headset
connection
ii. RJ-11 jack for the cable connectivity
Features
:
i.
ii.
Electronic volume control
3-steps ringer selection
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
iii.
iv.
v.
3.7
Operator System
3.7.1
Description
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 19 of 23
Timed flash
Switchable tone or pulse setting
Last number redial
3.7.1.1 There are three (3) types of Operator System as follow:
3.7.1.1.1 Basic Operator System
3.7.1.1.2 Call Centre System
3.7.1.1.3 Multimedia Contact Centre System
3.7.2
Basic Operator System
3.7.2.1 The Basic Operator System is primarily used by telephone operator for answering
and extending inbound calls, making out-bound calls and general assistance both
for the public as well as internal users. Generally, this system can be configured
to three (3) different installation types:
3.7.2.1.1
3.7.2.1.2
3.7.2.1.3
Operator console
PC based
Operator console and PC based
3.7.2.2 The Basic Operator System shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications:
Incoming line
Terminal
:
:
Operating System :
Software Features :
One (1) dedicated line
Hard phone (digital / IP Phone) or Soft phone
(PC based client)
Soft phone is supported by Latest Windows or
Linux
i.
Auto Attendant (direct call, multiple autoattendants, record greetings, route calls,
revert call, to create and edit control
scripts using GUI tool)
ii.
Support Direct Section Selection (DSS)
iii.
Support a built-in VoIP functionality
iv.
Screen based operator’s application
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
v.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
Capable of being centralised and
distributed across multiple locations
Advanced attendant call handling
(keyboard and mouse)
Multiple queues (External, Internal,
Recall, Emergency etc.) – prioritisation
of emergency calls
Advanced directory search
View users’ presence
Line state and calendar activities
Messaging, etc
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
Support Operator Console features
8 programmable keys
2 lines LCD display
Hands-free, Half Duplex
Soft keys / LCD prompts
Support additional key button
Message waiting indicator
vi.
vii.
Physical Features :
Storage retention :
License
:
3.7.3
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 20 of 23
Report, call history, call recording for 7 years
Software Assurance License and/or User
License
Call Centre System
3.7.3.1 The Call Centre System is used by supervisor and agents for answering and
extending in-bound calls, making out-bound calls, general assistance both for the
public as well as internal users and able to produce performance report.
3.7.3.2 The Call Centre System shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications: Incoming line
:
Terminal
:
Operating System :
Software Features :
one (1) dedicated line
Hard phone (digital / IP Phone) or soft phone
Latest Windows Server or Linux
i.
Call application run on embedded type
server and meet the required Busy Hour
Call Attempts (BHCA)
ii.
Wall board
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
Support call tracking and monitoring
system for all enquiries
Support agent module – Access to single
view of the customer (include emails,
documents, tasks and faxes)
View customer’s contact and enquiry
history
Call recording
Call centre reporting
Support
automation
through
an
Interactive Voice Response (IVR)
Supervisor features (barging, whisper,
eaves drop)
Physical Features :
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
Support Operator Console features
8 programmable keys
2 lines LCD display
Hands-free, Half Duplex
Soft keys / LCD prompts
Support additional key button
Message waiting indicator
Storage retention :
i.
ii.
iii.
report
call history
call recording for 7 years
Storage recording :
License
:
3.7.4
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 21 of 23
supported file format .wav, .mp3
Software Assurance License and/or User
License
Multimedia Contact Centre System
3.7.4.1 Multimedia Contact Centre System is used by supervisor and agents to entertain
in-bound / out-bound calls, general assistance both for the public as well as
internal users, OMNI-channel platform (such as email, social-media, fax etc) and
able to produce performance report.
3.7.4.2 The Multimedia Contact Centre System shall comply with the following minimum
technical specifications:SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
Incoming line
:
Terminal
:
Operating System :
Software Features :
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 22 of 23
one (1) dedicated line
Hard phone (digital / IP Phone) or soft phone
Latest Windows Server or Linux
i.
Call application run on embedded type
server and meet the required Busy Hour
Call Attempts (BHCA)
ii.
Wall board
iii.
Support call tracking and monitoring
system for all enquiries
iv.
Support agent module – Access to single
view of the customer (include emails,
documents, tasks and faxes)
v.
View customer’s contact and enquiry
history
vi.
Call recording
vii.
Call Centre Realtime Monitoring,
Analytics and Reporting
viii.
Support
automation
through
an
Interactive Voice Response (IVR)
ix.
Supervisor features (barging, whisper,
eaves drop)
x.
Skill-Based Routing with Automatic Call
Distribution (ACD)
xi.
Driven instant messaging and text
messaging or communication with a
chatbot/callbot.
xii.
Integration with application such as
Customer Relation Management (CRM)
system
xiii.
Flexible Configuration (single site/ multisite and single server/ multi-server)
xiv.
Agent omni-desktop web GUI
xv.
Supervisor web GUI
xvi.
Scripting Tools
xvii.
Open channel Application Programming
Interface (API)
xviii.
3rd-party Apps and Customs Integrations
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S3 - 23 of 23
xix.
Auto Disaster recovery
Physical Features :
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
vi.
vii.
Support Operator Console features
8 programmable keys
2 lines LCD display
Hands-free, Half Duplex
Soft keys / LCD prompts
Support additional key button
Message waiting indicator
Storage retention :
i.
ii.
iii.
report
call history
call recording for 7 years
Storage recording :
License
:
supported file format .wav, .mp3
Software Assurance License and/or User
License
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S4 - 1 of 8
4.0
SYSTEM OF CABLING
4.1
Description
4.1.1
These sections describe about the system of cabling for the following
telecommunication installation:
4.1.1
Cabling System for Fibre To The Premise (FTTP)
4.1.1.1 The FTTP is a form of Fibre optic communication delivery, in which an optical
fibre is run in an optical distribution network from the telecommunication service
provider all the way to the premises occupied by the subscriber. The FTTP
installation shall comply with ITU-T Recommendations in the G.984 series and
Fixed Network Facilities - In-Building And External; MCMC MTSFB TC G024 or
latest and shall consist of the following component:
4.1.1.1.1
4.1.1.1.2
4.1.1.1.3
4.1.1.1.4
4.1.1.1.5
4.1.1.1.6
Indoor Fibre Optic Cable
Outdoor Fibre Optic Cable
Overhead Fibre Optic Cable
Fibre Wall Socket
Optical Distribution Frame
Fibre Termination Box
4.1.1.2 The cabling system shall be able to support signal transmission for data, voice
and video application. No cable jointing shall be allowed for the cabling system
installation. The minimum bending radius shall be not less than ten (10) times of
the overall fibre optic cable diameter.
4.1.2
Cabling System for VoIP System
4.1.2.1 The VoIP system also called IP telephony. It is a technologies for voice
communications and multimedia sessions over Internet Protocol networks. The
cabling system shall comply with the Technical Code: MCMC MTSFB TC T03 or
latest, JKR Specification L-S38 (Specification for ICT Networking System) and
shall consist of the following component:
4.1.2.1.1
4.1.2.1.2
4.1.2.1.3
4.1.2.1.4
4.1.2.1.5
4.1.2.1.6
Singlemode Fiber Optic Cable - Outdoor
Singlemode Fiber Optic Cable - Indoor
Multimode Fiber Optic Cable - Outdoor
Multimode Fiber Optic Cable - Indoor
Fiber Optic Patch Panel Horizontal cabling
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Copper Cable
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
4.1.2.1.7
4.1.2.1.8
4.1.2.1.9
4.1.2.1.10
4.1.2.1.11
4.1.2.1.12
4.1.2.1.13
4.1.3
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S4 - 2 of 8
Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) Copper Cable
Singlemode Pigtail, Adapter and Patch Cord
Multimode Pigtail, Adapter and Patch Cord
Fiber Optic Cable Splicing Cassette
RJ-45 Modular Jack
RJ-45 Patch Panel
RJ-45 Patch Cord
Cabling System for Analogue/Digital Telephone System
4.1.3.1 The Analogue / Digital System is only limited to voice system while the design shall
comply with the Technical Code: MTSFB TC T03:2019 or latest and shall consist
of the following component:
4.1.3.1.1
4.1.3.1.2
4.1.3.1.3
4.1.3.1.4
4.1.3.1.5
4.1.3.1.6
4.1.3.1.7
4.1.3.1.8
4.1.3.1.9
4.2
4.2.1
Indoor Multipair Telephone Cable
Indoor Jumper Cable
Outdoor Multipair Underground Telephone Cable
Overhead Multipair Telephone Cable
Telephone faceplate
Distribution frame
Distribution Point Box
Connection/Disconnection Module
Surge Protective Device (SPD)
Types of Cable
Indoor Fibre Optic Cable
4.2.1.1 The Indoor Fibre Optic Cable shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568.3, ISO/IEC 118011 and ITU-T G.652.D or G.657.A and the following minimum technical
specifications: Fibre Core Count
Fibre Class
Core/Cladding diameter
Macro Bending Loss
:
:
:
:
Cable Type
Jacket Material
:
:
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
2 cores
Optical Singlemode (OS) 2 type
≤ 9 µm / 125 µm
Bend insensitive fibre ≤15mm
bending radius
Tight Buffer
Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH)
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
4.2.2
Flame Test Method
:
Maximum attenuation
:
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S4 - 3 of 8
IEC60332-3,
IEC60754-2,
IEC61034-2
0.40 dB/km at 1550 nm
0.40 dB/km at 1310 nm
Outdoor Fibre Optic Cable
4.2.2.1 The Outdoor Fibre Optic Cable shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568.3 and ISO/IEC
11801-1 and the following minimum technical specifications: Fibre Core Count
Fibre Class
Core/Cladding diameter
Cable Type
Jacket Material
Armoured
Cable Standards
Maximum attenuation
4.2.3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
2 cores
Optical Singlemode (OS) 2 type
≤ 9 µm / 125 µm
Loose Tube
Polyethylene (PE)
Corrugated Steel-armoured
ANSI/ICEA S-87-640
0.30 dB/km at 1550 nm
0.40 dB/km at 1310 nm
Overhead Fibre Optic Cable
4.2.3.1 The Overhead Fibre Optic Cable shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568.3, ISO/IEC
11801-1, ITU-T G.652.D and the following minimum technical specifications: Fibre Core Count
Fibre Class
Core/Cladding diameter
Cable Type
Jacket Material
:
:
:
:
:
Strength Member
Cable Standards
Maximum attenuation
:
:
:
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
2 cores
Optical Singlemode (OS) 2 type
9 µm / 125 µm
Loose Tube
Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH)
and UV Resistance sheath
Steel Wire
ITU-T G.657A2
0.40 dB/km at 1550 nm
0.50 dB/km at 1310 nm
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
4.2.4
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S4 - 4 of 8
Structured Cabling System
4.2.4.1 The cabling for VoIP System shall comply with ICT Networking System as
specified in JKR Specification L-S38 (Specification for ICT Networking System).
4.2.5
Indoor Multipair Telephone Cable for Analogue/Digital Telephone System
4.2.5.1 The Indoor Multipair Telephone Cable is the telephone cables for vertical and
horizontal installation. The indoor telephone cables shall comply with latest MS
2121 and the following minimum technical specifications: Conductor size
Insulation
No of pairs
Insulation Thickness
Insulation Resistance
4.2.6
:
:
:
:
:
0.63mm
Solid Polyethelene
One (1)
0.25mm
300 MΩ
Indoor Jumper Cable for Analogue/Digital Telephone System
4.2.6.1 The Indoor Jumper Cable for patching installation between/within distribution
frame/panel shall comply with MS 2122 and the following minimum technical
specifications: Conductor size
Insulation
No of pairs
Insulation Thickness
Insulation Resistance
4.2.7
:
:
:
:
:
0.50mm
Solid Polyethelene
One (1)
0.20mm
300 MΩ
Outdoor Multipair Underground Telephone Cable for Analogue/Digital
Telephone System
4.2.7.1 The Outdoor Multipair Underground Telephone Cable used is Fully Filled Unit
Twin moisture barrier polyethylene sheathed cable (FF PEUT). The cable shall
comprise of solid plain annealed tinned copper conductor PVC insulated, twisted
in pairs and shall be PVC sheathed coloured grey. The cable shall comply with
MS 2124 and the following minimum technical specifications: Conductor size
Insulation
:
:
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
0.63mm
Solid Polyethelene
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
No of pairs
Insulation Thickness
Insulation Resistance
4.2.8
:
:
:
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S4 - 5 of 8
One (1)
0.25mm
300 MΩ
Overhead Multipair Telephone Cable for Analoque/Digital Telephone
System
4.2.8.1 The Overhead Multipair Telephone Cable used is Integral Barrier Unit Twin
moisture barrier polyethylene sheathed cable (IB PEUT). The Overhead cable
shall come with steel wire and comply with MS 2123 , MS 2125 and the following
minimum technical specifications: Conductor size
Insulation
No of pairs
Insulation Thickness
Suspension Wire / Strand
:
:
:
:
:
0.63mm
Solid polyethylene
One (1)
0.25mm
Provided
4.3
Cabling Accessories
4.3.1
The Fibre Wall Socket for FTTP shall comply with UL 94 V-0 rating and the
following minimum technical specifications: -
4.3.2
Type
Port
Material
:
:
:
Size
:
Indoor wall mounted
1 inlet port, 2 outlet ports
High-impact type, flame
thermoplastic
85mm(H) x 85mm(W)
retardant,
The Fibre Termination Box (FTB) for FTTP is generally refers to the box shape
Fibre optic management products used to protect and distribute the optical Fibre
links in FTTP/FTTH/FTTO Networks. The direct application of termination box is
to terminate fibre optic cables and connect the core of the cable and pigtail. The
minimum requirement as specified below:
Type
Core Capacity
Material
:
:
:
Wall mount
4
Plastic
Injection
Moulded
or
thermoplastic and made of fire retardant
as specified in UL 94 standards
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
Dimension - High Density
- Premises
Adaptor
Protection Rating
4.3.3
4.3.4
4.3.5
:
:
:
:
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S4 - 6 of 8
410mm(H) x 350mm(W) x 140mm(D)
240mm(H) x 220mm(W) x 85mm(D)
SC/UPC, SC/APC
IP55 (Outdoor), IP44 (Indoor) as
specified in IEC60529
The Optical Distribution Frame (ODF) for FTTP is a frame used to provide cable
interconnections between communication facilities, which integrate Fibre splicing,
Fibre termination, Fibre optic adapters & connectors and cable connections
together in a single unit. The minimum requirement as specified below:
Type
:
Core Capacity
Material
:
:
Dimension
:
Wall mount and rack mount come with
equipment bonding
72
Cold-rolled steel and powder coated in
light grey (RAL7035)
800mm(W) x 400mm(D) x 2200mm(H)
Singlemode Pigtail shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568.3 and ITU-T G.652.D or
G.657.A and the following minimum technical specifications: Fibre Class
Core/Cladding diameter
Connector Type
Jacket Material
:
:
:
:
Flame Test Method
:
OS 2 type
≤ 9 µm / 125 µm
SC
Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH) or
PVC
LSZH
(IEC60332-3,
IEC60754-2,
IEC61034-2) or CMR
The Cabling Accessories for Structured Cabling System in VoIP System shall
comply with ICT Networking System as specified in JKR Specification L-S38
(Specification for ICT Networking System).
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
4.3.6
The telephone faceplate for Analogue/Digital Telephone System shall comply
with the following minimum technical specifications: Type
Port
4.3.7
Material
:
:
:
:
Size
Contacts
:
:
Indoor wall mounted
RJ11 Socket - Screw Terminals
RJ45 and Telephone Faceplates – IDC
High-impact type, flame retardant,
thermoplastic (Urea or Polycarbonate)
85mm(H) x 85mm(W)
Six positions with four contacts
(phosphor bronze wire with gold plating
and of minimum size 0.45 mm diameter)
The distribution frame for Analogue/Digital Telephone System shall comply with
the following minimum technical specifications:Type
Terminal block
:
:
:
:
4.3.8
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S4 - 7 of 8
Floor standing or wall mounted
10 pairs type mounted on the back
mount frame (Stainless steel type with
latches and hole)
Quick slip non-screw and non-solder
type
Equipped with plug-in break points to
isolate the PABX
The distribution point box for Analogue/Digital Telephone System shall comply
with the following minimum technical specifications: Type
Material
:
:
Finishing body
:
:
Wall mounting.
Fabricated from mild steel sheet
designed to form a rigid construction
The box shall be treated with two layers
of rust proof primer and finished with
another two layers of enamel green paint
The doors and hinges shall be so
constructed to prevent sagging and
misalignment. Doors shall be able to be
opened through – 180 degrees to permit
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S4 - 8 of 8
unobstructed access to the inside of the
box.
4.3.9
The Connection/Disconnection Module For Analogue/Digital Telephone System
shall comply with the following minimum technical specifications: Internal diameter of
connection wire
No. of pair
Material
:
:
:
0.4mm-0.63mm
10 Pair
Thermoplastic flammability
class UL 94 V0
4.3.10 The Surge Protective Device (SPD) for Analogue/Digital Telephone System is a
device used on telecommunication systems to protect the insulation and
conductors of the system from the damaging effects of surge. The SPD shall
comply with the following minimum technical specifications:
Continous Operating Voltage
Nominal Discharge current, In
Nominal Current, IL
Type of connection
Degree of protection
:
:
:
:
:
127V AC / 180V DC
5kA per lines
0.25 A
Series
IP 10
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S5 - 1 of 5
5.0
EXTERNAL TELECOMMUNICATION INFRASTRUCTURE
5.1
Description
5.1.1
The External Telecommunication Infrastructure shall meet the specifications as
specified in MCMC MTFSB TC G025 or latest while consist of the following
component as below:
5.1.1.1 Underground Infrastructure
5.1.1.2 Overhead Infrastructure
5.2
Underground Infrastructure
5.2.1
Telecommunication Manhole
5.2.1.1 Telecommunication manhole shall be of factory pre-fabricated or Precast
concrete type. The typical manhole design, specification, accessories and
manhole concrete cover as shown in Figure 5.1, Figure 5.2 and Figure 5.3 in
appendix respectively.
5.2.1.2 In-situ manhole is the manhole that is constructed at site and mainly is due to
limitation of accessibility to the location such as remote area, hilly, island etc. Insitu manhole shall be constructed with Quality A concrete (cement, sand and
aggregate which is 1:2:4) Telecommunication manhole is an opening to a
confined space such as a shaft, utility vault, or large vessel. Manholes are often
used as an access point for an underground public utility, allowing inspection,
maintenance, and system upgrades.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S5 - 2 of 5
5.2.1.4 Type and minimum specifications for precast telecommunication manhole shall
comply with latest BS 8810 as Table 5.1 below:No.
Manhole
type
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
Pit
JB30
JRC7
JC9
JC9C
R1B
R2A
R2A (M)
Recommended
internal dimension
L X W X H (mm)
460 X 460 X 760
860 x 860 x 760
1160 x 855 x 850
1810 x 890 x 1150
1960 x 1260 x 1020
1980 x 1370 x 1830
3280 x 1500 x 1830
3740 x 1640 x 2000
No. of duct way
100mm
diameter
2
2
2
4
4
6
12
16
Loading weight
(tonne)
5.0
22.5
22.5
22.5
22.5
22.5
22.5
22.5
Table 5.1: Type and minimum manhole specifications
5.2.1.5 The manhole shall come together with approriate size of heavy duty concrete
cover suitable for manhole type as listed in Table 5.1 and shall comply with latest
BS EN 124.
5.2.2
Underground Ducts
Underground ducts are divided into three (3) category as below;
5.2.2.1
Main duct
5.2.2.1.1
The main duct for underground installation is used in two (2)
conditions which are open trench or Horizontal Directional Drilling
(HDD) method. The typical duct depth specification as Figure 5.4 in
Appendix. The minimum specifications as below:
For open trench method;
Type
Diameter
:
:
GI Pipe, uPVC, PVC or HDPE
100 mm
:
:
HDPE
100 mm
For HDD method;
Type
Diameter
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
5.2.2.1.2
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S5 - 3 of 5
All duct shall be provided in nominal lengths of 6 meter and type of
underground duct as below:
i.
Galvanised Iron (GI)
The Galvanised Iron (GI) that have been dipped in a protective
zinc coating to prevent corrosion and rust shall comply with BS
1387 / MS 863 and the following minimum technical
specifications:
Material
Wall Thickness
Inner Diameter
Class
Pipe End
Application
:
:
:
:
:
:
Galvanised Iron
5.4 mm
100 mm
B
Threaded Cut & Socketed
Road crossing or hard standing
ii. Unplasticised PVC (uPVC)
The uPVC which means no plasticizer has been added to
the PVC compound shall comply with BS3506 and the following
minimum technical specifications:
Material
:
Inner Diameter
Wall Thickness
Class
Application
:
:
:
:
Unplasticised Polyvinyl Chloride
(uPVC)
100 mm
2.6 ~3.0 mm
D
Coastal area
iii. PVC
The PVC shall be comply with MS 1034 and the following
minimum technical specifications:
Material
Inner Diameter
Wall Thickness (mm)
Application
:
:
:
:
iv. HDPE
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
Polyvinyl Chloride (PVC)
100mm
2.6mm
Turfing area
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S5 - 4 of 5
The HDPE ducts are particular suitable for horizontal direct
drilling applications or trenchless design. HDPE shall comply
with MS 1058 and the following minimum specification:
5.2.2.2
5.2.2.3
Material
:
Pressure Rating
Inner Diameter
Wall Thickness
Application
:
:
:
:
High
Density
(HDPE)
PN10
100 mm
8.1~9.1 mm
HDD
Polyethylene
Subduct
The subduct is used to lay multiple cables inside the main duct and
to maximize the duct space and protection. The sample of subduct
arrangement inside the duct is shown Figure 5.5 in appendix. The
subduct shall comply with the following minimum specification:
Material
:
Diameter
Wall Thickness
:
:
High
Density
Polyethylene
(HDPE) corrugated
32 mm
3.0 mm
Innerduct
The Innerduct is a flexible fabric system designed specifically for
increasing main duct capacity. The unique textile construction allows
innerduct to conform to the shape of cables placed within, greatly
reducing wasted space and increasing cable deployment efficiency.
Figure 5.6 in Appendix illustrates the innerduct installation. The
subduct shall comply with the following minimum specification:
Size
Cable Diameter
:
:
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
50mm x 3-Cell
Not exceeding 21.6mm
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
5.3
Overhead Infrastructure
5.3.1
Telecommunication Pole
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S5 - 5 of 5
5.3.1.1 The Telecommunication Pole is a column to support overhead cable. All poles
shall meet the specifications as specified in latest MCMC MTFSB TC G024 and
as Figure 5.7 in Appendix.
5.3.1.2 Telecommunication pole shall be install not more than 50 metre apart interval.
5.3.1.3 The minimum requirement of pole shall be as specified below:
Type
Nominal Height
Top Diameter
Bottom Diameter
Maximum load/point
Maximum total load
Permanent bending load
Minimum bending load
Embedded Pole Length
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Accessories
:
Galvanised Steel Pole or Concrete Pole
6.7m ,7.5m, 9.0m
10cm - 14cm
16.7cm - 26cm
200kg
1,600 kg
30 %
224 kg
1150 mm, 1300 mm, 1500 mm complete
with kicking block
stay wire complete with necessary
accessories
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
6.0
TELECOMMUNICATION EARTHING SYSTEM
6.1
Description
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S6 - 1 of 4
The earthing system for telecommunications to meets basic safety requirement in
accordance with the IEC 30129, IEC 60364 and ANSI/TIA 607-C.
6.2
Telecommunication Earthing Component
6.2.1
The generic telecommunications earthing infrastructure originates at the
electrical entrance facility earth and extends throughout the building. It includes
the following major components:-
6.3.1.1
6.3.1.2
6.3.1.3
6.3.1.4
6.3.1.5
6.2.2
Primary Bonding Bar (PBB)
Secondary Bonding Bar (SBB)
Telecommunications Bonding Backbone (TBB)
Telecommunications Bonding Conductor (TBC)
Backbone Bonding Conductor (BBC)
Primary Bonding Bar (PBB)
The PBB serves as the dedicated extension of the building earthing electrode
system for the telecommunications infrastructure. The PBB also serves as the
central attachment point for the SBB(s) and equipment. The PBB shall comply
the following minimum technical specifications: Dimension
:
100 mm (W) x 6 mm (t).
Material
:
Copper
Others
:
i.
Bar provided with holes for use
with correctly matched cable lug
and other accessories
ii.
iii.
Cleaned and antioxidant
Earthing terminals or bars
mounted on porcelain insulators
shall be provided
All connections to the secondary
bonding bar shall be soundly
made and electrically satisfactory
by means of bolts and nuts with
spring washers and jam nuts
iv.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
Location
6.2.3
:
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S6 - 2 of 4
Entrance Facility i.e. (Subscriber
Distribution Frame (SDF), Main TCR,
Server Room)
Secondary Bonding Bar (SBB)
The SBB is the earthing connection point for telecommunications systems in the
TCR and SDF Room. The SBB shall comply the following minimum technical
specifications: Dimension
:
50 mm x 6 mm (thick)
Material of Bar
having minimum
Accessories
:
:
Made of Copper, or copper alloys
of 95% conductivity when annealed.
i.
Bar provided with holes for use with
correctly matched cable lug and
other accessories
iii.
iv.
Cleaned and antioxidant
Earthing terminals or bars mounted
on porcelain insulators shall be
provided
All connections to the secondary
bonding bar shall be soundly made
and electrically satisfactory by
means of bolts and nuts with spring
washers and jam nuts
v.
6.2.4
Telecommunication Bonding Backbone Bar (TBB)
The TBB is a conductor that connects all SBBs to the PBB. The intended function
of a TBB is to reduce or equalise potential differences. The TBB shall shall be
used to interconnects all SBB with the PBB using 25mm x 3mm tinned copper
tape.
6.2.5
Telecommunication Bonding Conductor (TBC)
A PBB shall be bonded to the electrical system MEB using TBC. The routing of
the TBC shall consider the need to minimise both conductor length and the
numbers of bends.
The TBC shall be used to connects the PBB to the building main earthing bar
using 25mm x 3mm tinned copper tape.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
6.2.6
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S6 - 3 of 4
Backbone Bonding Conductor (BBC)
Whenever two or more TBBs are used within a multi-storey building, the TBBs
shall be bounded together with a Backbone Bonding Conductor (BBC) at the top
floor and at minimum of every third floor in between the lowest floor level.
The BBC size shall be of 25mm x 3mm copper tape.
6.2
Telecommunication Earthing System Infrastructure
6.2.1
Earthing system for telecommunication are applied depending on type of cabling
system as follow:
6.2.1.1 Combination ICT and Telephone (Structured Cabling System)
Figure 6.1: Illustrative example of Earthing System for Telecommunications (ICT and
Telephone Installation)
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S6 - 4 of 4
6.2.1.2 Analogue/Digital Telephone System (non-Structured Cabling System)
Figure 6.2: Illustrative example of Earthing System for for
Telecommunications (Telephone Installation only)
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S7 - 1 of 7
7.0
LABELLING
7.1
Description
7.1.1
Labels shall be fitted on the outside of all optical distribution frame, Fibre
termination box ,fibre wall socket, distribution frame, distribution point box etc.
7.1.2
The labels shall allows easy identification of the equipment, heavy duty types,
made of durable printed sticker (e.g. Brady) and shall be able to securely tie to
the equipment.
7.2
Fibre to The Premise
7.2.1
Optical Distribution Frame (ODF)
7.2.1.1 The ODF shall be labelled at top of the ports with the Building Level, FTB Number
where the fibre cable originates from and shall be labelled in pairs. For example:
if the fibre cable on ports 1-2 and 3-4 originates from Riser Room, Level 1, Block
‘A’, then the top part shall be labelled “A1.1”.
7.2.1.2 The bottom part of the ports on the Fibre Optic Patch Panel (FOPP) in the same
rack shall be labelled continuously, in sequence. For example: For FOPP #1 shall
have alphabet ‘A’ and has port numbers from 1, 2 and so on (based on port
capacity) then FOPP #2 shall have alphabet ‘B’ and has port numbers 1, 2 and
so on.
A1
A
A2
A
A1.1
A1.2
A1.3
A1.4
A1.5
A1.6
A2.1
A2.2
A2.3
A2.4
A2.5
A2.6
Figure 7.1: Labelling Convention Fibre Patch Panel at Server Room
Where,
• “A” represent Building Name/Code
• “A1” represent floor level fibre patch panel
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S7 - 2 of 7
• “A1.1” represent port for fibre patch cord termination
• “1” represent number of fibre cores
7.2.2
Fibre Termination Box
7.2.2.1 Fibre Termination Box shall be label at outgoing of the ports with the Building
Level, FWS Number where the fibre cable originates from and shall be labelled
in pairs. For example: if the fibre cable on ports 1-2 and 3-4 originates from Block
‘A’, Level 1, FWS port then the top part shall be labelled “A1. 1” and “A1.2”.
A1.1
A1
A1.2
A1.3
A1.4
A1.5
Figure 7.2: Labelling Convention Fibre Termination Box
Where,
•
•
•
•
“A” represent Building Name/Code
“A1” represent floor level fibre patch panel
“A1.1” represent port for fibre patch cord termination
“1” represent number of fibre cores
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
A1.6
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
7.2.3
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S7 - 3 of 7
Fibre Wall Socket
7.2.3.1 The Fibre Wall Socket shall be named and labelled according to a specific
labelling convention that allows easy identification of the structured cabling
including type and location.
7.2.3.2 The Fibre Wall Socket Convention is as follows:
Building Name/Code
Building Level
Unit Number
B 1.10
Figure 7.3: Labelling Convention for Fibre Wall Socket
Where,
• “B” represent Building Name/Code
• “1” represent Building Level
• “10” represent Unit Number
7.3
Analogue/Digital Telephone System
7.3.1
Distribution Frame and Distribution Point Box
7.3.1.1 All distribution frame and distribution point box shall be named and labelled
according to a specific labelling convention that allows easy identification of the
equipment including type and location.
7.3.1.2 The distribution frame and distribution point box labelling convention is as follows:
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S7 - 4 of 7
EXAMPLE 1:
Building Name/Code
Building Level
Frame Number/
Distribution Point Box
A 1. F1
Figure 7.4: Labelling Convention for distribution frame and distribution point box
Where,
•
•
•
•
“A” represent Building Name/Code
“1” represent Building Level
“F1” represent Frame number 1 or
“DP1” represent Distribution Point Box number 1
EXAMPLE 2:
Building Name / Code
Building Level
Frame Number/
Distribution Point Box
B 2. F2
Figure 7.5: Labelling Convention for distribution frame and distribution point box
Where,
•
•
•
•
“A” represent Building Name/Code
“2” represent Building Level
“F2” represent Frame number 2 or
“DP2” represent Distribution Point Box number 2
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S7 - 5 of 7
7.4
IP PBX and other Equipment Labelling
7.4.1
The IP PBX and other equipment as listed in Table 7.1 shall be named and
labelled according to the specific labelling convention that allows easy
identification of the equipment including type and location.
7.4.2
The IP PBX and other equipment labelling convention is as follows:
Building Name / Code
Building Level
Rack Number
Equipment Number in Rack
A 1. 1. E1
Figure 7.6: Labelling Convention for IP PBX and other equipment
Where,
•
•
•
•
“A” represent Building Name/Code
“1” represent Building Level
“1” represent Rack Number 1
“E1” represent Equipment Name Number 1 in rack as in Table 7.1.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S7 - 6 of 7
EXAMPLE:
Building Name / Code
Building Level
Rack Number
Equipment Number in Rack
A 1. 1. PBX1
Figure 7.7: Labelling Convention for IP PBX and other equipment
Where,
•
•
•
•
“A” represent Building Name/Code
“1” represent Building Level
“1” represent Rack Number 1
“PBX1” represent Equipment Name Number 1 in rack as in Table 7.1.
Bil.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.
Equipment Name
Equipment Labelling
IP PBX
PBX
Hybrid PABX
PABX
Session Border Controller
SBC
SIP Gateway
SIP_G
Analogue VoIP Gateway
A_VoIP_G
ISDN Media Gateway
ISDN_G
SIP Phone
SIP_P
SIP/w Phone
SIPw_P
IP Phone
IP_P
DECT Phone
DECT_P
Digital Phone
DGT_P
Single Line Phone
SL_P
Call Centre
Call_Ctr
Operator Console
Op_C
Contact Centre
Con_Ctr
Table 7.1: Equipment Labelling
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S7 - 7 of 7
7.5
Voice Faceplates Labelling
7.5.1
The Voice faceplates shall be named and labelled according to a specific labelling
convention that allows easy identification of the structured cabling including type
and location.
7.5.2 The Voice Faceplates Labelling Convention is as follows:
Building Name/Code
Building Level
Rack Number
Port Number
Outlet Type
B1.1.A10V
Figure 7.8: Labelling Convention for Voice Faceplate
Where,
•
•
•
•
•
•
“B” represent Building Name/Code
“1” represent Building Level
“1” represent Rack Number 1
“A10” represent Port Number 10 on patch panel A
“V” represent Outlet Type for Voice Outlet
“Green Colour” represent colour for voice
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S8 - 1 of 2
8.0
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
8.1
Description
8.1.1
After the installation has been completed and before the Certification of Practical
Completion is issued, the whole Telephone system shall be tested for
compliance, performance and manufacturer’s and/or local authority testing and
commissioning guideline.
8.1.2
The S.O or S.O’s Representatives reserves the right to be present at all tests and
The Contractor shall give at least one (1) week notice in writing to the S.O or
S.O’s Representative for this purpose. In any case, no test shall be carried out
without prior approval of the S.O or S.O.’s Representative.
8.1.3
The contractor responsible for the work shall arrange with S.O and TELCO for a
final inspection and testing. If the installation is not satisfactory, the contractor
shall rectify all the defects and arrange for another final inspection and testing.
The contractor shall forward the Certificate of Acceptance to the S.O for record.
8.2
Telephone System Test
8.2.1
The Contractor shall arrange with the Certified Engineer registered with the
equipment’s manufacturer to conduct and carry out the work of testing and
commissioning of the telephone system.
8.2.2
The tests to be carried out where relevant, shall consist of the following procedure
or method and shall according to the equipment manufacturer’s warranty and as
per stated in Inspection Test Plan (ITP) provided by The Contractor and agreed
by S.O / S.O’s Representative.
8.2.2.1
Visual inspection to ensure the telephone equipment shall be
properly mounted/installed according to the manual, free from dust,
physically in good condition without any scratch or crack.
8.2.2.2
Configuration test to check;
i.
ii.
iii.
iv.
v.
The basic calls for audio standard quality
Caller ID (CLID) and Calling Name (CNAM) Presentation
Call Forward, Dual Tone Multi-Frequency (DTMF) Tests
Voicemail
Network redundancy (if applicable)
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
vi.
vii.
viii.
ix.
x.
xi.
8.2.2.3
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S8 - 2 of 2
Auto attendant
Audio conferencing
Call hold
Call transfer
Session refresh
Fax
Functionality and stress test to ensure the equipment/system
meets the functional requirement and the performances specified;
i. Maximum call at one time during busy hour
ii. Extension to extension test
iii. Outgoing call from extension
iv. Incoming call from public exchange (PBX)
v. Basic features system facilities
vi. Power failure/ battery back-up test
vii. System integration (Eg. Call billing,auto attendant)
8.2.2.4
Security Test to ensure the equipment/system meets the security
requirement.
i.
ii.
8.2.2.5
PBX secure log in system
Voice security test
User Acceptance Test with the present of S.O/S.O’s Representative
and Client’s Representative.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S9 - 1 of 1
9.0
WARRANTY AND SUPPORT
9.1
Description
9.1.1
During the Defects Liability Period (DLP), the Contractor shall be responsible for
the warranty and support for the complete installation. All works shall be carried
out by a competent person. All labour, materials, tools and parts necessary to
rectify the defect due to manufacturing or installation faults shall be supplied and
executed at the Contractor's cost.
9.2
Warranty
9.2.1
The contractor shall guarantee the installations; equipment, application system
and software are free from defective or faulty of design, manufacture fabrication
and installation work after DLP as specified in the Contract.
9.2.2
All information technology-based systems and all interfacing, integration and
connection systems shall free from software error.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
10.0
SHOP DRAWINGS AND AS-BUILT DOCUMENTS
10.1
Shop Drawings
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S10 - 1 of 3
10.1.1 Two sets of prints of shop drawings for construction and/or installation shall be
submitted to the S.O.’s Representative for approval. The Contractor shall prepare
and submit shop drawings for the whole work or parts of the work at least two
weeks before the work begins. If the shop drawings submitted are not acceptable
by the S.O.’s Representative, the Contractor shall amend and re-submit the shop
drawings within two weeks from the date of return of the shop drawings. No work
shall be carried out without the shop drawings being approved by the S.O.’s
Representative. The shop drawings shall include and show the following: 10.1.1.1 The dimensioned general arrangements, layouts and positions of
equipment, wiring accessories such as voice point faceplate, equipment
racks and all others necessary for the complete installations as
specified in the Drawings and/or Bill of Quantities;
10.1.1.2 The dimensioned layouts and positions of all holes and cutthrough in
the walls and floors for the horizontal dan backbone cabling;
10.1.1.3 The dimensioned general arrangements, layouts, routes and positions
of all horizontal dan backbone cabling;
10.1.1.4 Cable routes for all cables laid underground, in ducts and trenches;
10.1.1.5 The dimensioned general arrangements and layout of earthing system
including routes for earthing conductors and positions of earth
electrodes;
10.1.1.6 Schematic drawings, network topology, vLAN and IP-address topology;
10.1.1.7 Rack population drawing;
10.2
As-Built Documents
10.2.1 As-Built documents shall consist of but not limited to the As-Installed drawings,
manuals, certificates, catalogues, inventories, and parts lists.
10.2.2 The As-Installed drawings or documents shall comprise of: 10.2.2.1 Site plan & cable routes;
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S10 - 2 of 3
10.2.2.2 System schematic diagram;
10.2.2.3 Layout plan (trunking/ conduit route and location of voice points);
10.2.2.4 Earthing system;
10.2.2.5 Rack population and arrangement of equipment in TCR;
10.2.2.6 Setting parameters and configurations on each related equipment;
10.2.3.7 Source code of the application systems or software developed;
10.2.2.8 Test result on cabling system and each related equipment;
10.2.2.9 Checklist or format reporting flow during Defect & Liability Period;
10.2.2.10 The certificate of warranty from cable manufacturer and equipment;
10.2.3 If the drawings or documents submitted are not according to the actual installation
at site and/or not acceptable to the S.O.'s Representative, the Contractor shall
amend and re-submit the drawings or documents within two weeks from the date
of return of the drawings or documents.
10.2.4 The manuals shall comprise of: 10.3.1.1 Installation manual.
10.3.1.2 Operation manual, Service and Maintenance manual.
10.3.1.3 Parts list, product data, catalogue and product test certificates.
10.2.5 The certified softcopy of As-Built documents shall be compiled on web-based
format. The hardcopy of As-Built document shall be labelled at the lower righthand corner with the Contractor's name and address, date of commissioning,
document number (the document number to be obtained from the S.O.'s
Representative), title and following particulars: JABATAN KERJA RAYA
CAWANGAN KEJURUTERAAN ELEKTRIK
CONTRACT NO.:
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S10 - 3 of 3
10.2.6 Each of the As-Built documents shall be bound together with hard cover and
submitted in minimum four (4) sets upon issuance of Certificate of Practical
Completion of the project.
10.2.7 In addition, one set of the As-Installed drawing shall be submitted in the form of
tracing/original document, and four sets in CD ROM.
10.2.8 The cost of all these documents, prints, manuals, tools etc. are deemed to be
included in the Contract.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
11.0
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S11 - 1 of 3
APPENDIX
Figure 5.1:Typical Manhole design and specification
Figure 5.2: Typical manhole design and accessories for JC9, JC9C, R2A, R2A(M)
and R2B
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S11 - 2 of 3
Figure 5.3 : Typical manhole cover using concrete
Figure 5.4 : Typical Duct Depth Specification
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S11 - 3 of 3
For 100mm Duct Size
For 100mm Duct Size
Figure 5.5: Duct category
Innerduct
Figure 5.6: Innerduct category
Figure 5.7 : Pole depth Installation
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S12 - 1 of 3
12.0
LIST OF STANDARDS AND NORMATIVE REFERENCES
12.1
List of Standards
STANDARD
DESCRIPTION
Malaysia Standard
Telecommunication Cable : Plastic twin pair, triple and unit
MS 2121:2012
types, internal cable.
MS 2122:2012
Telecommunication Cable : Jumper Cable
MS 2123:2012
Telecommunication Cable : Self-supporting drop wire
Telecommunication Cable : Fully filled, unit twin moisture
MS 2124:2012
barrier polyethylene sheathed cable (FF PEUT)
Telecommunication Cable: Integral bearer - Moisture
MS 2125:2012
barrier polyethylene sheathed cable (IB PEUT)
MS IEC 60038:2006
IEC standard voltages
MS 863:1983
Welded Steel Tube
Rigid Polyvynil Cloride (PVC) For Underground
MS 1034:2013
Telecommunication Cables
Polyethylene (PE) Piping System for Water Supply – Part
MS 1058:PART 2: 2005
2: Pipes (Fourth Revision)
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE)
IEEE 802.3af
Power over Ethernet
IEEE 802.1p/q
Tagging/Priority-QoS at the Data-Link/MAC Sublayer
American National Standard Institute/ Telecommunications Industry
Association (ANSI/TIA)
Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer
ANSI/TIA-568.0-D
Premises
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling
ANSI/TIA-568.1.D
Standard
ANSI/TIA-568.2-D
Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling
ANSI/TIA-568.3-D
Optical Fibre Cabling and Components Standard
International Organization for Standardization and the International
Electrotechnical Commission (ISO/IEC)
ISO/IEC 11801-1:2017
Generic Cabling For Customer Premises
International Telecommunications Union Standard (ITU)
ITU-T H.323 (12/2009)
Packet-based multimedia communications systems
Procedures for real-time Group 3 facsimile communication
ITU-T T.38 (11/2015)
over IP networks
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
STANDARD
ITU-T G.652 (11/2016)
ITU-T G.657 (11/2016)
ITU-T G.711 (11/1988)
ITU-T G.722 (11/1988)
ITU-T G.726 (12/1990)
ITU-T
(10/2017)
G.729A/B
DESCRIPTION
Characteristics of a single-mode optical fibre and cable.
Characteristics of a bending-loss insensitive single-mode
optical fibre and cable
Pulse code modulation (PCM) of voice frequencies
7 kHz audio-coding within 64 kbit/s
40, 32, 24, 16 kbit/s Adaptive Differential Pulse Code
Modulation (ADPCM)
Reduced complexity 8 kbit/s CS-ACELP codec
Gigabit-capable passiveoptical networks
(GPON):
General Characteristics
British Standard
Gully tops and manhole tops for vehicular and pedestrian
areas — Design requirements, type testing, marking,
quality control
Specification for screwed and socketed steel tubes and
tubulars and for plain end steel tubes suitable for welding
or for screwing to BS 21 pipe threads
International Electrotechnical Commision
Electrical Installations for Buildings
American Society For Testing and Material
Standard Specification for Solid Wall High Density (HDPE)
Conduit Based on Controlled Outside Diameter
Standard Specification for Smooth-Wall Coilable
Polyethylene (PE) Conduit for Preassembled Wire and
Cable
ITU-T G.984 (03/2008)
BS EN 124:2015
BS 1387:1985
IEC 60364
ASTM F2160
ASTM D3485
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S12 - 2 of 3
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
12.2
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S12 - 3 of 3
Normative References
The following normative references are indispensable for the application of this
specification and technical code as below;
REFERENCE
DESCRIPTION
Malaysia Communications and Multimedia Commision
MCMC
MTSFB
TC
Fixed Network Facilities - In Building And External.
G024:2020
MCMC
MTSFB
TC Specification For Terminal Equipment Connecting To The
T001:2013
Public Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).
Specification For Analogueue Calling Line Identity
MCMC
MTSFB
TC
Presentation (A-Clip) Facility For Connection To Public
T002:2013
Switched Telephone Network (PSTN).
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
13.0
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S13 - 1 of 2
ABBREVIATIONS
For this specification, the following abbreviations and acronyms applies:
AC
ATA
BG
BMT
BTU
CO Trunk
DDI
DHCP
DID
DOME
DP
ER
FTB
FTTP
FWS
FXO
FXS
GI
GSM
HDPE
HSBB
IDD
IDF
IODF
IP
IPME
ISDN
ISP
LAN
MDF
MDP
METRO E
MGCP
MH
Alternating Current
Analogue Telephone Adapter
Business Gateway
Bandwidth Management Tool
Bandwidth Termination Unit
Central Office Trunk
Direct Dialing Inward (Europe)
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
Direct Inward Dialing
Direct over Metro-E
Distribution Point Box
Equipment Rack
Fibre Termination Box
Fibre to the Premise
Fibre Wall Socket
Foreign Exchange Office
Foreign Exchange Subscriber
Galvanised Iron
Global System for Mobile Communication
High Density Polyethylene
High Speed Broadband
International Direct Dialing
Intermediate Distribution Frame
Incoming Optical Distribution Frame
Internet Protocol
Internet Protocol Metro Ethernet
Integrated Services Digital Network
Internet Service Provider
Local Area Network
Main Distribution Frame
Main Distribution Point Box
Metro Ethernet
Media Gateway Control Protocol
Manhole
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM
(L-S16)
MLSP
MTSFB
NID
NPE
ONU
OODF
PABX
PBX
PRI
PSTN
PVC
RG
RJ11
RJ45
SBC
SDF
SIP
SKMM
TC
TE
UPE
UTP
VG
VOIP
VPN
WAN
WLAN
CKE.LS.01.16.(00).2021
Date: May 1990
Revision: 1
Date: June 2021
Page: S13 - 2 of 2
Multi Protocol Label Switching
Malaysian Technical Standards Forum Bhd
Network Interface Device
Network-Protection Equipment
Optical Network Unit
Outgoing Optical Distribution Frame
Public Automatic Branch Exchange
Public Branch Exchange
Primary Rate Interface
Public Switched Telephone Network
Polyvinyl Chloride
Resident Gateway
Registered Jack 11
Registered Jack 45
Session Border Controller
Subscriber Distribution Frame
Session Initiation Protocol
Suruhanjaya Komunikasi dan Multimedia Malaysia
Telecommunication Closet
Terminal Equipment
User-facing Provider Edge
Unshielded Twisted Pair
Voice Gateway
Voice Over Internet Protocol
Virtual Private Network
Wide Area Network
Wireless Local Area Network
SPECIFICATION FOR TELEPHONE SYSTEM (L-S16)
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
SPECIFICATION FOR
ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM
(L-S38)
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
CAWANGAN KEJURUTERAAN
ELEKTRIK
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: i of iii
SECTION
1.0
CONTENT
General
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.5
2.0
Installation, Configuration and Workmanship
2.1
2.2
2.3
3.0
Description
Firewall
Network Switches
Server
Storage
Wireless Access Point (Wi-Fi AP) System
Network Management System
User Equipment
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
5.0
Desription
Certified Installer
Certified Network Engineer
Network Equipment
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
4.0
Scope
Standards
Technical Particulars
Guarantees
Electrical System Requirement
Description
Desktop Computer & Desktop Workstation
Laptop
Telepresence System
Medical Display Monitor
Equipment Rack
5.1
5.2
5.3
Description
Network Rack
Server Rack
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
PAGE
S1/1 – S1/1
1
1
1
1
1
S2/1 – S2/1
1
1
1
S3/1 – S3/12
1
2
5
9
10
11
12
S4/1 – S4/8
1
1
4
7
8
S5/1 – S5/3
1
2
3
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: ii of iii
SECTION
6.0
CONTENT
Facilities for Data Centre, Server Room &
Telecommunication Closet Room (TCR)
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
6.5
6.6
6.7
6.8
6.9
7.0
Description
Precision Air Conditioner (PAC)
Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS)
Early Warning Smoke Detection System
Fire Suppression System
Water Leak Detection System
Environment Monitoring System (EMS)
Telecommunication Earthing System
Signal Reference Grid (SRG)
System of Cabling
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
7.16
7.17
7.18
Structured Cabling System
Type of Cables & Accessories
Singlemode Fibre Optic Cable
Multimode Fibre Optic Cable
Fibre Optic Cable Accessories
Twisted Pair Copper Cable
RJ45 Modular Jack
RJ45 Patch Panel
RJ45 Patch Cord
Modular Plug Terminated Link (MPTL)
Faceplate
Multi-user Telecommunications Outlet Assembly (MUTOA)
Cabling in Conduit, Trunking, Cable Tray and Cable Ladder
(Surface/ Concealed/ Suspended)
Cabling in Cable Basket and Fibre Raceway
Cabling in Underground Ducting and Manhole
Conduits and Trunking Space Factor
Identification of Services
Mounting Heights
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
PAGE
S6/1 – S6/11
1
3
4
5
6
6
7
8
10
S7/1 – S7/14
1
2
3
5
7
9
9
10
10
11
11
12
12
13
14
14
14
14
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: iii of iii
SECTION
8.0
CONTENT
Labelling
8.1
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.5
8.6
9.0
Testing and Commissioning
9.1
9.2
9.3
9.4
10.0
Test Instruments
Test and Test Certificates
Structured Cabling System Test
Network Equipment Test
Warranty and Support
10.1
10.2
11.0
Description
Equipment Rack Labelling
Network Switches, UPS and Other Equipment Labelling
Fibre Patch Panel and Fibre Patch Cord Labelling
UTP Patch Panel and UTP Patch Cord labelling
Data/ Voice Faceplates and Wireless Access Point
(Wi-Fi AP) Labelling
Description
Warranty
Shop Drawings and As-Built Documents
11.1
11.2
Shop Drawings
As Built Documents
PAGE
S8/1 – S8/6
1
1
2
3
4
5
S9/1 – S9/4
1
1
2
3
S10/1 – S10/1
1
1
S11/1 – S11/3
1
2
12.0
List of Standards
S12/1 – S12/2
13.0
Abbreviations
S13/1 – S13/3
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S1 - 1 of 1
1.0
GENERAL
1.1
SCOPE
1.1.1
This section of the Specifications describes and specifies requirements for the supply,
delivery, installation, testing, commissioning, handing over in approved working order and
maintenance during the Defects Liability Period of the whole Information and
Communication Technology (ICT) installation in accordance to the Specification, Bill of
Quantities, Conditions of Contract, Drawings etc.
1.2
STANDARDS
1.2.1
The material, equipment and installation shall conform to the principles of the latest
standards and its addendums laid down by the Malaysian Standards (MS), Suruhanjaya
Komunikasi & Multimedia Malaysia (SKMM), International Organisation for Standardisation
(ISO), Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers (IEEE), American National
Standards Institute (ANSI), Telecommunications Industry Association (TIA) and
International Electrotechnical Commission (IEC).
1.3
TECHNICAL PARTICULARS
1.3.1
The Contractor shall submit at the time of tendering all catalogues, detailed technical
particulars, name of manufacturers, brand, model numbers and guarantees in respect of
the equipment offered, which shall be binding. No departure from these technical particulars
and guarantees will be permitted except with the written approval of the Superintendent
Officer (S.O.) or S.O.’s Representative.
1.4
GUARANTEES
1.4.1
The Contractor shall guarantee the equipment to be supplied under this contract against
faulty design, materials and workmanship at the manufacturer’s works within the DLP.
1.5
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM REQUIREMENT
1.5.1
All equipment shall be rated for operation on a 230/400V (within the tolerance as defined
in MS IEC 60038; 230/400 V, +10%, -6%), 3-phase, 4 wire, 50Hz system with solidly
earthed neutral.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S2 - 1 of 1
2.0
INSTALLATION, CONFIGURATION AND WORKMANSHIP
2.1
DESCRIPTION
2.1.1
All works shall comply with the specification and shall be of best engineering practices and
shall be carried out and supervised by qualified, competent and skilled personnel.
2.1.2
The Contractor shall responsible for all related works which involve earthwork, hacking and
making good or any civil work for the installation. All labour, material and tools necessary
during the works shall be supplied or executed at the Contractor's cost. The Contractor
shall ensure the site is in a good condition after the installation completed.
2.2
CERTIFIED INSTALLER
2.2.1
The work of installation, termination, testing and commissioning of the structured cabling
system shall be conducted and carried out by a Certified Installer. The Certified Installer
shall be a competent person and certified by related cable manufacturer. The Contractor
shall submit the list of on-site Certified Installer complete with valid certificates to the S.O.
or S.O.’s Representative at least two (2) weeks prior to the installation.
2.3
CERTIFIED NETWORK ENGINEER
2.3.1
The work of configuration, testing and commissioning of the network equipment installed
shall be conducted and carried out by a Certified Network Engineer. The Certified Network
Engineer shall be a competent person and certified by related network equipment
manufacturer. The Contractor shall submit the list of on-site Certified Network Engineer
complete with valid certificates to the S.O. or S.O.’s Representative at least two (2) weeks
prior to the installation.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S3 - 1 of 12
3.0
NETWORK EQUIPMENT
3.1
DESCRIPTION
3.1.1
The network equipment including its software for network infrastructure e.g. Local Area
Network (LAN) generally consists of the following components: 3.1.1.1
Firewall
3.1.1.2
Network Switches
3.1.1.3
Server
3.1.1.4
Storage
3.1.1.5
Wireless LAN Access Point (Wi-Fi)
3.1.1.6
Network Management Software
3.1.2
All network equipment shall comply with the IPv4 and IPv6 requirement. It shall also comply
with IEC 61000 and CISPR 22 standards pertaining to Electromagnetic Compatibility
(EMC).
3.1.3
All network equipment shall be configured as per required such as VLANs, security policies
and IP Addressing of the network which suit to the requirement. Information of numbers of
VLANs, port assignments, permissions, security policies etc. shall be submitted to S.O. or
S.O.’s Representative for approval.
3.1.4
The size of network shall be categorised based on the following criteria:
3.1.4.1
Small network – network ports ≤ 200
3.1.4.2
Medium network – 200 < network ports ≤1000
3.1.4.3
Large network – network ports > 1000
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S3 - 2 of 12
3.2
FIREWALL
3.2.1
The Firewall and its features shall be of the following types: -
3.2.2
3.2.1.1
Firewall with basic features suitable for small size of network.
3.2.1.2
Firewall with standard features suitable for medium size of network.
3.2.1.3
Firewall with comprehensive features suitable for large size of network.
The firewall with basic features shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications: Firewall Throughput
Firewall IMIX
VPN Tunnel /Throughput
IPS Throughput
Antivirus Throughput
Concurrent connections
New connections/sec
Storage
Power Supply
Gigabit Ethernet Port
Management ports
General Management
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Network Protection
:
5.0 Gbps
2.0 Gbps
2 nos / 1.5 Gbps
1.5 Gbps
1.0 Gbps
3,000,000
30,000
Solid State Technology
Optional redundant power supply unit
Support 4 x 1 GbE port (min.)
2 x USB 3.0 and 1 x RJ45
Trouble shoot in graphical user interface
(GUI), automated firmware update, backup
and restore configuration by on demand,
daily, weekly or monthly. Default zones for
LAN, WAN, DMZ, VPN and Wi-Fi
Stateful inspection firewall, Intrusion
Prevention System (IPS) and Virtual Private
Network (VPN)
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S3 - 3 of 12
3.2.3
The firewall with standard features shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications: Firewall Throughput
Firewall IMIX
VPN Tunnel/Throughput
IPS Throughput
NGFW Throughput
Antivirus Throughput
Concurrent Connections
New Connections/sec
Storage
Power Supply
Gigabit Ethernet Port
Expansion Slot
Management Ports
High Availability
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
General Management
:
Reporting
Network Protection
:
:
10.0 Gbps
5.0 Gbps
10 nos / 3.0 Gbps
5.0 Gbps
4.0 Gbps
2.0 Gbps
4,000,000
100,000
Solid State Technology
Redundant power supply unit
4 x 1 GbE port, 2 x 10 GbE port (min.)
Copper/fibre/SFP/SFP+ module/port
2 x USB 3.0 and 1 x RJ45
Support active-active and active-passive
configuration
Trouble shoot in graphical user interface
(GUI), automated firmware update, backup
and restore configuration by on demand,
daily, weekly or monthly. Default zones for
LAN, WAN, DMZ, VPN and Wi-Fi.
Support on-board and central management
Intrusion Prevention System (IPS),
Advanced Threat Protection, Web protection
and control, Web Application Firewall and
Virtual Private Network (VPN).
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S3 - 4 of 12
3.2.4
The firewall with comprehensive features shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications: Firewall Throughput
Firewall IMIX
VPN Tunnel/Throughput
IPS Throughput
NGFW Throughput
Antivirus Throughput
Concurrent Connections
New Connections/sec
Storage
Power Supply
Gigabit Ethernet Port
Expansion Slot
Management Ports
High Availability
General Management
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Reporting
Network Protection
:
:
20.0 Gbps
8.0 Gbps
Unlimited nos / 5.0 Gbps
10.0 Gbps
10.0 Gbps
10.0 Gbps
10,000,000
150,000
Solid State Technology
Redundant power supply, hot swappable
4 x 1 GbE port, 4 x 10 GbE port (min.)
Copper/fibre/SFP/SFP+ module/port
2 x USB 3.0 and 1 x RJ45
Active – active configuration
Trouble shoot in graphical user interface
(GUI), automated firmware update, backup
and restore configuration by on demand, daily,
weekly or monthly. Default zones for LAN,
WAN, DMZ, VPN and Wi-Fi.
Support on-board and central management
Intrusion Prevention System (IPS),
Advanced Threat Protection, Web protection
and control, Web Application Firewall (WAF)
and Virtual Private Network (VPN).
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S3 - 5 of 12
3.3
NETWORK SWITCHES
3.3.1
All network switches shall comply with IEEE 802.3 with latest Ethernet technology and the
communication shall be based on Transmission Control Protocol /Internet Protocol
(TCP/IP).
3.3.2
The types of network switches shall be of the following types: -
3.3.3
3.3.2.1
Core Switch – used to interconnects the Distribution Switch and/or Access
Switch in the network.
3.3.2.2
Distribution Switch – used to interconnects the Access Switch located at
different building to the Core Switch in the network.
3.3.2.3
Access Switch – used to interconnects the end user devices (e.g. PC,
printers, telephones, Wi-Fi AP) to the network.
3.3.2.4
Server Farm Switch – used to interconnects several numbers of Servers to
the Core Switch in the Server Room.
CORE SWITCH
3.3.3.1 The Core Switch shall comply with the following minimum technical specifications: Layer Function
Number of Port
:
:
I/O Ports
:
Port Performance
:
Power Supply
IP Routing
High Availability
:
:
:
Layer 2/3/4 switching
As specified in the Drawing and/or Bill of
Quantities
Support 1/10 GbE (small network),
Support 1/10/25/40 GbE (medium network),
Support 1/10 GbE to 100 GbE (large network)
Wire speed, Non-blocking port (no over
subscription of switching fabric)
Redundant power supply, hot swappable
IPv4 and IPv6 requirement
Redundant supervisor and fabric
(only for modular chassis type)
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S3 - 6 of 12
3.3.4
DISTRIBUTION SWITCH
3.3.4.1 The Distribution Switch shall comply with the following minimum technical specifications: -
3.3.5
Layer Function
Number of Port
:
:
I/O Ports
:
Port Performance
:
Power Supply
IP Routing
High Availability
:
:
:
Layer 2/3/4 switching
As specified in the Drawing and/or Bill of
Quantities
Support 1/10/25/40 GbE (medium network),
Support 1/10 GbE to 100 GbE (large network)
Wire speed, Non-blocking port (no over
subscription of switching fabric)
Redundant power supply unit, hot swappable
IPv4 and IPv6 requirement
Redundant supervisor and fabric
(only for modular chassis type)
ACCESS SWITCH
3.3.5.1 The Access Switch shall comply with the following minimum technical specifications: Layer Function
Number of Ethernet Port
:
:
Stacking module/cable
Port Performance
:
:
Layer 2/4 switching
24 or 48 port 1000 Base-T
Minimum 2 port 10 GbE
10 Gbps speed (for stacking environment)
Wire speed, Non-blocking port (no over
subscription of switching fabric)
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S3 - 7 of 12
3.3.5.2 The Access Switch with Power Over Ethernet (PoE) shall comply with the following
minimum technical specifications: Layer Function
Number of Ethernet Port
:
:
Stacking Module/Cable
PoE Function
:
:
Port Performance
:
Layer 2/4 switching
24-port 1000 Base-T
Minimum 2 port 10 GbE
10 Gbps speed (for stacking environment)
Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) complies
with IEEE 802.3af and 802.3at (PoE+)
Wire speed, Non-blocking port (no over
subscription of switching fabric)
3.3.5.3 The Multi Gig or Multi Rate Switch shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications: Layer Function
Number of Port
:
:
Transceiver Speed
:
Stacking Module/Cable
Power Supply
PoE function
:
:
:
Port Performance
:
Layer 2 switching
As specified in the Drawing and/or Bill of
Quantities
Support 10 Gbps uplink, 1/ 2.5/5.0 Gbps
downlink
10 Gbps speed (for stacking environment)
Dual power supply unit, hot swappable
Power Sourcing Equipment (PSE) complies
with IEEE 802.3af, 802.3at, 802.3bt(PoE++)
Wire speed, Non-blocking port (no over
subscription of switching fabric)
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S3 - 8 of 12
3.3.6
SERVER FARM SWITCH
3.3.6.1 The Server Farm Switch shall have a Layer 2 and Layer 3 switching services and shall
comply with the following minimum technical specifications: -
3.3.7
Number of Port
:
Transceiver Speed
Power Supply
Port Performance
:
:
:
As specified in the Drawing and/or Bill of
Quantities
Support 1/10 Gbps
Dual power supply unit, hot swappable
Wire speed, Non-blocking port (no over
subscription of switching fabric)
TRANSCEIVER MODULE
3.3.7.1 The Singlemode Transceiver Module shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications: Transceiver Speed
Wavelength
:
:
10 Gbps uplink or higher
1310 nm or 1550 nm
3.3.7.2 The Multimode Transceiver Module shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications: Transceiver Speed
Wavelength
:
:
10 Gbps uplink or higher
850 nm or 1300 nm
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S3 - 9 of 12
3.4
SERVER
3.4.1
The server shall be rack based type and shall be housed in the 19” equipment rack.
3.4.2
The server shall be able to support virtual environment solution and shall support
redundancy and high availability (HA) configuration to prevent single engine failure.
3.4.3
The server shall be equipped with server management software and latest version of antivirus software.
3.4.4
The server for network management shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications: Processor
Processor sockets (CPU)
Number of core
Core speed
Cache per processor
Memory
Internal storage
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
RAID controllers
Drive bays (Hard disk)
PCIe I/O slots
Network Interface Card
Power Supply
Operating System
:
:
:
:
:
:
Intel or AMD processor with latest generation
Dual processor
4
2.0 GHz
11 MB
2 x 8 GB DDR4, minimum 8 DIMM slots,
Minimum 1TeraByte usable with at
least RAID 1 configuration
Support RAID 0/1/5/6
Minimum 8 slots
Minimum 3
Minimum 1 card
Dual power supply unit, hot swappable
Latest Version (e.g. Microsoft
Windows/Linux/Unix or any Hypervisor)
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S3 - 10 of 12
3.4.5
The server for system application infrastructure shall comply with the following minimum
technical specifications: Processor
Processor sockets (CPU)
Number of core
Core speed
Cache per processor
Memory
Internal storage
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
RAID controllers
Drive bays (Hard disk)
PCIe I/O slots
Network Interface Card
Power Supply
Operating System
:
:
:
:
:
:
Intel or AMD processor with latest generation
Dual processor
8
2.0 GHz
11 MB
4 x 8 GB DDR4, minimum 24 DIMM slots,
Minimum 1TeraByte useable with at
least RAID 1 configuration
Support RAID 0/1/5/6
Minimum 8 slots
Minimum 6
Minimum 2 card
Dual power supply unit, hot swappable
Latest Version (e.g. Microsoft
Windows/Linux/Unix or any Hypervisor)
3.5
STORAGE
3.5.1
The storage shall be of rack based type and shall be housed in the 19” equipment rack.
3.5.2
The size of the storage shall be calculated based on the current requirement and future
expansion.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S3 - 11 of 12
3.6
WIRELESS ACCESS POINT (WI-FI AP) SYSTEM
3.6.1
The Wi-Fi AP system shall be equipped with wireless management system software and/or
hardware and including the licences.
3.6.2
The Wi-Fi AP shall comply with latest version of IEEE 802.11 standard and shall be
compatible with the previous IEEE 802.11 a/b/g/n/ac standard.
3.6.2.1 The Wi-Fi AP shall comply with the following minimum technical specifications: Standard Compliance
Frequency Band
Modulation Technology
:
:
:
Antenna Technology
Radio Technology
Interface port
:
:
:
LED Indicator
:
PoE Function
:
IEEE 802.11 ax (Wi-Fi 6) or higher
Support 2.4 GHz or 5 GHz
Support 1024 QAM and Orthogonal
Frequency Division Multiple Access
(OFDMA),
2x2 Multi User - MIMO or higher
Support Triple Radio
Support 0.1/1/2.5 GbE
Base-T (RJ45 port)
Indicates Power On, Running, Alarm and
Fault
Support Power Over Ethernet (PoE) in
compliance with IEEE 802.3af, 802.3at,
802.3bt
3.6.2.2 The Wireless Controller or Management System shall comply with the following minimum
technical specifications: Platform
Number of Port
Expansion slot
Power Supply
Security Features
:
:
:
:
:
Appliance or Virtual
Minimum of 2 port Ethernet Base-T
Support SFP/SFP+ module/port
Support redundant power supply
Support WPA/WPA2/WPA3 authentication
and encryption, Wireless IPS
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S3 - 12 of 12
3.7
NETWORK MANAGEMENT SYSTEM
3.7.1
The Network Management System (NMS) shall be able to support the following minimum
technical specifications: 3.7.1.1
To monitor and manage wired and wireless network devices and shall be
able to detect, diagnose and resolve multi-vendor network performance
issues.
3.7.1.2
To support cloud computing, software defined network and big data
analytics environment. It shall be able to collect statistics on devices
performance, alarm data, traps, user data and analyses the collected
statistics to perform root cause analysis.
3.7.1.3
To provide unified management of small, medium and large size of networks
and multiple branch of campus network.
3.7.1.4
To monitor and manage third-party devices such as switches, firewall,
router, wireless access point and others in unified platform.
3.7.1.5
To provide configuration for batch import, export, modification, deletion,
templates to deploy configuration on devices and configuration wizard at
least for Layer 2 and Layer 3 networks, VLANs, DHCP, DNS, NAT, STP etc.
3.7.1.6
To allow network administrators to configure SSIDs, restrict access, allow
access, enable isolation user terminals, enable or disable transmission of
audio/video data, MAC address blacklist and whitelist, multiple security
authentication methods including portal, PSK, PPSK or latest.
3.7.1.7
To provide network topology, reporting on the overall of network health
status, log data in real-time with an interactive graphical user interface (GUI),
chart and graph.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S4 - 1 of 8
4.0
USER EQUIPMENT
4.1
DESCRIPTION
4.1.1
The user equipment shall be originated from the manufacturer, not a clone product, shall
be supplied with the software licenses, security software (e.g. Anti-virus) and warranty as
stated in the contract.
4.1.2
The user equipment generally consists of desktop computer, desktop workstation, laptop,
telepresence system, medical display monitor, etc.
4.2
DESKTOP COMPUTER AND DESKTOP WORKSTATION
4.2.1
The Desktop Computer for network administration usage shall comply with the following
minimum technical specifications: Processor
:
Processor sockets (CPU)
:
Number of core
:
Core speed (base frequency) :
Memory
:
Memory DIMM slot
:
Hard Drive
:
Network Interface Card
:
Port
:
Chassis Form Factor
:
Power Supply
:
Operating System
:
Security Software
:
Accessories
:
Display Monitor
:
Support
:
Intel processor or AMD with latest
generation
Core i5 or Ryzen 5
6
2.0 GHz
1 x 8GB DDR4 at 2666 MHz
2 slots
256 GB Solid State Drive
1000 Base-T (RJ-45)
4 x USB 3.0, 1 x DisplayPort
Micro
AC Adapter power supply unit
Latest version (e.g. Microsoft or Linux)
Anti-virus enterprise version
English Keyboard, Optical Mouse, All-In
One
Mount or Stand (height adjustable) to be
mounted behind monitor, etc.
21.5 inch, Backlighted LED, Full HD
Resolution (1920 x 1080)
24x7 Next Business Day
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S4 - 2 of 8
4.2.2
The Desktop Computer for standard office automation usage shall comply with the following
minimum technical specifications: Processor
:
Processor sockets (CPU)
:
Number of core
:
Core speed (base frequency) :
Memory
:
Memory DIMM slot
:
Hard Drive
:
Network Interface Card
:
Port
:
Chassis Form Factor
:
Wireless
:
Power Supply
:
Operating System
:
Accessories
:
Display Monitor
:
Support
:
Intel processor or AMD with latest generation
Core i5 or Ryzen 5
6
2.0 GHz (min)
1 x 8 GB DDR4 at 2666 MHz
2 slots
512 GB Solid State Drive
1000 Base-T (RJ-45)
4 x USB 3.0, 1 x DisplayPort
Micro
Integrated Intel Wi-Fi 6, dual band 802.11ax
AC Adapter power supply unit
Latest version (e.g. Microsoft or Linux)
English Keyboard, Optical Mouse, All-InOne
Mount or Stand (height adjustable) to be
mounted behind monitor, etc.
21.5 inch, Backlighted LED, Full HD
Resolution (1920 x 1080)
24x7 Next Business Day
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S4 - 3 of 8
4.2.3
The Desktop Workstation for high performance usage shall comply with the following
minimum technical specifications: Processor
:
Processor sockets (CPU)
:
Number of core
:
Core speed (base frequency) :
Chipset
:
Memory
:
Memory DIMM slot
:
Hard Drive
:
Network Interface Card
:
Graphic Card
:
Port
:
Chassis Form Factor
:
Power Supply
:
Operating System
:
Accessories
:
Display Monitor
:
Support
:
Intel Xeon processor with latest generation
Xeon W
8
3.4 GHz
Intel W480
2 x 16 GB DDR4 at 2666 MHz with ECC
4 slots
1TB Solid State Drive
1000 Base-T (RJ-45)
8 GB NVidia Quadro RTX 4000
4 x USB 3.0, 1 x DisplayPort
Full Tower
Energy Efficiency (80 plus gold rating)
Latest version (e.g. Microsoft or Linux)
Wired USB Keyboard (English), Optical
Mouse, etc.
27 inch, Backlighted LED, QHD
Resolution (2560 x 1440)
24x7 Next Business Day
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S4 - 4 of 8
4.3
LAPTOP
4.3.1
The Laptop for standard office automation usage shall comply with the following minimum
technical specifications: Processor
:
Processor sockets (CPU)
:
Number of core
:
Core speed (base frequency) :
Boost speed
:
Cache per processor
:
Memory
:
DIMM slots
:
Internal storage
:
Network Interface Card
:
I/O ports
:
Battery
:
Operating System
Adapter
Keyboard
Wireless
:
:
:
:
Display
Webcam
Weight
Accessories
Support
:
:
:
:
:
Intel or AMD processor with latest generation
Intel Core i5 or Ryzen 5
4
1.6 GHz
4.2 GHz
6 MB
1 x 8 GB DDR4
2 DIMM slots
512 GB Solid State Drive
Built-in RJ-45, Gigabit Ethernet
2 x USB 3.2 or latest generation ports,
HDMI 1.4, Universal Audio Jack
Minimum 40 Whr with Fast Charge
capability
Latest version (e.g. Microsoft or Linux)
AC Adapter
Backlit keyboard
Integrated Intel Wi-Fi 6, dual band 802.11ax
and Bluetooth 5.1
14” HD (1366 x 768) Anti-glare Non-touch
720p webcam with microphone
1.7 kg (maximum)
Backpack, USB optical mouse etc.
24x7 Next Business Day
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S4 - 5 of 8
4.3.2
The Laptop for managerial purposes usage shall comply with the following minimum
technical specifications: Processor
:
Form Factor
:
Processor sockets (CPU)
:
Number of core
:
Core speed (base frequency) :
Boost speed
:
Cache per processor
:
Memory
:
Internal storage
:
Network Interface Card
:
I/O ports
:
Battery
Operating System
Adapter
Keyboard
Wireless
:
:
:
:
:
Display
:
Webcam
Sensor
Weight
Accessories
Support
:
:
:
:
:
Intel or AMD processor with latest generation
2-in-1 (convertible/ support tablet)
Intel Core i7 or Ryzen 7
4
1.8 GHz
4.9 GHz
8 MB
1 x 16 GB LPDDR3 at 2133 MHz
512 GB Solid State Drive
USB-C to RJ-45 adapter
2 x USB 3.2 or latest generation ports,
HDMI 1.4, Universal Audio Jack
Minimum 52 Whr with Long-life battery
Latest version (e.g. Microsoft or Linux)
USB Type-C Adapter
Backlit keyboard
Integrated Intel Wi-Fi 6, dual band 802.11ax
and Bluetooth 5.1
14” FHD (1920 x 1080) Anti-glare with
capacitive touch screen
720p webcam with microphone
Proximity sensor
1.4 kg (maximum)
Backpack, Wireless optical mouse etc.
24x7 Next Business Day
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S4 - 6 of 8
4.3.3
The Laptop for mobile workstation usage shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications: Processor
:
Form Factor
:
Processor sockets (CPU)
:
Number of core
:
Core speed (base frequency) :
Boost speed
:
Cache per processor
:
Memory
:
DIMM slots
:
Internal storage
:
Network Interface Card
:
I/O ports
:
Graphic card
Battery
Operating System
Adapter
Keyboard
Wireless
Display
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Display brightness
Webcam
Accessories
External Monitor
:
:
:
:
Mobile cart
:
UPS battery
:
Support
:
Intel or AMD processor with latest
generation
Mobile Workstation
Intel Core i5 (45W H-series)
4
2.6 GHz
4.6 GHz
8 MB
2 x 8 GB DDR4 2933MHz
4 DIMM slots
512 GB Solid State Drive
Integrated RJ-45, Gigabit Ethernet
2 x USB 3.2 or latest generation ports,
HDMI 1.4, Universal Audio Jack
6 GB NVIDIA Quadro RTX 3000
Minimum 95 Whr with Long-life battery
Latest version (e.g. Microsoft or Linux)
180W AC Adapter
Backlit keyboard
Intel Dual Band AX201 2x2 c/w Bluetooth 5.1
15” Ultra HD (3840x2160) resolution,
Anti-glare, 100 Adobe gamut and support
High Dynamic Range (HDR)
500 nits
720p webcam with microphone
Backpack, USB optical mouse etc
24” Medical Display Monitor with HDMI
input
Mobile cart to fit proposed mobile
workstation and external monitor
UPS battery to support External monitor and
mobile workstation
24x7 Next Business Day
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S4 - 7 of 8
4.4
TELEPRESENCE SYSTEM
4.4.1
The Telepresence System consists of integrated multi-codec, multi-monitor, multimicrophone and multi-channel speaker systems. It shall be able to present interactive audio
and video in real-time at different locations.
4.4.2
The Telepresence System shall comply with the following minimum technical specifications:
Display System
:
Camera
:
Video Requirement
:
Audio Requirement
:
Network Requirement
:
User Interface
Security
:
:
Support
:
Full HD video monitor display
(1920 x 1080) resolution
Support HDMI interface
Full HD camera, (1920 x 1080) resolution
Locked PTZ position set and fixed focus
Comply with H.264 and H.239 standards
1080 p per codec at 2 Mbps
16 x 9 aspect ratio
Comply with AAC-LD and AAC-LC standards
2 x digital michrophone array pods
50Hz – 20kHz frequency response
1 GbE Base-T (RJ-45 port), support
IPv4, IPv6 requirement and latest application
platform (e.g. Microsoft Office
Communications Server integration,
Microsoft ICE, Skype, Meet, Zoom etc.)
Web based management, SNMP
Media Encryption (H.323, SIP),
AES-128, AES-256, Authenticated access to
admin menus, web interface and telnet API
24x7 Next Business Day
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S4 - 8 of 8
4.5
MEDICAL DISPLAY MONITOR
4.5.1
The Medical Display Monitor with 5.0 megapixel (MP) shall comply with the following
minimum technical specifications: Screen Technology
:
Active Screen Size
:
Resolution
:
Viewing Image
:
Bit depth
:
Viewing angle
:
Ambient Light Compensation :
Sensor
:
DICOM calibrated luminance :
Video Input Signal
:
Screen Protection
:
EMI compliance
:
Support
:
4.5.2
LCD, dual monitor
21.3” diagonal
2100 x 2800 pixels
Color/ Gray
30 bit
1780
Provided
Front Sensor
600 cd/m2
DisplayPort
Protective, anti-reflective glass cover
Comply with IEC 60601-1-2
24x7 Next Business Day
The Medical Display Monitor with 3.0 megapixel (MP) shall comply with the following
minimum technical specifications: Screen Technology
:
Active Screen Size
:
Resolution
:
Viewing Image
:
Bit depth
:
Viewing angle
:
Ambient Light Compensation :
Sensor
:
DICOM calibrated luminance :
Video Input Signal
:
Screen Protection
:
EMI compliance
:
Support
:
LCD, dual monitor
21.3” diagonal
2048 x 1536 pixels
Color/ Gray
30 bit
1780
Provided
Front Sensor
500 cd/m2
DisplayPort
Protective, anti-reflective glass cover
Comply with IEC 60601-1-2
24x7 Next Business Day
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S5 - 1 of 3
5.0
EQUIPMENT RACK
5.1
DESCRIPTION
5.1.1
The Equipment Rack shall be of a standard nineteen inch (19”) factory fabricated rack and
shall be of the following types:5.1.1.1
Network Rack shall house the equipment such as switches, fibre optic patch
panel, UTP patch panel, firewall and others, suitable for floor standing or
wall mounted type of installation.
5.1.1.2
Server Rack shall house the servers equipment, storage and accessories,
suitable for floor standing type of installation in the Server Room.
5.1.2
The network rack shall preferably be located at a centrally located room within 70 meters
radius of serving working station area with 90 meters of maximum cable length.
5.1.3
The rack type Power Distribution Unit (PDU) shall be equipped with power supply indicator
and on/off switch. The PDU shall comply with IEC 60320 latest edition.
5.1.4
All fibre optic, twisted pair and power cable incoming to the equipment rack shall be of topentry. A minimum of two (2) meters slack cable shall be allowed to give movement tolerance
to the equipment rack.
5.1.5
The floor standing equipment racks shall be equipped with horizontal, vertical and slack
cable management accessories to eliminate cable stress, to maintain a neat and organised
cable route within a rack.
5.1.6
Velcro tie shall be used to bundle or manage all cables in the equipment rack in order to
make it tidy and neat. The velcro tie shall be of heavy-duty type, able to fasten and
unfastened repeatedly and reusable.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S5 - 2 of 3
5.2
NETWORK RACK
5.2.1
The Network Rack shall be of stamped metal plate with black epoxy coating finishes.
5.2.2
The Network Rack in TCR shall be rated for 1000kg static load and shall comply with the
following minimum technical specifications: Rack Unit
Width / Depth
Frame / Panel Thickness
Front / Rear Door
Top Entry Cable Slot
Vertical Cable Management
Rack PDU
Earthing connection
Accessories
5.2.3
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
42 U
800 mm / 1000 mm
2 mm / 1.5 mm
Double-leaf, lockable and perforated door
2 slots with air sealing and cable grommet
4 angle side
16A socket outlet type C13
1 x 16 sq.mm PVC rack bonding conductor
Lockable castor wheel and heavy-duty
adjustable levelling feet
The Network Rack in Server Room shall be rated for 1500kg static load and shall comply
with the following minimum technical specifications: Rack Unit
Width / Depth
Frame / Panel Thickness
Front / Rear Door
Top Entry Cable Slot
Vertical Cable Management
Rack PDU
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
Earthing connection
Blank Panel
Accessories
:
:
:
42 U
800 mm / 1000 mm
2 mm / 1.5 mm
Double leaf, lockable and perforated door
2 slots with air sealing and cable grommet
4 angle side
16A socket outlet type C13 and 32A 3-pin
Commando Plug
1 x 16 sq.mm PVC rack bonding conductor
1U, 2U or 5U
Lockable castor wheel and heavy-duty
adjustable levelling feet
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S5 - 3 of 3
5.2.4
The Wall Mounted Network Rack shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications: Rack Unit
Width / Depth
Frame / Panel Thickness
Front Door
Top Entry Cable Slot
Trailing Socket
Earthing connection
Accessories
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
9U / 15 U
600 mm / 800 mm
1.5 mm / 1.2 mm
Single leaf, lockable and perforated door
2 slots with air sealing and cable grommet
3 nos 13A 3-pin switched socket outlet
1 x 16 sq.mm PVC rack bonding conductor
Heavy duty wall mounted bracket
5.3
SERVER RACK
5.3.1
The Server Rack shall be of stamped metal plate with black epoxy coating finishes. It shall
be ready made or recommended by the server manufacturer.
5.3.2
The Servers Rack shall be rated for 1500kg static load and shall comply with the following
minimum technical specifications: Rack Unit
Width / Depth
Frame / Panel Thickness
Front / Rear Door
Top Entry Cable Slot
Rack PDU
:
:
:
:
:
:
Earthing connection
:
Blank Panel
Accessories
:
:
Monitoring accessories
:
42 U
600 mm or 800 mm / 1000 mm
2 mm / 1.5 mm
Double leaf, lockable and perforated door
2 slots with air sealing and cable grommet
C13 and C19 socket outlet 32A 3-pin
commando plug
1 x 16 sq.mm PVC rack bonding conductor or
25 mm x 3 mm copper tape
1U, 2U or 5U
Lockable castor wheel and heavy-duty
adjustable levelling feet
Keyboard/Video/Mouse (KVM) console
switch
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S6 - 1 of 11
6.0
FACILITIES FOR DATA CENTRE, SERVER ROOM AND TELECOMMUNICATION
CLOSET ROOM (TCR)
6.1
DESCRIPTION
6.1.1
The equipment rack shall be housed in a designated room which is either Data Centre or
Server Room or TCR. The rooms shall comply with ISO/IEC 11801-5, ANSI/TIA-569.E and
ANSI/TIA 942 B.
6.1.2
Data Centre is designed to house a number of critical servers, storage and database with
24x7 days operation which is required to be monitored, controlled and no compromise with
any error in data integrity, security, losses or power failure. The Data Centre shall have its
dedicated support rooms or areas as follows: 6.1.2.1
Server Room to house the ICT network infrastructure e.g. switches, server,
storage etc.
6.1.2.2
Mechanical & Electrical (M&E) rooms for equipment e.g. centralised UPS,
switchboard, chiller distribution unit (CDU), firefighting cylinder, etc.
6.1.2.3
Network Operation Center (NOC) or Command Center for IT supporting
staffs.
6.1.2.4
Staging Area for ICT equipment to be inspected, configured and tested to
ensure deployment readiness.
6.1.2.5
Media Storage Area e.g. documentation, hard disk drives, tape drives,
compact disc etc.
6.1.3
Server Room is designed to house servers or storages with 24x7 days operation and no
compromise with any error in data integrity, security, losses or power failure. It shall
accommodate several units of equipment racks.
6.1.4
A Main Telecommunication Closet Room (MTCR) is designed to house core or distribution
switches, non-critical server or storage and shall accommodate more not than two (2) units
of equipment racks.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S6 - 2 of 11
6.1.5 A Telecommunication Closet Room (TCR) is designed to house access switches and
shall accommodate not more than two (2) units of equipment racks.
6.1.6
Facilities for all related rooms are as follows:
Facilities
UPS
PAC
FSS
WLD
SD
EMS
Data Centre
Centralised
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Server Room
Centralised
✓
✓
✓
✓
✓
Main TCR
Rack type
X
X
X
X
X
TCR
Rack type
X
X
X
X
X
Room
✓ - Provided
Table 6.1
X - Not Provided
Type of Room and Its Facilities
UPS
-
Uninterruptible Power Supply
PAC
-
Precision Air-Conditioner
FSS
-
Fire Suppression System
WLD
-
Water Leak Detection System
SD
-
Early Warning Smoke Detection System
EMS
-
Environment Monitoring System
Note
:
For MTCR and TCR, the air-conditioning unit and portable fire
suppression system shall be provided by the Mechanical Contractor.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S6 - 3 of 11
6.2
PRECISION AIR-CONDITIONER (PAC)
6.2.1
The precision air-conditioner (PAC) system shall be of rack based type, support hot and/or
cold aisle containment system and shall be able to eliminate hot/cold air mixing in order to
maximise cooling efficiency to the network equipment.
6.2.2
The PAC shall comply with the following minimum technical specifications :-
6.2.3
6.2.4
Performance
:
Type
Cooling Capacity
Monitoring System
:
:
:
23°C ± 1 Rack inlet temperature comply with
ASHRAE TC9.9
Chilled Water or Air-Cooled type
10kW to 50kW for each unit
Built in monitoring and control system via TCP/IP
The Chilled Water type cooling system shall consist of the following components :6.2.3.1
In-row rack cooling unit complete with evaporators, chilled water piping (one
length with no joint in between) come with closed-cell insulation, condensate
pipe, 2-way valve, sockets, control system, overflow sensor, thermostat,
cabling and control humidistat (if applicable).
6.2.3.2
Chiller Distribution Unit (CDU) complete with isolation valve, balancing
valve, a set of distribution pipes and any other accessories which is required
to complete the CDU.
The Air-Cooled type cooling system shall consist of the following components: 6.2.4.1
In-row rack cooling unit complete with a set of refrigeration system,
evaporators, copper piping complete with closed cell insulation, condensate
pipe, valve, cable, control system and thermostat control.
6.2.4.2
The outdoor unit shall consist of condenser coil, copper piping complete with
closed cell insulation, etc.
6.2.4.3
The compressor shall be variable speed or inverter type complete with
rotalock valve for easy maintenance.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S6 - 4 of 11
6.2.5
IN-ROW RACK COOLING UNIT
6.2.5.1 The In-row rack cooling unit shall be of 42U height with horizontally air discharge patterns.
The nominal input voltage shall be of 220-240V, 50Hz system.
6.2.5.2 The In-row rack cooling unit shall come with redundancy configuration and controllable
temperature.
6.2.5.3 The In-row rack cooling unit shall be able to achieve rack inlet temperature at 0.1°C
tolerance.
6.2.5.4 The fan shall be electronically commutated (EC) motor with variable speed and
automatically regulated by microprocessor based controller through all modes of operation.
The fan shall be of modular and hot swappable type.
6.2.5.5 The In-row rack cooling unit shall be integrated with air filtering system to reduce the
concentration of dust. The filter shall be greater than 20% efficiency comply with ASHRAE
52.1 and ASHRAE 52.2.
6.2.5.6 The proposed solution by the contractor shall be of fully contain in-row system complete
with power management unit, touch screen panel to monitor the system status, power
usage effectiveness (PUE), etc.
6.2.5.7 The In-row rack cooling unit shall be able to send information status and integrate with
EMS server through TCP/IP or SNMP protocol.
6.3
UNINTERRUPTIBLE POWER SUPPLY (UPS)
6.3.1
The Uninterruptible Power Supply (UPS) shall be of modular and scalable type.
6.3.2
For Data Centre or Server Room, the UPS power module and battery shall be of rack based
and hot swappable type. The power modules shall have high availability or redundancy
configuration (i.e. N+1) and the battery modules shall be provided with not less than thirty
(30) minutes backup time.
6.3.3
The UPS shall be able to send information status and integrate with EMS server through
TCP/IP or SNMP protocol.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S6 - 5 of 11
6.4
EARLY WARNING SMOKE DETECTION SYSTEM
6.4.1
The system shall consist of highly sensitive laser based smoke detector using aspirated air
sampling connected to sampling pipes. The type of sampling pipes shall be copper.
6.4.2
The system shall be provided with a single or dual sample inlets with separate chamber for
each inlet, internal thermal sensor flow monitoring, smoke detection and exhaust pipes.
6.4.3
The system shall comply with EN 54-20 and Jabatan Bomba dan Penyelamat Malaysia
requirements. It shall have alarm level outputs as follows: 6.4.3.1
A Pre-Signal Alarm shall activate the visual and audible alarm in the fire risk
area.
6.4.3.2
An Alarm Signal shall send signal to the EMS server through TCP/IP or
SNMP protocol.
6.4.4
The system shall indicate the condition of the smoke sensors either dusty or dirty.
6.4.5
The system’s detector, filter, aspirator and relay outputs shall be housed in an enclosure
and shall be arranged in such a way that air is drawn from the fire risk area. The air sample
is passed through an external filter and detector.
6.4.6
The system’s detector shall be of laser based type and shall have an obscuration sensitivity
range of 0.025 – 20% obscuration per metre.
6.4.7
The sampling pipe shall comply with latest BS 6266, smooth bore type with an internal
diameter range between 19 to 21 mm. All joints in the sampling pipes shall be air tight using
solvent cement.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S6 - 6 of 11
6.5
FIRE SUPPRESSION SYSTEM
6.5.1
The Fire Suppression System shall comply with NFPA and ISO 14520 on Clean Agent Fire
Extinguishing System with zero ozone depleting and low global warming nitrogen inert gas
system.
6.5.2
The clean agent gas shall electrically non-conduct in both the liquid and gaseous state. It
shall be of equipment and human safe, leave no residue, colourless and odourless liquefied
compressed gas type which is suitable to be used in the Data Centre or Server Room.
6.5.3
The fire suppression system shall able to send information status and integrate with EMS
server through TCP/IP or SNMP protocol.
6.6
WATER LEAK DETECTION SYSTEM
6.6.1
The Water Leak Detection System shall consist of control panel, sensing cable and graphic
monitoring display panel. The system shall simultaneously detect the presence of water at
any point along the sensing cable and trigger the alarm system control panel.
6.6.2
The control panel shall capable of monitoring up to accumulated length of 150 metre. The
precision distance to locate the leak location shall be less than 1 metre. The storage
capacity shall support minimum of 800 time-stamped events which stored in non-volatile
memory and in First-In-First-Out order.
6.6.3
The sound of alarm system e.g. buzzer shall be not more than 90 dB and equipped with
silence button.
6.6.4
The sensing cable shall be able to detect the presence of water and any other conductive
liquids. The cable shall consists of two or four wire served as liquid sensing and continuity
wire. The cable shall made of non-flame propagating and self-extinguishing material.
6.6.5
The water leak detection system shall able to send information status and integrate with
EMS server through TCP/IP or SNMP protocol.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S6 - 7 of 11
6.7
ENVIRONMENT MONITORING SYSTEM (EMS)
6.7.1
The Environment Monitoring System (EMS) shall be able to provide comprehensive
management and monitoring of power, cooling, security and energy consumption in Data
Centre or Server Room.
6.7.2
The EMS hardware and software shall comply with the following minimum technical
specifications: 6.7.2.1
Real-time monitoring, instant fault notification and accessible by multiple
authorised users from anywhere on the network.
6.7.2.2
Support multi-vendor environment for monitoring any devices from any
manufacturer through TCP/IP or SNMP protocol.
6.7.2.3
Integrate with building management system for information on the security,
electrical and mechanical system in the Data Centre or Server Room.
6.7.2.4
Graphical and custom reporting for ease of data collection, distribution and
analysis. Centralised repository for ease of access to the historical alerts or
data through one central database.
6.7.2.5
User-friendly interface using any web browser and shall be able to send
notification or alert signal via SMS e.g. WhatsApp or email.
6.7.2.6
Provided with dual power supply, latest version of operating system, 2 GHz
AMD/Intel processor, Full HD screen resolution and 1 TB data storage.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S6 - 8 of 11
6.8
TELECOMMUNICATION EARTHING SYSTEM
6.8.1
The telecommunication earthing system shall comply with basic safety requirements in
accordance to IEC 30129, IEC 60364 and ANSI/TIA 607-C standards.
6.8.2
The generic telecommunication earthing infrastructure shall originate at the electrical main
earthing bar and extended throughout the building. The infrastructure shall consists of the
following components as shown in Figure 6.1: -
6.8.3
6.8.2.1
Primary Bonding Bar (PBB)
6.8.2.2
Secondary Bonding Bar (SBB)
6.8.2.3
Telecommunication Bonding Conductor (TBC)
6.8.2.4
Telecommunication Bonding Backbone (TBB)
6.8.2.5
Backbone Bonding Conductor (BBC)
6.8.2.6
Rack Bonding Conductor (RBC)
6.8.2.7
Rack Bonding Terminal (RBT)
6.8.2.8
Equipment Bonding Terminal (EBT)
The Primary Bonding Bar (PBB) shall be used as a connection point of telecommunication
earthing infrastructure to the electrical main earthing bar and as a final attachment point for
the SBB(s). The PBB shall comply with the following minimum technical specifications: Dimension
Material
Accessories
:
:
:
Type
Location
:
:
50 mm width x 6 mm thickness x 300 mm length
Tinned Copper
Bar mounted on porcelain insulator and provided
with bolts, nuts, spring washer and jam nuts for
copper tape connection.
Ready made 6 way with M6 bolts and nuts
SDF Room/MTCR/TCR
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S6 - 9 of 11
Figure 6.1: Illustrative diagram of Telecommunication Earthing System
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S6 - 10 of 11
6.8.4
The Secondary Bonding Bar (SBB) shall be used as a connection point for
telecommunication equipment e.g. equipment rack, telephone vertical frame or DP, etc.
The SBB shall comply with the following minimum technical specifications: Dimension
Material
Accessories
:
:
:
Type
Location
:
:
25 mm width x 6 mm thickness x 300 mm length
Tinned Copper
Bar mounted on porcelain insulator and provided
with bolts, nuts, spring washer and jam nuts for
copper tape connection.
Ready made 6 way with M6 bolts and nuts
MTCR, TCR or Server Room
6.8.5
The Telecommunication Bonding Conductor (TBC) of 25mm x 6mm copper tape shall
connect the PBB to the electrical main earthing bar.
6.8.6
The Telecommunication Bonding Backbone (TBB) of 25mm x 6mm copper tape shall
connect all SBBs with the PBB.
6.8.7
Whenever two or more TBBs are used within a multi-storey building, the TBBs shall be
bounded together with a Backbone Bonding Conductor (BBC) at the top floor. The size of
BBC is 25mm x 6mm copper tape.
6.8.8
The Rack Bonding Conductor (RBC) of 16 sq.mm PVC shall connect the Rack Bonding
Terminal (RBT) of equipment rack to the SBB.
6.9
SIGNAL REFERENCE GRID (SRG)
6.9.1
For Data Centre, a reliable signal reference shall be provided by an SRG dedicated at least
to a functional unit or a system block i.e. SRG for Raised Flooring System as shown in
figure 6.2. The SRG shall address the discharge of electrostatic energy as stated in ISO/IEC
14763-2.
6.9.2 In latest ISO/IEC 30129, the mesh bonding network is constructed using the access-floor
pedestals and stringers. The flooring system shall be electrically continuous and shall be
bonded together at intervals no greater than every 6 pedestals in each direction using
25mm x 3mm copper tape and pedestal bonding clamps.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S6 - 11 of 11
6.9.3
The mesh bonding network shall be constructed from flat conductors using prefabricated
copper strip with minimum 50mm width x 0.5mm thickness . All crossings and jointed
sections shall employ exothermic welding.
Figure 6.2: Typical Installation of SRG
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S7 - 1 of 14
7.0
SYSTEM OF CABLING
7.1
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM
7.1.1
The structured cabling system shall consists of a combination of the following components:
7.1.1.1
Backbone cabling
7.1.1.2
Horizontal cabling
7.1.2
The external backbone cabling shall be of an interconnection between one equipment rack
in Telecommunication Closet Room (TCR) to another in different buildings within the same
campus network. The internal backbone cabling shall be of an interconnection between one
equipment rack to another in the same building which can be in different or in the same
floor. Singlemode or multimode fibre optic cable shall be used for the backbone cabling.
The minimum bending radius for backbone cables shall be ten (10) times the overall cable
diameter.
7.1.3
The horizontal cabling shall be of a cabling from patch panel in the equipment rack to the
individual RJ45 faceplate using unshielded twisted pair (UTP) cable. For area where the
horizontal cabling routed with high radiation or source of electromagnetic field (EMF) e.g.
X-ray or MRI machine and operating theater, shielded twisted pair (STP) cable shall be
used. The minimum bending radius for horizontal cables shall be four (4) times the overall
cable diameter. The horizontal cable for PoE application shall be bundled up to a maximum
of 24 cables per bundle.
7.1.4
The structured cabling system shall be able to support signal transmission for data, voice
and video application. No cable jointing shall be allowed for the structured cabling system
installation.
7.1.5
The internal backbone cabling and horizontal cabling shall be installed in separate trunking.
They shall be routed parallel to the building wall and column, lies in a coordinated manner
with other services.
7.1.6
The system shall be installed in accordance to the latest ANSI/TIA 568-D, ISO/IEC
11801 standard and manufacturer’s cable installation guideline for 25 years product and
application warranty. All components shall be from single brand manufacturer and comply
with end to end solutions requirement.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S7 - 2 of 14
7.2
TYPES OF CABLES AND ACCESSORIES
7.2.1
The types of cables for backbone cabling shall be of the following type and complete with
its accessories: -
7.2.2
7.2.1.1
Outdoor Singlemode Fibre Optic Cable
7.2.1.2
Indoor Singlemode Fibre Optic Cable
7.2.1.3
Singlemode Pigtail, Adapter and Patch Cord
7.2.1.4
Outdoor Multimode Fibre Optic Cable
7.2.1.5
Indoor Multimode Fibre Optic Cable
7.2.1.6
Multimode Pigtail, Adapter and Patch Cord
7.2.1.7
Fibre Optic Cable Splicing Cassette
7.2.1.8
Fibre Optic Patch Panel
The types of cables for horizontal cabling shall be of the following type and complete with
its accessories: 7.2.2.1
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Copper Cable
7.2.2.2
Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) Copper Cable
7.2.2.3
RJ-45 Modular Jack
7.2.2.4
RJ-45 Patch Panel
7.2.2.5
RJ-45 Patch Cord
7.2.3.6
Modular Plug Terminated Link (MPTL)
7.2.3.7
Faceplate
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S7 - 3 of 14
7.3
SINGLEMODE FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
7.3.1
Outdoor Singlemode Fibre Optic Cable shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568.3-D,
ISO/IEC 11801-1, ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 and the following minimum technical
specifications: Number of core
Fibre Class
Core/Cladding diameter
Cable Type
Jacket Material
Armoured
Maximum attenuation
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
6 core
Optical Singlemode 2 (OS 2) type
≤ 9 µm / 125 µm
Loose Tube
Polyethylene (PE)
Corrugated Steel-armoured
0.30 dB/km at 1550 nm
0.40 dB/km at 1310 nm
10 km at 1310 nm wavelength
10 Gbps Ethernet distance
:
10 GbE cable distance
:
Support up to 10km distance with less than
6.2 dB total insertion loss with maximum of 2
connections
25 GbE cable distance
:
Support up to 10km distance with less than
6.7 dB total insertion loss with maximum of 2
connections
40 GbE cable distance
:
Support up to 10km distance with less than
6.7 dB total insertion loss with maximum of 2
connections
100 GbE cable distance
:
Support up to 10km distance with less than
6.3 dB total insertion loss with maximum of 2
connections
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S7 - 4 of 14
7.3.2
Indoor Singlemode Fibre Optic Cable shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568.3-D, ISO/IEC 118011 and the following minimum technical specifications: Number of Core
Fibre Class
Core/Cladding diameter
Cable Type
Jacket Material
Flame Test Method
Maximum attenuation
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
6 core
OS 2 type
≤ 9 µm / 125 µm
Tight Buffer
Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH)
IEC 60754-2, IEC 61034-2
0.50 dB/km at 1550 nm
0.50 dB/km at 1310 nm
10 km at 1310 nm wavelength
10 Gbps Ethernet distance
:
10 GbE cable distance
:
Support up to 10km distance with less than
6.2 dB total insertion loss with maximum of 2
connections
25 GbE cable distance
:
Support up to 10km distance with less than
6.7 dB total insertion loss with maximum of 2
connections
40 GbE cable distance
:
Support up to 10km distance with less than
6.7 dB total insertion loss with maximum of 2
connections
100 GbE cable distance
:
Support up to 10km distance with less than
6.3 dB total insertion loss with maximum of 2
connections
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S7 - 5 of 14
7.3.3
Singlemode Pigtail shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568.3-D and the following minimum
technical specifications: Fibre Class
Core/Cladding diameter
Connector Type
:
:
:
OS 2 type
≤ 9 µm / 125 µm
LC
Jacket Material
Flame Test Method
:
:
Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH) or PVC
IEC 60754-2, IEC 61034-2
7.4
MULTIMODE FIBRE OPTIC CABLE
7.4.1
Outdoor Multimode Fibre Optic Cable shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568.3-D, ISO/IEC 118011, ANSI/ICEA S-87-640 and the following minimum technical specifications: Number of Core
Fibre Class
Core/Cladding diameter
Cable Type
Jacket Material
Armoured
Maximum attenuation
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
10 GbE cable distance
:
25 GbE cable distance
:
6 core
Optical Multimode OM4 or OM5
50 µm / 125 µm
Loose Tube
Polyethylene (PE)
Corrugated Steel-armoured
3.00 dB/km at 850 nm
1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm (OM4)
1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm (OM5)
Support up to 500m distance at 850nm with
less than 2.9 dB total insertion loss with
maximum of 2 connections
Support up to 130m distance at 850nm
with less than 1.3 dB total insertion loss with
maximum of 2 connections
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S7 - 6 of 14
7.4.2
40 GbE cable distance
:
Support up to 150m distance at 850nm with
less than 1.5 dB total insertion loss with
maximum of 2 connections
100 GbE cable distance
:
Support up to 150m distance at 850nm with
less than 1.5 dB total insertion loss with
maximum of 2 connections
Indoor Multimode Fibre Optic Cable shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568.3-D and ISO/IEC
11801-1 and the following minimum technical specifications: Number of Core
Fibre Class
Core/Cladding diameter
Cable Type
Jacket Material
Flame Test Method
Maximum attenuation
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
6 core
Optical Multimode 4 (OM4) or (OM5)
50 µm / 125 µm
Tight Buffer
Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH)
IEC 60754-2, IEC 61034-2
3.00 dB/km at 850 nm
1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm (OM4)
1.5 dB/km at 1300 nm (OM5)
Support up to 500m distance at 850nm with
less than 2.9 dB total insertion loss with
maximum of 2 connections
10 GbE cable distance
:
25 GbE cable distance
:
Support up to 130m distance at 850nm
with less than 1.3 dB total insertion loss with
maximum of 2 connections
40 GbE cable distance
:
Support up to 150m distance at 850nm with
less than 1.5 dB total insertion loss with
maximum of 2 connections
100 GbE cable distance
:
Support up to 150m distance at 850nm with
less than 1.5 dB total insertion loss with
maximum of 2 connections
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S7 - 7 of 14
7.4.3
Multimode Pigtail shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568.3-D and the following minimum technical
specifications: Fibre Class
:
Core/Cladding diameter
Connector Type
Jacket Material
Flame Test Method
:
:
:
:
TIA-492AAAF Optical Multimode 4 (OM4) or
higher (OM5)
50 µm / 125 µm
LC
Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH) or PVC
IEC 60754-2, IEC 61034-2
7.5
FIBRE OPTIC CABLE ACCESSORIES
7.5.1
Adapter shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568.3-D and the following minimum technical
specifications: Connector Type
Fibre Type
Colour
:
:
:
Fastening Method
Sleeve Material
:
:
LC duplex
Multimode or Singlemode
Shall be colour coded or marked as specified
in ANSI/ TIA 598 :
OM4 - Aqua/ Violet
OM5 - Lime Green
OS2 - Blue
End cap snap-in
Ceramic
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S7 - 8 of 14
7.5.2
7.5.3
Fibre Optic Patch Cord shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568.3-D and the following minimum
technical specifications: Connector Type
Fibre Type
Cable Type
Colour
:
:
:
:
Connector Material
:
Fibre optic cable splicing cassette shall be of 19” rack mounted type and consists of rear
cable management to support the incoming cable. The maximum port of the patch panel
shall be 48 duplex ports, 1U types, shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568.3-D and the following
minimum technical specifications: Adapter Type
Fibre Type
Fibre Ports
Fibre Panel Type
Splice tray
7.5.4
LC duplex and shall be factory terminated
Multimode or Singlemode
Tight Buffer
Shall be colour coded or marked as specified
in ANSI/ TIA 598 :
OM4 - Aqua/ Violet
OM5 - Lime Green
OS2 - Blue
Ceramic
:
:
:
:
:
LC duplex with internal shutters
Multimode or Singlemode
3 duplex ports
Accept four slot modular cassettes
Built-in/modular splice tray in cassette.
Fibre Optic Patch Panel shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568.3-D and the following minimum
technical specifications: Fibre Patch Panel Type
Panel Movement
Fibre Ports
Splice tray
:
:
:
:
Accept four slot modular cassettes
Modular sliding trays.
Up to 48 duplex ports per RU
Built-in/modular splice tray in cassette.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S7 - 9 of 14
7.6
TWISTED PAIR COPPER CABLE
7.6.1
Unshielded Twisted Pair (UTP) Cable shall comply with ISO/IEC 11801, ANSI/TIA 568.2-D
standards and the following minimum technical specifications: Conductor
Cable category
Conductor Size
Shielding
Jacket Material
Flame Test Method
Frequency
Power Over Ethernet (PoE)
Application
7.6.2
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
4 pairs
Cat. 6A
23 AWG solid bare copper
Unshielded U/UTP
Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH)
IEC 60754-2, IEC 61034-2
500 MHz over 90m distance
Comply with IEEE 802.3 af/at/bt
10GBase-T comply with IEEE 802.3
Shielded Twisted Pair (STP) Cable shall comply with ISO/IEC 11801, ANSI/TIA 568.2-D
standards and the following minimum technical specifications: Conductor
Cable category
Conductor Size
Shielding
Jacket Material
Flame Test Method
Frequency
Power Over Ethernet (PoE)
Application
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
:
4 pairs
Cat. 6A
23 AWG solid bare copper
Shielded F/UTP or U/FTP
Low Smoke Zero Halogen (LSZH)
IEC 60754-2, IEC 61034-2
500 MHz over 90m distance
Comply with IEEE 802.3 af/at/bt
10GBase-T comply with IEEE 802.3
7.7
RJ45 MODULAR JACK
7.7.1
The RJ45 modular jack shall comply with IEC 60603-7, ISO/IEC 11801 and ANSI/TIA
568.2-D standards, with 8 termination poles or 4 pair insulation displacement connection
for 23 AWG. It shall be angle mounted in faceplate and support T568B cabling termination.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S7 - 10 of 14
7.7.2
For Power over Ethernet (PoE) applications, the modular jack shall comply with latest IEEE
802.3 af/at/bt and IEC 60512 standards.
7.7.3
The modular jack contact shall be of gold plated and comply with IEC 60603-7 and
ANSI/TIA-1096-A standards. It also shall be rated for minimum of 750 mating cycles.
7.8
RJ45 PATCH PANEL
7.8.1
The patch panel shall be of 19” rack mounted type and consists of rear cable management
to support and provide proper bending radius for the twisted pair cable
. The maximum
port of the patch panel shall be of twenty four (24) 1U type.
7.8.2
For shielded patch panel, a minimum of one-hole lug using 6 mm PVC cable shall be
provided for connections to the rack earthing system.
7.9
RJ45 PATCH CORD
7.9.1
The patch cord at patch panel or workstation/faceplate shall be a maximum of 5 meters
length. The patch cord shall be of the same category Cat 6A with the horizontal twisted pair
cable.
7.9.2
The patch cord shall be factory terminated, tested and comply with ISO/IEC 11801 and
ANSI/TIA 568.2-D standard. It shall also comply with latest IEEE 802.3 af/at/bt standard for
Power over Ethernet (PoE) applications.
7.9.3
The patch cord jacket shall be of LSZH. The plug contact shall be of gold plated and comply
with IEC 60603-7 and ANSI/TIA-1096-A Standard. It also shall be rated for a minimum of
750 mating cycles.
7.9.4
The minimum bending radius for the patch cord shall be two (2) times of the overall cable
diameter.
7.9.5
For identification purposes, the colour code for patch cord or tagging for different system or
services shall be as shown in Table 7.1.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S7 - 11 of 14
System/ Services
Colour for Patch Cord or Tagging
Data (e.g. Network, Wi-Fi)
Blue
Voice (e.g. IP Telephony, Fax)
Green
ELV (e.g. IP CCTV, IP Door Access)
White
Table 7.1. Colour Code for Patch Cord or Tagging for different System/ Services
7.10
MODULAR PLUG TERMINATED LINK (MPTL)
7.10.1 The modular plug terminated link shall comply with ANSI/TIA-568.2-D, ISO/IEC 11801
standards and the following minimum technical specifications: Connector type
Cable category
Frequency
Power Over Ethernet (PoE)
Application
:
:
:
:
:
RJ45
Cat. 6A
500 MHz
Comply with IEEE 802.3 af/at/bt
10GBase-T comply with IEEE 802.3
7.10.2 The connector shall be securely mounted to provide connection to the Wi-Fi access points
or security IP cameras.
7.11
FACEPLATE
7.11.1 The faceplate material shall be from high-impact type, flame retardant, thermoplastic and
UV resistant.
7.11.2 The faceplate shall be flush mounted type, support angle mounting and complete with
shutter. The size shall be of 86 mm x 86 mm with a maximum number of two (2) port.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S7 - 12 of 14
7.11.3 The labelling area shall be large enough, covered with flip down or snap-in place on the top
edge of the faceplate and allow labels to be easily viewed and installed. Manufacturer Brand
name of the structured cabling system shall be embossed at the front of the faceplate.
7.11.4 For concealed installation, metalclad type back boxes shall be of galvanized sheet steel.
7.12
MULTI-USER TELECOMMUNICATIONS OUTLET ASSEMBLY (MUTOA)
7.12.1 The MUTOA shall be used for frequent changes in office layout. The MUTOA shall allow
the horizontal cable to remain undisturbed while allowing office to do rearrangements. All
workstation equipment shall be connected directly to the MUTOA using patch cord. It shall
be from single brand manufacturer which support end to end solution.
7.12.2 It shall be located in an area where each furniture cluster is served by at least one (1) unit
of MUTOA.
7.12.3 Each MUTOA shall serve a maximum of twelve (12) workstations. It shall be attached to a
permanent part of the building and shall not be located in the ceiling or furniture, unless if
part of the furniture is permanently affixed to the building.
7.13
CABLING IN CONDUIT, TRUNKING, CABLE TRAY AND CABLE LADDER
(SURFACED/ CONCEALED/ SUSPENDED)
7.13.1 General system of cabling/ wiring in conduits, trunking, cable tray or cable ladder etc. shall
be referred to the latest JKR Specification for Low Voltage Internal Electrical Installation (LS1).
7.13.2 For horizontal cabling concealed in conduit, the conduits and fittings shall be of rigid high
impact PVC grade Heavy Duty Code No 4421 and shall be under Product Specification
Scheme. Cables above false ceiling shall run in conduit or trunking. Trunking shall be
fabricated from electrogalvanised steel finished with epoxy oven baked powder coated or
hot dipped galvanised steel. Other materials, components specification and method of
installation shall be referred to the latest JKR Specification for Low Voltage Internal
Electrical Installation (L-S1).
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S7 - 13 of 14
7.13.3 For backbone cabling in trunking, cable tray and cable ladder, they shall be referred to the
latest JKR Specification for Low Voltage Internal Electrical Installation (L-S1).
7.13.4 All cabling shall be run neatly and in an orderly manner. They shall be routed parallel to
building wall, column lines in a coordinated manner with other services and shall be
arranged above the mechanical services and pipelines. Wherever the conduit, trunking,
cable tray or cable ladder passes through a floor or a fire-resistant wall, fire resisting barrier
shall be provided with non-hygroscopic fire resisting material of minimum two (2) hours fire
rated and approved by Jabatan Bomba Dan Penyelamat Malaysia.
7.14
CABLING IN CABLE BASKET AND FIBRE RACEWAY
7.14.1 All horizontal and backbone cabling inside the MTCR or TCR and routing inside the Server
Room or Data Centre, they shall be laid on cable basket and/or fibre raceway. Wherever
the cable basket and fibre raceway connected to the trunking, cable tray or cable ladder on
the fire-resistant wall, fire resisting barrier shall be provided with non-hygroscopic fire
resisting material of minimum 2-hour fire rated and approved by Jabatan Bomba Dan
Penyelamat Malaysia.
7.14.2 The cable basket and its fittings shall comply with MS IEC 61537 and the material shall be
of stainless steel wire rod with 304 graded.
7.14.3 The fibre raceway and its fittings shall be of PVC type, self-extinguishing and halogen free
material.
7.14.4 The cable basket and fibre raceway shall be supported by fixing brackets and hence they
shall not be in contact with the walls or soffit slabs. The brackets shall be installed at
intervals not greater than 1000 mm.
7.14.5 All cables running on the cable basket shall be bundled up securely using Velcro cable tie
at interval not more than 600 mm apart.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S7 - 14 of 14
7.15
CABLING IN UNDERGROUND DUCTING AND MANHOLE
7.15.1 All backbone cabling laid in underground ducting and manhole, they shall be referred to the
latest JKR Specification for Telephone System (L-S16).
7.16
CONDUITS AND TRUNKING SPACE FACTOR
7.16.1 The number of cables drawn into the conduit or laid in trunking shall be such that the ratio
of the sum of the overall cross-sectional areas of the cables (including insulation and any
sheath) to the internal cross-sectional area of the conduit or trunking in which they are
installed shall not exceed 40% for conduit and 45% for trunking respectively.
7.17
IDENTIFICATION OF SERVICES
7.17.1 The basic colour for the identification of ICT conduit, trunking and their cover shall follow
the colour coding as specified in the latest JKR Specification for Low Voltage Internal
Electrical Installation (L-S1).
7.18
MOUNTING HEIGHTS
7.18.1 Mounting heights listed below shall be measured from the underside of the fitting to the
finished floor level. The heights of fitting shall be as shown in Table 7.2 below: Type of Fitting
Mounting Height (mm)
Wall mounted Equipment Rack
1450
Wall mounted Wi-Fi AP
300 below ceiling level
Network point (at wall)
400
Table 7.2. Mounting Heights
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S8 - 1 of 6
8.0
LABELLING
8.1
DESCRIPTION
8.1.1
The labels shall be fitted on the outside of all equipment rack, network equipment, patch
panels, patch cords, faceplates, Server Room or Data Centre facilities etc.
8.1.2
The labels shall allow easy identification of the equipment, heavy duty types, made of
durable printed sticker and shall be able to securely stick or tied to the equipment.
8.2
EQUIPMENT RACK LABELLING
8.2.1
The equipment rack shall be named and labelled according to a specific labelling
convention which allow easy identification of the equipment including type and location as
shown in Figure 8.1.
8.2.2
The equipment rack labelling convention is as follows:-
Building Name
Building Level
Equipment Rack
Number
A 1. 1
Figure 8.1. Labelling Convention for Equipment Rack
Where,
• “A” is building name e.g. Blok A.
• “1” is building level e.g. Level 1.
• “1” is equipment rack number on that particular floor e.g. Equipment Rack Number 1.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S8 - 2 of 6
8.3
NETWORK SWICTHES, UPS AND OTHER EQUIPMENT LABELLING
8.3.1
The network switches, UPS and other equipment shall be named and labelled according to
the specific labelling convention which allow easy identification of the equipment including
type and location as shown in Figure 8.2.
8.3.2
The switches, UPS and other equipment labelling convention is as follows:
Building Name
Building Level
Equipment Rack Number
Network Switch/ UPS
Number in Rack
A 1. 1. S1
Figure 8.2: Labelling Convention For Switches and UPS
Where,
• “A” is building name e.g. Blok A.
• “1” is building level e.g. Level 1.
• “1” is equipment rack number on that particular floor e.g. Equipment Rack Number 1.
• “S1” is the 1st Network Switch in that particular equipment rack e.g. Network Switch
Number 1.
• “UPS1” is the 1st UPS in that particular equipment rack e.g. UPS Number 1.
• Other equipment labelling shall be decided on site with S.O. or S.O.’s Representative
approval.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S8 - 3 of 6
8.4
FIBRE PATCH PANEL AND FIBRE PATCH CORD LABELLING
8.4.1
The fibre patch panel and patch cord shall be named and labelled according to the specific
labelling convention which allow easy identification of the equipment including type and
location as shown in Figure 8.3
8.4.2
The fibre patch panel top part of the ports shall be labelled with the Building Level,
Equipment Rack Number where the fibre cable originates from and shall be labelled in
pair. For example: if the fibre cable on port 1-2 and 3-4 originates from Block A, TCR Level
1, Equipment Rack Number 1 then the top part shall be labelled “A1.1”.
8.4.3
The bottom part of the ports on the fibre patch panel in the same rack shall be labelled
continuously, in sequence. For example: For Fibre Patch Panel #1 shall have alphabet ‘A’
and has core pair numbers from 1, 2 and so on, then Fibre Patch Panel #2 shall have
alphabet ‘B’ and has core pair numbers 1, 2 and so on.
A
Figure 8.3: Labelling Convention For Fibre Patch Panel
8.4.4
The fibre patch cord in the same rack shall be labelled at both end with the same labelling
of port it is connected. For example: If fibre patch cord on Fibre Patch Panel #1 is
connected to port A1.1.34, then fibre patch cord shall be labelled as A1.1.34 at both end
and so forth. Label holder shall be made of durable plastic and shall be securely tied to the
fibre patch cord.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S8 - 4 of 6
8.5
UTP PATCH PANEL AND UTP PATCH CORD LABELLING
8.5.1
The UTP patch panel and patch cord shall be named and labelled according to the specific
labelling convention which allow easy identification of the equipment including type and
location as shown in Figure 8.4.
8.5.2
The UTP patch panel in the same rack shall be labelled continuously, in sequence. For
example: If UTP Patch Panel #1 labelled as A, then UTP Patch Panel #2 shall be labelled
as B and so on.
A
Figure 8.4: Labelling Convention for UTP Patch Panel
8.5.3
The UTP patch cord in the same rack shall be labelled continuously at both ends, in
sequence. For example: If UTP Patch Cords on Patch Panel #1 labelled as A1 to A24, then
UTP Patch Cords on Patch Panel #2 shall be labelled as B1 to B24 and so forth. Label
holder shall be made of durable plastic and shall be securely tied to the UTP patch cord .
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S8 - 5 of 6
8.6
DATA/ VOICE FACEPLATES AND WI-FI AP LABELLING
8.6.1
The Data/ Voice faceplates and Wi-Fi AP shall be named and labelled according to a
specific labelling convention which allow easy identification of the structured cabling
including type and location as shown in Figure 8.5 and 8.6.
8.6.2
The Data faceplates labelling convention is as follows:
Building Name
Building Level
Equipment Rack Number
Port Number
Outlet Type
B1.1.A10D
Figure 8.5: Labelling Convention for Data Faceplate
Where,
• “B” is building name e.g. Blok B.
• “1” is building level e.g. Level 1.
• “1” is equipment rack number on that particular floor e.g. Equipment Rack Number 1.
• “A10” is port Number 10 on patch panel A e.g. Port Number A10.
• “D” is for Data Outlet Type or “AP” is for Wi-Fi Outlet Type.
• Colour: BLUE for Data.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S8 - 6 of 6
8.6.3
The voice faceplates labelling convention is as follows:
Building Name
Building Level
Equipment Rack Number
Port Number
Outlet Type
B1.1.A10V
Figure 8.6: Labelling Convention for Voice Faceplate
Where,
• “B” is building name e.g. Blok B.
• “1” is building level e.g. Level 1.
• “1” is equipment rack number on that particular floor e.g. Equipment Rack Number 1.
• “A10” is port Number 10 on patch panel A e.g. Port Number A10.
• “V” is for Voice Outlet Type.
• Colour: GREEN for Voice
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S9 - 1 of 4
9.0
TESTING AND COMMISSIONING
9.1
TEST INSTRUMENTS
9.1.1
All measuring and test instruments used for testing and commissioning of the installations
shall be regularly tested and calibrated by the manufacturers or accredited calibration
laboratories for their functionality and accuracy. Test and Calibration Reports or Certificates
for the measuring and test instruments issued by the calibration laboratory shall be valid for
two (2) years from the date of issuance.
9.1.2
The instruments and their Test and Calibration Reports or Certificates shall be submitted
to S.O. or S.O’s Representative for verification two (2) weeks before testing of the
installations being carried out. No test on the installation shall be carried out without prior
approval of the S.O or S.O’s Representative. Notwithstanding the validity of the aforesaid
Reports or Certificates, the measuring and test instruments shall be recalibrated if so
required by the S.O or S.O’s Representative after any mechanical or electrical mishandling.
Fee required for the testing and calibrating of the measuring and test instruments is deemed
to be included in the Contract.
9.1.3
The Contractor shall provide adequate equipment or tools for the whole testing and
commissioning works.
9.2
TEST AND TEST CERTIFICATES
9.2.1
After the installation work has been completed and before Certificate of Practical
Completion is issued, the whole ICT networking system shall be tested for compliance,
performance and manufacturer’s testing and commissioning guideline.
9.2.2
The S.O or S.O’s Representative reserves the right to be present at all tests and the
Contractor shall give at least one (1) week notice in writing to the S.O or S.O’s
Representative for this purpose. In any case, no test shall be carried out without prior
approval of the S.O or S.O.’s Representative. A copy of test results certified by competent
person shall be submitted to the S.O or S.O’s Representative. Copies of all the test
certificates together with As Installed Drawings properly bound and titled shall be submitted
to the S.O or S.O’s Representative within one (1) week after the completion of the testing.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S9 - 2 of 4
9.3
STRUCTURED CABLING SYSTEM TEST
9.3.1
The testing shall be performed using a valid version of cable tester or analyzer e.g. Fluke
Field Tester, Softing, Viavi or similar with the latest updated firmware and software. The
work of testing and commissioning of the structured cabling system installed shall be
conducted and carried out by a Certified Installer.
9.3.2
The testing shall be carried out on each cable installed only after all cables are fully bundled,
tidied-up and patched into the network equipment. The same bundled patch cord shall be
tested with the RJ45 plug on equipment side as per Channel Link Test requirement.
9.3.3
The Twisted Pair copper cable installation shall be tested and certified to the latest
ANSI/TIA 568.2D, ISO/IEC 11801-1 standards and cable manufacturer’s warranty
requirement. The following tests shall be carried out:
9.3.4
9.3.3.1
Channel Link Test which includes the continuity, presence of electrical
parameters and performance characteristics such as return loss, insertion
loss (attenuation), pair to pair near end crosstalk (NEXT). Any reading
indicated a marginal pass shall not be accepted.
9.3.3.2
The MPTL Test shall be conducted with TIA Cat 6A MPTL test limit,
Permanent Link Adapter and Patch Cord Adapter for Category 6A testing on
the Far End or Remote Test Equipment (for MPTL termination).
The fibre optic cable installation shall be tested and certified to the latest ANSI/TIA-568. 3D, ISO/IEC 14763-3 standards and cable manufacturer’s warranty requirement. The
following tests shall be carried out:
9.3.4.1
Tier 1 test (Optical Loss Test Set) shall include the bi-directional end to end
test with 1 jumper reference methods, total link loss attenuation, channel
length and polarity of the fibre channel. The cable shall be tested at both
wavelengths 850 nm and 1300 nm for multimode fibre optic cable and 1310
nm and 1550 nm for singlemode fibre optic cable. The insertion loss for each
mated optical fibre connection shall not exceed 0.3dB for multimode fibre
optic cable and 0.5dB for singlemode fibre optic cable.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S9 - 3 of 4
9.3.5
Test results shall be printed directly from test unit or from a downloaded file using an
application software from test equipment manufacturer.
9.3.6
The Contractor shall take such action as are necessary to remedy the non compliance or
non quality installation and recertify again. The test results and other related documents
shall be submitted to the cable manufacturer for the purpose of structured cabling system
warranty certificate issuance.
9.3.7
The Contractor shall submit the test result and warranty certificate to the S.O. or S.O’s
Representative at least two (2) weeks before onsite verification. The testing and
commissioning works shall not be considered as completed until warranty certificate has
been issued and on-site verification tests have been conducted.
9.3.8 The testing and commissioning works of the structured cabling system shall be completed
at least two (2) weeks prior to network equipment testing.
9.4
NETWORK EQUIPMENT TEST
9.4.1
The Contractor shall arrange with the Certified Network Engineer registered with the
equipment’s manufacturer to conduct and carry out the work of testing and commissioning
of the network equipment.
9.4.2
The tests to be carried out according to the equipment manufacturer’s warranty and as per
stated in JKR Inspection and Testing Plan (ITP) provided by the Contractor. The test shall
consist of the following procedures or methods:9.4.2.1
Visual inspection to ensure the network equipment shall properly
mounted/installed according to the manual, free from dust and physically in
good condition without any scratch or crack.
9.4.2.2
Configuration test to check the administrator login ability into the equipment
web browser, IP addresses configuration as per network topology designed,
signal strength of the Wi-Fi system, security configuration as per client’s
policy, the equipment appear in NMS and indicates error-free status.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S9 - 4 of 4
9.4.2.3
Functionality test to ensure the equipment/system meets the functional
requirement and performance specified.
9.4.2.4
Final Acceptance Test to ensure the whole installation of the
equipment/material complies with the requirements as mentioned in the
Contract. The test shall be conducted with the presence of S.O. or S.O’s
Representative and User’s/ Client’s Representative.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S10 - 1 of 1
10.0
WARRANTY AND SUPPORT
10.1
DESCRIPTION
10.1.1 During the Defects Liability Period (DLP), the Contractor shall be responsible for the
warranty and support for the complete installation. All works shall be carried out by
competent or certified person. All labour, materials, tools and parts necessary to rectify the
defect due to manufacturing or installation faults shall be supplied and executed at the
Contractor's cost.
10.2
WARRANTY
10.2.1 The Contractor shall guarantee the equipment, application system and software are free
from defective or faulty of design, manufacture fabrication and installation works after DLP
as specified in the Contract.
10.2.2 For structured cabling system a minimum twenty-five (25) years mandatory warranty shall
be provided. The certificate of warranty from cable manufacturer shall be submitted to the
S.O. or S.O.'s Representative for verification.
10.2.3 All information and communication technology based systems and all interfacing,
integration and connection systems shall free from software error.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S11 - 1 of 3
11.0
SHOP DRAWINGS AND AS BUILT DOCUMENTS
11.1
SHOP DRAWINGS
11.1.1 Two (2) sets of prints of shop drawings for construction and/or installation shall be submitted
to the S.O. or S.O.’s Representative for approval. The Contractor shall prepare and submit
shop drawings for the whole work or parts of the work at least two weeks before the work
begins. If the shop drawings submitted are not acceptable by the S.O. or S.O.’s
Representative, the Contractor shall amend and re-submit the shop drawings within two
weeks from the date of return of the shop drawings. No work shall be carried out without
the shop drawings being approved by the S.O. or S.O.’s Representative. The shop
drawings shall include and show the following: 11.1.1.1 Coordinated dimensioned general arrangements, layouts and positions of ICT
equipment, cabling accessories such as network point faceplate, equipment
racks, Wi-Fi and all others necessary for the complete of ICT installation;
11.1.1.2 The dimensioned layouts and positions of all holes and cut-through in the walls
and floors for the horizontal dan backbone cabling;
11.1.1.3 The dimensioned general arrangements, layouts, routes and positions of all
horizontal dan backbone cabling;
11.1.1.4 Coordinated routes for all cables laid external of the building, laid underground, in
ducts, manholes and trenches;
11.1.1.5 Coordinated routes for all cables laid in the trunking, cable tray, cable ladder,
cable basket, fibre raceway etc.;
11.1.1.6 The dimensioned general arrangements and layout of telecommunication earthing
system including routes for bonding/backbone conductor to the main earthing bar;
11.1.1.7 Schematic drawings, network topology, VLAN and IP address topology;
11.1.1.8 Rack population drawing.
11.1.2 The cost for all these shop drawings is deemed to be included in the Contract.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S11 - 2 of 3
11.2
AS BUILT DOCUMENTS
11.2.1 As built documents shall consist of but not limited to the as-installed drawings, manuals,
certificates, catalogues, inventories and parts lists.
11.2.2 The as installed drawings or documents shall comprise of: 11.2.2.1
Site plan and cable routes;
11.2.2.2
Schematic drawing, network topology, VLAN and IP address topology;
11.2.2.3
Layout plan (conduit/ trunking, cable tray, cable ladder, cable basket, fibre
raceway route and location of network points);
11.2.2.4
Telecommunication earthing system;
11.2.2.5
Rack population and arrangement of equipment in Server Room/ Data
Centre, MTCR and TCR;
11.2.2.6
Setting parameters, configurations, IP addressing and VLAN on each
related equipment;
11.2.2.7
Source code of the application systems or software developed;
11.2.2.8
Test result on structured cabling system, network equipment and each
related equipment;
11.2.2.9
Checklist or format reporting flow during Defect Liability Period;
11.2.2.10
The certificate of warranty from cable manufacturer and equipment.
11.2.3 These drawings shall be labelled at the lower right hand corner with the Contractor’s name
and address, date of commissioning, scale, drawing number (the drawing number to be
obtained from the S.O or S.O’s Representative), title and following particulars:JABATAN KERJA RAYA
CAWANGAN KEJURUTERAAN ELEKTRIK
CONTRACT NO.:
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S11 - 3 of 3
11.2.4 If the drawings or documents submitted are not according to the actual installation at site
and/or not acceptable to the S.O. or S.O.'s Representative, the Contractor shall amend
and re-submit the drawings or documents within two (2) weeks from the date of return of
the drawings or documents.
11.2.5 The manuals shall comprise of: 11.2.5.1
Installation manual.
11.2.5.2
Operation manual, Service and Maintenance manual.
11.2.5.3
Inventory list, product data, catalogue and product test certificates.
11.2.6 The certified softcopy of as built documents shall be compiled on web based format. The
hardcopy of as built document shall be labelled at the lower right hand corner with the
Contractor's name and address, date of commissioning, document number (the document
number to be obtained from the S.O. or S.O.'s Representative), title and following
particulars: JABATAN KERJA RAYA
CAWANGAN KEJURUTERAAN ELEKTRIK
CONTRACT NO.:
11.2.7 Each of the as built documents shall be bound together with hard cover and submitted in
minimum four (4) sets upon issuance of Certificate of Practical Completion of the project.
11.2.8 In addition, one (1) set of the as installed drawing shall be submitted in the form of original
document, and four (4) sets in physical digital storage.
11.2.9 The cost of all these documents, prints, manuals, tools etc. whether or not provided in the
Bill of Quantities, is deemed to be included in the Contract.
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S12 - 1 of 2
12.0
LIST OF STANDARDS
STANDARD
DESCRIPTION
IEEE 802.3
Ethernet Networks
IEEE 802.11
Wireless Local Area Networks
MS IEC 60038
IEC Standard Voltages
MS IEC 60364
Electrical Installations of Buildings
IEC 61000
Electromagnetic Compatibility
CISPR 22
EN 54-20
ISO 14520
BS 6266:2011
ISO/IEC 30129:2015
ISO/IEC 14763-2
Electromagnetic Compatibility within Europe for Information
Technology Equipment
Fire Detection and Fire Alarm Systems - Aspirating Smoke
Detectors
Gaseous Fire-Extinguishing Systems - Physical Properties and
System Design
Fire Protection for Electronic Equipment Installations. Code of
Practice
Information Technology - Telecommunications Bonding
Networks for Buildings and Other Structures
Information Technology - Implementation and Operation of
Customer Premises Cabling - Planning and Installation
ISO/IEC 11801-1
Generic Cabling for Customer Premises
ISO/IEC 11801-5
Generic Cabling for Customer Premises : Data Centres
ISO/IEC 18598
Information Technology - Automated Infrastructure
Management (AIM) systems - Requirements, Data Exchange
and Applications
ANSI/TIA-568.0-D
Generic Telecommunications Cabling for Customer Premises
ANSI/TIA-568.1.D
Commercial Building Telecommunications Cabling Standard
ANSI/TIA-568.2-D
Balanced Twisted-Pair Telecommunication Cabling
ANSI/TIA-568.3-D
Optical Fibre Cabling and Components Standard
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S12 - 2 of 2
STANDARD
DESCRIPTION
ANSI/TIA-569-E
Standard for Telecommunications Pathways and Spaces
ANSI/TIA-606-C
Administration Standard for Commercial Telecommunications
ANSI/TIA-862-B
Structured Cabling Infrastructure Standard for Intelligent
Building Systems
ANSI/TIA-942-B
Telecommunications Infrastructure Standard for Data Centres
ANSI/ICEA S-87-640
Optical Fibre Outside Plant Communications Cable Standard
ANSI/ TIA 598
Optical Fibre Cable Color Coding
IEC 60332-3
IEC 60754-2
IEC 61034-2
IEC 60603-7
IEC 60512
ANSI/TIA-1096-A
MS IEC 61537
IEC 61010-1
IEC 61557-1
ISO/IEC 14763-3
ISO/IEC 60320
Tests on Electric and Optical Fibre Cables under Fire
Conditions - Test for Vertical Flame Spread of VerticallyMounted Bunched Wires or Cables
Test on Gases Evolved During Combustion of Materials from
Cables
Measurement of Smoke Density of Cables Burning under
Defined Conditions
Connectors for Electronic Equipment - Detail Specification for 8way, Unshielded, Free and Fixed Connectors
Connectors for Electrical and Electronic Equipment
Telecommunications Telephone Terminal Equipment Connector
Requirements for Connection of Terminal Equipment to the
Telephone Network
Cable Management - Cable Tray Systems and Cable Ladder
Systems
Safety Requirements for Electrical Equipment for Measurement,
Control, and Laboratory Use
Electrical Safety in Low Voltage Distribution Systems up to
1000 VAC and 1500 VDC
Information technology - Implementation and Operation of
Customer Premises Cabling - Testing of Optical Fibre Cabling
Appliance Couplers For Household And Similar General
Purposes
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S13 - 1 of 3
13.0
ABBREVIATIONS
ANSI
American National Standards Institute
AMD
Advanced Micro Devices
API
Application Programming Interface
ASHRAE
American Society of Heating, Refrigerating and Air-Conditioning
Engineers
BICSI
Building Industry Consulting Service International
CMR
Communications Multipurpose Cable Riser
DDR
Double Data Rate
DIMM
Dual In-Line Memory Module
DHCP
Dynamic Host Configuration Protocol
DMZ
Dimilitarised Zone
DNS
Domain Name Server
EMC
Electromagnetic Compatibility
FHD
Full High Definition
FTP
Foiled Twisted Pair
GB
Gigabyte
GbE
Gigabit Ethernet
Gbps
Gigabit per second
GHz
Giga Hertz
HDMI
High-Definition Multimedia Interface
HDR
High Dynamic Range
ICT
Information and Communication Technology
IEC
International Electrotechnical Commission
IEEE
Institute of Electrical and Electronics Engineers
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S13 - 2 of 3
IMIX
Internet Mix
I/O
Input Output
IP
Internet Protocol
IPS
Intrusion Prevention System
ISO
International Organization for Standardization
LSZH
Low Smoke Zero Halogen
LPDDR
Low Power Double Data Rate
MAC
Media Access Control
MB
Megabyte
MIMO
Multiple Input Multiple Output
MPTL
Modular Plug Terminated Link
MUTOA
Multi-user Telecommunications Outlet Assembly
NAT
Network Adress Translation
NFPA
National Fire Protection Association
NGFW
Next Generation Firewall
nm
Nanometer
OFDMA
Orthogonal Frequency Division Multiple Access
OM4/ OM5
Optical Multimode (OM) - Levels are for Multimode Fibre
OS2
Optical Singlemode (OS) - Levels are for Singlemode Fibre
PCIe
Peripheral Component Interconnect Express
PSK
Pre-Shared Key
PPSK
Private Pre-Shared Key
PVC
Polyvinyl chloride
QAM
Quadrature Amplitude Modulation
QHD
Quad High Definition
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.
CKE.LS.03.38.(00).2020
Date Issued: August 2021
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING
SYSTEM (L-S38)
Revision: 0
Date: August 2021
Page: S13 - 3 of 3
RAID
Redundant Array of Independent Disks
RJ-45
Registered Jack 45
SDF
Subscriber Distribution Frame
SFP
Small Form-Factor Pluggable
SMS
TBShort Message Service
SNMP
Simple Network Management Protocol
SSID
Service Set Identifier
STP
Spanning Tree Protocol
TB
Terabyte
TCP/IP
Transmission Control Protocol/ Internet Protocol
TIA
Telecommunications Industry Association
USB
Universal Serial Bus
VLAN
Virtual Local Area Network
VPN
Virtual Private Network
WAN
Wide Area Network
WPA
Wi-Fi Protected Access
SPECIFICATION FOR ICT NETWORKING SYSTEM
© Hak cipta : 2021 Cawangan Kejuruteraan Elektrik, JKR Malaysia.